S 1403DL/MLD operations manual

S 1403DL/MLD operations manual
http://www.avionteq.com/IFR-Aeroflex-S1403DL-MLD-Mode-S-Test-Set.aspx
www.avionteq.com
Mode S Test System
S-1403DL
Operation Manual
1002-2400-200
Issue-2
OPERATION MANUAL
MODE S TEST SYSTEM
S-1403DL
PUBLISHED BY
Aer oflex
COPYRIGHT  Aer oflex 2003
All r ights r eser ved. No par t of this publication may be r epr oduced, stor ed in a r etr ieval
system, or tr ansmitted in any for m or by any means, electr onic, mechanical, photocopying,
r ecor ding or other wise without the pr ior per mission of the publisher .
O r iginal Pr inting
May 1997
Revision 1
Dec 1997
Revision 2
F eb 1999
Issue- 2
Dec 2003
10200 West Yor k / Wichita, Kansas 67215 U.S.A. / ( 316) 522- 4981 / FAX 524- 2623
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
Cable Statement:
Double shielded and properly terminated external interface cables must be used with this
equipment when interfacing with the RS-232, IFR BUS and/or AUX BUS Connectors.
For continued EMC compliance, all external cables must be 3 meters or less in length.
The display backlight may momentarily dim if a voltage dip, interruption or surge occurs on
the power line.
Nomenclature Statements:
In this manual the S-1403DL, S-1403DL Test Auxiliary, Test Auxiliary or Test Set refers to
the S-1403DL Test Auxiliary.
In this manual the ATC-1400A, ATC-1400A Transponder/DME Test Set or ATC-1400A Test
Set refers to the ATC-1400A-2 Transponder/DME Test Set.
S-1403DL Upgrade Statement:
An S-1403DL upgrade from other product versions retains the prior product identity. The
Front Panel upgrade indicating S-1403DL implies functionality only. Test Sets with upgrade
kits installed are not compliant to national or international EMC and/or safety standards.
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
THIS PAG E INT ENTIO NALLY LEFT BLANK.
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SAFETY FIRST: TO ALL OPERATIONS PERSO NNEL
REFER ALL SERVICING OF UNIT TO QUALIFIED TECHNICAL PERSONNEL. THIS UNIT CONTAINS NO
OPERATOR SERVICEABLE PARTS.
WARNING: USING THIS EQUIPMENT IN A MANNER NOT SPECIFIED BY THE ACCOMPANYING
DOCUMENTATION MAY IMPAIR THE SAFETY PROTECTION PROVIDED BY THE EQUIPMENT.
CASE, COVER OR PANEL REMOVAL
Removing protective covers, casings or panels from this Test Set exposes the operator to electrical hazards
that can result in electrical shock or equipment damage. Do not operate this Test Set with the case, cover
or panels removed.
SAFETY IDENTIFICATION IN TECHNICAL MANUAL
This manual uses the following terms to draw attention to possible safety hazards, that may exist when
operating this equipment.
CAUTION:
THIS TERM IDENTIFIES CONDITIONS OR ACTIVITIES THAT, IF IGNORED, CAN RESULT IN
EQUIPMENT OR PROPERTY DAMAGE (E.G., FIRE).
WARNING: THIS TERM IDENTIFIES CONDITIONS OR ACTIVITIES THAT, IF IGNORED, CAN RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
SAFETY SYMBOLS IN MANUALS AND ON UNITS
CAUTION: Refer to accompanying documents. (This symbol refers to specific CAUTIONS represented on
the unit and clarified in the text.)
AC OR DC TERMINAL: Terminal that may supply or be supplied with ac or dc voltage.
DC TERMINAL: Terminal that may supply or be supplied with dc voltage.
AC TERMINAL: Terminal that may supply or be supplied with ac or alternating voltage.
SWITCH OFF: AC line power to the device is OFF.
SWITCH ON: AC line power to the device is ON.
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING PRECAUTION
Improper grounding of equipment can result in electrical shock.
USE OF PROBES
Check specifications for the maximum voltage, current and power ratings of any connector on the Test Set
before connecting it with a probe from a terminal device. Be sure the terminal device performs within these
specifications before using it for measurement, to prevent electrical shock or damage to the equipment.
POWER CORDS
Power cords must not be frayed, broken nor expose bare wiring when operating this equipment.
USE RECOMMENDED FUSES ONLY
Use only fuses specifically recommended for the equipment at the specified current and voltage ratings.
INTERNAL BATTERY
This unit contains a Lithium Battery, serviceable only by a qualified technician.
CAUTION:
SIGNAL GENERATORS CAN BE A SOURCE OF ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) TO
COMMUNICATION RECEIVERS. SOME TRANSMITTED SIGNALS CAN CAUSE DISRUPTION
AND INTERFERENCE TO COMMUNICATION SERVICES OUT TO A DISTANCE OF SEVERAL
MILES. USERS OF THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD SCRUTINIZE ANY OPERATION THAT RESULTS
IN RADIATION OF A SIGNAL (DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY) AND SHOULD TAKE NECESSARY
PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID POTENTIAL COMMUNICATION INTERFERENCE PROBLEMS.
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
THIS PAG E INT ENTIO NALLY LEFT BLANK.
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
RECORD OF REVISIONS
REV
NO.
ISSUE
DATE
DATE
INSERTED
BY
REV
NO.
ISSUE
DATE
DATE
INSERTED
BY
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
THIS PAG E INT ENTIO NALLY LEFT BLANK.
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
LIST O F EFFECTIVE PAG ES
CHAPTER/SECT IO N/SUBJECT
T itle Page
Copyr ight Page
Statements
Safety Page
Recor d of Revisions
List of Effective Pages
Table of Contents
Intr oduction
1- Table of Contents
1- List of Illustr ations
1- List of Tables
1- 1- 1
1- 1- 2
1- 2- 1
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 3
1- 2- 4
1- 3- 1
1- 4- 1
1- 5- 1
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
Appendix F
Appendix G
Appendix H
Appendix I
Index
Installation Calibr ation
Installation Calibr ation
Installation Calibr ation
Installation Calibr ation
PAG E
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Pr ocedur e Title Page
Pr ocedur e War ning Page
Pr ocedur e Caution Page
Pr ocedur e
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
thr ough
DATE
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
56
4
74
16
50
14
2
2
8
10
2
22
4
2
2
2
4
4
1 thr ough 16
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
1/03
LIST O F EFFECTIVE PAG ES
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
THIS PAG E INT ENTIO NALLY LEFT BLANK.
LIST O F EFFECTIVE PAG ES
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
TABLE O F CO NTENTS
Title
Chapter /Section
T itle Page
Copyr ight Page
Statements
Safety Page
Recor d of Revisions
List of Effective Pages
Table of Contents
Intr oduction
Chapt er 1
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
A B C D E F G H I -
1
2
3
4
5
-
Descr iption
O per ation
Specifications
Shipping
Stor age
1- 1
1- 2
1- 3
1- 4
1- 5
Connector Pin- O ut Tables
Decoded Sequence Menu For mats
Test Equipment Requir ements
Signal F or mats
Inter r ogation and Reply Timing
Related Documents
Metr ic/Br itish Imper ial Conver sion Table with Nautical Distance Conver sions
Compar ison With the S- 1403C
Abbr eviations
Index
Installation Calibr ation Pr ocedur e
TABLE O F CO NTENTS
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
THIS PAG E INT ENTIO NALLY LEFT BLANK.
TABLE O F CO NTENTS
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
INT RO DUCTIO N - MO DE S TEST SYSTEM
T his manual contains the infor mation necessar y to install and oper ate the Mode S Test
System. It is designed to be used in conjunction with the ATC- 1400A O per ation Manual.
The S- 1403DL T est Auxiliar y, when inter faced with the ATC- 1400A Tr ansponder /DME Test
Set, for ms the Mode S Test System. The additional r emote commands r equir ed for
ATCRBS and Mode S testing ar e listed in Section 1- 2- 4 of this manual.
It is str ongly r ecommended that per sonnel be thor oughly familiar with the contents of this
manual, along with contents of the ATC- 1400A O per ation Manual, befor e attempting to
oper ate this equipment.
Refer all ser vicing of the Mode S Test System to qualified technical per sonnel.
ORGANIZATION
T his manual is divided into the following Chapter s and Sections:
CHAPTER 1 - OPERATION
Section 1 - DESCRIPT IO N ( physical descr iption of the S- 1403DL; descr iption of
contr ols, connector s and indicator s and menus and scr eens)
Section 2 - O PERATIO N ( installation; gener al oper ating pr ocedur es, per for mance
evaluation, r emote oper ation)
Section 3 - SPECIFICATIO NS
Section 4 - SHIPPING
Section 5 - STO RAG E
INTRODUCTION
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
THIS PAG E INT ENTIO NALLY LEFT BLANK.
INTRODUCTION
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
CHAPTER O NE
MO DE S TEST SYSTEM
O PERATIO N MANUAL
TABLE O F CO NTENTS
Title
Chapter /Section/Subject
Page
SECTIO N 1 - DESCRIPTIO N
1. G ener al Descr iption and Capabilities
1.1
Descr iption
1.2
F unctional Capabilities
1- 1
1- 1- 1
1- 1- 1
1- 1- 1
1
1
1
2. Contr ols, Connector s and Indicator s
2.1
S- 1403DL F r ont Panel
2.2
S- 1403DL Rear Panel
2.3
Keyboar d Definition
2.4
Display Menu Definition
2.4.1
Contr ol Menus ( CMENU)
2.4.2
Sequence Menus ( SMENU)
2.4.3
T est Menus ( T MENU)
2.5
AT C- 1400A F r ont Panel
2.6
AT C- 1400A Rear Panel
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
2
4
5
9
13
14
38
41
50
56
SECTIO N 2 - O PERAT IO N
1. Installation
1.1
G ener al
1.2
Safety Pr ecautions
1.2.1
Complying With Instr uctions
1.2.2
G r ounding Equipment and Power Cor d
1.2.3
O per ating Safety
1.2.4
CAUTIO N and WARNING Labels
1.3
Power Requir ements
1.4
Installation Pr ocedur e
1.5
Power - Up Pr ocedur e
1.6
Installation Calibr ation
1.7
Exter nal Cleaning
1- 2
1- 2- 1
1- 2- 1
1- 2- 1
1- 2- 1
1- 2- 1
1- 2- 1
1- 2- 1
1- 2- 1
1- 2- 1
1- 2- 1
1- 2- 1
1- 2- 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
4
4
4
2. G ener al O per ating Pr ocedur es
2.1
G ener al
2.1.1
System Char acter istics
2.1.2
System Consider ations
2.1.3
Input Consider ations
2.1.4
Initial ATC- 1400A Contr ol Settings
2.1.5
O per ational Hook- Up
2.2
AT C F unction
2.2.1
Descr iption
2.2.2
Pr ocedur e
2.2.3
G ener al T est Sequence
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1
1
1
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
9
1- TABLE O F CO NTENTS
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
T itle
Chapter /Section/Subject
Page
SECTIO N 2 – O PERAT IO N ( co n t )
2.3
SEQ Function
2.3.1
Descr iption
2.3.2
Pr ocedur e
2.3.3
G ener al T est Sequence
2.4
ACS Function
2.4.1
Descr iption
2.4.2
Pr ocedur e
2.4.3
G ener al T est Sequence
2.5
ACL Function
2.5.1
Descr iption
2.5.2
Pr ocedur e
2.5.3
G ener al T est Sequence
2.6
INTLCE F unction
2.6.1
Descr iption
2.6.2
Pr ocedur e
2.6.3
G ener al T est Sequence
2.7
DI Function
2.7.1
Descr iption
2.7.2
Pr ocedur e
2.7.3
G ener al T est Sequence
2.8
Bur st F unction
2.8.1
Descr iption
2.8.2
Pr ocedur e
2.9
T est Menu Tests
2.9.1
MT L T est
2.9.2
ELM Tests
2.10 Memor y O per ation
2.10.1 Save
2.10.2 Recall
2.11 Pr int Scr een
2.12 Stand Alone O per ation
1- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
12
12
12
18
21
21
21
26
29
29
29
34
37
37
38
42
45
45
45
53
56
56
56
64
64
65
73
73
73
74
74
3. Per for mance Evaluation
3.1
G ener al
3.2
Pr e- O per ational Conditions
3.3
Test Equipment Requir ements
3.4
Cor r ective Maintenance
3.5
T est Recor d
3.6
Per for mance Evaluation Pr ocedur e
3.7
Per for mance Evaluation Data Sheet
1- 2- 3
1- 2- 3
1- 2- 3
1- 2- 3
1- 2- 3
1- 2- 3
1- 2- 3
1- 2- 3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
13
1- TABLE O F CO NTENTS
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
Title
Chapter /Section/Subject
Page
SECTIO N 2 – O PERAT IO N ( co n t )
4. Remote O per ation
4.1
G ener al
4.2
F r ont Panel O per ation
4.3
O per ating Pr ocedur es
4.3.1
AT C- 1400A G PIB Configur ation
4.3.2
S- 1403DL RS- 232 Configur ation
4.3.3
S- 1403DL G PIB Configur ation
4.4
T est Macr o Language ( TMAC)
4.5
Command Syntax
4.6
Commands
4.6.1
SCPI/IEEE- 488.2 Commands
4.6.2
O ld- Style Commands
4.7
Examples
4.7.1
Example #1
4.7.2
Example #2
4.7.3
Example #3
4.7.4
Example #4
1- 2
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
38
46
46
47
49
50
SECTIO N 3 - SPECIFICATIO NS
1. Mode S T est System Specifications
1.1
RF
1.1.1
Antenna A ( ANT A) , RF I/O Connector
1.1.2
Antenna B ( ANT B) , ANT B Connector
1.2
Pulse Char acter istics
1.2.1
G ener al
1.2.2
AT C F unction
1.2.3
SEQ Function
1.2.4
ACS/ACL F unctions
1.2.5
INTLCE Function
1.2.6
DI F unction
1.2.7
BURST F unction
1.2.8
ELM F unction
1.3
UUT Measur ements
1.3.1
Reply Delay
1.3.2
%Reply
1.3.3
Pulse Char acter stics
1.4
Input/O utput Dr ive Levels
1.4.1
Miscellaneous O utputs
1.4.2
Miscellaneous Inputs
1.4.3
REPLY ( 3- 27 V) O UT
1.5
Power Requir ements
1.6
F use Requir ements
1.7
Safety Conditions
1- 3
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1- 3- 1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
6
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
11
12
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
SECTIO N 4 - SHIPPING
1. Shipping Test Sets
1.1
Infor mation
1.2
Repacking Pr ocedur e
1- 4
1- 4- 1
1- 4- 1
1- 4- 1
1
1
1
1- TABLE O F CO NTENTS
Page 3
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
T itle
SECTIO N 5 - STO RAG E
1. Stor ing Test Sets
Chapter /Section/Subject
1- 5
1- 5- 1
Page
1
1- TABLE O F CO NTENTS
Page 4
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
LIST O F ILLUSTRATIO NS
Title
Chapter /Section/Subject
S- 1403DL F r ont and Rear Panels
S- 1403DL Keyboar d
Example Save and Recall Configur ation Scr eens
( Section 1, F igur e 4 not used at this time.)
Main Contr ol Menu
Example F unction A AT C Scr een
Example F unction A SEQ Scr een
Example F unction A ACS Scr een
Example F unction A ACL Scr een
Example F unction A Inter lace Scr een
Example F unction A Double Inter r ogation Scr een
Example F unction A Bur st Scr een
Example F unction A AT C Monitor Scr een
Example F unction B Scr een
Example Per cent Reply Scr een
Example Reply Delay Scr een
Example Squitter ( 1 of 2) Scr een
Example Squitter ( 2 of 2) Scr een
Main Setup Menu
Example C71 Setup ( Inter r ogation Tr igger ) Scr een
Example C72 Setup ( Scope Tr igger ) Scr een
Example C73 Setup ( Ext Sync O ut) Scr een
Example C74 Setup ( PPMG ) Scr een
Example C75 Setup ( Misc) Scr een
Example C76 Setup ( SMenu) Scr een
Example C79 Setup ( ATC1400A Contr ols) Scr een
Main System Menu
Example C81 System ( RS232 Contr ol) Scr een
Example C82 System ( RS232 Inter face) Scr een
Example C83 System ( G PIB) Scr een
Example C84 System ( IFR BUS) Scr een
Example C85 System ( Keyboar d) Scr een
Example C86 System ( Clock) Scr een
Example C89 System ( Ver sion) Scr een
S For mat Sequence Menu Examples in O ctal and Hex Radix
L For mat Sequence Menu Examples in O ctal and Hex Radix
D For mat Sequence Menu Examples in O ctal and Hex Radix
Sequence Menu Inter r ogation AP Field For mation
Main Test Menu
Example Miscellaneous T est Menu
Example T 23 Miscellaneous MT L Scr een
Example ELM Test Menu
Example T31 ELM Setup Scr een
Example T32 UELM Test Scr een
Example T 33 UELM- Multi T est Scr een
Example T34 DELM Test Scr een
Example T 35 DELM- Multi T est Scr een
ATC- 1400A F r ont and Rear Panels
Page
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
2
9
11
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
14
14
16
17
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
40
41
41
42
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
1- LIST O F ILLUST RATIO NS
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
T itle
Chapter /Section/Subject
S- 1403DL to ATC- 1400A Inter connections
Mode S Test System O per ational Hook- Up Diagr am
ATC Function Timing Diagr am
SEQ F unction T iming Diagr am
ACS Function Timing Diagr am
ACL Function Timing Diagr am
INT LCE Function Inter r ogation Sequence
INT LCE F unction T iming Diagr am
DI Function Timing Diagr am
UELM Sample Timing Diagr ams
DELM Sample Timing Diagr ams
F unction and RF Level Tests Setup Diagr am
Pr epulse Test Setup Diagr am
Ext Sync O ut Test Setup Diagr am
Ext Sync In Test Setup Diagr am
Ext Mod In T est Setup Diagr am
ATCRBS Discr ete and Scope Tr igger Tests Setup Diagr am
RS- 232 Host Cable Connections ( 9- Pin)
RS- 232 Host Cable Connections ( 25- Pin)
RS- 232 Modem Cable Connections ( 9- Pin)
RS- 232 Modem Cable Connections ( 25- Pin)
Repacking Pr ocedur e
1- 2- 1
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 3
1- 2- 3
1- 2- 3
1- 2- 3
1- 2- 3
1- 2- 3
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
1- 4- 1
Page
3
3
11
19
27
35
37
43
55
67
71
2
10
10
11
11
12
2
2
2
2
2
1- LIST O F ILLUSTRATIO NS
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
LIST O F TABLES
Title
F unction Selections
( Section 1, T able 2 not used at this time.)
DF17 Squitter Selection
Tr igger Sour ce
Default Sequence Menu
SMENU Addr ess Cycle
Specified F use Ratings
Installation Kits
DF17 Squitter Inter val T imes
DF17 Squitter T ype
Number Systems Conver sion
TCAS Reply Rate Testing
Mode S Reply Rate Testing
MTL Er r or Codes
UELM Er r or Codes
DELM Er r or Codes
Stand Alone Mode Simulated ATC- 1400A Contr ols
S- 1403DL SCPI- Style Command List
S- 1403DL O ld- Style Command List
O ld- Style/SCPI- Style Command Compar ison
Chapter /Section/Subject
Page
1- 1- 2
9
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 1- 2
1- 2- 1
1- 2- 1
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 2
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
1- 2- 4
24
26
31
39
2
3
8
8
13
56
56
65
72
72
74
6
38
45
1- LIST O F TABLES
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
THIS PAG E INT ENTIO NALLY LEFT BLANK.
1- LIST O F TABLES
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SECTION 1 - DESCRIPTION
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND CAPABILITIES
1.1 DESCRIPT IO N
The S- 1403DL/ATC- 1400A ( Mode S Test
System) simulates an AT CRBS/Mode S
equipped Secondar y Sur veillance Radar
( SSR) gr ound station. The Mode S Test
System pr ovides pulse and Differ ential
Phase Shift Keying ( DPSK) modulated
signals for testing Air T r affic Contr ol Radar
Beacon System ( AT CRBS) and Mode Select
( Mode S) tr ansponder s. O per ation can be
manual using fr ont panel contr ols and
switches or r emote using a contr oller
thr ough one of the par allel or ser ies r emote
inter face connector s.
Var iable inter r ogation r ates for ATCRBS
( 0 to 7999 PRF) and Mode S ( 0 to
2500 PRF)
1.2 FUNCTIONAL CAPABILITIES
Pr ogr ammable 1000- item sequence for
uplink and downlink for mat infor mation
The Mode S T est System has the following
featur es and capabilities:
AT CRBS ( AT C) F unction
Mode S Sequence ( SEQ ) F unction
ATCRBS O nly All Call ( All Call Shor t
[ACS]) Function
AT CRBS/Mode S All Call ( All Call Long
[ACL]) Function
Inter lacing ( INT LCE) F unction to
simulate the r eal wor ld mixed
inter r ogation envir onment
Squitter scr eens with decoded addr ess,
tail number and countr y infor mation
Scr een dump ( in ASCII) capability
thr ough the S- 1403DL RS- 232
Connector
S- 1403DL Stand Alone mode pr oviding
limited single antenna testing ability
without the ATC- 1400A
Tr ansponder /DME Test Set
Batter y backup memor y for saving up to
five sets of test configur ations
Extensive inter r ogation pulse width,
position and amplitude contr ol
Synchr onous Phase Rever sal ( SPR)
offset contr ol
Easy and quick Mode S addr ess and
addr ess par ity field changes
Remote oper ation thr ough the S- 1403DL
or ATC- 1400A ( RS- 232 or G PIB)
Double Inter r ogation ( DI) F unction
Bur st Function
Two RF Input/O utput Connector s with
set fr equency and output levels for
Antenna A/Antenna B diver sity testing
( MLD option pr ovides level contr ol for
Antenna B.)
Four - line by 40 column indicator for
displaying var ious par ameter s and
functions
24 contr ol keys for numer ical data entr y,
function selection and cur sor contr ol
1- 1- 1
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
THIS PAG E INT ENTIO NALLY LEFT BLANK.
1- 1- 1
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
T HIS PAG E INTENTIO NALLY LEFT BLANK.
1- 1- 2
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2. CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND INDICATORS
Refer to 1- 1- 2, Figur e 1 to locate all S1403DL
contr ols,
connector s
and
indicator s.
Refer to 1- 1- 2, F igur e 48 to
locate all ATC- 1400A contr ols, connector s
and indicator s.
B
A
C
D
BRIGHTNESS
7/D
CURSOR
8/E
9/F
2ND
FUNC#
P2
P3
ARF LVL
4/A
5/B
6/C
HEX
P4/P6
BRF LVL
SLEW
F
E
UUT VIDEO
SPR
BURST
1
2
3
PRTSCR
ANT B
SAVE
RECALL
S MENU
0
POWER
I
S-1403DL
I
U MENU
SEQ AD
P PULS
EX SYN
C MENU
CL/ESC
ON/CAL
ENTER
T MENU
PPMG
EX MOD
HELP
1kW PK
10W AVG
G
H
K
L
M
N
O
Q
R
EXT
PRF OUT
ANT B
VIDEO OUT
ATCRBS
OUT
EXT
SYNC IN
EXT
MOD IN
P
S
T
U
REPLY GRP
TRIG IN
MODE GRP
TRIG IN
V
W
X
Y
AA
Z
DECODED
VIDEO IN
J4
J5
J6
J18
J17
J19
J20
24
REPLY
(TTL) OUT
ENABLE
TRIG IN
FUS E
GPIB J21
REPLY
(3-27V) OUT
F4
1.0A @ 110VAC
0.5A @ 230VAC
TYPE F
.
FUSE
DISPARTY
OUT
ANT B
GEN OUT
PREPULSE
OUT
EXT
SYNC OUT
SCOPE
TRIG OUT
1400A POWER
FUS E
F2
1
J3
115
230
.
J8
J22
J9
J24
J23
J25
J26
F1
IFR BUS J11
MECH ASSY,
PULSE/PROCESSOR
FUS E
PPMG
J14
DPSK OUT
J15
RF LVL
J13
F3
AUX BUS J10
163 WATTS MAX
3A @
110/230
VAC
TYPE F
FUSE
DPSK ADJ
R28
RS-232
J12
VOLTAGE SELECT
FUS E
FUSE
J7
02407001
AB AC
FUSE
J
ANT B
+/-
PRODUCTION MODEL
AL
AK
AI
AJ
AF
AG
AH
AD
AE
02407002
M
N
O
Q
R
S
T
U
REPLY GRP
TRIG IN
MODE GRP
TRIG IN
V
W
X
Y
AA
Z
USE
DECODED
VIDEO IN
1
J3
J4
J5
J6
J17
J18
J19
J20
F2
24
J8
J22
J9
REPLY
(TTL) OUT
ENABLE
TRIG IN
J23
J24
GPIB J21
REPLY
(3-27V) OUT
J25
LINE
115
J7
DISPARTY
OUT
ANT B
GEN OUT
PREPULSE
OUT
EXT
SYNC OUT
SCOPE
TRIG OUT
AB AC
FUS
EXT
PRF OUT
ANT B
VIDEO OUT
ATCRBS
OUT
EXT
SYNC IN
EXT
MOD IN
P
SE F
L
J26
AC OUT
SELECT
IFR BUS J11
F1
MECH ASSY,
PULSE/PROCESSOR
DPSK OUT
J15
PPMG
J14
RF LVL
J13
SE F
DPSK ADJ
R28
AUX BUS J10
FUS
USE
RS-232
J12
E FU
K
E FU
J
AC IN
UPGRADE MODEL
AL
AK
AJ
AI
AH
AG
AF
AE
AD
02407030
S- 1403DL Fr ont and Rear Panels
Figur e 1
1- 1- 2
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
S-1403DL Item Letter Location List
(Front Panel):
A. BRIGHTNESS Control
B. MENU Display
C. CURSOR Keys
D. Keyboard
E. UUT VIDEO Connector (J10001)
F. UUT VIDEO Indicator
G. ANT B Connector (J10002)
H. SLEW Control
I. POWER Switch
S-1403DL Alphabetical Location List
(Front Panel):
A N T B C o n n e ct o r ( J1 0 0 0 2 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BRIGHTNESS Control ..........................
C U R S O R K e ys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K e yb o a r d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M E N U D i sp l a y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWER Switch....................................
SLEW Control .....................................
U U T V I D E O C o n n e ct o r ( J1 0 0 0 1 ) . . . . . . . . . . . .
U U T V I D E O I n d i ca t o r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G
A
C
D
B
I
H
E
F
S-1403DL Item Letter Location List
(Rear Panel):
J . S C O P E T R I G O U T C o n n e ct o r ( J 7 )
K . E X T M O D I N C o n n e ct o r ( J3 )
L . E X T S Y N C O U T C o n n e ct o r ( J8 )
M . E X T S Y N C I N C o n n e ct o r ( J4 )
N. PREPULSE OUT Connector (J9)
S-1403DL Alphabetical Location List
(Rear Panel):
1 4 0 0 A P O W E R C o n n e ct o r
o r A C O U T C o n n e ct o r ( u p g r a d e ) . . . . . .
A C I N C o n n e ct o r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A N T B G E N O U T C o n n e ct o r ( J2 2 ) . . . . . . . . . .
A N T B V I D E O O U T C o n n e ct o r ( J6 ) . . . . . . . .
AC
AD
P
Q
O . ATCRBS O U T C o n n e c t o r ( J 5 )
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
W.
X.
Y.
Z.
AA.
AB.
AC.
AD.
AE.
AF.
AG.
AH.
AI.
A J.
AK.
AL.
A N T B G E N O U T C o n n e ct o r ( J2 2 )
A N T B V I D E O O U T C o n n e ct o r ( J6 )
E X T P R F O U T C o n n e ct o r ( J1 7 )
DISPARITY OUT Connector (J23)
M O D E G R P T R I G I N C o n n e c t o r ( J1 8 )
E N A B L E T R I G I N C o n n e ct o r ( J2 4 )
R E P L Y G R P T R I G I N C o n n e ct o r ( J1 9 )
R E P L Y ( T T L ) O U T C o n n e ct o r ( J2 5 )
D E C O D E D V I D E O I N C o n n e c t o r ( J2 0 )
R E P L Y ( 3 - 2 7 V ) O U T C o n n e ct o r ( J2 6 )
GPIB Connector (J21)
I F R B U S C o n n e c t o r ( J1 1 )
F2 and F4 Fuses
or F2 Fuse (upgrade)
1400A POWER Connector
or AC OUT Connector (upgrade)
A C I N C o n n e ct o r
VOLTAGE SELECT Switch
F1 and F3 Fuses
or F1 Fuse (upgrade)
AUX BUS Connector (J10)
RF LVL Connector (J13)
P P M G C o n n e ct o r ( J1 4 )
DPSK OUT Connector (J15)
DPSK ADJ (R28)
RS-232 Connector (J12)
ATCRBS O U T C o n n e ct o r ( J5 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O
A U X B U S C o n n e ct o r ( J1 0 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D E C O D E D V I D E O I N C o n n e ct o r ( J2 0 ) . . . .
D I S P A R I T Y O U T C o n n e ct o r ( J2 3 ) . . . . . . . . . .
DPSK ADJ (R28) .................................
D P S K O U T C o n n e ct o r ( J1 5 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E N A B L E T R I G I N C o n n e ct o r ( J2 4 ) . . . . . . . . .
E X T M O D I N C o n n e ct o r ( J3 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E X T P R F O U T C o n n e ct o r ( J1 7 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E X T S Y N C I N C o n n e ct o r ( J4 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E X T S Y N C O U T C o n n e ct o r ( J8 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F1 and F3 Fuses
o r F 1 F u se ( u p g r a d e ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F2 and F4 Fuses
o r F 2 F u se ( u p g r a d e ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G P I B C o n n e ct o r ( J2 1 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I F R B U S C o n n e ct o r ( J1 1 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M O D E G R P T R I G I N C o n n e ct o r ( J1 8 ) . . . . .
P P M G C o n n e ct o r ( J1 4 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P R E P U L S E O U T C o n n e ct o r ( J9 ) . . . . . . . . . . . .
R E P L Y ( 3 - 2 7 V ) O U T C o n n e ct o r ( J 2 6 ) . . . .
R E P L Y ( T T L ) O U T C o n n e ct o r ( J2 5 ) . . . . . . .
R E P L Y G R P T R I G I N C o n n e ct o r ( J 1 9 ) . . . .
R F L V L C o n n e ct o r ( J1 3 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R S - 2 3 2 C o n n e ct o r ( J1 2 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S C O P E T R I G O U T C o n n e ct o r ( J7 ) . . . . . . . . .
V O L T A G E S E L E C T S w i t ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AG
X
S
AK
AJ
U
K
R
M
L
AF
AB
Z
AA
T
AI
N
Y
W
V
AH
AL
J
AE
1- 1- 2
Page 3
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.1 S- 1403DL F RO NT PANEL
B
A
C
D
BRIGHTNESS
7/D
8/E
2ND
FUNC#
P2
P3
ARF LVL
4/A
5/B
6/C
HEX
P4/P6
CURSOR
BRF LVL
SLEW
9/F
UUT VIDEO
SPR
BURST
1
2
3
PRTSCR
ANT B
SAVE
RECALL
S MENU
0
U MENU
SEQ AD
P PULS
EX SYN
C MENU
CL/ESC
ON/CAL
ENTER
T MENU
PPMG
EX MOD
HELP
POWER
I
S-1403DL
I
F
E
ANT B
+/-
1kW PK
10W AVG
G
H
IT EM
DESCRIPT IO N
A. BRIG HTNESS Contr ol
Contr ols br ightness of the S-1403DL
MENU Display backlight. Rotating cw
incr eases br ightness. Rotating ccw
decr eases br ightness.
B. MENU Display
ITEM
G r een LED illuminates when r eceiving
tr ansmitter r eplies thr ough the S1403DL ANT B Connector .
G . ANT B Connector ( J10002)
CAUTION:
C. CURSOR Keys ( ↑, →, ↓, ←)
MAXIMUM INPUT
PO WER MUST NO T
EXCEED 1 kW PEAK O R
10 W AVERAG E.
Pr ovides access to a second RF
channel for diver sity testing. The S1403DL tr ansmits inter r ogation
signals thr ough the ANT B Connector
at a fixed power level unless the
Multi- Level Diver sity option is
installed. The Multi- Level Diver sity
option pr ovides level contr ol of the
Antenna B signals tr ansmitted thr ough
this connector .
Select data or contr ol fields for
editing. Cur sor is shown as an
under line below the selected field.
After positioning the cur sor under the
desir ed field, the Keyboar d or SLEW
Contr ol edits the field.
D. Keyboar d
H. SLEW Contr ol
Selects data by r otating in either a cw
or ccw dir ection. Entire command and
decimal data fields ar e edited with
one SLEW Contr ol entr y. O ctal data
fields ar e changed one char acter at a
time. SLEW Contr ol input allows rapid
advance to desir ed function or data.
E. UUT VIDEO Connector ( J10001)
Pr ovides detected UUT tr ansmission
video r eceived through the S-1403DL
ANT B Connector .
DESCRIPTIO N
F. UUT VIDEO Indicator
Displays menus as selected on the
S- 1403DL Keyboar d. Refer to 2.4 of
1- 1- 2 for menu descr iptions.
Contr ols the micr opr ocessor and is
used for data entr y. A Keyboar d entr y
changes the char acter at the cur sor
position and advances the cur sor to
the next char acter in that field. Refer
to 2.3 of 1- 1- 2 for Keyboar d key
definitions.
02407001
I.
PO WER Switch
or
Connects (I) or disconnects (O )
exter nal ac power to S- 1403DL and
1400A PO WER Connector .
1- 1- 2
Page 4
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.2 S- 1403DL REAR PANEL
J
K
L
M
N
O
J4
J3
J7
J8
S
EXT
PRF OUT
J17
DISPARTY
OUT
ANT B
GEN OUT
J9
R
J6
J5
PREPULSE
OUT
EXT
SYNC OUT
SCOPE
TRIG OUT
Q
ANT B
VIDEO OUT
ATCRBS
OUT
EXT
SYNC IN
EXT
MOD IN
P
J22
J23
02407003
ITEM
DESCRIPTIO N
J. SCO PE T RIG O UT Connector ( J7)
Pr ovides a scope tr igger for the
inter r ogation or r eply. T he ATC1400A T O /TAC/T D Switch and S1403DL C72 Setup Scr een contr ol the
signal output. Refer to Appendix A for
tr igger pulse position.
K. EXT MO D IN Connector ( J3)
Pr ovides the input for an exter nal
modulation sour ce applied to the
ANT A output signal and contr olled in
the S- 1403DL C75 Setup Scr een.
L. EXT SYNC O UT Connector ( J8)
Pr ovides a sync pulse contr olled in
the S- 1403DL C73 Setup Scr een.
M. EXT SYNC IN Connector ( J4)
Pr ovides the input for an exter nal
sync sour ce contr olled in the
S- 1403DL C71 Setup Scr een.
N. PREPULSE O UT Connector ( J9)
Pr ovides a 1.0 µs long TTL Pr epulse
contr olled in the S- 1403DL C75 Setup
Scr een.
ITEM
DESCRIPTIO N
O . ATCRBS OUT Connector (J5)
Pr ovides an active low 3.0 µs long
ATCRBS Discr ete pulse. The leading
edge of the pulse occur s 1.0 µs pr ior
to the leading edge of P 1 in an
Antenna A ( ATC- 1400A RF I/O
Connector ) ATCRBS inter r ogation.
P. ANT B G EN O UT Connector ( J22)
Pr ovides a digital ver sion of the
Antenna B output signal.
Q . ANT B VIDEO O UT Connector ( J6)
Pr ovides a digital ver sion of the
Antenna B r eply signal viewed at the
S- 1403DL UUT VIDEO Connector .
R. EXT PRF O UT Connector ( J17)
Pr ovides a sync pulse when the
S- 1403DL is tr igger ed. The tr igger
sour ce selected in the C71 Setup
Scr een also pr ovides the sour ce for
the EXT PRF O UT sync pulse.
S. DISPARITY O UT Connector ( J23)
Reserved for future use.
1- 1- 2
Page 5
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
T
U
V
REPLY GRP
TRIG IN
MODE GRP
TRIG IN
W
X
Y
Z
AA
DECODED
VIDEO IN
1
J18
J19
J20
24
REPLY
(TTL) OUT
ENABLE
TRIG IN
J24
GPIB J21
REPLY
(3-27V) OUT
J25
J26
IFR BUS J11
02407004
IT EM
DESCRIPT IO N
T . MO DE G RP TRIG IN Connector ( J18)
Reserved for future use.
U. ENABLE TRIG IN Connector ( J24)
Reserved for future use.
V. REPLY G RP T RIG IN Connector ( J19)
Reserved for future use.
W. REPLY ( TTL) O UT Connector ( J25)
Reserved for future use.
X. DECO DED VIDEO IN Connector ( J20)
Reserved for future use.
ITEM
DESCRIPTIO N
Z. G PIB Connector ( J21)
Pr ovides a par allel inter face for
gener al pur pose pr ogr ammable
instr umentation. Electr ical
char acter istics confor m to IEEE- 488.2
specifications. Refer to Appendix A
for pin- out table.
AA. IFR BUS Connector ( J11)
Pr ovides communication and contr ol
data between the ATC- 1400A and the
S- 1403DL thr ough the ATC- 1400A IFR
BUS Connector . Refer to Appendix A
for pin- out table.
Y. REPLY ( 3- 27 V) O UT Connector ( J26)
Reserved for future use.
1- 1- 2
Page 6
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
AB
SE F
1.0A @ 110VAC
0.5A @ 230VAC
TYPE F
LINE
FUSE
3A @
110/230
VAC
TYPE F
FUSE
F1
USE
FUSE
E FU
AE
AD
DESCRIPTIO N
AB. F2 and F 4 F uses
Fuses power to the S- 1403DL
VO LTAG E SELECT Switch. Refer to
1.3 of 1- 2- 1 for cor r ect fuse size and
type.
AC. 1400A PO WER Connector
CAUTION:
FOR CONNECTION TO
AT C- 1400A O NLY.
Pr ovides ac power to the ATC- 1400A.
AD. AC IN Connector
Pr ovides the input for 115 or 230 VAC
single phase power to the S-1403DL.
The S- 1403DL VO LT AG E SELECT
Switch must be set to cor r ect position
befor e applying power .
AE. VO LT AG E SELECT Switch
Selects the line voltage applied to the
S- 1403DL: 115 for 100 to 120 VAC or
230 for 220 to 240 VAC.
AF . F 1 and F 3 F uses
Fuses input power to the S- 1403DL
and 1400A PO WER Connector . Refer
to 1.3 of 1- 2- 1 for cor r ect fuse size
and type.
AC IN
AE
AF
02407031
Pr oduction Model
ITEM
AC OUT
SELECT
163 WATTS MAX
SE F
FUSE
AF
VOLTAGE SELECT
FUS
F3
115
230
.
FUS E
F2
.
115
FUS E
F1
USE
E FU
FUS E
F4
1400A POWER
FUS E
AC
FUS
F2
AB
AC
AD
02407032
Upgr ade Model
ITEM
DESCRIPTIO N
AB. F2 Fuse
Fuses power to the S- 1403DL
VO LTAG E SELECT Switch. Refer to
1.3 of 1- 2- 1 for cor r ect fuse size and
type.
AC. AC O UT Connector
CAUTION:
FOR CONNECTION TO
ATC- 1400A O NLY.
Pr ovides ac power to the ATC- 1400A.
AD. AC IN Connector
Pr ovides the input for 115 or 230 VAC
single phase power to the S-1403DL.
The S- 1403DL VO LTAG E SELECT
Switch must be set to cor r ect position
befor e applying power .
AE. VO LTAG E SELECT Switch
Selects the line voltage applied to the
S- 1403DL: 115 for 100 to 120 VAC or
230 for 220 to 240 VAC.
AF. F1 Fuse
Fuses input power to the S- 1403DL
and 1400A PO WER Connector . Refer
to 1.3 of 1- 2- 1 for cor r ect fuse size
and type.
1- 1- 2
Page 7
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
RS-232
J12
AL
DPSK ADJ
R28
AK
DPSK OUT
J15
AJ
PPMG
J14
AI
RF LVL
J13
AUX BUS J10
AH
AG
02407006
IT EM
DESCRIPT IO N
AG . AUX BUS Connector ( J10)
Pr ovides timing and pulse signals
between the ATC- 1400A and the
S- 1403DL thr ough the AT C- 1400A
AUXILIARY Connector . Refer to
Appendix A for pin- out table.
AH. RF LVL Connector ( J13)
Pr ovides an analog output signal for
ver nier contr ol over the AT C- 1400A
RF output level.
ITEM
DESCRIPTIO N
AL. RS- 232 Connector ( J12)
Pr ovides a ser ial inter face for r emote
contr ol of the Mode S Test System.
The S- 1403DL G PIB and RS- 232
Connector s suppor t simultaneous
oper ation along with or without
ATC- 1400A G PIB. The S- 1403DL C81
and C82 Setup Scr eens pr ovide
control over remote settings. Refer to
Appendix A for pin- out table.
AI. PPMG Connector ( J14)
Pr ovides a Pulse Power Measur ement
G ate ( PPMG ) pulse to the ATC-1400A,
contr olled in the S- 1403DL C74 Setup
Scr een. The PPMG pulse selects a
specific AT CRBS or Mode S Reply
pulse for UUT power and fr equency
measur ements. T he AT C- 1400A
displays power measur ements on the
XMT R PWR WAT T S Display and
fr equency measur ements on the
XMTR FREQ MHz Display.
AJ. DPSK O UT Connector ( J15)
Pr ovides the DPSK modulation used
in Mode S inter r ogations. The bipolar
level signal dr ives the phase
modulator in the AT C- 1400A.
AK. DPSK ADJ ( R28)
Sets a consistent amplitude level for
the Mode S inter r ogation phase
r ever sals.
1- 1- 2
Page 8
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
7 or FUNC# or D Key
2.3 KEYBOARD DEFINITION
7/D
8/E
9/F
2ND
FUNC#
P2
P3
ARF LVL
4/A
5/B
6/C
BRF LVL
HEX
P4/P6
SPR
BURST
1
2
3
PRTSCR
ANT B
SAVE
RECALL
S MENU
0
x
+/-
U MENU SEQ AD P PULS
C MENU CL/ESC ON/CAL
T MENU
PPMG
EX MOD
The 7 Key enter s the number 7 in contr ol or
data fields.
Pr essing the 2ND, FUNC# and both number
Keys for selected function in sequence
displays the cor r esponding function scr een
accor ding to the last used Contr ol Menu
C10 ( for Antenna A) or C20 (for Antenna B)
function.
Refer to 1-1-2, Table 1 for
Function Selections.
FUNCTION
NUMBER
C10/C20
FUNCTION
SCREEN
01
f01:ATC
02
f02:SEQ
Mode S Only
03
f03:ACS
ATCRBS Only All
Call
04
f04:ACL
ATCRBS/Mode S
All Call
05
f05:INTLCE
Interlace (Mixed)
06
f06:DI
Double
Interrogation (Two
in one period)
07
f07:BURST
Burst (Set number
of one type)
EX SYN
ENTER
HELP
S- 1403DL Keyboar d
F igur e 2
The S- 1403DL Keyboar d consists of 20
keys ( 24 keys mechanically including the
CURSOR Keys) . The keys allow data entry
for selecting functions, menu for mats and
field data.
All keys have at least two
functions and some have thr ee. Pr essing a
single key activates the selected fir st or der
function ( shown above each key in black) .
The 2ND Key allows activation of second or
thir d order functions. CURSOR Keys are
located next to the Keyboar d to expedite
enter ing data.
08
INTERROGATION
FUNCTION
ATCRBS Only
f08:ATC Mon ATCRBS Monitor
Function Selections
Table 1
Pr essing the 2ND, HEX and D Keys in
sequence enter s the number D ( 13) in
hexadecimal data fields.
2ND Key
The 2ND Key selects second or der
functions ( shown below each key in blue) or
thir d or der functions ( hexadecimal number s
>9) with the HEX Key. Pr essing the 2ND
Key and desir ed second or der function key
activates
the
selected
second
or der
function. The cur sor box changes to an
under line to indicate the 2ND Key has been
pr essed.
1- 1- 2
Page 9
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
8 or P2 or E Key
4 or HEX or A Key
T he 8 Key enter s the number 8 in contr ol or
data fields.
The 4 Key enter s the number 4 in contr ol or
data fields.
Pr essing the 2ND and P2 Keys in sequence
moves the cur sor to the P2 field for edit, if
valid for the cur r ent function. T he P2 Key
function oper ates fr om any menu and
causes the S- 1403DL to display the last
enter ed applicable C10 function scr een.
Pr essing the 2ND and HEX Keys in
sequence allows selection of a single digit
number gr eater than nine ( A, B, C, D, E
and F) for hexadecimal data fields. The
Keyboar d indicates hexadecimal number s
gr eater than nine in r ed above the
cor r esponding keys.
Pr essing the 2ND, HEX and E Keys in
sequence enter s the number E ( 14) in
hexadecimal data fields.
9 or P3 or F Key
T he 9 Key enter s the number 9 in contr ol or
data fields.
Pr essing the 2ND and P3 Keys in sequence
moves the cur sor to the P3 field for edit, if
valid for the cur r ent function. T he P3 Key
function oper ates fr om any menu and
causes the S- 1403DL to display the last
enter ed applicable C10 function scr een.
Pr essing the 2ND, HEX and F Keys in
sequence enter s the number F ( 15) in
hexadecimal data fields.
ARF LVL or BRF LVL Key
Pr essing the ARF LVL Key moves
cur sor to the Ar f field for edit. T he
LVL ( RF Signal Level for Antenna A)
function oper ates fr om any menu
causes the S- 1403DL to display the
enter ed C10 function scr een.
the
ARF
Key
and
last
Pr essing the 2ND and BRF LVL Keys in
sequence moves the cur sor to the Br f field
for edit. T he BRF LVL ( RF Signal Level for
Antenna B) Key function oper ates fr om any
menu and causes the S- 1403DL to display
the C20 function scr een.
Pr essing the 2ND, HEX and A Keys in
sequence enter s the number A ( 10) in
hexadecimal data fields.
5 or P4/P6 or B Key
The 5 Key enter s the number 5 in contr ol or
data fields.
Pr essing the 2ND and P4/P6 Keys in
sequence moves the cur sor to the P4 or P6
field for edit, if valid for the cur r ent
function. The P4/P6 Key function oper ates
fr om any menu and causes the S- 1403DL to
display the last enter ed applicable C10
function scr een.
Pr essing the 2ND, HEX and B Keys in
sequence enter s the number B ( 11) in
hexadecimal data fields.
6 or SPR or C Key
The 6 Key enter s the number 6 in contr ol or
data fields.
Pr essing the 2ND and SPR Keys in
sequence moves the cur sor to the SPR field
for edit, if valid for the cur r ent function.
The SPR ( Synchr onous Phase Rever sal)
Key function oper ates fr om any menu and
causes the S- 1403DL to display the last
enter ed applicable C10 function scr een.
Pr essing the 2ND, HEX and C Keys in
sequence enter s the number C ( 12) in
hexadecimal data fields.
1- 1- 2
Page 10
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
BURST or PRTSCR Key
3 or RECALL Key
T he BURST Key activates the BURST
Function when oper ating in the Bur st
Scr een.
When activated, the BURST
Function
tr ansmits
the
number
of
inter r ogations specified in the C10/C20 f07
function scr een.
If enabled in the C71
Setup Scr een as the tr igger sour ce, the
BURST Key initiates single inter r ogations in
other functions.
The 3 Key enter s the number 3 in contr ol or
data fields.
Pr essing the 2ND and PRTSCR Keys in
sequence per for ms a cur r ent scr een dump
out the RS- 232 Connector ( J12) if enabled
in the C81 RS232 Contr ol System Scr een.
Pr essing the S MENU and Sequence Menu
number ( 000 to 999) Keys in sequence
displays the cor r esponding sequence menu.
Pr essing the S MENU Key without a
sequence
number
displays
the
last
accessed sequence menu or the default
S001 Sequence Menu on power - up.
1 or ANT B Key
The 1 Key enter s the number 1 in contr ol or
data fields.
Pr essing the 2ND and ANT B Keys in
sequence moves the cur sor to the AntB
field for edit. T he ANT B ( Antenna B) Key
function oper ates fr om any menu and
causes the S- 1403DL to display the last
enter ed applicable C10 function screen.
Pr essing the 2ND and RECALL Keys in
sequence displays the Recall Configur ation
Scr een for r ecalling saved scr een and
factor y default configur ations.
Refer to
2.10.2 in 1- 2- 2 for Recall oper ation.
S MENU or U MENU Key
The U MENU Key is reserved for future
use.
2 or SAVE Key
The 2 Key enter s the number 2 in contr ol or
data fields.
Pr essing the 2ND and SAVE Keys in
sequence displays the Save Configur ation
Scr een for saving scr een configur ations in
up to five non- volatile memor y Slots. Refer
to 2.10.1 in 1- 2- 2 for Save oper ation.
MS
SAVE CONFIGURATION
Slot 5: -- Empty --
MR
Press ENTER
to save.
RECALL CONFIGURATION
Slot 2: Yearly Cal Test
27jul96,10:05:15
Press ENTER
to recall.
Example Save and Recall Configur ation Scr eens
Figur e 3
1- 1- 2
Page 11
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
0 or SEQ AD Key
T he 0 Key enter s the number 0 in contr ol or
contr ol or data fields.
Pr essing the 2ND and SEQ AD Keys in
sequence moves cur sor to the ADDR field
( uplink for mat addr ess) for edit in the
sequence menu. T he SEQ AD ( Sequential
Addr ess) Key function oper ates fr om any
menu and causes the S- 1403DL to display
the last displayed sequence menu or S001
Sequence Menu ( default) .
• o r P PULS Key
T he • Key enter s the decimal point in data
fields.
Pr essing the 2ND and P PULS Keys in
sequence moves the cur sor to the C75
Setup Screen PrePulseOut field for edit.
The P PULS ( Pr epulse) Key function
oper ates fr om any menu and causes the S1403DL to display the C75 Setup Scr een.
+/- or EX SYN Key
T he +/- Key changes a decimal data field
value from positive (+ ) to negative (-) or
vice ver sa without having to pr ess the
ENT ER Key. The +/- Key function, used
after editing the decimal data field, displays
the plus (+) or minus (-) sign befor e the
data.
The +/- Key also cycles thr ough
active sequence menus when pr essed with
the cur sor in the sequence menu S###
field.
Pr essing the 2ND and EX SYN Keys in
sequence enter s the C73 Setup Scr een and
moves the cursor to the ATC Enable field.
The EX SYN (External Sync output) Key
function oper ates fr om any menu.
C MENU or T MENU Key
Pr essing the C MENU and Contr ol Menu
Number ( 0- 9) Keys in sequence enter s the
cor r esponding Contr ol Menu. T he 0 Key
enter s the Main Contr ol Menu. Pr essing
the C MENU Key without a number enter s
the last accessed Contr ol Menu.
Pr essing the 2ND and T MENU Keys in
sequence enter s the last accessed Test
Scr een. Pr essing the 2nd, T MENU and
Test Menu Number ( 0- 6) Keys in sequence
enter s the cor r esponding Test Scr een. The
0 Key enter s the Main Test Menu.
CL/ESC or PPMG Key
Pr essing the CL/ESC Key dur ing an edit
( befor e pr essing the ENTER Key) clear s
input data and r estor es pr evious data. The
CL/ESC Key function r esets entir e octal
and hexadecimal data fields to zer o.
Pr essing the CL/ESC Key dur ing UUT
measur ements clear s r eply infor mation and
resets to current reply input.
Pr essing the 2ND and PPMG Keys in
sequence enter s the C74 Setup Scr een.
T he PPMG ( Pulse Power Measur ement
G ate) Key function oper ates fr om any
scr een and allows adjustment to measur e
the power of selected tr ansponder pulses.
ON/CAL or EX MOD Key
The ON/CAL Key steps through the different
states or values of control fields having
more than one state or value, changes
inter r ogation addr esses in addr ess data
fields and star ts or stops applicable Test
Menu oper ations.
Pr essing the 2ND and EX MO D Keys in
sequence enter s the C75 Setup Scr een.
The EX MO D ( Exter nal Modulation input)
Key function oper ates fr om any scr een and
allows selection of the modulation sour ces.
ENTER or HELP Key
The ENTER Key enter s the cur r ent data or
r etur ns to the pr evious scr een fr om Help
scr een.
Pr essing the ENTER Key after
editing a data field saves the changes to
any and all fields in the cur r ent scr een.
The HELP Key is r eser ved for futur e use.
1- 1- 2
Page 12
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.4 DISPLAY MENU DEFINITION
The S- 1403DL displays four menu types;
Contr ol, Sequence, T est and User . Contr ol
Menus include the function scr eens, Setup
Menus, System Menus and Calibr ation
Menus.
Sequence menus ( up to 1000
pr eset menus) load Mode S inter r ogation
infor mation and display r eply content. Test
Menus include the tr ansponder capability
test, Extr a Length Message ( ELM) tests and
other special infor mation tests. The User
Menu allows up to nine user definable
scr eens ( loaded r emotely) .
An er r or occur s when setting only one test
set ( S- 1403DL or ATC- 1400A) for Double
Inter r ogations. T he S- 1403DL monitor s the
ATC- 1400A DBL INTERR/INTRF PULSE
Thumbwheels selections.
The DO UBLE
position is only valid with the S- 1403DL DI
Function active. The S- 1403DL indicates
this er r or by flashing the message,
* DI/INTF ERRO R * in the top line of the
MENU Display in all scr eens.
All scr eens have a scr een r efer ence
designator in the upper left cor ner of the
MENU Display.
T he scr een r efer ence
designator indicates the scr een type with a
letter ( C for Contr ol Menu, S for Sequence
Menu, T for T est Menu, MS for Memor y
Save or MR for Memor y Recall) .
The
number s for a menu scr een indicates a
par ticular subscr een.
Scr eens contain contr ol and/or data fields.
Contr ol fields set test par ameter s and can
be numer ic ( setting a value) , select
( selecting a mode or state) , numer ic/select
( selecting a state and setting a value if
r equir ed by the selected state) or str ing
( enter ing text) type.
Data fields contain
number s
r epr esenting
values
or
infor mation.
F ields not cur r ently being
updated or out of r ange display dashes.
Fields immediately following a colon ( :)
gener ally
specify
values
or
settings
selected
by
the
oper ator .
Fields
immediately following an equal sign ( =)
gener ally specify values or infor mation
r etur ned to the oper ator by the SI- 1404.
The sequence menus ar e an exception in
that defined data fields, r eceived or set,
follow an equal sign.
NOTE: T he S- 1403DL pr ovides the only
valid per cent r eply infor mation.
Counting UUT Mode S squitter
( unsolicited) tr ansmissions makes
the AT C- 1400A DME- PRF
Hz/XPDR- %REPLY Display invalid.
1- 1- 2
Page 13
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.4.1
Cont rol Men u s ( CMENU)
C00
1)FUNC A
2)FUNC B
3)%REPLY
MAIN CMENU
4)REPLY DELAY 7)SETUP MENU
5)SQTR 1of2
8)SYSTEM MENU
6)SQTR 2of2
9)CAL MENU
Main Contr ol Menu
Figur e 5
Pr essing C MENU and a number key ( 1- 9)
in sequence enter s the applicable Contr ol
Menu subscr een or last accessed scr een of
a par ticular function or subscr een gr oup.
C10 FUNCTION A
F unction A consists of scr eens for contr ol
and monitor of Antenna A ( AT C- 1400A RF
I/O Connector ) . Pulse settings also apply
to the S-1403DL ANT B Connector output.
f 01 AT C
C10 f01:ATC (ATCRBS)
Arf:+1.2
P3:CAL
Altitude:+105000 Dly= 3.0250 Sqtr= 0.85
AntA%:ATC=100,S= 0 AntB%=100 AntB:+.95
C10 f01:ATC (ATCRBS)
Arf:+1.2
P3:CAL
Code=ID7777X
Dly= 3.0125 Sqtr=02.10
AntA%:ATC=100,S= 0 AntB%=100 AntB:+.95
Example F unction A ATC Scr eens
Figur e 6
F unction 01 displays the AT C Scr een to
oper ate the AT C F unction.
T he ATC
Scr een allows adjustment of the AT CRBS
P 3 pulse level in addition to monitor ing
r eply infor mation and helping set the
Antenna A RF level.
NOTE: The ATC- 1400A pr ovides most of
the ATCRBS contr ol.
FIELD
C10
DESCRIPTION
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Contr ol Menu scr eens) indicates
Contr ol Menu 10.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
f01
Editable function field ( to enter
other Function A scr eens) indicates
Function 01 ATC ( ATCRBS) .
Ar f
Editable RF Level ver nier contr ol
combines with the ATC- 1400A RF
LEVEL Contr ol to set the Antenna A
output level thr ough the ATC- 1400A
RF I/O Connector . The field r anges
from -3.0 to +3.0 dB in 0.1 dB
steps. The ATC- 1400A RF LEVEL dBm Display plus the Ar f field
setting indicates the tr ue Antenna A
output level.
1- 1- 2
Page 14
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
FIELD
P3
DESCRIPTIO N
Contr ol field sets P 3 pulse level:
CAL sets P 3 level same as P 1 level.
VAR allows the AT C- 1400A
SLS/ECHO T humbwheels to adjust
P 3 level in dB fr om P 1 level ( only
when ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO
ON/OFF Switch is OFF). O F F
deactivates the P 3 pulse.
Altitude/Code
The Altitude field r epor ts the
altitude in feet decoded fr om the
r eplies to Mode C inter r ogations.
FIELD
AntB
DESCRIPTION
Contr ol field activates the S- 1403DL
ANT B Connector and sets the
diver sity offset value ( timing
differ ence fr om Antenna A
tr ansmissions to Antenna B
tr ansmissions [P 1 leading edge to
P 1 leading edge]) . The offset value
r anges fr om - 0.95 to +0.95 µs in
0.05 µs steps. O F F disables the
ANT B Connector . When disabled,
the Mode S Test System shuts off
all Antenna B inter r ogations and
disr egar ds any Antenna B squitter s.
The Code field r epor ts the octal ID
decoded fr om identification r eplies
( all AT CRBS r eplies except for
Mode C) . T he scr een displays ID
befor e the Code if the special
position identification ( SPI) pulse
follows the r eply ( Modes 2 and A) .
NOTE: Mode 1 r eplies display only
two digits and two spaces
since only five pulses ar e
available.
The scr een displays X if the
identification r eply contains the X
pulse.
Refer to Appendix E for var ious
r eplies and pulse infor mation.
Dly
UUT infor mation field displays r eply
delay ( P 3 leading edge to F 1 leading
edge) in µs.
Sqtr
UUT infor mation field displays time
inter val between Mode S DF11
squitter tr ansmissions in seconds.
AntA% UUT infor mation field displays
per centage of AT CRBS r eplies
( AT C=) and Mode S r eplies ( S=)
r eceived to inter r ogations
tr ansmitted thr ough the ATC- 1400A
RF I/O Connector .
AntB% UUT infor mation field displays
per centage of r eplies r eceived to
inter r ogations tr ansmitted thr ough
the S- 1403DL ANT B Connector .
1- 1- 2
Page 15
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
f 02 SEQ
C10 f02:SEQ (ModeS)
Arf:+1.2
P6:CAL,Wd:+0.00,Dv:+0.00 P2:CAL
SPR:ON ,Dv:+0.00 Dly=128.0125 Sqtr= 1.10
AntA%:ATC= 0,S=100 AntB%=100 AntB:+.95
Example F unction A SEQ Scr een
Figur e 7
F unction 02 displays the Sequence ( SEQ )
Scr een to oper ate the Mode S Sequence
F unction.
The Sequence Scr een allows
adjustment to Mode S inter r ogation pulses
in addition to monitor ing r eply infor mation
and helping set the Antenna A RF level.
FIELD
FIELD
P2
Contr ol field sets P 2 pulse level:
CAL sets P 2 level same as P 1 level.
VAR allows the ATC- 1400A
SLS/ECHO Thumbwheels to adjust
P 2 level in dB fr om P 1 level ( only
when ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO
ON/OFF Switch is OFF). O F F
deactivates the P 2 pulse.
SPR
Contr ol fields set the Synchr onous
Phase Rever sal ( SPR) . O N
activates SPR. O F F disables SPR.
DESCRIPTION
C10
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 AT C C10 field in 1- 1- 2.
f02
Editable function field ( to enter
other F unction A scr eens) indicates
Function 02 SEQ ( ModeS) .
Arf
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 ATC Ar f field in 1- 1- 2.
P6
Contr ol fields set the P 6 pulse:
CAL activates the P 6 pulse. O F F
deactivates the P 6 pulse.
The Wd subfield contr ols P 6 width.
CAL sets the P 6 pulse width to
16.25 µs for 56- bit data fields and
30.25 µs for 112- bit data fields.
Enter ing a var iable value adjusts
the P 6 pulse width in 0.05 µs steps
to ± 1.50 µs fr om the CAL width.
The Dv subfield contr ols P 6
position. CAL sets P 6 ( leading
edge) to 3.5 µs following leading
edge of P 1 . Enter ing a var iable
value deviates the P 3 pulse position
in 0.05 µs steps to ± 1.95 µs fr om
the CAL position.
DESCRIPTION
The Dv subfield contr ols SPR
position. CAL sets the SPR to
1.25 µs following P 6 leading edge.
Enter ing a var iable value deviates
the SPR position in 0.05 µs steps to
± 1.00 µs fr om the CAL position.
Dly
UUT infor mation field displays r eply
delay ( SPR to P 1 leading edge of
r eply) in µs.
Sqtr
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTIO N A,
f01 ATC Sqtr field in 1- 1- 2.
NOTE: O nly unsolicited DF11
tr ansmissions ( SPR
disabled or >140 µs
following SPR) ar e
accepted squitter s.
AntA% Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTIO N A,
f01 ATC AntA% field in 1- 1- 2.
AntB% Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTIO N A,
f01 ATC AntB% field in 1- 1- 2.
AntB
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTIO N A,
f01 ATC AntB field in 1- 1- 2.
1- 1- 2
Page 16
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
f 03 ACS an d f 04 ACL
C10 f03:ACS (All Call Short)
Arf:+1.2
P4:CAL,Wd:+0.00,Dv:+0.00
P3:CAL
DF=--,AA=------ Dly= 3.0125 Sqtr= 0.90
AntA%:ATC= 80,S= 10 AntB%=100 AntB:+.95
Example Function A ACS Scr een
Figur e 8
C10 f04:ACL (All Call Long)
Arf:+1.2
P4:CAL,Wd:+0.00,Dv:+0.00
P3:CAL
DF=11,AA=123456 Dly=128.0125 Sqtr= 0.98
AntA%:ATC= 10,S= 80 AntB%=100 AntB:+.95
Example Function A ACL Scr een
Figur e 9
Function 03 displays the ACS ( All Call
Shor t) Scr een for the ACS Function and
F unction 04 displays the ACL ( All Call
Long) Scr een for the ACL Function. Each
scr een sets the Mode S T est System for
sending
out
applicable
All
Call
inter r ogations, monitor s r eply infor mation
and helps set the Antenna A RF level.
FIELD
DESCRIPTIO N
C10
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 AT C C10 field in 1- 1- 2.
f03
Editable function field ( to enter
other Function A scr eens) indicates
F unction 03 ACS ( All Call Shor t) or
04 ACL ( All Call Long) .
Arf
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 AT C Ar f field in 1- 1- 2.
P4
Contr ol fields set the P 4 pulse:
CAL sets P 4 level same as P 1 level.
VAR allows the AT C- 1400A
SLS/ECHO T humbwheels to adjust
P 4 level in dB fr om P 1 level ( only
when ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO
ON/OFF Switch is OFF). O F F
deactivates the P 4 pulse.
The Wd subfield contr ols P 4 width.
CAL sets P 4 width to 0.8 µs (ACS)
or 1.6 µs ( ACL) . Enter ing a value
from -0.6 to +2.75 (ACS) or -1.40 to
+1.95 (ACL) adjusts P 4 width in
0.05 µs steps fr om CAL width.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
The Dv subfield contr ols P 4
position. CAL sets P 4 leading edge
to 2.0 µs following P 3 ( active or
disabled) leading edge location.
Enter ing a var iable value deviates
P 4 pulse position in 0.05 µs steps to
± 1.95 µs fr om the CAL position.
P3
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTIO N A,
f01 ATC P3 field in 1- 1- 2.
DF
Infor mation field displays downlink
for mat fr om any Mode S r eply.
AA
Infor mation field shows hexadecimal
air cr aft addr ess fr om DF11 r eplies.
Dly
UUT infor mation field displays r eply
delay ( P 3 to F 1 or P 4 to P 1 [leading
edge to leading edge]) in µs.
Sqtr
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTIO N A,
f01 ATC Sqtr field in 1- 1- 2.
NOTE: Accepted squitters are DF11
tr ansmissions, unsolicited,
( P 4 disabled or >141.8 µs
following P 4 tr ailing edge) .
AntA% Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTIO N A,
f01 ATC AntA% field in 1- 1- 2.
AntB% Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTIO N A,
f01 ATC AntB% field in 1- 1- 2.
AntB
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTIO N A,
f01 ATC AntB field in 1- 1- 2.
1- 1- 2
Page 17
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
f 05 INTLCE
C10 f05:INTLCE;Ratio:1to32
Arf:+1.2
Dly=128.0125 Sqtr= 1.00
AntA%:ATC= 80,S= 20 AntB%=100 AntB:+.95
Example F unction A Inter lace Scr een
Figur e 10
F unction 05 displays the Inter lace Scr een
for the Inter lace F unction. T he Inter lace
Scr een sets the Mode S T est System for
tr ansmitting a mixtur e of Mode S and
AT CRBS inter r ogations at a selected r atio.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
C10
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 AT C C10 field in 1- 1- 2.
f05
Editable function field ( to enter
other F unction A scr eens) indicates
Function 05 INT LCE.
Ratio:1to
Editable contr ol number field sets
the number ( 1 to 999) of AT CRBS
inter r ogations tr ansmitted for each
Mode S inter r ogation tr ansmitted.
Arf
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 ATC Ar f field in 1- 1- 2.
Dly
UUT infor mation field displays r eply
delay ( P 3 to AT CRBS r eply F 1 or
SPR to Mode S r eply P 1 [leading
edge to leading edge]) in µs.
Sqtr
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 AT C Sqtr field in 1- 1- 2.
AntA% Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 ATC AntA% field in 1- 1- 2.
AntB% Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 ATC AntB% field in 1- 1- 2.
AntB
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 ATC AntB field in 1- 1- 2.
1- 1- 2
Page 18
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
f 06 DI
C10 f06:DI;1st:SEQ,2nd:ATC
Arf:+1.2
P6:CAL,Wd:+0.00,Dv:+0.00 P2:CAL
SPR:ON ,Dv:+0.00 Dly=128.0125 Sqtr= 1.04
AntA%:ATC= 50,S= 45 AntB%=100 AntB:+.95
Example F unction A Double Inter r ogation Scr een
Figur e 11
F unction
06
displays
the
Double
Inter r ogation ( DI) Scr een for the DI
Function. T he DI Scr een sets the Mode 4/
Mode S Test System for sending out two
selected types of inter r ogations ( ATCRBS,
Mode S, All Call Shor t or All Call Long) in
the same time fr ame as one nor mal
inter r ogation.
FIELD
FIELD
AntB
DESCRIPTION
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTIO N A,
f01 ATC AntB field in 1- 1- 2.
DESCRIPTIO N
C10
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 AT C C10 field in 1- 1- 2.
f06
Editable function field ( to enter
other Function A scr eens) indicates
Function 06 DI.
The 1st field sets the fir st
inter r ogation type ( ATC, SEQ , ACS
or ACL) . O nly the fir st inter r ogation
type has editable contr ol and data
fields.
The 2nd field sets the second
inter r ogation type ( ATC, SEQ , ACS
or ACL) .
NOTE: The S- 1403DL displays fields
accor ding to the 1st field setting.
Refer to the par ticular function
selected as the fir st inter r ogation
for field definitions.
Arf
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 AT C Ar f field in 1- 1- 2.
Dly
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f05 INT LCE Dly field in 1- 1- 2.
Sqtr
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 AT C Sqtr field in 1- 1- 2.
AntA% Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 AT C AntA% field in 1- 1- 2.
AntB% Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 AT C AntB% field in 1- 1- 2.
1- 1- 2
Page 19
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
f07 BURST
C10 f07:BURST;SEQ:1000
Arf:+1.2
P6:CAL,Wd:+0.00,Dv:+0.00 P2:CAL
SPR:ON ,Dv:+0.00 Dly=128.0125 Sqtr= 1.05
AntA%:ATC= 0,S= 90 AntB%= 90 AntB:+.95
Example F unction A Bur st Scr een
Figur e 12
F unction 07 displays the Bur st Scr een for
the Bur st F unction. The Bur st Scr een sets
the Mode S T est System for sending out a
selected type of inter r ogation ( ATCRBS,
Mode S, All Call Shor t or All Call Long) a
selected amount of times.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
C10
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 AT C C10 field in 1- 1- 2.
f07
Editable function field ( to enter
other F unction A scr eens) indicates
Function 07 BURST.
The ATC, SEQ , ACS or ACL field
sets the type of inter r ogation. T he
number field ( 1 to 9999) sets the
specific number of interrogations
sent. For r efer ence, the Bur st
Number ( BN) r efer s to the number
field value.
NOTE: T he S- 1403DL displays fields
accor ding to the type of
inter r ogation. For field definitions,
r efer to the Function A function
scr een for the function selected as
the inter r ogation type.
Arf
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 ATC Ar f field in 1- 1- 2.
Dly
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f05 INTLCE Dly field in 1- 1- 2.
Sqtr
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 AT C Sqtr field in 1- 1- 2.
AntA% Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 ATC AntA% field in 1- 1- 2.
AntB% Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 ATC AntB% field in 1- 1- 2.
AntB
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 ATC AntB field in 1- 1- 2.
1- 1- 2
Page 20
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
f08 ATC Mon
C10 f08:ATC Mon;Mode:1
Arf:+1.2
F1toF2=20.3000, F1Wd=0.4500, F2Wd=0.4500
Code= 0121
Dly= 3.0125 Jtr=0.2000
AntA%:ATC= 0,S= 90 AntB%= 90 AntB:-.95
Example Function A ATC Monitor Scr een
Figur e 13
F unction 08 displays the AT C Monitor
Scr een for the AT CRBS Monitor Pulse
Function. The ATC Monitor Scr een sets the
Mode S T est System for sending out
selected
AT CRBS
inter r ogations
and
measur ing r eply pulse par ameter s and
jitter.
FIELD
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 AT C C10 field in 1- 1- 2.
f08
Editable function field ( to enter
other Function A scr eens) indicates
Function 08 AT C Mon.
Mode
Infor mation field tr acks inter r ogation
mode set by the AT C- 1400A XPDR
MO DE Contr ol or ATCRBS field
setting in the C79 Setup Scr een
when oper ating in the Stand Alone
mode ( 1400 Contr ol set to STANDALONE in the C84 System Scr een) .
Possible modes ar e 1, 2, A, B, C, D
or T.
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 AT C Ar f field in 1- 1- 2.
DESCRIPTION
Altitude/Code
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTIO N A,
f01 ATC Altitude/Code field in
1- 1- 2.
Additional infor mation may be
added at the end of the field
accor ding to the r eply as follows:
DESCRIPTIO N
C10
Arf
FIELD
For emer gency identification
r eplies, the scr een displays EM.
For identification of position ( I/P)
r eplies, the scr een displays IP.
Jtr
UUT infor mation field displays r eply
jitter ( differ ence between shor test
and longest r eply delays) in µs.
AntA% Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTIO N A,
f01 ATC AntA% field in 1- 1- 2.
AntB% Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTIO N A,
f01 ATC AntB% field in 1- 1- 2.
AntB
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTIO N A,
f01 ATC AntB field in 1- 1- 2.
F1toF2
UUT infor mation field displays F 1 to
F 2 r eply pulse spacing in µs.
F 1Wd
UUT infor mation field displays F 1
pulse width in µs.
F 2Wd
UUT infor mation field displays F 2
pulse width in µs.
Dly
Refer to 2.4.1 C10 FUNCTION A,
f01 ATC Dly field in 1- 1- 2.
1- 1- 2
Page 21
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
C20 FUNCTION B
C20 f05:INTLCE;Ratio:1to
1
Brf:-20+1.2
Dly= 3.0125 Sqtr= 1.25
AntB%:ATC= 50,S= 50 AntA%=100 AntB:+.95
Example Function B Scr een
Figur e 14
F unction B consists of the same function
scr eens as Function A except for the Br f
and AntB% fields. F unction B scr eens set
inter r ogation functions to contr ol and
monitor Antenna B ( S- 1403DL ANT B
Connector ) . Pulse settings also apply to
the ATC- 1400A RF I/O Connector output.
FIELD
FIELD
AntA% UUT infor mation field displays
per centage of r eplies r eceived to
inter r ogations tr ansmitted thr ough
the ATC- 1400A RF I/O Connector .
DESCRIPTION
C20
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Contr ol Menu scr eens) indicates
Contr ol Menu 20.
f##
Editable function field ( to enter
other F unction B function scr eens)
indicates cur r ent function.
NOTE: T he S- 1403DL displays fields
accor ding to the function type.
Refer to the same Function A
function scr een for field definitions.
Br f
Two fields allow contr ol of the
Antenna B level only with the MLD
option installed.
T he fir st field sets the Antenna B
main output signal level ( - 83 to - 20)
in dBm. Without MLD, the noneditable field indicates the S1403DL tr ansmits the Antenna B
signal at a fixed - 50 dBm.
DESCRIPTION
AntB% UUT infor mation field displays
per centage of ATCRBS r eplies
( ATC=) and Mode S r eplies ( S=)
r eceived to inter r ogations
tr ansmitted thr ough the S- 1403DL
ANT B Connector .
AntB
Contr ol field activates the S- 1403DL
ANT B Connector and sets the
diver sity offset value ( timing
differ ence fr om Antenna A
tr ansmissions to Antenna B
tr ansmissions [P 1 leading edge to
P 1 leading edge]) . The offset value
r anges fr om - 0.95 to +0.95 µs in
0.05 µs steps. O F F disables the
ANT B Connector . When disabled,
the Mode S Test Systems shuts off
all Antenna B inter r ogations and
disr egar ds any Antenna B squitter s.
The second field, the RF Level
ver nier contr ol, combines with the
fir st field to set the Antenna B
output level thr ough the S- 1403DL
ANT B Connector . The field, only
displayed with the MLD option
installed, r anges fr om - 3.0 to
+3.0 dB in 0.1 dB steps. Both fields
add together to indicate the tr ue
Antenna B output level.
1- 1- 2
Page 22
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
C30 PERCENT REPLY
C30
AntA%=
AntB%=
ATC
80
80
PERCENT REPLY
ModeS BAD NOREPLY
10
5
5
10
5
5
Example Per cent Reply Scr een
Figur e 15
FIELD
C30
DESCRIPTIO N
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Contr ol Menu scr eens) indicates
Contr ol Menu 30.
AntA% UUT infor mation fields display
per centage of r eplies r eceived to
inter r ogations tr ansmitted thr ough
the ATC- 1400A RF I/O Connector .
AntB% UUT infor mation fields display
per centage of r eplies r eceived to
inter r ogations tr ansmitted thr ough
the S- 1403DL ANT B Connector .
ATC
UUT infor mation fields display
per centage of AT CRBS r eplies
r eceived to inter r ogations
tr ansmitted.
ModeS
UUT infor mation fields display
per centage of Mode S r eplies
r eceived to inter r ogations
tr ansmitted.
BAD
UUT infor mation fields display
per centage of bad ( out of
specification) r eplies r eceived to
inter r ogations tr ansmitted.
NO REPLY
UUT infor mation fields display
per centage of inter r ogations
tr ansmitted having no r eplies
r eceived.
NOTE: Pr essing the S- 1403DL CL/ESC
Key with the Per cent Reply Scr een
displayed or changing inter r ogation
function (e.g. ATC→SEQ or
SEQ →ACS) initializes per cent r eply
fields to cur r ent per cent r eply
r eadings.
1- 1- 2
Page 23
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
C40 REPL Y DELAY
C40
REPLY DELAY
ATC= 3.0125,Min= 2.9875,Max= 3.0250
ModeS=128.0125,Min=128.0000,Max=128.0125
Example Reply Delay Scr een
Figur e 16
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
C40
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Contr ol Menu scr eens) indicates
Contr ol Menu 40.
AT C
UUT infor mation fields display
ATCRBS r eply delays in µs ( P 3
leading edge to F 1 leading edge) .
The fir st field indicates the cur r ent
ATCRBS r eply delay. T he Min=
field indicates the shor test AT CRBS
r eply delay dur ing the cur r ent test.
T he Max= field indicates the longest
AT CRBS r eply delay dur ing the
current test.
ModeS
UUT infor mation fields display
Mode S r eply delays in µs ( SPR to
P 1 leading edge) . T he fir st field
indicates the cur r ent Mode S r eply
delay. The Min= field indicates the
shor test Mode S r eply delay dur ing
the cur r ent test. T he Max= field
indicates the longest Mode S r eply
delay dur ing the cur r ent test.
NOTE: Pr essing the S- 1403DL CL/ESC
Key with the Reply Delay Scr een
displayed or changing inter r ogation
function (e.g. ATC→SEQ or
SEQ →ACS) initializes r eply delay
fields to cur r ent r eply delay
r eadings.
1- 1- 2
Page 24
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
C50 SQUITTER (1 of 2)
C50
SQUITTER (1of2)
Capt
Addr:h=A55A6A,o=51255152,Tail=N44KR,
Country=United States
Counts/150s:DF11=148,DF17=301,DF17I= 24
Example Squitter ( 1 of 2) Scr een
Figur e 17
FIELD
DESCRIPTIO N
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
C50
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Contr ol Menu scr eens) indicates
Contr ol Menu 50.
The DF17= field indicates number of
DF17 squitter s r eceived dur ing the
cur r ent or last time per iod.
Capt
Indicates data in the squitter
captur e buffer . Without data in the
squitter captur e buffer , the Squitter
Scr eens do not display Capt. The
squitter captur e buffer can only be
examined using r emote commands.
Addr
UUT infor mation fields display the
Mode S Addr ess fr om r eceived
squitter s in hexadecimal ( h=) and
octal (o=) formats.
The DF17X= field indicates number
of DF17 X type squitter s r eceived
dur ing the cur r ent or last time
per iod. The editable X (A, I, O , P,
S or T) selects the type of DF17
squitter s counted. Refer to 1- 1- 2,
Table 3 for selection descr iption.
SELECTION
DESCRIPTION
A
Airborne Position
I
Aircraft Identification
The T ail= field displays the Tail
Number decoded fr om the UUT
Mode S Addr ess.
O
Other
P
On-Demand Information
(Pilot Report)
The Countr y= field displays the
name of the countr y, when decoded
fr om the most significant bits of the
UUT Mode S Addr ess.
S
Surface Position
T
Airborne
Supplementary
Information (Trend)
Counts
Editable data field sets the time in
seconds ( 10 to 300) to count
r eceived squitter s befor e star ting
the count over .
T he DF11= field indicates number of
DF11 squitter s r eceived dur ing the
cur r ent or last time per iod.
DF17 Squitter Selection
Table 3
NOTE: Pr essing the S- 1403DL CL/ESC
Key with the Squitter ( 1 of 2)
Scr een displayed or changing
inter r ogation function ( e.g.
ATC→SEQ or SEQ→ACS)
initializes squitter count fields to
zer o.
1- 1- 2
Page 25
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
C60 SQUITTER (2 of 2)
C60
SQUITTER (2of2)
DF CA
AA
ME
II ANT
11 6 A55A6A
*0 A
17A 6 A55A6A 50A421555420A1 0 B
TIME
1.10
0.51
Example Squitter ( 2 of 2) Scr een
Figur e 18
DESCRIPTION
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
C60
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Contr ol Menu scr eens) indicates
Contr ol Menu 60.
TIME
UUT infor mation fields display time
between the last two squitter s in
seconds.
Capt
Refer to 2.4.1 C50 SQ UIT T ER ( 1 of
2) Capt field in 1- 1- 2.
DF11
UUT infor mation fields display
decoded DF 11 squitter data.
NOTE: Pr essing the S- 1403DL CL/ESC
Key with the Squitter ( 2 of 2)
Scr een displayed or changing
inter r ogation function ( e.g.
ATC→SEQ or SEQ→ACS)
initializes squitter data fields to
cur r ent r eadings.
FIELD
DF17X
UUT infor mation fields display
decoded DF 17 squitter data.
T he editable X (A, I, O , P, S or T)
selects the type of DF17 squitter
displayed. Refer to 1- 1- 2, T able 3
for selection descr iption.
CA
AA
ME
UUT infor mation fields display
tr ansponder capability data in
hexadecimal fr om last squitter .
UUT infor mation fields display
air cr aft addr ess data in hexadecimal
from last squitter.
UUT infor mation field displays
extended squitter message data in
hexadecimal fr om last squitter . The
first five bits indicate the type of
DF17 squitter accor ding to the
tables at the end of Appendix D.
II
UUT infor mation fields display the
last (bottom) four bits of the
conver ted PI addr ess field in
hexadecimal ( nor mally zer o for
squitters). If the first (top) 20 bits
of the conver ted PI field ( nor mally
zer o) have a non- zer o value an *
appear s befor e the II field.
ANT
UUT infor mation fields r epor t the
last squitter r eceived was thr ough
what antenna ( A or B) .
Squit t er Period Measurement Paramet ers
Range:
DF11:
0.01 to 3.00 seconds
DF 17A:
0.01 to 1.50 seconds
DF 17S:
0.01 to 15.00 seconds
DF17I:
0.01 to 30.00 seconds
DF17T:
0.01 to 1.50 seconds
DF 17P:
0.01 to 65.53 seconds
DF17O :
0.01 to 65.53 seconds
Resolution: 10 ms
Accur acy:
± 10 ms, ± 0.005%
1- 1- 2
Page 26
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
C70 SETUP MENU
C70
SETUP MENU
1)INTER TRIG 4)PPMG
2)SCOPE TRIG 5)MISC
3)EXT SYNC
6)SMENU
7)
8)
9)ATC1400A
Main Setup Menu
Figur e 19
Pr essing a number key ( 1- 9) fr om the Main
Setup Menu enter s the applicable Setup
Menu subscr een.
The Setup Menu
subscr eens set tr igger ing, modulation,
for mat and other inter r ogation par ameter s.
C71 Interrogation Trigger
C71
SETUP - INTERROGATION TRIGGER
TrigSource:ExtSyncIn
TrigGen:10.0000Sec
Example C71 Setup ( Inter r ogation Tr igger ) Scr een
Figur e 20
FIELD
C71
DESCRIPTIO N
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Contr ol Menu scr eens) indicates
C71 Setup Scr een.
Tr igSour ce
Contr ol field selects inter r ogation
tr igger sour ce. Refer to 1- 1- 2,
Table 4.
SETTING
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Tr igG en
Sets the S- 1403DL internal trigger
gener ator accor ding to selected
units, 0.0004 to 99.9999 (Sec) for
the time between inter r ogations or 1
to 2500 ( Hz) for the number of
interrogations per second.
SOURCE
SelfInterr
Self Interrogate pulse
from ATC-1400A
through S-1403DL AUX
BUS Connector
ExtSyncIn
External source through
S-1403DL EXT SYNC
IN Connector
TrigGen
S-1403DL internal
source as set by
TrigGen field
BurstKey
Single trigger manually
controlled by pressing
S-1403DL BURST Key
T r igger Sour ce
Table 4
1- 1- 2
Page 27
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
C72 Scope Trigger
C72
SETUP - SCOPE TRIGGER
ATC ModeS ACS ACL
Enable:OFF ON
OFF OFF
Source:CAL 150
CAL CAL
(in µS)
Example C72 Setup ( Scope Tr igger ) Scr een
Figur e 21
FIELD
C72
DESCRIPTION
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Contr ol Menu scr eens) indicates
C72 Setup Scr een.
Enable
Contr ol field activates ( O N) or
deactivates ( O F F) tr igger output at
the S- 1403DL SCO PE T RIG O UT
Connector for each inter r ogation
type.
Sour ce
Contr ol field sets timing for each
inter r ogation type: CAL to
r efer ence the AT C- 1400A
T O /TAC/T D Switch or a var iable
numer ic value. Refer to Appendix A
for the T O and T D pulse positions.
The var iable numer ic value sets the
tr igger position in µs r efer enced to
the leading edge of the Antenna A
inter r ogation P 1 pulse. In all
modes, setting the scope tr igger
timing to the var iable numer ic value
fixes the scope tr igger pulse width
at 1 µs.
AT C
Contr ol fields set tr igger output and
timing for ATCRBS inter r ogations.
ModeS
Contr ol fields set tr igger output and
timing for Mode S inter r ogations.
ACS
Contr ol fields set tr igger output and
timing for All Call Shor t
inter r ogations.
ACL
Contr ol fields set tr igger output and
timing for All Call Long
inter r ogations.
1- 1- 2
Page 28
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
C73 Ext Syn c O u t
C73
SETUP - EXT SYNC OUT
ATC ModeS ACS ACL
Enable:OFF ON
OFF OFF
Dj:+0.00µS
Example C73 Setup ( Ext Sync O ut) Scr een
Figur e 22
FIELD
C73
DESCRIPTIO N
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Contr ol Menu scr eens) indicates
C73 Setup Scr een.
Enable
Contr ol field activates ( O N) or
deactivates ( O F F) exter nal sync
pulse output at the S- 1403DL EXT
SYNC O UT Connector for each
inter r ogation type.
AT C
Contr ol field activates or
deactivates exter nal sync pulse
output for AT CRBS inter r ogations.
ModeS
Contr ol field activates or
deactivates exter nal sync pulse
output for Mode S inter r ogations.
ACS
Contr ol field activates or
deactivates exter nal sync pulse
output for All Call Shor t
inter r ogations.
ACL
Contr ol field activates or
deactivates exter nal sync pulse
output for All Call Long
inter r ogations.
Dv
Contr ol field sets the sync pulse
position fr om - 9.95 to +9.95 µs, in
r efer ence to the star t of the
Antenna A inter r ogation P 1 pulse.
1- 1- 2
Page 29
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
C74 PPMG
C74
SETUP - PPMG (POWER)
ATC ModeS DELM
Enable:OFF OFF
OFF
Pulse:A1
P116
1
Example C74 Setup ( PPMG ) Scr een
Figur e 23
NOTE: For the S- 1403DL to contr ol pulse
power measur ement, the ATC1400A F 2 /P 2 F 1 /P 1 Switch must be
set to F 2 /P 2 .
FIELD
C74
DESCRIPTION
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Contr ol Menu scr eens) indicates
C74 Setup Scr een.
Enable
Contr ol fields activate (O N) or
deactivate (O F F) Pulse Power
Measur ement G ate ( PPMG )
oper ation for each r eply type.
Pulse
AT C
Contr ol fields select the r eply pulse
to measur e for each r eply type. The
Mode S Test System measur es
power and fr equency of the selected
pulse.
Contr ol fields set PPMG oper ation
for ATCRBS r eplies.
The ATC Enable field activates ( O N)
or deactivates ( O F F) PPMG
oper ation.
The Mode S T est System per for ms
power and fr equency measur ements
on the AT CRBS r eply pulse ( F 1, C1,
A1, C2, A2, C4, A4, X, B1, D1, B2,
D2, B4, D4, F2 or SPI) selected in
the ATC Pulse field.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
ModeS
Contr ol fields set PPMG oper ation
for Mode S r eplies.
The ModeS Enable field activates
( O N) or deactivates ( O F F) PPMG
oper ation.
The Mode S Test System per for ms
power and fr equency measur ements
on the Mode S r eply pulse ( P001 to
P116) selected in the ModeS Pulse
field.
DELM Contr ol fields set PPMG oper ation
for Downlink Extended Length
Messages ( DELM) .
The DELM Enable field activates
( O N) or deactivates ( O F F) PPMG
oper ation.
Activating the DELM Enable field
automatically sets ATC Pulse field
to F1 because the S- 1403DL sends
ATCRBS inter r ogations pr ior to the
fir st Mode S to accur ately set up the
ATC- 1400A PPMG oper ation.
NOTE: The S- 1403DL DSP does
not measur e power on the
CloseO ut r eply.
The Mode S Test System per for ms
power and fr equency measur ements
on the selected Mode S r eply pulse
( ModeS pulse field) in the message
( 1 to 16) selected in the DELM
Pulse field.
1- 1- 2
Page 30
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
C75 Misc
C75
SETUP - MISC
AntAEnable:ON
PrePulseOut:253µS
AntAModSrc:INT/EXT
AntBModSrc:INT
Example C75 Setup ( Misc) Scr een
Figur e 24
FIELD
C75
DESCRIPTIO N
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Contr ol Menu scr eens) indicates
C75 Setup Scr een.
AntAEnable
Contr ol field activates ( O N) or
disables (O F F) oper ation thr ough
the ATC- 1400A RF I/O ( Antenna A)
Connector . T he Mode S Test
System tr ansmits inter r ogations and
r eceives squitter s or r eplies thr ough
the active AT C- 1400A RF I/O
Connector . When the AT C- 1400A
RF I/O Connector is disabled, the
Mode S T est System shuts off all
Antenna A inter r ogations and
disr egar ds any Antenna A squitter s.
Pr ePulseO ut
Contr ol field deactivates ( O F F) or
activates a pr epulse out the S1403DL PREPULSE O UT Connector
and sets a time delay ( 0 to 260 µs)
between leading edges of the
pr epulse and the Antenna A P 1
inter r ogation pulse.
AntAModSr c
Contr ol field selects the modulation
sour ce for Antenna A ( ATC- 1400A
RF I/O Connector ) inter r ogations:
inter nal (INT) , exter nal (EXT) or
both ( INT /EXT ).
AntBModSr c
Contr ol field selects the modulation
sour ce for Antenna B ( S- 1403DL
ANT B Connector ) inter r ogations:
inter nal (INT) , exter nal (EXT) or
both ( INT /EXT ).
1- 1- 2
Page 31
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
C76 SMenu
C76
SETUP - SMENU
SmenuRadix:OCTAL
SetAllSmenu:DEFAULT
GlobalAddr:Xpdr=17725762,AP XOR=00000000
GlobalAddr:User=10273645,AP XOR=00000001
Example C76 Setup ( SMenu) Scr een
Figur e 25
FIELD
C76
DESCRIPTION
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Contr ol Menu scr eens) indicates
C76 Setup Scr een.
SmenuRadix
Contr ol field selects the numer ical
for mat, hexadecimal (HEX) or
OCTAL, of all the data fields in the
sequence menus except for the
decimal UF , DF and AC fields.
SetAllSmenu
Contr ol field tur ns O F F all sequence
menus, activates factor y DEFAULT
sequence menus in 1- 1- 2, Table 5
( tur ning off all other s) or sets all
fields to ZERO . The SetAllSmenu
field also sets the ADDR field in all
sequence menus to USER (User=
addr ess) or XPDR ( tr ansponder
addr ess) . Changes only take affect
after pr essing the ENTER Key with
the cur sor in the SetAllSmenu field
( displays NoAction until changed) .
SMENU
DEFAULT
S001
Decoded UF00/DF00
S002
Decoded UF04/DF04
S003
Decoded UF05/DF05
S004
Decoded UF11/DF11
S005
Decoded UF16/DF16
S006
Decoded UF20/DF20
S007
Decoded UF21/DF21
S008
Decoded UF00/DF00
Default Sequence Menu
Table 5
Selecting DEFAULT or ZERO sets
all fields except for ADDR= to zero,
activates scope tr igger and sets
ADDR= to numeric (not global).
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
G lobalAddr :
O ne infor mation and thr ee contr ol
fields indicate four of five addr ess
choices in sequence menus.
The Xpdr = infor mation field displays
the tr ansponder r eply addr ess ( fr om
DF11 squitter s, DF17 squitter s,
Mode S All Call r eplies and Mode S
inter r ogation r eplies) in the for mat
indicated by the SmenuRadix field.
The top AP XO R= contr ol field sets
the XO R mask ( SmenuRadix for mat)
per for med on the AP field when the
selected sequence menu addr ess is
XPDR-X. The converted transponder
addr ess ( r eal AP field) XO Red with
top AP XO R= field setting for ms the
final AP field in the sequence menu
inter r ogation. The AP XO R= field
allows tr ansmission of bad AP fields
in any sequence menu. Refer to
2.4.2 in 1- 1- 2.
The User = contr ol field specifies an
alternative global inter r ogation
addr ess ( in SmenuRadix for mat) .
The addr ess, available in all
sequence menus, allows easy
inter r ogation addr ess changes.
The bottom AP XO R= contr ol field
sets the XO R mask ( SmenuRadix
for mat) per for med on the AP field
when USER- X is selected as the
sequence menu addr ess. The
conver ted User = addr ess XO Red
with bottom AP XO R= field setting
for ms the final AP field in the
sequence menu inter r ogation. The
AP XO R= field allows tr ansmission
of bad AP fields in any sequence
menu. Refer to 2.4.2 in 1- 1- 2.
1- 1- 2
Page 32
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
C79 ATC1400A Con t rols
C79
SETUP - ATC1400A CONTROLS
ATCRBS:C
P123Wd: 1.05µS
RF I/O:NORM Mode:DI
P2Dj: CAL
Scope :To
Spc: 333.3µS P3Dj:+1.95µS
Example C79 Setup ( ATC1400A Contr ols) Scr een
Figur e 26
The C79 Setup ( AT C1400A Contr ols)
Scr een displays AT C- 1400A fr ont panel
contr ol status.
When the AT C- 1400A is
disconnected fr om the S- 1403DL, the C79
Setup Scr een allows the S- 1403DL to
simulate AT C- 1400A fr ont panel contr ols.
T he C79 Setup Scr een par ameter s ar e only
adjustable when oper ating the S- 1403DL in
the Stand- Alone mode ( set in the C84
System Scr een) with the ATC- 1400A
disconnected fr om the S- 1403DL.
FIELD
C79
DESCRIPTIO N
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Contr ol Menu scr eens) indicates
C79 Setup Scr een.
ATCRBS
Control field, simulating ATC-1400A
XPDR MODE Control, selects mode
for ATCRBS (1, 2, T, A, B, C or D).
RF I/O Contr ol field, simulating ATC- 1400A
CW/NO RM/O FF Switch, sets the RF
output thr ough the S- 1403DL ANT B
Connector : O F F disables output.
NORM sends inter r ogations ( full
modulated RF) . CW transmits a
continuous wave ( unmodulated RF) .
Scope Contr ol field, simulating ATC- 1400A
T O /TAC/T D Switch, sets the sync
pulse position thr ough S- 1403DL
SCO PE T RIG O UT Connector : T O
sets the sync pulse for viewing
inter r ogation pulses. T d sets sync
pulse for viewing r eplies or second
inter r ogations ( DI function) .
Mode
Contr ol field sets the simulated
ATC- 1400A DBL INT ERR/INTRF
PULSE T humbwheels mode ( Interf
[not available in Stand- Alone mode],
DI or O F F).
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Spc or Loc
Field, simulating par t of ATC- 1400A
DBL INTERR/INTRF PULSE
Thumbwheels, sets DI function
spacing ( Spc) or shows inter fer ence
pulse location ( Loc) , accor ding to
Mode field setting. Spc contr ol field
sets DI spacing fr om 0 ( 40 for
double SEQ ) to 399.9 µs between
P 1 leading edge in fir st inter r ogation
to P 1 leading edge in second
inter r ogation. Loc field displays
inter fer ence pulse position fr om 17.5 to +399.9 in µs fr om leading
edge of the inter r ogation P 1 pulse.
P2Dv
Contr ol field, simulating the AT C1400A XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL Switch
and XPDR P 2 /P 3 DEV Thumbwheels
( only for P 2 ), sets P 2 pulse position
to CAL ( nominal) or deviates
position ( in µs) fr om nominal.
Deviation r anges fr om - 1.95 to
+1.95 µs.
P123Wd
Contr ol field, simulating ATC- 1400A
XPDR PULSE WIDTH Thumbwheels,
sets the width ( in µs) of selected
P 1 , P 2 and P 3 pulses. Width r anges
fr om 0 to 1.95 µs and CAL
( nominal) .
P3Dv
Contr ol field, simulating the ATC1400A XPDR DEV P 3 /CAL Switch
and XPDR P 2 /P 3 DEV Thumbwheels
( only for P 3 ), sets P 3 pulse position
to CAL ( nominal) or deviates
position ( in µs) fr om nominal.
Deviation r anges fr om - 1.95 to
+1.95 µs.
1- 1- 2
Page 33
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
C80 SYSTEM MENU
C80
SYSTEM MENU
1)RS232 CTRL 4)IFR BUS
2)RS232 INTF 5)KEYBOARD
3)GPIB
6)CLOCK
7)
8)SELF-TEST
9)VERSION/OPT
Main System Menu
Figur e 27
Pr essing a number key ( 1- 9) fr om the Main
System Menu enter s the applicable System
Menu subscr een.
T he System Menu
subscr eens set system par ameter s.
C81 RS232 Cont rol
C81
SYSTEM - RS232 CONTROL
RCI:ENABLE
Screen Dump:ENABLE
RCI Echo:YES
Screen Border:7BIT
Screen EOL:CR/LF
Example C81 System ( RS232 Contr ol) Scr een
Figur e 28
T he C81 System ( RS232 Contr ol) Scr een
sets the S- 1403DL for ser ial r emote
oper ation thr ough the RS- 232 Connector
( J12) .
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
C81
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Contr ol Menu scr eens) indicates
C81 System Scr een.
RCI
Contr ol field allows r emote contr ol
( ENABLE) or ignor es input
( DISABLE).
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Scr een Bor der
Contr ol field selects the bor der style
for a scr een dump: 8BIT (IBM
char acter s) , 7BIT or NONE.
Scr een EO L
Contr ol field selects the end of line
char acter s for a scr een dump:
( CR/LF, LF, CR or NUL ).
RCI Echo
Contr ol field enables ( YES) remote
commands to echo back to the
contr oller or disables (NO ) remote
echo.
Scr een Dump
Contr ol field allows ( ENABLE) or
pr ohibits (DISABLE) the use of the
PRTSCR Key to per for m a scr een
dump out the RS- 232 Connector .
1- 1- 2
Page 34
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
C82 RS232 Int erf ace
C82
SYSTEM - RS232
Baud:38400
Data:8
Stop:1
Parity:NONE
INTERFACE
Hndshk:XON/XOFF
HndshkOn: 90%
HndshkOff:10%
Example C82 System ( RS232 Inter face) Scr een
Figur e 29
T he C82 System ( RS232 Inter face) Scr een
sets the inter face par ameter s for S- 1403DL
ser ial r emote oper ation thr ough the RS- 232
Connector ( J12) .
FIELD
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Par ity Contr ol field sets the par ity check
mode: NONE, ODD or EVEN.
Hndshk
DESCRIPTIO N
C82
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Contr ol Menu scr eens) indicates
C82 System Scr een.
Baud
Contr ol field selects the baud r ate
( 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 or 57600)
in bits per second.
Data
Contr ol field sets the number of
data bits per wor d (7 or 8).
Stop
Contr ol field sets the number of
stop bits per wor d (1 or 2).
Contr ol field sets the handshake
mode: NONE, XO N/XO FF
( softwar e) , CTS ( one- way har dwar e)
or CTS/RTS ( two- way har dwar e) .
HndshkO n:
Selects the handshake O N thr eshold
per centage ( 10% to 90%) , indicating
available buffer r oom to activate
handshake.
HndshkO ff:
Selects the handshake O F F
thr eshold per centage ( 10% to 90%) ,
indicating available buffer r oom to
deactivate handshake.
C83 G PIB
C83
RCI:ENABLE
Address:10
SYSTEM - GPIB
Example C83 System ( G PIB) Scr een
Figur e 30
The C83 System ( G PIB) Scr een sets the
S- 1403DL for par allel r emote oper ation
through the S-1403DL GPIB Connector
(J21).
FIELD
FIELD
Addr ess
Contr ol field sets the G PIB addr ess
(0 to 31).
C83
DESCRIPTIO N
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Contr ol Menu scr eens) indicates
C83 System Scr een.
RCI
DESCRIPTION
Contr ol field allows r emote contr ol
( ENABLE) or ignor es input
( DISABLE).
1- 1- 2
Page 35
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
C84 IFR BUS
C84
SYSTEM - IFR BUS
1400 Control: MASTER
Must power down
1403 Bus Address: 3
before settings
take effect.
Example C84 System ( IFR BUS) Scr een
Figur e 31
FIELD
C84
DESCRIPTION
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Contr ol Menu scr eens) indicates
C84 System Scr een.
1400 Contr ol
Contr ol field sets the S- 1403DL
contr ol over the ATC- 1400A:
MASTER places the S- 1403DL in
contr ol over the ATC- 1400A
har dwar e. T he Remote Command
Interpreter (RCI) is not affected.
SLAVE allows the S- 1403DL to
listen but not contr ol the ATC1400A. STAND-ALONE ignor es
input fr om the ATC- 1400A.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
1403 Bus Addr ess
Contr ol field sets IFR Bus addr ess
for S- 1403DL r emote commands ( 2
to 7) or pr events r emote oper ation
thr ough the IFR Bus ( O F F).
NOTE: New C84 System Scr een settings
only take affect after recycling
power . Pr essing the S- 1403DL
PO WER Switch O ff (O ) and
pr essing the S- 1403DL PO WER
Switch back O n ( I) r ecycles power .
C85 Keyboard
C85
SYSTEM - KEYBOARD
Repeat Delay:0.8sec
Repeat Rate:0.2sec
Example C85 System ( Keyboar d) Scr een
Figur e 32
FIELD
C86
DESCRIPTION
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Contr ol Menu scr eens) indicates
C86 System Scr een.
Repeat Delay
Contr ol field sets the time r equir ed,
in 0.1 second incr ements, to hold
down a key befor e the Keyboar d
oper ation r epeats. T he default is
0.8 seconds.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Repeat Rate
Contr ol field sets the time per iod, in
0.1 second incr ements, for each
r epeating Keyboar d oper ation ( after
initial delay) when holding down a
key. The default is 0.2 seconds.
1- 1- 2
Page 36
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
C86 Clock
C86
SYSTEM - CLOCK
Date: 16apr99
Time: 15:24:59
SincePowerUp:
TotalRunTime:
2.1hrs
12.3hrs
Example C86 System ( Clock) Scr een
Figur e 33
FIELD
DESCRIPTIO N
C86
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Contr ol Menu scr eens) indicates
C86 System Scr een.
Date
Contr ol field sets the cur r ent date:
day ( 1 to 31) , month ( fir st thr ee
letter abbr eviation) and year ( last
two digits) .
Time
Contr ol field sets the cur r ent time:
hour ( 0 to 24) , minute ( 0 to 60) and
second ( 0 to 60) .
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
SincePower Up
Infor mation field r epor ts the cur r ent
number of hour s the S- 1403DL has
oper ated since power up.
TotalRunTime
Infor mation field r epor ts the total
number of hour s the S- 1403DL has
oper ated since leaving the factor y.
C88 Self Test
Not installed at this time.
C89 Version
C89
SYSTEM - VERSION
S/N=1075
MP:04.03,02feb99 Options:MLD,MODB
PP:04.03,02feb99 SRAM:1280K FLASH:2048K
FP:03.02,18may98 LCA:02.21,03.03,03.02
Example C89 System ( Ver sion) Scr een
Figur e 34
FIELD
DESCRIPTIO N
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
C89
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Contr ol Menu scr eens) indicates
C89 System Scr een.
O ptions
Infor mation field r epor ts installed
har dwar e and softwar e options.
MP
Infor mation field r epor ts the Main
Pr ocessor fir mwar e ver sion number
and build date.
SRAM Infor mation field r epor ts the amount
of static RAM ( in bytes) on the
Pulse PC Boar d Assembly.
PP
Infor mation field r epor ts the Pulse
Pr ocessor fir mwar e ver sion number
and build date.
LCA
FP
Infor mation field r epor ts the Fr ont
Panel Pr ocessor fir mwar e ver sion
number and build date.
FLASH
Infor mation field r epor ts the
fir mwar e ver sion number s for thr ee
Logic Cell Ar r ay chips.
Infor mation field r epor ts the amount
of flash RO M ( in bytes) on the Pulse
PC Boar d Assembly.
1- 1- 2
Page 37
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
C90 CALIBRATION MENU
Refer to Installation Calibr ation Pr ocedur e
( for qualified ser vice per sonnel only) for
infor mation on the Calibr ation Contr ol Menu
scr eens.
2.4.2
Sequence Menus ( SMENU)
Sequence
menus
ar e
used
when
tr ansmitting
Mode
S
inter r ogations.
Sequence menus pr ogr am var ious Mode S
inter r ogations and look at the content of the
Mode S r eplies. T he Mode S T est System
tr ansmits each activated sequence menu as
one Mode S inter r ogation. Inter r ogations
ar e
tr ansmitted
in
numer ical
or der
accor ding
to
sequence
number
and
r epeated for all active sequence menus
dur ing any function involving Mode S
inter r ogations.
Sequence menus ar e split in half. The top
two lines pr ogr am the Mode S inter r ogation.
The bottom two lines display the UUT r eply
infor mation.
The r adix of the UF, DF and AC fields ar e
always decimal ( base 10) . The C76 SMenu
Setup Scr een sets the r adix for all other
data fields ( inter r ogations and r eplies) :
octal ( base 8) or hex ( base 16) .
Undesignated data field bits ar e set to
zer o.
S999:S;UF13,000000000,
+
RPLY:N;DF04,000000000,
ADDR=17725762
ADDR=17725762
S777:S;UF13,0000000,
+
RPLY:N;DF04,0000000,
ADDR=3FABF2
ADDR=3FABF2
S F or mat Sequence Menu Examples in O ctal and Hex Radix
Figur e 35
S111:L;UF17,0000000000000000000000000000
+
ADDR=17725762
RPLY:N;DF19,0000000000000000000000000000
ADDR=17725762
S000:L;UF17,000000000000000000000,
+
ADDR=3FABF2
RPLY:N;DF19,000000000000000000000,
ADDR=3FABF2
L F or mat Sequence Menu Examples in O ctal and Hex Radix
Figur e 36
1- 1- 2
Page 38
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
S005:D;UF16,RL=0,AQ=0,
+ MU=0000000000000000000, ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;DF16,VS=0,SL=0,RI=00,AC=0000,
MV=0000000000000000000, ADDR=17725762
S019:D;UF24,RC=0,NC=0,
+ MC=00000000000000000000,
RPLY:D;DF24,KE=0,ND=0
MD=00000000000000000000,
ADDR=3FABF2
ADDR=3FABF2
D F or mat Sequence Menu Examples in O ctal and Hex Radix
Figur e 37
FIELD
S###
DESCRIPTIO N
Editable menu field selects cur r ent
Sequence Menu screen (000 to 999).
Pr essing the O N/CAL Key in this
field activates or deactivates ( O F F)
the selected sequence menu.
The for mat field sets inter r ogation
format: D ( decoded subfields) , N
( undecoded fields with number of
bits depending on uplink for mat) , S
(short 56-bit transmission), L ( long
112- bit tr ansmission) or Reply Only
( no inter r ogation, for displaying the
contents of a DELM segment) .
NOTE: Pr essing the S- 1403DL +/Key with the cur sor in the
S### field displays the next
active sequence menu.
UF##
Editable field selects the Mode S
inter r ogation uplink for mat for the
selected sequence menu.
The inter r ogation data fields depend
on the inter r ogation and uplink
formats selected. Refer to
Appendix D for the Mode S uplink
field definitions.
Shor t inter r ogations have a 27- bit
message field ( added to the 5- bit
uplink for mat field and the 24- bit
addr ess par ity field pr ovides the
total 56- bit tr ansmission) .
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Long inter r ogations have an 83- bit
message field ( added to the 5- bit
uplink for mat field and the 24- bit
addr ess par ity field pr ovides the
total 112- bit tr ansmission) .
The scope tr igger field activates (+)
or deactivates ( - ) the scope tr igger
for the selected sequence menu to
pr ovide oscilloscope display control.
The Mode S Enable field must be ON
in C72 Scope Tr igger Setup Scr een.
Decoded inter r ogations display the
subfields accor ding to the uplink
for mat. Refer to Appendix B for the
Decoded Sequence Menu For mats.
ADDR Data field sets the UUT transponder
addr ess sent in the Mode S
inter r ogation addr ess par ity field.
Pr essing the O N/CAL Key in this
field cycles to the next addr ess or
addr ess/par ity combination
accor ding to 1- 1- 2, Table 6. Refer
to 1- 1- 2, Figur e 38 for actual AP
field for mation accor ding to addr ess
selected. The C76 SMenu Setup
Scr een pr ovides the G lobal Addr ess
( Xpdr = or User =) and G lobal AP
XO R settings used in the pr ocess.
The C76 SMenu Setup Scr een
( SetAllSmenu) pr ovides the ability
to set the ADDR field to USER or
XPDR for all active sequence menus
simultaneously.
1- 1- 2
Page 39
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
ADDRESS
Numeric
WHERE TO SET
Transponder
address/default
USER
C76 SMenu Setup Screen
Global Addr:User= field
setting
USER-X
DESCRIPTION
DF##
UUT tr ansponder infor mation field
indicates the downlink for mat
r eceived in r eply to the selected
sequence menu.
SMENU ADDR field or
remote
XPDR
XPDR-X
FIELD
The r eply data fields depend on the
r eply for mat and the UUT r eply
r eceived. Refer to Appendix D for
the Mode S downlink field
definitions.
Transponder address
XORed with C76 SMenu
Setup Screen Global
Addr:Xpdr=, AP XOR=
field setting
Shor t inter r ogations have a 27- bit
message field ( added to the 5- bit
uplink for mat field and the 24- bit
addr ess par ity field pr ovides the
total 56- bit tr ansmission) .
C76 SMenu Setup Screen
Global Addr:User= field
XORed with C76 SMenu
Setup Screen Global
Addr:User=, AP XOR=
field setting
Long inter r ogations have an 83- bit
message field ( added to the 5- bit
uplink for mat field and the 24- bit
addr ess par ity field pr ovides the
total 112- bit tr ansmission) .
SMENU Addr ess Cycle
Table 6
RPLY
Decoded inter r ogations display the
subfields accor ding to the uplink
for mat. Refer to Appendix B for the
Decoded Sequence Menu For mats.
Signifies the star t of the sequence
menu UUT r eply lines.
The for mat field sets r eply format:
N (not decoded for unspecified short
or long depending on the UUT reply
received) or D ( decoded subfields) .
ADDR UUT information field provides the
UUT tr ansponder addr ess, obtained
by str ipping the par ity infor mation
fr om the AP field r eceived in the
UUT reply.
XPDR or USER Selected
GLOBAL
ADDRESS
CONVERT
to AP
XPDR-X or USER-X Selected
FINAL
AP FIELD
XOR
OPERATION
SMENU
DATA
GLOBAL
AP XOR
Sequence Menu Inter r ogation AP Field For mation
Figur e 38
1- 1- 2
Page 40
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.4.3
Test Men u s ( T MENU)
T00
1)
2)MISC MENU
3)ELM MENU
MAIN TMENU
4)
7)
5)
8)
6)
9)
Main Test Menu
Figur e 39
Pr essing 2ND, T MENU and a number key
in sequence enter s the applicable Test
Menu subscr een or last accessed scr een of
a par ticular T est Menu subscr een gr oup.
Pr essing the S- 1403DL BURST Key in a
test scr een ( any Test Menu subscr een
except menus and setups) initiates that
par ticular test.
A r unning test stops by
exiting the test scr een, pr essing the
CL/ESC Key or by completing the test.
All test scr eens have status fields on the
r ight side of the top line displaying NOT
RUN, RUNNING , PASS or FAIL .
Test
scr eens with er r or fields also indicate a
numer ic and text er r or .
T20 MISC MENU
T20
1)
2)
3)MTL
MISC MENU
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
Example Miscellaneous Test Menu
Figur e 40
Pr essing a number key ( 1- 7) fr om the
Miscellaneous
T est
Menu
enter s
the
applicable
Miscellaneous
Test
Menu
subscr een.
Miscellaneous T est Menu
subscr eens pr ovide setup or r un specific
tests. The specific tests pr ovide detailed
tr ansponder infor mation.
1- 1- 2
Page 41
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
T 23 Misc MTL
T23
MISC - MTL
PASS
Reply%:100
Time:10sec
MTL:-65.3dBm
Antenna:A
Error: 2=Pass
Press BURST to start test
Example T 23 Miscellaneous MTL Scr een
Figur e 41
T he T23 Miscellaneous ( MT L) T est Menu
Scr een tests deter mines the minimum
thr eshhold level ( MTL) of the tr ansponder
UUT.
The Mode S Test System sends
AT CRBS inter r ogations of each type, an All
Call Long and Mode S inter r ogations
r equesting capability r epor ts.
FIELD
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Time
Editable menu field ( to enter other
Test Menu scr eens) indicates
Miscellaneous T est Scr een 23.
Infor mation field r epor ts length of
time test r an or has been r unning.
Er r or
Infor mation field indicates numer ic
and text er r or s. Refer to 1- 2- 2,
Table 8.
Infor mation field indicates NOT
RUN, RUNNING , PASS or FAIL .
MTL
Infor mation field r epor ts the lowest
tr ansmitted power level in dBm, the
UUT r eceived and r esponded to, of
the Mode S Test System.
T 23
Antenna
Contr ol field selects test antenna, A
thr ough ATC- 1400A RF I/O
Connector or B ( only if MLD option
is installed) thr ough S- 1403DL ANT
B Connector .
Status
Reply%
Infor mation field r epor ts total r eply
per centage.
DESCRIPTION
T30 EL M MENU
T30
ELM MENU
1)SETUP
4)DELM
7)
2)UELM
5)DELM-MULTI 8)
3)UELM-MULTI 6)
9)
Example ELM Test Menu
Figur e 42
Pr essing a number key ( 1- 5) fr om the ELM
T est Menu enter s the applicable ELM Test
Menu
subscr een.
ELM
T est
Menu
subscr eens set up and r un extended length
message tests ( Comm- C inter r ogations and
Comm-D replies) .
The ELM Test Menu subscr eens exer cise
the uplink and downlink ELM pr otocol
capabilities of a tr ansponder .
The S1403DL uses the Tr igSour ce in the C71
Setup
Scr een
to
initiate
the
fir st
inter r ogation for the star t of each test loop.
1- 1- 2
Page 42
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
T31 ELM Set u p
T31
ResrvDelay:
CloseDelay:
UelmSpacing:
ELM - SETUP
100µS
100µS
100µS
Example T31 ELM Setup Scr een
Figur e 43
FIELD
T31
DESCRIPTIO N
Editable menu field ( to enter other
T est Menu scr eens) indicates T31
ELM Scr een.
Resr vDelay
Contr ol field deter mines the
Reser vation Delay by setting the
spacing between the end of the
r eser vation r eply and the beginning
of the fir st ELM inter r ogation.
Spacing r anges fr om 100 to
63000 µs with 100 µs as default.
CloseDelay
Contr ol field deter mines the
Closeout Delay by setting the
spacing between the end of the last
ELM r eply and the beginning of the
fir st CloseO ut inter r ogation. DELM
tests always assume spacing
r elative to the end of the 16th ELM
r eply ( if it exists or not) . Spacing
r anges fr om 100 to 63000 µs with
100 µs as default.
UelmSpacing
Contr ol field sets the spacing
between the star t of the UELMs.
Spacing r anges fr om 50 to 63000 µs
with 100 µs as default.
ELM Delay and Spacing Paramet ers
Reser vation Delay ( UELM and DELM)
( leading edge of P 1 in Reser vation
inter r ogation to leading edge of P 1 in
fir st ELM Segment) :
Range:
( 100 to 63000 µs) + 252.75 µs
Step:
1 µs
Accur acy: ± 100 ns, ± 0.005%
Closeout Delay ( UELM) ( leading edge
of P 1 in last ELM Segment to leading
edge of P 1 in Closeout inter r ogation) :
Range:
( 100 to 63000 µs) + 252.75 µs
Step:
1 µs
Accur acy: ± 100 ns, ± 0.005%
Closeout Delay ( DELM) ( leading edge
of P 1 in ELM Author ization to leading
edge of P 1 in Closeout inter r ogation) :
Range:
( 100 to 63000 µs) + 2292.75 µs
Step:
1 µs
Accur acy: ± 100 ns, ± 0.005%
UELM Spacing ( leading edge of P 1 in
any ELM Segment to leading edge of
P 1 in next ELM Segment) :
Range:
50 to 63000 µs
Step:
1 µs
Accur acy: ± 100 ns, ± 0.005%
1- 1- 2
Page 43
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
T 32 UELM
T32
ELM - UP
NOT RUN
ELM
XMT
ERROR
S901-904
4
Press BURST to start test
Example T32 UELM Test Scr een
Figur e 44
T he UELM T est Scr een exer cises the UELM
datalink featur e ( ability to r eceive Comm- C
message
segments
sent
in
UF24
inter r ogations)
of
the
tr ansponder in
singlesite oper ation.
FIELD
T 32
DESCRIPTION
Editable menu field ( to enter other
T est Menu scr eens) indicates T32
ELM Scr een.
Status
Infor mation field indicates NOT
RUN, RUNNING , PASS or FAIL .
ELM
Contr ol field selects the star ting
sequence menu bin for the ELM
data fr om S000 to S984. The
second number indicates the ending
sequence menu bin accor ding to the
XMT field setting. The last
sequence menu bin contains the
Acknowledgment Reply.
XMT
Contr ol field sets the number of
ELMs to be tr ansmitted fr om 2 to
16, automatically setting the ending
sequence menu bin in the ELM field.
ERROR
Infor mation field indicates numer ic
and text er r or s. Refer to 1- 2- 2,
Table 9.
1- 1- 2
Page 44
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
T33 UELM Multisite
T33
RESV
S900
ELM - UP - MULTI
FAIL
ELM
XMT CLOS ERROR
S901-916 16 S917 10=ResvNoRply
Press BURST to start test
Example T33 UELM- Multi Test Scr een
Figur e 45
T he UELM Multisite Test Scr een exer cises
the UELM datalink featur e ( ability to
r eceive Comm- C message segments sent in
UF24 inter r ogations) of the tr ansponder in
multisite oper ation.
FIELD
T33
DESCRIPTIO N
Editable menu field ( to enter other
T est Menu scr eens) indicates T33
ELM Scr een.
Status
Infor mation field indicates NOT
RUN, RUNNING , PASS or FAIL .
RESV Contr ol field selects the sequence
menu bin for the Reser vation/
Reser vation Reply fr om S000 to
S999.
ELM
Contr ol field selects the star ting
sequence menu bin for the ELM
data fr om S000 to S984. The
second number indicates the ending
sequence menu bin accor ding to the
XMT field setting. The last
sequence menu bin contains the
Acknowledgment Reply.
XMT
Contr ol field sets the number of
ELMs to be tr ansmitted fr om 2 to
16, automatically setting the ending
sequence menu bin in the ELM field.
CLO S Contr ol field selects the sequence
menu bin for the Closeout/Closeout
Reply fr om S000 to S999.
ERROR
Infor mation field indicates numer ic
and text er r or s. Refer to 1- 2- 2,
Table 9.
1- 1- 2
Page 45
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
T 34 DELM
T34
ELM - DOWN
FAIL
ELM
EXP/RCV ERROR
S975-990
16 00 20=ElmNoRply
Press BURST to start test
Example T34 DELM Test Scr een
Figur e 46
T he DELM T est Scr een exer cises the DELM
datalink featur e ( ability to tr ansmit Comm- D
message segments sent in DF 24 r eplies) of
the tr ansponder in singlesite oper ation.
FIELD
T 34
DESCRIPTION
Editable menu field ( to enter other
T est Menu scr eens) indicates T34
ELM Scr een.
Status
Infor mation field indicates NOT
RUN, RUNNING , PASS or FAIL .
ELM
Contr ol field selects the star ting
sequence menu bin for the ELM
r eply data fr om S000 to S984. The
second ( r ight) number indicates the
ending sequence menu bin
accor ding to the fir st ( left) number
set plus 15. The S- 1403DL always
r eser ves 16 sequence menu bins for
the DELM r eplies. T he fir st ELM
sequence menu bin selected ( fir st
number ) contains the UF 24
inter r ogation.
EXP/RCV
Infor mation fields indicate the ELM
r eception number s. T he fir st
number indicates the number of
expected ELMs ( always set to the
maximum 16 with singlesite) . The
second number indicates the
number of ELMs actually r eceived.
ERROR
Infor mation field indicates numer ic
and text er r or s. Refer to 1- 2- 2,
Table 10.
1- 1- 2
Page 46
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
T35 DELM Multisite
T35
ELM - DOWN - MULTI
FAIL
RESV
ELM
CLOS EXP/RCV ERROR
S950 S951-966 S967 16 14 26=ElmBadND
Press ESC to stop test
Example T35 DELM- Multi Test Scr een
Figur e 47
The DELM- Multisite Test Scr een exer cises
the DELM datalink featur e ( ability to
tr ansmit Comm- D message segments sent
in DF 24 r eplies) of the tr ansponder in
multisite oper ation.
FIELD
T35
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
ERROR
Infor mation field indicates numer ic
and text er r or s. Refer to 1- 2- 2,
Table 10.
DESCRIPTIO N
Editable menu field ( to enter other
T est Menu scr eens) indicates T35
ELM Scr een.
Status
Infor mation field indicates NOT
RUN, RUNNING , PASS or FAIL .
RESV Contr ol field selects the sequence
menu bin for the Reser vation/
Reser vation Reply fr om S000 to
S999.
ELM
Contr ol field selects the star ting
sequence menu bin for the ELM
r eply data fr om S000 to S984. The
second ( r ight) number indicates the
ending sequence menu bin
accor ding to the fir st ( left) number
set plus 15. The S- 1403DL always
r eser ves 16 sequence menu bins for
the DELM r eplies. T he fir st ELM
sequence menu bin selected ( fir st
number ) contains the UF 24
inter r ogation.
CLO S Contr ol field selects the sequence
menu bin for the Closeout/Closeout
Reply fr om S000 to S999.
EXP/RCV
Infor mation fields indicate the ELM
r eception number s. T he fir st
number indicates the number of
expected ELMs. T he second
number indicates the number of
ELMs actually r eceived.
1- 1- 2
Page 47
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
1
3
40
PRF SQTR Hz
VEL
ATC1400A
DISPLAY SELECT
DME DIST
NMi
KTS
XPDR
RANGE
NMi
UNIT UNDER TEST
DME-PRF Hz
XPDR-% REPLY
XMTR FREQ
XMTR PWR
MHz
WATTS
CODE
FREQ
MHz
DBL INTERR / INTRF PULSE
0 0 0 0
70
30
20
F
RANGE/VEL/ACCEL
0 0 0 0
OFF
0 0 0
XPDR
RF LEVEL
0 0 0 0 0
OFF
80
90
XXX.XX
100
PRF/SQTR
XPDR MODE
C
T
D
2
AC 1 CODE
1
AC 2
2
XPDR PULSE WIDTH
2
0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0 0
P2
ON
CODE
-
OFF
V
TONE
P3
V
IDENT
OFF
DME P DEV
3
XXX0.0
XXX.00
SLS/ECHO
0 0 0
L
O
A
D
0
+
RNG
VEL
ACCEL
FEET
TACAN
ON
XPDR P /P DEV
+
-
P2
+
V
B
A
-
V
0
KTS
NMi
+
V
10
37
FREQ / FUNCTION SELECT
-dBm
60
V
38
50
V
DME REPLY
EFFICIENCY
40
VAR
CAL
ON
IN
OFF
FT/S/S
C
L
E
A
R
6
CW
NORM
-1 NMi
7
OFF
CAL
OFF
POWER
F2 / P2
I
F1 / P1
TO
INTRF
PULSE WIDTH
DISCRIMINATOR
CAL
TAC
RF I/O
SUPPRESSOR
MAN
STEP
MAN
FREQ
STEP
RATE
CAL O/
CAL MARKS
SYNC
AUTO
1.45 S
1.0 S
TD
CAL
ON
OFF
OUT
VAR
NORM
GEN
XMTR
OFF
35
34
9
33
32
31
30
28
29
22
26
27
25
71
DECODER
SELFWIDE EQUALIZER INTERR
20
23
18
19
SERIAL
LOW
CLOCK
FREQ
J7
J5
TEST
INTERROGATOR
AUXILIARY
J23
J8
J6
INDICATOR
12
17 15
72
INST DIM
HI
16
73
02407008
75
76
IFR BUS
J1
NARROW
OFF
OFF
R/NAV
GEN
XMTR
J9
J10
J11
J2
J3
J4
AC LINE FUSES
USE
61
E
F
F
F1
120 WATTS MAX
FUS
E
USE
FUS
66
J22
F2
3.0A @ 110/230 VAC
TYPE F
A5
A1
ON 1 1 1 1 1
OFF 0 0 0 0 0
CAUTION
100-120VAC
220-240VAC
57
60Hz
50Hz
FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION
AGAINST FIRE, REPLACE ONLY
WITH FUSE OF THE SPECIFIED
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT RATINGS.
54
SH1 AH1 T6 TE0
LE0 SR1 RL1
L4
PP0 DC1 DT1 C0
O1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
N
O
F
F
GPIB ADDRESS
53
IEEE 488 - 1978
02407035
AT C- 1400A Fr ont and Rear Panels
Figur e 48
1- 1- 2
Page 48
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ATC-1400A Numerical Location List:
1. XMTR PWR WATTS Display
3. RF LEVEL -dBm Display
6. RF LEVEL Control
7. CW/NORM/OFF Switch
9. RF I/O Connector (J15)
12. XMTR Connector (J16)
15. GEN Connector (J17)
1 6 . S U P P R E S S O R O U T P U T C o n n e c t o r ( J1 8 )
1 7 . S U P P R E S S O R O N / O F F S w i t ch
18. SLS/ECHO ON/OFF Switch
19. SUPPRESSOR VAR Adjustment
27. 1.0 µs/1.45 µs Switch
20. XPDR PULSE WIDTH VAR/CAL Switch
22. MAN/AUTO/MAN STEP Switch
23. CAL Ø Control
25. XPDR DEV P3/CAL Switch
ATC-1400A Alphabetical Location List:
1 . 0 µ s / 1 . 4 5 µ s S w i t ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A C I N P U T C o n n e ct o r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A U X I L I A R Y C o n n e ct o r ( J6 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C A L M A R K S C o n n e ct o r ( J1 9 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL Ø Control.....................................
C W / N O R M / O F F S w i t ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D A B S I N P U T C o n n e ct o r ( J1 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DBL INTERR/INTRF PULSE Thumbwheels
∆F Thumbwheels .................................
D I S C R I M I N A T O R C o n n e ct o r ( J2 1 ) . . . . . . . . .
DISPLAY SELECT Control ....................
DISPLAY SELECT Readout ...................
DME-PRF Hz/XPDR-%REPLY Display ....
EXTERNAL MEASUREMENT GATE
C o n n e ct o r ( J3 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F 2 / P 2 F 1 / P 1 S w i t ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26. CAL MARKS Connector (J19)
28. XPDR DEV P2/CAL Switch
FREQ/FUNCTION SELECT Thumbwheels
G E N C o n n e ct o r ( J1 7 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G P I B A D D R E S S / O P T I O N D i p S w i t ch e s . .
G P I B C o n n e ct o r ( J1 4 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I F R B U S C o n n e ct o r ( J5 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTRF PULSE WIDTH Control ...............
M A N / A U T O / M A N S T E P S w i t ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P O W E R S w i t ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P R F / S Q T R O N / O F F S w i t ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P R F / S Q T R T h u m b w h e e l s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R F I / O C o n n e ct o r ( J1 5 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R F L E V E L - d B m D i sp l a y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF LEVEL Control ...............................
R F L E V E L I N P U T C o n n e ct o r ( J4 ) . . . . . . . . . .
SELF-INTERR/OFF Switch ....................
SLS/ECHO ON/OFF Switch ...................
S L S / E C H O T h u m b w h e e l s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S U P P R E S S O R O N / O F F S w i t ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S U P P R E S S O R O U T P U T C o n n e ct o r ( J1 8 )
S U P P R E S S O R V A R A d j u st m e n t . . . . . . . . . . . .
S Y N C C o n n e ct o r ( J2 0 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T A C A N O N / O F F S w i t ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T O / T A C / T D S w i t ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X M T R C o n n e ct o r ( J1 1 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X M T R C o n n e ct o r ( J1 6 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X M T R F R E Q M H z D i sp l a y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XMTR PWR WATTS Display ..................
X P D R D E V P 2 / C A L S w i t ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
15
54
53
71
31
22
35
32
41
9
3
6
76
66
18
50
17
16
19
29
37
30
61
12
51
1
28
X P D R D E V P 3 / C A L S w i t ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XPDR MODE Control............................
XPDR P2/P3 DEV Thumbwheels ............
25
38
44
XPDR PULSE WIDTH Thumbwheels .......
X P D R P U L S E W I D T H V A R / C A L S w i t ch . . .
49
20
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
SYNC Connector (J20)
TO/TAC/TD Switch
INTRF PULSE WIDTH Control
PRF/SQTR ON/OFF Switch
DISCRIMINATOR Connector (J21)
F2/P2 F1/P1 Switch
35.
37.
38.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
POWER Switch
TACAN ON/OFF Switch
XPDR MODE Control
DISPLAY SELECT Control
PRF/SQTR Thumbwheels
DBL INTERR/INTRF PULSE Thumbwheels
DISPLAY SELECT Readout
XPDR P2/P3 DEV Thumbwheels
45.
46.
48.
49.
50.
51.
53.
54.
57.
61.
66.
71.
72.
73.
75.
FREQ/FUNCTION SELECT Thumbwheels
DME-PRF Hz/XPDR-%REPLY Display
∆F Thumbwheels
XPDR PULSE WIDTH Thumbwheels
SLS/ECHO Thumbwheels
XMTR FREQ MHz Display
GPIB Connector (J14)
GPIB ADDRESS/OPTION Dip Switches
AC INPUT Connector
XMTR Connector (J11)
SELF-INTERR/OFF Switch
I F R B U S C o n n e ct o r ( J5 )
A U X I L I A R Y C o n n e c t o r ( J6 )
DABS INPUT Connector (J1)
EXTERNAL MEASUREMENT GATE
Connector (J3)
76. RF LEVEL INPUT Connector (J4)
27
57
72
26
23
7
73
42
48
33
40
43
46
75
34
1- 1- 2
Page 49
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.5 ATC- 1400A FRO NT PANEL
1
UNIT UNDER TEST
FREQ
XMTR PWR
MHz
RANGE/VEL/ACCEL
WATTS
3
RF LEVEL
-dBm
0 0 0 0 0
XXX.XX
XXX0.0
6
XXX.00
L
O
A
D
RNG
VEL
KTS
NMi
IN
ACCEL
FT/S/S
C
L
E
A
R
CW
7
NORM
-1 NMi
OFF
RF I/O
OUT
GEN
NORM
XMTR
9
12
02407011
IT EM
DESCRIPT IO N
1. XMTR PWR WATTS Display
Continuously displays the peak pulse
power of the UUT r eply pulse selected
in the S- 1403DL- 1 C74 PPMG Setup
Scr een.
3. RF LEVEL - dBm Display
Displays the pr ogr ammed peak RF
power of the ATC- 1400A gener ator in
dB below 1 mW.
6. RF LEVEL Contr ol
Adjusts AT C- 1400A RF gener ator
level in 1 dB steps by slowly tur ning
the contr ol knob.
7. CW/NORM/OFF Switch
Contr ols the signal thr ough the AT C1400A RF I/O Connector ( Antenna A)
and S- 1403DL ANT B Connector
( Antenna B) .
CW supplies continuous wave signal
( RF signal with no modulation) at the
fr equency set with ATC- 1400A
FREQ /FUNCTIO N SELECT and ∆F
Thumbwheels. CW setting is used to
test the Mode S Test System.
ITEM
DESCRIPTIO N
NORM allows the Mode S Test System
to tr ansmit inter r ogations ( modulated
RF signal) . NO RM is the nor mal
setting for Mode S Test System
oper ation.
O F F disables output. When disabled,
the Mode S Test System shuts off all
inter r ogations and disr egar ds any
squitters.
9. RF I/O Connector ( J15)
CAUTION:
MAXIMUM INPUT TO
THE RF I/O
CONNECTOR MUST NOT
EXCEED 5 kW PEAK O R
10 W AVERAG E.
Tr ansmits inter r ogation signals to and
r eceives r eply signals fr om the UUT
pr imar y antenna ( Antenna A) .
12. XMTR Connector ( J16)
Pr ovides detected UUT r eply pulses
for viewing on an oscilloscope.
1- 1- 2
Page 50
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
18
20
P2
NMi
V
+
VAR
V
CAL
CAL
AUTO
FREQ
STEP
RATE
CAL O/
IN
OFF
SUPPRESSOR
MAN
STEP
MAN
ON
ON
OFF
OUT
VAR
GEN
OFF
23
ITEM
22
19
DESCRIPTIO N
15. G EN Connector ( J17)
Pr ovides detected inter r ogation and
inter fer ence pulses for viewing on an
oscilloscope.
16. SUPPRESSO R O UT PUT Connector
( J18)
Pr ovides mutual suppr ession pulses.
17. SUPPRESSO R O N/O FF Switch
Enables or disables mutual
suppr ession pulses.
NOTE: When the AT C- 1400A DBL
INTERR/INTRF PULSE
T humbwheels have DOUBLE
selected, an active
suppression pulse eliminates
the fir st inter r ogation of the
double inter r ogation. The
DBL INTERR/INTRF PULSE
Thumbwheels deter mine the
delay fr om the suppr ession
pulse to second inter r ogation.
18. SLS/ECHO O N/O F F Switch
Enables or disables Side- Lobe
Suppr ession ( SLS) pulses.
O N adds the P 2 ( ATCRBS) or P 5
( Mode S) SLS pulse to the
inter r ogation tr ansmission. The ATC1400A SLS/ECHO T humbwheels
contr ol only the amplitude of the SLS
pulse when activated.
17
ITEM
16
15
02407010
DESCRIPTIO N
O F F disables SLS and allows the
SLS/ECHO Thumbwheels to contr ol
other pulse amplitudes if selected.
19. SUPPRESSO R VAR Adjustment
Adjusts voltage level of mutual
suppr ession pulse fr om +3 to +27 V.
20. XPDR PULSE WIDTH VAR/CAL Switch
VAR selects a var iable inter r ogation
pulse width set by the ATC- 1400A
XPDR PULSE WIDTH Thumbwheels .
O nly the widths of P 1 , P 2 ( if selected)
and P 3 ( if applicable and selected)
ar e contr olled by this switch.
CAL selects an inter r ogation pulse
width of 0.8 µs.
22. MAN/AUTO /MAN STEP Switch
Set to MAN position for Mode S Test
System oper ation.
23. CAL Ø Contr ol
Adjusts the phase of calibr ation
( timing) pulses with r espect to
inter r ogation pulses. Rotating contr ol
cw delays calibr ation pulses and
enables the oper ator to align
calibr ation pulses with r eply pulses.
1- 1- 2
Page 51
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
32
28
25
27
OFF
-
V
ON
+
OFF
33
IT EM
-
CAL
F1 / P1
DISCRIMINATOR
V
CODE
TO
INTRF
PULSE WIDTH
31
TD
TAC
SYNC
29
DESCRIPT IO N
25. XPDR DEV P 3 /CAL Switch
- ' advances position of P 3 pulse fr om
nominal, by value selected on XPDR
P 2 /P 3 DEV Thumbwheels, in µs.
CAL sets P 3 pulse to nominal position.
Refer to Appendix F.
+ ' delays position of P 3 pulse fr om
nominal, by value selected on XPDR
P 2 /P 3 DEV Thumbwheels, in µs.
26. CAL MARKS Connector ( J19)
Pr ovides the calibr ation pulses output
set by the 1.0 µs/1.45 µs Switch and
aligned by the CAL Ø Contr ol.
27. 1.0 µs/1.45 µs Switch
Sends 1.0 µs calibr ation pulses for
Mode S r eplies or 1.45 µs calibr ation
pulses for AT CRBS r eplies out the
ATC- 1400A CAL MARKS Connector .
28. XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL Switch
- ' advances position of the P 2 pulse
fr om nominal, by the XPDR P 2 /P 3 DEV
T humbwheels value, in µs.
CAL sets P 2 pulse ( SLS in AT CRBS)
to nominal position.
+ ' delays position of the P 2 pulse
fr om nominal, by the XPDR P 2 /P 3 DEV
T humbwheels value, in µs.
+
V
TONE
P3
V
P2
IDENT
-
CAL
1.0µS
1.45 S
µ
26
CAL MARKS
30
ITEM
02407012
DESCRIPTIO N
29. SYNC Connector ( J20)
Pr ovides active low oscilloscope sync
pulse set by T O /TAC/T D Switch. The
Sync pulse is 17.5 µs prior to P 1 of
the inter r ogation for T O position and
coincidental with P 3 of the
inter r ogation for T D position.
30. T O /TAC/T D Switch
Contr ols sync pulse positions thr ough
the ATC-1400A SYNC and S-1403DL
SCO PE TRIG O UT Connector (T O and
T D ar e the only valid settings) .
T O positions sync pulse for viewing
inter r ogation pulses on oscilloscope.
T D positions sync pulse for viewing
r eply or second inter r ogation ( DI
function) pulses on oscilloscope.
31. INTRF PULSE WIDTH Contr ol
Adjusts width of inter fer ence pulse
fr om 0.2 to 5 µs.
32. PRF/SQ TR ON/OFF Switch
Enables/disables Ant A inter r ogations
thr ough the RF I/O Connector ( C71
TrigSource set to SelfInterr).
33. DISCRIMINATO R Connector ( J21)
Pr ovides discr iminated RF input
pulses to calculate individual r eply
pulse fr equencies. The discr iminator
pr oduces noise with no RF pr esent.
1- 1- 2
Page 52
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
PRF SQTR Hz
VEL
40
DME DIST
NMi
KTS
XPDR
RANGE
NMi
CODE
FREQ
MHz
DME REPLY
EFFICIENCY
50
40
60
70
30
20
80
10
90
0
100
XPDR MODE
38
B
A
C
T
D
2
AC 1 CODE
1
AC 2
FEET
TACAN
ON
37
IDENT
OFF
CO
OFF
POWER
I
TONE
F2 / P2
F1 / P1
DISCRIMINATOR
34
35
02407013
ITEM
DESCRIPTIO N
34. F 2 /P 2 F 1 /P 1 Switch
F 2 /P 2 enables PPMG contr ol in the S1403DL C74 Setup Scr een. The ATC1400A measur es power and fr equency
for the selected pulse.
F 1 /P 1 disables PPMG contr ol by the
S- 1403DL. T he AT C- 1400A measur es
power and fr equency of the F 1 or P 1
pulse in the r eply.
35. PO WER Switch
or
Connects (I) or disconnects (O )
exter nal ac power to the AT C- 1400A.
37. TACAN ON/OFF Switch
Set to O F F position for Mode S Test
System oper ation.
38. XPDR MODE Control
Selects inter r ogation mode by setting
nominal P 3 pulse position for ATCRBS
and All Call inter r ogations. Modes A
and C ar e the pr imar y modes of the
AT C function and All Call function
( ACS or ACL) oper ation.
ITEM
DESCRIPTIO N
NOTE: In Mode S Test System
oper ation, AC 1 is the same as
A and AC 2 is the same as C.
The DISPLAY SELECT
Readout displays Mode C
altitude in feet when the
DISPLAY SELECT Contr ol is
in XPDR CO DE position and
AC 2 is selected on XPDR
MODE Control.
40. DISPLAY SELECT Contr ol
Sets the DISPLAY SELECT Readout.
O nly thr ee positions ar e valid for
Mode S Test System oper ation.
FREQ MHz displays inter r ogation RF
relating to FREQ /FUNCTIO N SELECT
and ∆F Thumbwheels settings.
PRF/SQ TR Hz displays the PRF as
set by the PRF/SQ TR Thumbwheels.
XPDR CODE displays the octal for m
of code r eceived in ATCRBS r eplies.
When XPDR MO DE Contr ol is in AC 2
position, Mode C altitude is displayed
in feet.
1- 1- 2
Page 53
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
41
VEL
PRF SQTR Hz
44
43
42
ATC
1400
DISPLAY SELECT
DME DIST
NMi
KTS
XPDR
RANGE
NMi
CODE
FREQ
MHz
DBL INTERR / INTRF PULSE
DME REPLY
EFFICIENCY
50
40
60
30
70
20
80
10
90
0
100
0 0 0 0
PRF/SQTR
XPDR MODE
A
B
C
T
D
2
AC 1 CODE
1
AC 2
0 0 0 0
0 0
OFF
XPDR P /P DEV
2
3
0 0 0
FEET
02407014
IT EM
DESCRIPT IO N
41. PRF/SQ TR Thumbwheels
Selects inter r ogation r ate in Hz. For
the DI function, inter r ogation r ate is
twice the value on the thumbwheels.
42. DBL INTERR/INTRF PULSE
Thumbwheels
O F F tr ansmits r egular inter r ogations
( nor mal oper ating position) .
INTERF- tr ansmits an inter fer ence
pulse with each inter r ogation.
T humbwheels deter mine inter fer ence
pulse position in µs pr ior to leading
edge of P 1 in the inter r ogation.
INTERF+ tr ansmits an inter fer ence
pulse with each inter r ogation.
T humbwheels deter mine inter fer ence
pulse position in µs following the
leading edge of P 1 in the
inter r ogation.
DOUBLE selects double inter r ogation
when the S- 1403DL displays the DI
Scr een. T humbwheels deter mine
spacing between inter r ogations.
ITEM
DESCRIPTIO N
NOTE: The S- 1403DL displays the
* DI/INTRF ERRO R * when
the DBL INTERR/INTRF
PULSE Thumbwheels have
DOUBLE selected and the S1403DL is not in the DI
Scr een.
NOTE: Selecting DOUBLE on the DBL
INTERR/INTRF PULSE
Thumbwheels with the
suppr ession pulse active
( SUPPRESSO R O N/O FF
Switch) eliminates the fir st
inter r ogation. Thumbwheels
set delay fr om suppr ession
pulse to second inter r ogation.
43. DISPLAY SELECT Readout
Displays the ATC- 1400A tr ansmitting
fr equency, PRF or UUT r eply code
data, as selected with the DISPLAY
SELECT Contr ol.
44. XPDR P 2 /P 3 DEV Thumbwheels
Deviates position, in µs, of the P 2
and/or P 3 pulse( s) fr om nominal
accor ding to XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL
Switch and/or XPDR DEV P 3 /CAL
Switch setting( s) .
1- 1- 2
Page 54
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
45
48
46
ATC1400A
50
49
UNIT UNDER TEST
DME-PRF Hz
XPDR-% REPLY
FREQ / FUNCTION SELECT
XPDR
XMTR FREQ
V
0 0 0 0
51
0 0 0
F
MHz
RANGE/VEL/ACCEL
0 0 0 0 0
OFF
XXX.XX
P3 DEV
0
DME P DEV
2
0 0
XPDR PULSE WIDTH
0 0 0
XXX0.0
XXX.00
SLS/ECHO
+
0
L
O
A
D
RNG
VEL
ACCEL
C
L
E
02407015
ITEM
DESCRIPTIO N
45. FREQ/FUNCTION SELECT
Thumbwheels
Set to XPDR function for Mode S Test
System operation. Sets transmit
frequency from 962 to 1213 MHz
( 1030 MHz for nor mal oper ation) .
46. DME- PRF Hz/XPDR- %REPLY Display
Set to zer o dur ing nor mal Mode S
T est System oper ation. For accur ate
per cent r eply, r efer to the S- 1403DL
C10 Function A, C20 Function B
and/or C30 Per cent Reply Scr een( s) .
48. ∆F T humbwheels
Deviates ATC- 1400A tr ansmitting
fr equency - 9.99 to +9.99 MHz fr om
frequency set on FREQ /FUNCTIO N
SELECT Thumbwheels.
49. XPDR PULSE WIDT H T humbwheels
Sets width, in µs, of selected P 1 , P 2
and P 3 pulses.
ITEM
DESCRIPTIO N
50. SLS/ECHO Thumbwheels
Selects amplitude of SLS pulses ( P 2 ,
ATCRBS or P 5 , Mode S) when
SLS/ECHO O N/O FF Switch is O N.
Selects amplitude of P 2 , P 3 or P 4 if
the respective field is set to VAR in
the S- 1403DL Contr ol Menu function
scr een and the SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch is O FF.
Selects amplitude of inter fer ence
pulses when activated by the DBL
INTERR/INTRF PULSE Thumbwheels,
r egar dless of SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch setting.
Selected amplitude r anges fr om - 19 to
+9 dB with respect to the level of P 1
in the inter r ogation.
51. XMTR FREQ MHz Display
Continuously displays aver age
fr equency of RF pulses r eceived in
UUT r eplies. The S- 1403DL C74
Setup Scr een selects the pulses to
measur e when the ATC- 1400A F 2 /P 2
F 1 /P 1 Switch is set to F 2 /P 2 . The
ATC- 1400A measur es and displays
only the fr equency of F 1 , AT CRBS or
P 1 , Mode S when the F 2 /P 2 F 1 /P 1
Switch is set to F 1 /P 1 position.
1- 1- 2
Page 55
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.6 AT C- 1400A REAR PANEL
71
DECODER
SELFWIDE EQUALIZER INTERR
72
INST DIM
HI
SERIAL
LOW
CLOCK
FREQ
J7
J5
TEST
INTERROGATOR
AUXILIARY
J23
J8
J6
INDICATOR
73
75
76
IFR BUS
J1
NARROW
OFF
OFF
R/NAV
GEN
XMTR
J9
J10
J11
J2
J3
66
J22
J4
AC LINE FUSES
USE
F
E
E
F
FUS
USE
FUS
F1
61
120 WATTS MAX
F2
3.0A @ 110/230 VAC
TYPE F
A5
A1
ON 1 1 1 1 1
OFF 0 0 0 0 0
CAUTION
100-120VAC
220-240VAC
60Hz
50Hz
FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION
AGAINST FIRE, REPLACE ONLY
WITH FUSE OF THE SPECIFIED
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT RATINGS.
57
IT EM
DESCRIPT IO N
53. G PIB Connector ( J14)
Pr ovides a par allel inter face for
gener al pur pose pr ogr ammable
instr umentation. Confor ms to IEEE
Standar d 488- 1978.
54. G PIB ADDRESS/O PT IO N Dip
Switches
Sets IEEE- 488 bus addr ess for
par allel r emote contr ol oper ation.
57. AC INPUT Connector
Connects ac power fr om S- 1403DL to
ATC- 1400A.
61. XMTR Connector ( J11)
Pr ovides the detected video r eceived
fr om the UUT tr ansmitter and set at a
TTL level.
66. SELF-INTERR/OFF Switch
Set to O F F for Mode S T est System
oper ation.
71. IFR BUS Connector ( J5)
Connects to S- 1403DL IF R BUS for
communication and contr ol data.
54
ITEM
SH1 AH1 T6 TE0
L4
LE0 SR1 RL1
PP0 DC1 DT1 C0
O1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
N
O
F
F
GPIB ADDRESS
IEEE 488 - 1978
53
02407035
DESCRIPTIO N
72. AUXILIARY Connector ( J6)
Connects to S- 1403DL AUXILIARY
Connector for timing and pulse signals.
73. DABS INPUT Connector ( J1)
Receives DPSK modulation fr om the
S- 1403DL thr ough DPSK O UT
Connector . The bipolar DPSK signal
modulates the ATC- 1400A RF signal
to pr ovide Mode S inter r ogations.
75. EXTERNAL MEASUREMENT G ATE
Connector ( J3)
Receives the PPMG pulse fr om the S1403DL MEASUREMENT G ATE O UT
Connector . The PPMG pulse tr igger s
the ATC- 1400A to measur e UUT reply
pulse power and frequency. Power
measur ements ar e displayed on the
XMTR PWR WATTS Display.
Fr equency measur ement is displayed
on the XMTR FREQ MHz Display.
76. RF LEVEL INPUT Connector ( J4)
Receives additional RF level contr ol
fr om the S- 1403DL RF VERNIER O UT
Connector . The ± 3 dB ver nier
contr ols the signal level tr ansmitted
thr ough the RF I/O Connector .
1- 1- 2
Page 56
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SECTION 2 - OPERATION
1. INSTALLATION
1.2.3
1.1 GENERAL
T he Mode S T est System is a bench test
set r equir ing continuous ac power to
oper ate. Installation of the Mode S Test
System includes connecting the S- 1403DL
Test
Auxiliar y
with
the
ATC- 1400A
Tr ansponder /DME T est Set, power ing up
the
system
and
accomplishing
an
installation calibr ation.
Due to potential for electr ical shock within
test equipment, Test Set cover s must not
be r emoved by oper ator s. The Installation
Calibr ation,
Pr ocedur e,
component
r eplacement and inter nal adjustments must
only be per for med by qualified ser vice
per sonnel.
Refer to the Installation
Calibr ation Pr ocedur e or Mode S Test
System Maintenance Manual ( 1002- 2400400) for maintenance pr ocedur es.
1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.2.4
The following safety pr ecautions must be
obser ved dur ing installation and oper ation.
Aer oflex assumes no liability for failur e to
comply with any safety pr ecaution outlined
in this manual.
Exer cise extr eme car e when per for ming
oper ations pr eceded by a CAUTIO N or
WARNING label. CAUT IO N labels appear
wher e possibility of damage to equipment
exists. WARNING labels denote conditions
wher e bodily injur y or death may r esult.
1.2.1
O perat ing Saf et y
CAUTION and WARNING Labels
Complyin g w it h In st ruct ions
Installation/oper ating per sonnel should not
attempt to install or oper ate the Mode S
Test System without r eading and complying
with instr uctions contained in this manual.
All pr ocedur es contained in this manual
must be per for med in exact sequence and
manner descr ibed.
1.2.2
Grounding Equipmen t and Power
Cord
WARNING: DO NOT USE A THREEPRO N G T O T WO - PRO N G
ADAPTER PLUG. DOING SO
CREATES A SHOCK HAZARD
BETWEEN T HE CHASSIS AND
ELECTRICAL GROUND.
T he power cor d, equipped with standar d
thr ee- pr ong plug, must be connected to a
pr oper ly gr ounded thr ee- pr ong r eceptacle.
It is the customer ’s r esponsibility to:
Have a qualified electr ician check
r eceptacle( s) for pr oper gr ounding.
Replace any standar d two- pr ong
r eceptacle( s) with pr oper ly gr ounded
thr ee- pr ong r eceptacle( s) .
1- 2- 1
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
1.3 PO WER REQ UIREMENT S
1.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
The Mode S Test System oper ates over a
voltage r ange of 100 to 120 VAC at 60 Hz
or 220 to 240 VAC at 50 Hz. No inter nal
wir ing
changes
ar e
r equir ed
befor e
applying ac power to the T est Auxiliar y.
T he VO LT AG E SELECT Switch setting on
S- 1403DL r ear panel must match the input
line voltage. Instantaneous sur ge cur r ent
at power up is ≤ 50 A. T he specified fuse
r atings ar e listed in 1- 2- 1, Table 1.
Refer to 1- 2- 1, Figur e 1.
CAUTION:
INPUT
VOLTAGE
100 to
120 VAC
220 to
240 VAC
FOR CONTINUOUS
PRO T ECT IO N AG AINST F IRE,
REPLACE O NLY WIT H F USES
O F T HE SPECIF IED VO LT AG E
AND CURRENT RATINGS.
F1 AND F3
AC IN FUSES
F2 AND F4
LINE SUPPLY
FUSES
3.0 A, 250 V
1.0 A, 250 V
Fast Blo (Type F) Fast Blo (Type F)
(Aeroflex PN:
(Aeroflex PN:
5106-0300-600)
5106-4501-000)
(Bussman AGC3) (Bussman AGC1)
3.0 A, 250 V
0.5 A, 250 V
Fast Blo (Type F) Fast Blo (Type F)
(Aeroflex PN:
(Aeroflex PN:
5106-0000-016)
5106-0300-600)
(Bussman
(Bussman AGC3)
AGC1/2)
Specified F use Ratings
Table 1
STEP
PRO CEDURE
1. Place the ATC- 1400A on the bench.
2. Place the S- 1403DL on top of the
ATC- 1400A.
3. Connect two 25- Pin D style cables:
O ne to the S- 1403DL IFR BUS
Connector ( J11) and ATC- 1400A
IFR BUS Connector ( J5) .
O ne to the S- 1403DL AUX BUS
Connector ( J10) and ATC- 1400A
AUXILIARY Connector ( J6) .
4. Connect
cables:
thr ee
SMB- to- SMB
coaxial
O ne to the S- 1403DL RF LVL
Connector ( J13) and ATC- 1400A
RF LEVEL INPUT Connector ( J4) .
O ne to the S- 1403DL PPMG
Connector ( J14) and ATC- 1400A
EXTERNAL MEASUREMENT G ATE
Connector ( J3) .
O ne to the S- 1403DL DPSK O UT
Connector ( J15) and ATC- 1400A
DABS INPUT Connector ( J1) .
5. Connect ac power cable to the S1403DL 1400A PO WER Connector and
ATC- 1400A AC INPUT Connector .
1- 2- 1
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
REPLY GRP
TRIG IN
MODE GRP
TRIG IN
DECODED
VIDEO IN
F2
1
J4
J3
J6
J5
J18
J17
J19
J20
24
REPLY
(TTL) OUT
ENABLE
TRIG IN
FUS E
GPIB J21
REPLY
(3-27V) OUT
F4
FUSE
DISPARTY
OUT
ANT B
GEN OUT
PREPULSE
OUT
EXT
SYNC OUT
SCOPE
TRIG OUT
1400A POWER
FUS E
FUSE
EXT
PRF OUT
ANT B
VIDEO OUT
ATCRBS
OUT
EXT
SYNC IN
EXT
MOD IN
1.0A @ 110VAC
0.5A @ 230VAC
TYPE F
.
115
230
.
J22
J24
J23
J25
J26
FUS E
F1
IFR BUS J11
MECH ASSY,
PULSE/PROCESSOR
DPSK ADJ
R28
RS-232
J12
DECODER
SELFWIDE EQUALIZER INTERR
FUS E
DPSK OUT
J15
PPMG
J14
RF LVL
J13
F3
AUX BUS J10
INST DIM
HI
SERIAL
LOW
CLOCK
FREQ
J7
J5
TEST
INTERROGATOR
AUXILIARY
J23
J8
J6
VOLTAGE SELECT
163 WATTS MAX
3A @
110/230
VAC
TYPE F
FUSE
J9
FUSE
J8
J7
IFR BUS
INDICATOR
J1
NARROW
OFF
OFF
R/NAV
GEN
XMTR
J9
J10
J11
J2
J3
J22
J4
AC LINE FUSES
E
FUS
F
F
USE
F1
120 WATTS MAX
FUS
E
USE
F2
3.0A @ 110/230 VAC
TYPE F
CAUTION
100-120VAC
220-240VAC
60Hz
50Hz
FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION
AGAINST FIRE, REPLACE ONLY
WITH FUSE OF THE SPECIFIED
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT RATINGS.
A5
A1
ON 1 1 1 1 1
OFF 0 0 0 0 0
SH1 AH1 T6 TE0
LE0 SR1 RL1
L4
PP0 DC1 DT1 C0
O1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
N
O
F
F
GPIB ADDRESS
IEEE 488 - 1978
02407007
S- 1403DL ( pr oduction model shown) to ATC- 1400A Inter connections
Figur e 1
The Mode S T est System can be installed
in either bench- top or r ack- mount fashion.
All IFR Systems, Inc., test sets are
nor mally shipped fr om the factor y with
plastic
feet
installed
for
bench- top
installation. Installation kits ar e listed in
1- 2- 1, Table 2.
KIT
INSTRUMENT
AEROFLEX
PART NUMBER
Rack-Mount
ATC-1400A
S-1403DL
7001-7636-800
7001-6740-800
Bench-Top/
Stack-Mount
ATC-1400A
S-1403DL
7005-6743-000
One kit required
per Mode S Test
System
CAUTION:
AVO ID RESTRICTION OF AIR
FLO W TO INTAKE VENT.
WHEN O PERATING IN THE
NORMAL HORIZONTAL
PO SITIO N, MAINTAIN AT
LEAST TWO INCHES ( FIVE
CENTIMETERS) O F
CLEARANCE BETWEEN THE
FAN SIDE OF THE
EQ UIPMENT AND O BJECTS
O R WALLS. IF O PERATING
IN A RACK, MAXIMUM
AMBIENT TEMPERAT URE
MUST BE AT O R BELO W
40° C.
Installation Kits
T able 2
1- 2- 1
Page 3
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
1.5 POWER-UP PROCEDURE
1.7 EXTERNAL CLEANING
T he Mode S T est System is configur ed for
one- touch power contr ol. When the ATC1400A PO WER Switch is O N ( I) , the S1403DL PO WER Switch contr ols power to
the S- 1403DL T est Auxiliar y and ATC1400A T r ansponder /DME T est Set.
The following pr ocedur e contains r outine
instr uctions for cleaning the outside of the
Test Set.
ST EP
CAUTION:
PRO CEDURE
1. Connect ac power cable to S- 1403DL
AC IN Connector and standar d 3- pin
gr ounded power r eceptacle.
2. Pr ess ATC- 1400A PO WER Switch O N
( I).
3. Pr ess S- 1403DL PO WER Switch O N
( I) to ener gize T est Auxiliar y and
ATC- 1400A.
STEP
DISCONNECT POWER FROM
TEST SET TO AVO ID
PO SSIBLE DAMAG E TO
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS.
PRO CEDURE
1. Clean fr ont panel, switches and
display face with soft lint-free cloth. If
dir t is difficult to r emove, dampen
cloth with water and a mild liquid
deter gent.
4. Ver ify ATC- 1400A Displays illuminate.
2. Remove gr ease, fungus and gr ound- in
dirt from surfaces with soft lint-free
cloth dampened ( not soaked) with
isopr opyl alcohol.
5. Ver ify S- 1403DL MENU Display shows
an active scr een.
3. Remove dust and dir t fr om connector s
with soft- br istled br ush.
1.6 INSTALLATION CALIBRATION
Befor e oper ation, the Mode S Test System
r equir es
calibr ation
accor ding
to
the
Installation Calibr ation Pr ocedur e.
Any
time the S- 1403DL or ATC- 1400A is
r eplaced, another installation calibr ation
should be per for med ( only by qualified
ser vice
per sonnel)
to
maintain
measur ement accur acy.
4. Cover connector s, not in use, with
suitable
dust
cover
to
pr event
tar nishing of connector contacts.
5. Clean cables with soft lint- fr ee cloth.
6. Paint exposed metal sur face to avoid
cor r osion.
1- 2- 1
Page 4
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2. GENERAL OPERATING PROCEDURES
2.1 GENERAL
The G ener al O per ating Pr ocedur es contain
instr uctions for oper ating the Mode S Test
System using Fr ont Panel contr ols ( local
oper ation) . G ener al O per ating Pr ocedur es
identify contr ols, connector s, indicator s and
display scr eens used to per for m the
individual functions. Data shown in sample
display scr eens may differ with actual test
settings. Refer to Unit Under T est ( UUT)
Manuals for specific UUT T est Pr ocedur es.
All- Call Shor t ( ACS) Function
The S- 1403DL G PIB Connector ( J21) , S1403DL RS- 232 Connector ( J12) and ATC1400A G PIB Connector ( J14) pr ovide
optional inputs for r emote communication
with the Mode S T est System. All r emote
communication with the Mode S Test
System is implemented with ASCII encoded
char acter str ings.
Refer to 1- 2- 4 for
descr iption of G PIB and RS- 232 oper ation.
All- Call Long ( ACL) Function
Refer to 1- 1- 2, Figur e 1 for S- 1403DL
contr ols, connector s and indicator s; 1- 1- 2,
Figur e 2 for S- 1403DL Keyboar d r efer ences
and 1- 1- 2, F igur e 48 for ATC- 1400A
contr ols, connector s and indicator s.
Inter lace ( INTLCE) Function
2.1.1
Syst em Charact erist ics
The Mode S T est System has
oper ational functions as follows:
seven
AT CRBS ( AT C) F unction
T he Mode S T est System tr ansmits
standar d
ATCRBS
inter r ogations.
Replies ar e tested for accur acy, per cent
r eply, fr equency, power and r eply delay.
Inter r ogation pulse char acter istics ar e
var ied to ver ify ATCRBS tr ansponder
r eceiver limitations.
Sequence ( SEQ ) F unction
The Mode S Test System tr ansmits
standar d Mode S inter r ogations. Up to
1000 pr ogr ammable inter r ogations ar e
sent in sequence. Inter r ogation pulse
char acter istics ar e var ied to ver ify Mode
S tr ansponder r eceiver limitations. The
S- 1403DL displays r eply infor mation.
The Mode S Test System tr ansmits the
ATCRBS
O nly
All
Call
( ATCRBS
inter r ogation plus P 4 pulse at nor mal
width) . Reply infor mation ver ifies the
tr ansponder
oper ates
cor r ectly.
Inter r ogation
pulse
char acter istics
including P 4 ar e var ied to ver ify
tr ansponder r eceiver limitations.
The Mode S Test System tr ansmits the
ATCRBS/Mode S All Call ( ATCRBS
inter r ogation plus wide P 4 pulse) . Reply
infor mation ver ifies the tr ansponder
oper ates cor r ectly. Inter r ogation pulse
char acter istics including P 4 ar e var ied
to
ver ify
tr ansponder
r eceiver
limitations.
The Mode S Test System tr ansmits
Mode S inter r ogations inter laced with
ATCRBS
inter r ogations
to
ver ify
tr ansponder oper ation in a nor mally
mixed envir onment.
Double Inter r ogation ( DI) Function
The Mode S Test System tr ansmits
( ATCRBS, Mode S, ACS or ACL) in
closely spaced inter r ogations to ver ify
tr ansponder oper ation and r ecover y.
BURST Function
The Mode S Test System tr ansmits
ATCRBS or Mode S inter r ogation
sequences at a set Pulse Repetition
Fr equency ( PRF) to ver ify tr ansponder
r eply r ate capability.
ATCRBS Monitor Pulse Function
The Mode S Test System tr ansmits
selected nor mal ATCRBS inter r ogations,
measur ing r eply pulse par ameter s and
r eply jitter . The ATCRBS Monitor Pulse
Function oper ates the same as the ATC
Function with additional measur ements
and is used in the same pr ocedur e.
1- 2- 2
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.1.2 Syst em Considerat ions
All functions pr ovide diver sity testing by
enabling Antenna B ( ANT B) . Simulating
dispar ity in amplitude or time fr om the
Antenna A ( ANT A) output ( AT C- 1400 RF
I/O Connector ) to the ANT B output ( S1403DL ANT B Connector ) , tests the UUT
ability to switch antennas.
Some Mode S or S- 1403DL functions ar e
differ ent fr om ATCRBS or ATC- 1400A
functions.
Major differ ences and other
consider ations ar e as follows:
The ATC- 1400A DISPLAY SELECT
Readout is not valid for Mode S r eplies.
The Mode S Test System does not
tr ansmit Mode A and Mode C
inter r ogations alter nately. In ATCRBS
functions, the Mode S Test System
tr ansmits only Mode A inter r ogations
with the ATC- 1400A XPDR MO DE
Control set to AC 1 and only Mode C
inter r ogations with the ATC- 1400A
XPDR MO DE Control set to AC 2 .
The S- 1403DL squitter display does not
discr iminate between inputs to ANT A
(ATC-1400A) and ANT B (S-1403DL).
Adjusting RF level with S- 1403DL SLEW
Contr ol r equir es 200 inter r ogations to
stabilize. Stabilization time incr eases
as PRF is set lower . The ATC- 1400A
RF LEVEL Contr ol r equir es little or no
stabilization time.
The ATC- 1400A DME- PRF Hz XPDR%REPLY Display displays invalid r eply
per centages because of Mode S
squitter s. The S- 1403DL displays
accur ate r eply per centages in the
Function A, Function B and %Reply
Contr ol Menu Scr eens.
The ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO
Thumbwheels adjust mor e than one
pulse level at the same time if set in the
S- 1403DL Contr ol Menus scr eens.
1- 2- 2
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.1.3
Input Considerat ions
CAUTION:
2.1.4
CONTINUOUS HIGH PRF
WITH HIGH UUT POWER MAY
DAMAG E THE S- 1403DL.
To ensur e allowable input, set inter r ogation
PRF of the Mode S T est System accor ding
to r eplies as follows ( UUT Power is the
power displayed on the ATC- 1400A XMTR
PWR WATTS Display) :
For AT CRBS, set PRF ≤
148
. • 106 .
UUT POWER
For Mode S shor t, set PRF ≤
For Mode S long, set PRF ≤
333 • 103 .
UUT POWER
Init ial ATC- 1400A Cont rol Set t ings
Set ATC- 1400A as follows:
CONTROL
SETTING
NORM
OFF
MAN
CAL
CW/NORM/OFF Switch
SLS/ECHO ON/OFF Switch
MAN/AUTO/MAN STEP Switch
XPDR DEV P 3 /CAL Switch
CAL
XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL Switch
ON
OFF
A
PRF/SQTR
Hz
0200
000.0 OFF
PRF/SQTR ON/OFF Switch
TACAN ON/OFF Switch
XPDR MODE Control
DISPLAY SELECT Control
PRF/SQUITTER Thumbwheels
DBL INTERR/INTRF Thumbwheels
FREQ/FUNCTION SELECT
Thumbwheels
∆F Thumbwheels
SELF-INTERR/OFF Switch
172 • 10 3 .
UUT POWER
2.1.5
1030 XPDR
OFF
OFF
O perat ional Hook- Up
Refer to 1- 2- 2, Figur e 2 for suggested
hook- up used to oper ate the Mode S Test
System.
The Mode S Test System
oper ational hook- up diagr am is used with
all functions.
SCOPE
TRIG
OUT
(J7)
TRIG
SCOPE
CHAN 2
EXT
SYNC
OUT
(J8)
ATCRBS
OUT
(J5)
S-1403DL
PREPULSE
OUT
(J9)
ANT B
CHAN 1
UUT
ANT B
ANT A
ATC-1400A
GEN (J17)
XMTR (J16) RF I/O (J15)
02403003
Mode S Test System O per ational Hook- Up Diagr am
Figur e 2
1- 2- 2
Page 3
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.2 ATC FUNCTION
2.2.1
Descript ion
In the ATC Function, the Mode S Test
System simulates an AT CRBS gr ound
station tr ansmitting standar d two- pulse
inter r ogations shown in Appendix E. The
Mode S T est System measur es r eply
char acter istics to ver ify the ATCRBS
tr ansponder oper ates cor r ectly.
2.2.2
Pro ced u re
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
1. Connect test equipment accor ding to
1- 2- 2, Figur e 2.
2. Apply power to Mode S Test System.
3. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, F UNC#, 0 and
1 Keys in sequence to select ATC
Scr een. If necessar y, use S- 1403DL
CURSO R Keys and SLEW Control to
set menu to C10.
C10 f01:ATC (ATCRBS)
Arf:-0.5
P3:CAL
Altitude=+ 9700 Dly= 2.9750 Sqtr= 1.00
AntA%:ATC=100,S= 0 AntB%=100 AntB:+.95
4. Set test par ameter s as follows:
INTERROGATION MODULATION
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and EX MO D
Keys in sequence to move cur sor to
C75 Setup Scr een AntAModSr c.
C75
SETUP - MISC
AntAEnable:ON
PrePulseOut:253µs
AntAModSrc:INT
AntBModSrc:INT
Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
AntAModSr c ( modulation for signal
out ATC- 1400A RF I/O Connector ) to:
EXT to deactivate inter nal pulse
modulation and use exter nal
modulation thr ough S- 1403DL EXT
MO D IN Connector . The Mode S
Test System disr egar ds inter nal
pulse contr ol settings for the
applicable antenna connector .
STEP
PRO CEDURE
INT/EXT to accept exter nal pulse
modulation thr ough S- 1403DL EXT
MO D IN Connector in addition to
nor mal inter nal modulation.
INT for nor mal Mode S Test
System inter nal modulation.
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R and O N/CAL
Keys to set AntBModSr c ( modulation
for signal out S- 1403DL ANT B
Connector ) as desir ed.
MO DE SELECTIO N
Use ATC- 1400A XPDR MO DE Contr ol
to select inter r ogation mode (1, 2, T,
A, B, C or D).
FREQUENCY
Adjust ATC- 1400A FREQ /FUNCTIO N
Thumbwheels and ∆F Thumbwheels to
set inter r ogation RF fr om 952.01 to
1222.99 MHz. Set to 1030 MHz for
nor mal oper ation.
RF LEVEL
Adjust ATC- 1400A RF LEVEL Contr ol
to set RF LEVEL - dBm Display fr om
127 ( - 127 dBm) to 0 (0 dBm) . Normal
oper ating r ange is - 69 to - 21 dBm.
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set Ar f field
from -3.0 to +3.0 in dB to offset cable
loss and/or other exter nal factor s.
Pr ess S- 1403DL ENTER Key.
INTERROGATION RATE
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 1
Keys in sequence to display C71
Inter r ogation Tr igger Setup Scr een.
C71
SETUP - INTERROGATION TRIGGER
TrigSource:TrigGen
TrigGen:
450Hz
CAUTION:
CONTINUOUS HIGH PRF
WITH HIGH UUT POWER
MAY DAMAG E S- 1403DL
( SEE 2.1.3 IN 1- 2- 2) .
1- 2- 2
Page 4
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
Set
inter r ogation
r ate
or
pulse
r epetition fr equency ( PRF ) accor ding
to one of four ways as follows:
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to TrigGen and
Tr igG en fr om 1 to 2500 Hz. Set
from 1 to 500 Hz for normal
oper ation.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
T r igSour ce to SelfInterr. Adjust
ATC- 1400A PRF/SQ TR
T humbwheels to set PRF fr om 0 to
7999. Set from 0 to 500 for
nor mal oper ation.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to Ext Syn cIn.
Connect exter nal tr igger sour ce
pr oviding T T L level inter r ogation
tr igger pulse to S- 1403DL EXT
SYNC IN Connector . Leading
edge of P 1 or pr epulse ( when
enabled) occur s 17.95 µs after
leading edge of exter nal sync
pulse. Adjust exter nal tr igger
sour ce as desir ed.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to BurstKey to allow
manual tr igger ing of a single
inter r ogation by pr essing the S1403DL BURST Key.
STEP
PROCEDURE
P 2 ( SLS) LEVEL
Set ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O N.
Set P 2 ( SLS) level
using
ATC- 1400A
SLS/ECHO
Thumbwheels. Adjust level fr om - 19
to +6 dB, relative to P 1 level. Ver ify
suppr ession occur s when P 2 level is
≥ P 1 level.
Ver ify suppr ession does
not occur when P 2 level exceeds P 1
level by ≥ 9 dB.
P 2 (SLS) PO SITION
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL
Switch to CAL for nominal P 2 ( SLS)
position of 2.0 µs following P 1 leading
edge. Set XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL Switch
to - ' or + ' and adjust ATC- 1400A
XPDR P 2 /P 3 DEV Thumbwheels fr om
0.00 to 1.85 to set position fr om 0.15
to 3.85 µs following P 1 leading edge.
P 3 LEVEL
Set ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O F F. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND
and P3 Keys in sequence to move
cur sor to C10 Function 01 ATC P3
field. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
set P3 to VAR. Set P 3 level using
ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO Thumbwheels.
Adjust level fr om - 19 to +6 dB,
relative to P 1 level. 0 dB is nor mal
oper ating level ( P3:CAL ).
For P 3
deactivation, pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL
Key to set P3 to O F F.
PUL SE WIDT H
P 3 PO SITIO N
Set AT C- 1400A XPDR PULSE WIDTH
VAR/CAL Switch to CAL for 0.8 µs
nominal width of P 1 , P 2 (SLS) (if
(if
activated)
activated)
and
P3
inter r ogation pulses.
Set XPDR
PULSE WIDT H VAR/CAL Switch to
VAR and use AT C- 1400A XPDR
PULSE WIDT H T humbwheels to adjust
width fr om 0.20 to 1.85 µs.
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV P 3 /CAL
Switch to CAL for nominal P 3 position.
Refer to Appendix E for nominal
position. Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV
P 3 /CAL Switch to - ' or + ' and adjust
DEV
ATC- 1400A
XPDR
P 2 /P 3
Thumbwheels fr om 0.00 to 1.85 to
deviate position - 1.85 to +1.85 µs
fr om nominal.
1- 2- 2
Page 5
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
STEP
If MLD is installed, set ANT B output
level. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys
and SLEW Contr ol to set menu to
C20. Use CURSOR Keys to select Brf
fields.
Use SLEW Contr ol and
Keyboar d to set fir st field fr om - 80 to
- 20 dBm and second field fr om -3.0 to
+3.0 dB ( used to offset cable loss) .
INTERFERENCE PULSE
Set ATC- 1400A DBL INT ERR/INTRF
PULSE
Thumbwheels
fr om
017.5
INTERF- to 399.9 INTERF+ to enable
and position inter fer ence pulse at 17.5 to +399.9 µs fr om leading edge
of P 1 or pr epulse, if active.
Set level from -19 to +6 dB
(relative to P 1 ) using ATC- 1400A
SLS/ECHO T humbwheels.
5. If desir ed, set optional outputs as
follows:
PREPULSE O UT
Set width fr om 0.2 to 5 µs using
ATC- 1400A INTRF PULSE WIDT H
Contr ol.
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and P PULS
Keys in sequence to move cur sor to
C75 Setup Scr een Pr ePulseO ut field.
Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
activate pr epulse thr ough S- 1403DL
PREPULSE O UT Connector . Use S1403DL SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d
to enter 0 to 260 µs ( time fr om
pr epulse leading edge to P 1 leading
edge) .
SUPPRESSO R PULSE
Connect AT C- 1400A SUPPRESSO R
O UTPUT
Connector
to
UUT
suppr essor input.
Set ATC- 1400A
SUPPRESSO R O N/O FF Switch to O N
to activate 33 µs wide ( fixed)
suppr essor pulse.
EXT SYNC O UT
Adjust level fr om 3 to 27 V using
ATC- 1400A SUPPRESSO R VAR
Adjustment.
Set ATC-1400A DBL INTERR/INTRF
PULSE T humbwheels to O F F to
position suppr essor pulse 0.8 µs
prior to P 3 . Set DBL
INTERR/INTRF PULSE
Thumbwheels from 017.5 INTERFto 399.9 INTERF+ to adjust
suppr essor pulse position fr om 17.5 to +399.9 µs relative to P 1 .
( Suppr essor pulse r eplaces
inter fer ence pulse when both ar e
activated.)
ANT B
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and ANT B Keys
in sequence to move cur sor to AntB
field. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
activate inter r ogations thr ough ANT B
Connector .
Use SLEW Contr ol and
Keyboar d to enter value fr om -0.95 to
+0.95 ( offset in 0.05 µs incr ements
fr om ANT A inter r ogations) . Without
the
Multi- Level
Diver sity
( MLD)
option, ANT B output level is - 50 dBm.
PRO CEDURE
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and EX SYN
Keys in sequence to move cur sor to
C73 Setup Scr een Enable field. Pr ess
O N/CAL Key to set ATC Enable field
O N for activating exter nal sync pulse
thr ough S- 1403DL EXT SYNC O UT
Connector . Use S- 1403DL CURSO R
Keys and SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d
to set Dv field from -9.95 to +9.95 µs
( time fr om exter nal sync pulse leading
edge to P 1 leading edge) ( - , P 1
follows exter nal sync; +, exter nal sync
follows P 1 ).
C73
SETUP - EXT SYNC OUT
ATC ModeS ACS ACL
Enable:ON OFF
OFF OFF
Dv:+1.00µS
1- 2- 2
Page 6
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
SCOPE TRIGGER OUT
Set scope tr igger output thr ough S1403DL SCO PE T RIG O UT Connector
for
desir ed
O scilloscope
display.
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 2
Keys in sequence to enter C72 Setup
Scr een.
STEP
C10 f08:ATC Mon;Mode:1
Arf:+1.2
F1toF2=20.3000, F1Wd=0.4500, F2Wd=0.4500
Altitude=+ 9700 Dly= 3.0125 Jtr=0.2000
AntA%:ATC= 0,S= 90 AntB%= 90 AntB:-.95
View r eply
Channel 2.
pulses
on
O scilloscope
REPLY DELAY
C72
SETUP - SCOPE TRIGGER
ATC ModeS ACS ACL
Enable:ON OFF
OFF OFF
Source:CAL 150
CAL CAL
(in µS)
Ver ify r eply delay ( P 3 leading edge to
F 1 leading edge) in Dly field. Ver ify
Dly field indicates 3.000 µs ( ± 0.5 µs) .
For detailed r eply delay infor mation,
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 4 Keys
in sequence to display C40 Reply
Delay Contr ol Menu. If desir ed, pr ess
S- 1403DL CL/ESC Key to r eset fields.
Set scope tr igger as follows:
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
AT C Enable to O N for activating
scope tr igger .
PERCENT REPLY
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
AT C Sour ce to CAL ( AT C- 1400A
contr ols scope tr igger position) .
Ver ify per cent r eply in C10/C20 ATC
Scr een AntA% and AntB% fields.
For detailed per cent r eply infor mation,
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 3 Keys
in sequence to display C30 Per cent
Reply Contr ol Menu. If desir ed, pr ess
S- 1403DL CL/ESC Key to r eset fields.
Set AT C- 1400A T O /TAC/T D Switch
to T O for viewing inter r ogation at
ATC- 1400A G EN Connector or T D
for viewing r eply at AT C- 1400A
XMT R Connector .
PO WER
Ver ify UUT power ( ATCRBS r eplies
only)
thr ough
ANT
A
( RF
I/O
Connector ) shown on ATC- 1400A
XMTR PWR WATTS Display. Select
r eply pulse to measur e as follows:
Connect
S- 1403DL
UUT
XMTR
Connector to O scilloscope for viewing
UUT r eplies at S- 1403DL ANT B
Connector .
6. Verify UUT replies as follows:
Set ATC- 1400A F 2 /P 2 F 1 /P 1 Switch
to F 1 /P 1 to measur e pulse power
of F 1 r eply pulse only.
FREQUENCY
Ver ify UUT tr ansmit fr equency on
ATC-1400A XMTR FREQ MHz Display.
Set F 2 /P 2 F 1 /P 1 Switch to F 2 /P 2 for
S- 1403DL to contr ol pulse power
measur ement selection.
ACCURACY
Press S-1403DL 2ND, FUNC#, 0 and
1 Keys in sequence to select ATC
Scr een.
Ver ify r eply content in
Altitude/ID Code field.
Pr ess S- 1403DL 0 and 8 Keys in
sequence to select AT C Monitor
Scr een.
Ver ify
r eply
pulse
par ameter s.
PROCEDURE
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and PPG
Keys in sequence to display C74
PPMG Setup Scr een.
C74
ATC
Enable:ON
Pulse:D2
SETUP ModeS
OFF
P116
PPMG (POWER)
DELM
OFF
1
1- 2- 2
Page 7
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
STEP
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to set ATC Enable
field to O N and select one of 16
possible AT CRBS r eply pulses for
AT C Pulse field.
7. Ver ify
UUT
Mode
infor mation as follows:
S
squitter
INTERVAL
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, F UNC#, 0 and
1 Keys in sequence to select ATC
Scr een. Ver ify inter val between DF11
squitter s in Sqtr field. ( Nor mally 0.8
to 1.2 seconds.)
PRO CEDURE
INFORMATION
Ver ify Tail and Countr y fields.
View squitter fields in hexadecimal:
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 6 Keys
in sequence to display C60 Squitter ( 2
of 2) Contr ol Menu. Use S- 1403DL
CURSO R Keys and O N/CAL Key to
set DF17 type (A, I, O , P, S or T).
Refer to 1- 2- 2, Table 4 for type
descr iption.
DF17 TYPE
DESCRIPTION
A
Airborne Position
I
Aircraft Identification
F or DF 17 type squitter inter vals,
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 6 Keys
in sequence to display C60 Squitter ( 2
of 2) Contr ol Menu.
O
Other
P
On-Demand Information
(Pilot Report)
S
Surface Position
C60
SQUITTER (2of2)
DF CA
AA
ME
II ANT TIME
11 4 A07613
0 A
1.00
17I 4 A07613 1A8C9A3124BA53 0 A 10.05
T
Airborne Supplementary
Information (Trend)
Ver ify squitter inter vals in
TIME field accor ding to 1- 2- 2,
Table 3.
DF17
TYPE
HIGH RATE
TIME
DF17 Squitter Type
Table 4
DF17X
LOW RATE
TIME
A
0.4 to 0.6 s
0.4 to 0.6 s
I
4.8 to 5.2 s
9.6 to 10.4 s
O
---
---
P
Once
Once
S
0.4 to 0.6 s
4.8 to 5.2 s
T
0.4 to 0.6 s
0.4 to 0.6 s
DF17 Squitter Inter val T imes
Table 3
ADDRESS
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 5 Keys
in sequence to display C50 Squitter ( 1
of 2) Contr ol Menu. Ver ify Mode S
Addr ess ( air cr aft addr ess) in Addr
fields.
C50
SQUITTER (1of2)
Addr:h=A07613,o=50073023,Tail=N129KS
Country=United States
Counts/120s:DF11=110,DF17= 36,DF17S= 24
1- 2- 2
Page 8
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.2.3
G eneral Test Sequ ence
Refer to 1- 2- 2, F igur e 3.
SIG NAL
1.
DESCRIPT IO N
Self Interr In (if selected)
SIG NAL
5. Scope Tr ig O ut
The S- 1403DL tr ansmits the active
high scope tr igger pulse thr ough the
SCO PE TRIG O UT Connector ( J7) .
Position,
r efer enced
to
ANT
A
inter r ogations, depends on the ATC1400A T O /TAC/T D Switch setting:
Active low pulse fr om the ATC- 1400A
tr igger s the inter r ogation pr ocess
( C71
Inter r ogation
T r igger
Setup
Scr een T r ig Sour ce field set to
SelfInterr) .
The self inter r ogate
pulse r ising edge occur s 17.95 µs
pr ior to leading edge of P 1 or pr epulse
( when enabled) .
T he S- 1403DL
r eceives the self inter r ogate pulse
thr ough the AUXILIARY Connector
( J10) .
T O ( for viewing inter r ogations)
Leading edge occur s 1.0 µs pr ior
to P 1 leading edge and tr ailing
edge occur s 1.0 µs prior to P 3
leading edge.
2. Ext Sync In (if selected)
Active high pulse occur s 17.95 pr ior
to leading edge of P 1 or pr epulse
( when enabled) .
T he S- 1403DL
r eceives the pulse thr ough the EXT
SYNC IN Connector ( J4) .
The
exter nal sync input r eplaces the self
inter r ogate input in tr igger ing the
inter r ogation
pr ocess
( C71
Inter r ogation Tr igger Setup Scr een
Trig Source field set to Ext SyncIn).
3. Pr epulse O ut ( when enabled)
Active high pulse, 1.0 µs wide, occur s
17.95 µs after the sync pulse r ising
edge ( self inter r ogate, exter nal sync
input or inter nal tr igger gener ator )
and 0 to 260 µs, as selected, pr ior to
P 1 leading edge.
T he S- 1403DL
tr ansmits the pr epulse thr ough the
PREPULSE O UT Connector ( J9) .
4. Ext Sync O ut ( when enabled)
Active high pulse, 1.0 µs wide, occur s
fr om - 9.95 to +9.95 µs, as selected,
relative to P 1 leading edge of the
inter r ogation.
T he
S- 1403DL
tr ansmits the pulse thr ough the EXT
SYNC O UT Connector ( J8) .
DESCRIPTIO N
T D ( for viewing r eplies)
Leading edge of 20.3 µs wide
pulse occur s 2.0 µs following P 3
leading edge ( 1.0 µs prior to F 1
leading edge of the expected
r eply) .
6.
ATCRBS O ut
Active low pulse, 3.0 µs wide, occur s
1.0 µs pr ior to P 1 leading edge. The
S- 1403DL tr ansmits the pulse thr ough
the ATCRBS O UT Connector ( J5) .
7. ANT B ( when enabled)
Active high ANT B inter r ogation
pulses
modulate
RF
tr ansmitted
thr ough
the
S- 1403DL
ANT
B
Connector ( J2) .
The S- 1403DL
offsets P 1 leading edge of the ANT B
inter r ogation fr om P 1 leading edge of
the ANT A inter r ogation accor ding to
the AntB field setting in the C10/C20
ATC Scr een. ANT B and ANT A pulse
char acter istics ar e the same except
for pulse level.
1- 2- 2
Page 9
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SIG NAL
DESCRIPTIO N
8. Ext Pulse
Active low pulses tr ansmitted thr ough
the S- 1403DL AUXILIARY Connector
( J10) modulate the ATC- 1400A RF
output.
Pulse char acter istics var y
accor ding to test par ameter settings.
Refer to Step 4 of AT C F unction
Pr ocedur e ( 2.2.2 in 1- 2- 2) .
9. Ext SLS ( when enabled)
Active low gate pulse enables ATC1400A SLS/ECHO T humbwheels to
contr ol the level of P 2 ( SLS) or P 3
depending
on
the
AT C- 1400A
SLS/ECHO O N/O F F Switch position
and C10/C20 P3 field setting.
10. PPMG ( if selected)
The pulse power measur ement gate
( PPMG ) occur s <1.0 µs pr ior to the
leading edge of the selected pulse.
The S- 1403DL tr ansmits the PPMG
pulse thr ough the PPMG Connector
( J14) to the ATC- 1400A.
NOTE: The ATC- 1400A ignor es
PPMG if the AT C- 1400A F 2 /P 2
F 1 /P 1 Switch is set to F 1 /P 1 .
11. 50% Video
The Mode S T est System r eceives the
UUT r eply video thr ough ANT A ( ATC1400A RF I/O Connector ) . The ATC1400A sends the r eply video to the S1403DL
thr ough
the
AUXILIARY
Connector ( J10) .
1- 2- 2
Page 10
Dec 1/03
EXT SYNC
OUT (J8)
50% VIDEO
(J10, PIN 11)
PPMG (J14)
EXT SLS
(J10, PIN 6)
EXT PULSE
(J10, PIN 5)
ANT B (J2)
ATCRBS
OUT (J5)
0.95 µ s
T
P1
P1
2.0 µ s
P2
MODE SPACING
O
P3
2.0 µ s
0.8 µ s
P2
1.0 µs
UUT REPLY DELAY
(3.0 µ s 0.5 µ s TYPICAL)
1.0 µs
3.0 µs
1.0 µs
-9.95 TO +9.95 µ s
0 TO 260 µ s
DEVIATION =
1.0 µs
IF SELECTED
UUT REPLY RECEIVED BY
ATC-1400A, SENT TO S-1403DL
IF SELECTED
WHEN ENABLED
WHEN ENABLED
SCOPE TRIG
OUT (J7)
WHEN ENABLED
17.95 µ s
IF SELECTED
PREPULSE
OUT (J9)
EXT SYNC
IN (J4)
SELF INTERR
(J10, PIN 14)
P3
F1
1 µs
D
A1
20.3 µ s
SPI
02402001
25.0 µ s ( 0.01 µ s)
D
F2
21.0 µ s ( 0.01 µ s)
17.0 µ s ( 0.01 µ s)
B
C
8.0 µ s ( 0.01 µ s)
A
< 1.0 µ s PRIOR TO SELECTED PULSE
20.3 µ s
T
5.0 µ s ( 0.01 µ s)
6.5 µ s ( 0.01 µ s)
3.0 µ s ( 0.01 µ s)
1
2
T
MODE
SPACING
ATCRBS
MODE
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ATC Function Timing Diagr am
Figur e 3
1- 2- 2
Page 11
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.3 SEQ FUNCTION
2.3.1
Descript ion
In the SEQ F unction, the Mode S Test
System simulates a Mode S gr ound station
tr ansmitting standar d thr ee- pulse, DPSK
modulated
inter r ogations
shown
in
Appendix E.
T he Mode S T est System
measur es r eply char acter istics to ver ify the
Mode S tr ansponder oper ates cor r ectly.
2.3.2
ST EP
Pro ced u re
STEP
PRO CEDURE
4. Pr ess S- 1403DL S MENU Key
display Mode S Sequence Menu.
to
S001:D;UF00,RL=0,CL=0,AQ=0,
+
ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;DF00,VS=0,SL=0,RI=00,AC=+ 31200,
ADDR=17725762
5. Set inter r ogation sequence as follows:
PRO CEDURE
1. Connect test equipment accor ding to
1- 2- 2, Figur e 2.
2. Apply power to Mode S Test System.
3. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 6
Keys to display C76 SMENU Setup
Scr een. Set as follows:
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
O N/CAL Key to set SmenuRadix to
desir ed data for mat ( HEX
[hexadecimal] or OCTAL ).
Use S-1403DL CURSOR, ON/CAL
and ENTER Keys for changing
SetAllSmenu to O F F ( deactivates
all sequence menus) , DEFAULT
( activates/r esets default sequence
menus, deactivates all other s) or
ZERO (sets all fields except ADDR
to 0) . Refer to 1- 1- 2, Table 5 for
default sequence menus.
Use S-1403DL ON/CAL and ENTER
Keys to set ADDR in all sequence
menus by changing SetAllSmenu
to XPDR ( tr ansponder addr ess) or
USER ( addr ess fr om User = field) .
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to set alter nate
addr esses ( G lobalAddr :User =) and
par ity ( AP XO R=) fields as desir ed
for checking oper ation with bogus
addr esses or bad AP fields.
C76
SETUP - SMENU
SmenuRadix:OCTAL
SetAllSmenu:NoAction
GlobalAddr:Xpdr=17725762,AP XOR=00000000
GlobalAddr:User=10273645,AP XOR=00000001
ACTIVATION
Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
activate or deactivate sequence menu.
FORMAT
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
O N/CAL Key to select format type for
active sequence menu.
Set to S
( shor t 56- bit tr ansmission) , L ( long
112- bit tr ansmission) or D ( decoded,
used for for mats with defined fields) .
UPLINK FORMAT
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d to select
desir ed uplink for mat.
DATA FIELDS
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to load data
fields accor ding to Appendix D. Refer
to Appendix B for defined fields and
1- 2- 2, Table 5 for converting data.
SCO PE TRIG G ER
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
O N/CAL
Key
to
activate
+
or
deactivate - scope tr igger . For stable
display, activate scope tr igger for only
one sequence menu.
UUT ADDRESS
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set ADDR
( UUT tr ansponder addr ess) field as
desir ed. With cur sor in ADDR field,
pr ess O N/CAL Key to cycle thr ough
other pr eset addr esses ( some set
r emotely and those set in Step 3) .
1- 2- 2
Page 12
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
STEP
PROCEDURE
SEQUENCE
RF LEVEL
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to select next
sequence menu. Repeat Step 5 to set
as desir ed.
BINARY
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX
000
0
0
0
001
1
1
1
Adjust ATC- 1400A RF LEVEL Contr ol
from 127 to 0 on RF LEVEL - dBm
Display ( - 69 to - 21 dBm is nor mal) .
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set Ar f field
from -3.0 to +3.0 in dB to offset cable
loss and/or other exter nal factor s.
Pr ess S- 1403DL ENTER Key.
010
2
2
2
INTERROGATION RATE
011
3
3
3
100
4
4
4
101
5
5
5
110
6
6
6
111
7
7
7
1000
10
8
8
1001
11
9
9
1010
12
10
A
1011
13
11
B
1100
14
12
C
1101
15
13
D
1110
16
14
E
1111
17
15
F
Number Systems Conver sion
Table 5
6. Press S-1403DL 2ND, FUNC#, 0 and
2 Keys in sequence to select SEQ
Scr een. If necessar y, use S- 1403DL
CURSO R Keys and SLEW Control to
set menu to C10.
C10 f02:SEQ (ModeS)
Arf:+0.7
P6:CAL,Wd:CAL ,Dv:CAL
P2:CAL
SPR:ON ,Dv:CAL
Dly=127.9875 Sqtr= 1.15
AntA%:ATC= 0,S=100 AntB%=100 AntB:+.95
7. Set test par ameter s as follows:
FREQUENCY
Adjust ATC-1400A FREQ /FUNCTIO N
Thumbwheels and ∆F Thumbwheels to
set inter r ogation RF fr om 952.01 to
1222.99 MHz. Set to 1030 MHz for
nor mal oper ation.
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 1
Keys in sequence to enter C71
Inter r ogation Tr igger Setup Scr een.
C71
SETUP - INTERROGATION TRIGGER
TrigSource:TrigGen
TrigGen:
34Hz
CAUTION:
CONTINUOUS HIGH PRF
WITH HIGH UUT PO WER
MAY DAMAG E S- 1403DL
( SEE 2.1.3 IN 1- 2- 2) .
Set inter r ogation r ate or PRF one of
four ways as follows:
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
TrigSource to TrigGen and TrigGen
from 1 to 2500 Hz. Set from 1 to
50 Hz for nor mal oper ation.
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to SelfInterr. Set PRF
from 0 to 2500 with ATC- 1400A
PRF/SQ TR Thumbwheels. Set
from 0 to 50 for nor mal oper ation.
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
TrigSource to ExtSyncIn. Connect
exter nal tr igger sour ce pr oviding
TTL level inter r ogation tr igger
pulse to S- 1403DL EXT SYNC IN
Connector . Leading edge of P 1 or
pr epulse ( when enabled) occur s
17.95 µs after leading edge of
exter nal sync pulse. Adjust
exter nal tr igger sour ce as desir ed.
1- 2- 2
Page 13
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to BurstKey to allow
manual tr igger ing of a single
inter r ogation by pr essing the S1403DL BURST Key.
PULSE WIDT H
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR PULSE WIDTH
VAR/CAL Switch to CAL for 0.8 µs
nominal width of P 1 and P 2 (if
activated) inter r ogation pulses.
Set
XPDR PULSE WIDT H VAR/CAL Switch
to VAR and use AT C- 1400A XPDR
PULSE WIDT H T humbwheels to adjust
width fr om 0.20 to 1.85 µs.
P 2 L EVEL
Set ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O F F. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND
and P2 Keys in sequence to move
cur sor to C10 Function 02 SEQ P2
field. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
set P2 to VAR. Set P 2 level using
AT C- 1400A SLS/ECHO T humbwheels.
Adjust level fr om - 19 to +6 dB,
relative to P 1 level. 0 dB is nor mal
oper ating level ( P2:CAL ).
For P 2
deactivation, pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL
Key to set P2 to O F F.
P 2 PO SITIO N
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL
Switch to CAL for nominal P 2 position
of 2.0 µs following P 1 leading edge.
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL
Switch to - ' or + ' and adjust ATC1400A XPDR P 2 /P 3 DEV T humbwheels
from 0.00 to 1.85 to set position fr om
0.15 to 3.85 µs following P 1 leading
edge.
STEP
PRO CEDURE
P 5 ( SLS) LEVEL
Set ATC_1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O N.
Set P 5 ( SLS) level
using
ATC- 1400A
SLS/ECHO
Thumbwheels. Adjust level fr om - 19
to +6 dB, relative to P 1 level. Ver ify
suppr ession occur s when P 5 level
exceeds P 6 level by 3 dB or mor e.
Ver ify suppr ession does not occur
when P 6 level exceeds P 5 level by
12 dB or mor e.
P 5 (SLS) PO SITION
Adjust P 5 ( SLS) position by changing
SPR position ( center of P 5 tr acks
SPR). Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys
and SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d to set
SPR:Dv field from -1.00 to +1.00 (time
deviated fr om nominal position in
0.05 µs incr ements) .
P 6 CONTROL
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and P4/P6 Keys
in sequence to move cur sor to C10
Function 02 SEQ P6 field.
Pr ess
O N/CAL Key to activate ( CAL ) or
deactivate (O F F) P 6 .
P 6 WIDTH
Use
S-1403DL
CURSO R
Keys,
O N/CAL Key and SLEW Contr ol to set
P6:Wd: field as desir ed. Set to CAL
for nominal P 6 pulse width ( 16.25 µs
for shor t 56- bit data field or 30.25 µs
for long 112- bit data field) . Var y P 6
pulse width fr om -1.50 to +1.50 ( µs
fr om nominal width) .
P 6 PO SITIO N
Use
S-1403DL
CURSO R
Keys,
O N/CAL Key and SLEW Contr ol to set
P6:Dv: field as desir ed. Set to CAL
for nominal P 6 leading edge position
(3.5 µs following P 1 leading edge) .
Set P 6 position fr om 1.55 to 5.45 µs
following P 1 by setting P6:Dv: field
from -1.95 to +1.95 ( µs fr om nominal
position) .
1- 2- 2
Page 14
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
SPR CONTROL
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and SPR Keys
in sequence to move cur sor to C10
F unction 02 SEQ SPR field.
Pr ess
O N/CAL Key to activate ( O N) or
deactivate (O F F) SPR.
SPR PO SIT IO N
Use
S-1403DL
CURSO R
Keys,
O N/CAL Key and SLEW Contr ol to set
SPR:Dv: field as desir ed. Set to CAL
for nominal SPR position
( 1.25 µs following P 6 leading edge) .
Set SPR position fr om 0.25 to 2.25 µs
following P 6 by setting SPR:Dv: field
from -1.00 to +1.00 ( in µs fr om
nominal
position) .
( All
DPSK
modulated data shifts accor dingly.)
INTERFERENCE PULSE
Set AT C- 1400A DBL INT ERR/INTRF
PULSE
Thumbwheels
fr om
017.5
INTERF- to 399.9 INTERF+ to enable
and position inter fer ence pulse at 17.5 to +399.9 µs fr om leading edge
of P 1 or pr epulse, if active.
Set level from -19 to +6 dB
(relative to P 1 ) using ATC- 1400A
SLS/ECHO T humbwheels.
Set width fr om 0.2 to 5 µs using
ATC- 1400A INTRF PULSE WIDTH
Contr ol.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Set ATC-1400A DBL INTERR/INTRF
PULSE Thumbwheels to O F F to
position suppr essor pulse 0.8 µs
prior to SPR. Set DBL INTERR/
INTRF PULSE Thumbwheels from
017.5 INTERF- to 399.9 INTERF+
to adjust suppr essor pulse position
fr om - 17.5 to +399.9 µs relative to
P 1 . ( Suppr essor pulse r eplaces
inter fer ence pulse when both ar e
activated.)
ANT B
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and ANT B Keys
in sequence to move cur sor to AntB
field. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
activate inter r ogations thr ough ANT B
Connector .
Use SLEW Contr ol and
Keyboar d to enter value fr om -0.95 to
+0.95 ( offset in 0.05 µs incr ements
fr om ANT A inter r ogations) . Without
the
Multi- Level
Diver sity
( MLD)
option, ANT B output level is - 50 dBm.
If MLD is installed, set ANT B output
level. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys
and SLEW Contr ol to set menu to
C20. Use CURSOR Keys to select Brf
fields.
Use SLEW Contr ol and
Keyboar d to set fir st field fr om - 80 to
- 20 dBm and second field fr om -3.0 to
+3.0 dB ( used to offset cable loss) .
8. If desir ed, set optional outputs as
follows:
SUPPRESSO R PULSE
PREPULSE O UT
Connect AT C- 1400A SUPPRESSO R
O UTPUT
Connector
to
UUT
suppr essor input.
Set ATC- 1400A
SUPPRESSO R O N/O FF Switch to O N
to activate 33 µs wide ( fixed)
suppr essor pulse.
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and P PULS
Keys in sequence to move cur sor to
C75 Setup Scr een Pr ePulseO ut field.
Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
activate pr epulse thr ough S- 1403DL
PREPULSE O UT Connector . Use S1403DL SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d
to enter 0 to 260 µs ( time fr om
pr epulse leading edge to P 1 leading
edge) .
Adjust level fr om 3 to 27 V using
ATC- 1400A SUPPRESSO R VAR
Adjustment.
C75
SETUP - MISC
AntAEnable:ON
PrePulseOut:253µs
AntAModSrc:INT
AntBModSrc:INT
1- 2- 2
Page 15
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
EXT SYNC O UT
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and EX SYN
Keys in sequence to move cur sor to
C73 Setup Scr een Enable field. Use
S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and O N/CAL
Key to set ModeS Enable field O N for
activating exter nal sync pulse thr ough
S- 1403DL EXT SYNC O UT Connector .
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d to set Dv
field fr om -9.95 to +9.95 µs ( time fr om
exter nal sync pulse leading edge to
P 1 leading edge) ( - , P 1 follows
exter nal sync; +, external sync follows
P 1 ).
C73
SETUP - EXT SYNC OUT
ATC ModeS ACS ACL
Enable:ON ON
OFF OFF
Dv:-0.50µS
SCO PE TRIG O UT
Set scope tr igger output thr ough S1403DL SCO PE T RIG O UT Connector
for
desir ed
O scilloscope
display.
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 2
Keys in sequence to enter C72 Setup
Scr een.
C72
SETUP - SCOPE TRIGGER
ATC ModeS ACS ACL
Enable:ON ON
OFF OFF
Source:CAL 200
CAL CAL
(in µS)
Set scope tr igger as follows:
STEP
PRO CEDURE
For S- 1403DL contr ol, use S1403DL SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d
to delay tr igger in µs following P 1
leading edge of the ANT A
inter r ogation. For detailed r eply
view, set ModeS Sour ce field
accor ding to the following sum
( Maximum field setting is 255 µs) :
P 1 - SPR Spacing ( 1.8 to 7.7 µs) +
expected r eply delay ( 128 µs) +
r eply P 1 to desir ed tr igger point ( 0
to 120 µs) .
For ATC- 1400A contr ol, set ATC1400A T O /TAC/T D Switch to T O for
viewing inter r ogation at ATC1400A G EN Connector or T D for
viewing r eply at ATC- 1400A XMTR
Connector .
Connect
S- 1403DL
UUT
XMTR
Connector to O scilloscope for viewing
r eplies
at
S- 1403DL
ANT
B
Connector .
9. Verify UUT replies as follows:
FREQUENCY
Ver ify UUT tr ansmit fr equency on
ATC-1400A XMTR FREQ MHz Display.
REPLY DELAY
Ver ify r eply delay ( SPR to P 1 leading
edge in r eply) in Dly field. Ver ify Dly
field indicates 128.000 µs ( ± 0.5 µs) .
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
ModeS Enable to O N for activating
scope tr igger , depending on scope
tr igger field setting in individual
sequence menus.
For detailed r eply delay infor mation,
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 4 Keys
in sequence to display C40 Reply
Delay Contr ol Menu. If desir ed, pr ess
S- 1403DL CL/ESC Key to r eset fields.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d to set
ModeS Sour ce to CAL ( tr igger
position contr olled by AT C- 1400A)
or a numer ic value (S-1403DL
controls trigger position).
Ver ify per cent r eply in C10/C20 SEQ
Scr eens, AntA% and AntB% fields.
PERCENT REPLY
For detailed per cent r eply infor mation,
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 3 Keys
in sequence to display C30 Per cent
Reply Contr ol Menu. If desir ed, pr ess
S- 1403DL CL/ESC Key to r eset fields.
1- 2- 2
Page 16
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
STEP
PO WER
If the measur ement pulse
data is O ne and the
pr eceding pulse data is
Zer o, the power r eading is
zer o because of not
detecting a r ising edge.
Ver ify UUT power thr ough ANT A ( RF
I/O Connector ) shown on ATC- 1400A
XMTR PWR WATTS Display. Select
r eply pulse to measur e as follows:
Set AT C- 1400A F 2 /P 2 F 1 /P 1 Switch
to F 1 /P 1 to measur e pulse power
of P 1 r eply pulse only.
Set F 2 /P 2 F 1 /P 1 Switch to F 2 /P 2 for
S- 1403DL to contr ol pulse power
measur ement selection.
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and PPG
Keys in sequence to display C74
PPMG Setup Scr een.
C74
ATC
Enable:OFF
Pulse:A1
SETUP ModeS
ON
P100
PPMG (POWER)
DELM
OFF
1
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to set ModeS
Enable field to O N. Select from 1
to 60 ( shor t r eply) or 116 ( long
r eply) possible Mode S r eply
pulses for ModeS Pulse field.
NOTE: T he S- 1403DL enables the
measur ement gate pr ior to the
r ising edge of the pulse to be
measur ed. Measur ement
continues until the next falling
edge. Adjacent pulses in the
pulse position modulated
Mode S r eplies may cause
er r oneous power r eadings
with conditions as follows:
If the measur ement pulse
data is Zer o followed by a
O ne, the selected pulse
and following pulse ar e
measured together
because the following
pulse has the first
detectable falling edge.
PPMG
PROCEDURE
Pn-1 Pn(>5)
PPMG
Zero One
02402008
DATA
Pr ess S- 1403DL S MENU Key. Use
S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol ( cur sor in S
field) to display each active sequence
menu. Ver ify r eply data shown in S1403DL Sequence Menu scr eens.
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
O N/CAL Key to set desired format
type in RPLY field (D for decoded
subfields or N for not decoded data) .
( S- 1403DL displays r eply data using
the r adix selected in Step 3.)
10. Ver ify
UUT
Mode
infor mation as follows:
S
squitter
INTERVAL
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, FUNC#, 0 and
2 Keys in sequence to select SEQ
Scr een.
Ver ify inter val between
squitter s in Sqtr field. ( Nor mally 0.8
to 1.2 seconds.)
For DF17 type squitter inter vals,
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 6 Keys
in sequence to display C60 Squitter ( 2
of 2) Contr ol Menu.
C60
SQUITTER (2of2)
DF CA
AA
ME
II ANT TIME
11 4 A07613
0 A
1.00
17I 4 A07613 1A8C9A3124BA53 0 A 10.05
Ver ify squitter inter vals in DF17X
PERIO D field accor ding to 1- 2- 2,
Table 3.
Pn (>4) Pn+1
Zero One
02402007
1- 2- 2
Page 17
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.3.3
SIG NAL
DESCRIPTIO N
ADDRESS
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 5 Keys
in sequence to display C50 Squitter ( 1
of 2) Contr ol Menu. Ver ify Mode S
Addr ess ( air cr aft addr ess) in Addr
fields.
C50
SQUITTER (1of2)
Addr:h=A07613,o=50073023,Tail=N129KS
Country=United States
Counts/120s:DF11=110,DF17= 36,DF17S= 24
INFORMATION
Ver ify Tail and Countr y fields.
View squitter fields in hexadecimal:
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 6 Keys
in sequence to display C60 Squitter ( 2
of 2) Contr ol Menu. Use S- 1403DL
CURSO R Keys and O N/CAL Key to
set DF17 type (A, I, O , P, S or T).
Refer to 1- 2- 2, T able 4 for type
descr iption.
G eneral Test Sequence
Refer to 1- 2- 2, Figur e 4.
SIG NAL
1.
DESCRIPTIO N
Self Interr In (if selected)
Active low pulse fr om the ATC- 1400A
tr igger s the inter r ogation pr ocess
( C71
Inter r ogation
Tr igger
Setup
Scr een Tr ig Sour ce field set to
SelfInterr) .
The self inter r ogate
pulse r ising edge occur s 17.95 µs
pr ior to leading edge of P 1 or pr epulse
( when enabled) .
The S- 1403DL
r eceives the self inter r ogate pulse
thr ough the AUXILIARY Connector
( J10) .
2. Ext Sync In (if selected)
Active high pulse occur s 17.95 pr ior
to leading edge of P 1 or pr epulse
( when enabled) .
The S- 1403DL
r eceives the pulse thr ough the EXT
SYNC IN Connector ( J4) .
The
exter nal sync input r eplaces the self
inter r ogate input in tr igger ing the
inter r ogation
pr ocess
( C71
Inter r ogation Tr igger Setup Scr een
Trig Source field set to Ext SyncIn).
3. Pr epulse O ut ( when enabled)
Active high pulse, 1.0 µs wide, occur s
17.95 µs after the sync pulse r ising
edge ( self inter r ogate, exter nal sync
input or inter nal tr igger gener ator )
and 0 to 260 µs, as selected, pr ior to
P 1 leading edge.
The S- 1403DL
tr ansmits the pr epulse thr ough the
PREPULSE O UT Connector ( J9) .
4. Ext Sync O ut ( when enabled)
Active high pulse, 1.0 µs wide, occur s
fr om - 9.95 to +9.95 µs, as selected,
relative to P 1 leading edge of the
inter r ogation.
The
S- 1403DL
tr ansmits the pulse thr ough the EXT
SYNC O UT Connector ( J8) .
1- 2- 2
Page 18
Dec 1/03
50% VIDEO
(J10, PIN 11)
PPMG (J14)
EXT SLS
(J10, PIN 6)
DPSK OUT
(J15)
EXT PULSE
(J10, PIN 5)
ANT B (J2)
O
P1
2.0 µ s
P2
3.5 µ s
P1
4.75 µ s
T
UUT REPLY DELAY
(128 µs 0.25 µs TYPICAL)
1.0 µ s
0.2 µ s
P5
1.25 µ s
P6
127 µ s
TIME IN µs
P6
P2
1.0 µs
2.75 µ s
1.0 µs
SYNC PHASE REVERSAL
0.8 µ s
0.95 µ s
1.0 µs
-9.95 TO +9.95 µ s
0 TO 260 µ s
DEVIATION =
1.0 µs
IF SELECTED
UUT REPLY RECEIVED BY
ATC-1400A, SENT TO S-1403DL
IF SELECTED
WHEN ENABLED
WHEN ENABLED
EXT SYNC
OUT (J8)
SCOPE TRIG
OUT (J7)
WHEN ENABLED
17.95 µ s
IF SELECTED
PREPULSE
OUT (J9)
EXT SYNC
IN (J4)
SELF INTERR
(J10, PIN 14)
0.0
P1
D
1.0
P2
1.0 µ s
3.5
P3
4.5
P4
< 1.0 µ s PRIOR TO
SELECTED PULSE
0.5 µ s
8.0 µ s
T
1.0 µs
8.0
0
BIT
2
1
BIT
3
1
BIT
n-2
1
BIT
n-1
0
BIT
n
9.0
P6
P7
Pn-2
Pn
02402002
Pn-1
DATA BLOCK 56 µ s OR 112 µ s
P5
0
BIT
1
PPM ENCODED REPLY DATA FORMS
THE DATA BLOCK. A PULSE IN THE
1ST HALF OF THE BIT POSITION
INDICATES ONE. A PULSE IN THE
2ND HALF INDICATES ZERO. THE
EXAMPLE REPLY WAVEFORM SHOWS
A BIT SEQUENCE OF 001...110.
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SEQ Function Timing Diagr am
Figur e 4
1- 2- 2
Page 19
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SIG NAL
DESCRIPTIO N
5. Scope Tr ig O ut
The S- 1403DL tr ansmits the active
high scope tr igger pulse thr ough the
SCO PE T RIG O UT Connector ( J7) .
Position,
r efer enced
to
ANT
A
inter r ogations, depends on the ATC1400A T O /TAC/T D Switch setting:
T O ( for viewing inter r ogations)
Leading edge of 4.75 µs wide
pulse occur s 1.0 µs prior to P 1
leading edge. Tr ailing edge
occur s 1.0 µs prior to SPR.
T D ( for viewing r eplies)
Leading edge of 8.0 µs wide pulse
occur s 127 µs after SPR (1.0 µs
prior to P 1 leading edge of the
expected r eply) .
Setting S- 1403DL C72 Scope Tr igger
Setup Scr een ModeS Sour ce field to a
numer ic value sets scope tr igger
leading edge at 0 to 255 µs fr om P 1 of
the ANT A inter r ogation.
6. ANT B ( when enabled)
Active high ANT B inter r ogation
pulses and DPSK data modulate RF
tr ansmitted thr ough the S- 1403DL
ANT B Connector ( J2) . T he S- 1403DL
offsets P 1 leading edge of the ANT B
inter r ogation fr om P 1 leading edge of
the ANT A inter r ogation accor ding to
the AntB field setting in the C10/C20
SEQ Scr een. ANT B and ANT A pulse
char acter istics ar e the same except
for pulse level.
SIG NAL
DESCRIPTIO N
7. Ext Pulse
Active low pulses tr ansmitted thr ough
the S- 1403DL AUXILIARY Connector
( J10) modulate the ATC- 1400A RF
output.
Pulse char acter istics var y
accor ding to test par ameter settings.
Refer to Step 7 of SEQ Function
Pr ocedur e ( 2.3.2 in 1- 2- 2) .
8. DPSK O ut
The DPSK output contains the uplink
for mat data infor mation used to
modulate the ANT A inter r ogation
signal. The data constantly changes
accor ding to the uplink for mats
selected
for
the
inter r ogation
sequence. Refer to Step 5 of SEQ
Function Pr ocedur e ( 2.3.2 in 1- 2- 2) .
The S- 1403DL tr ansmits the DPSK
modulation thr ough the DPSK O UT
Connector ( J15) to the ATC- 1400A.
9. Ext SLS ( when enabled)
Active low gate pulse enables ATC1400A SLS/ECHO Thumbwheels to
contr ol the level of P 5 ( SLS) or P 2
depending
on
the
ATC- 1400A
SLS/ECHO O N/O FF Switch position
and C10/C20 P2 field setting.
10. PPMG ( if selected)
The pulse power measur ement gate
( PPMG ) occur s <1.0 µs pr ior to the
leading edge of the selected pulse.
The S- 1403DL tr ansmits the PPMG
pulse thr ough the PPMG Connector
( J14) to the ATC- 1400A.
NOTE: The ATC- 1400A ignor es
PPMG if the ATC- 1400A F 2 /P 2
F 1 /P 1 Switch is set to F 1 /P 1 .
11. 50% Video
The Mode S Test System r eceives the
UUT r eply video thr ough ANT A ( ATC1400A RF I/O Connector ) . The ATC1400A sends the r eply video to the S1403DL
thr ough
the
AUXILIARY
Connector ( J10) .
1- 2- 2
Page 20
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.4 ACS FUNCTION
2.4.1
Descript ion
In the ACS Function, the Mode S Test
System tr ansmits ATCRBS O nly All Call
inter r ogations shown in Appendix E. The
Mode S T est System uses the ACS
Function to ver ify Mode S tr ansponder s do
not r eply and AT CRBS only tr ansponder s
r eply cor r ectly.
2.4.2
Proced u re
STEP
PROCEDURE
1. Connect test equipment accor ding to
1- 2- 2, Figur e 2.
2. Apply power to Mode S Test System.
3. Press S-1403DL 2ND, FUNC#, 0 and
3 Keys in sequence to select ACS
Scr een. If necessar y, use S- 1403DL
CURSO R Keys and SLEW Control to
set menu to C10.
C10 f03:ACS (All Call Short)
Arf:-1.1
P4:VAR,Wd:CAL ,Dv:CAL
P3:CAL
DF=--,AA=------ Dly= 3.0000 Sqtr= 1.10
AntA%:ATC=100,S= 0 AntB%=100 AntB:+.95
4. Set test par ameter s as follows:
INTERROGATION MODULATION
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and EX MO D
Keys in sequence to move cur sor to
C75 Setup Scr een AntAModSr c.
C75
SETUP - MISC
AntAEnable:ON
PrePulseOut:253µs
AntAModSrc:INT
AntBModSrc:INT
Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
AntAModSr c ( modulation for signal
out AT C- 1400A RF I/O Connector ) to:
EXT to deactivate inter nal pulse
modulation and use exter nal
modulation thr ough S- 1403DL EXT
MO D IN Connector . The Mode S
T est System disr egar ds inter nal
pulse contr ol settings for the
applicable antenna connector .
STEP
PROCEDURE
INT/EXT to accept exter nal pulse
modulation thr ough S- 1403DL EXT
MO D IN Connector in addition to
nor mal inter nal modulation.
INT for nor mal Mode S Test
System inter nal modulation.
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R and O N/CAL
Keys to set AntBModSr c ( modulation
for signal out S- 1403DL ANT B
Connector ) as desir ed.
MO DE SELECTIO N
Use ATC- 1400A XPDR MO DE Contr ol
to select inter r ogation mode (1, 2, T,
A, B, C or D).
FREQUENCY
Adjust ATC-1400A FREQ /FUNCTIO N
Thumbwheels and ∆F Thumbwheels to
set inter r ogation RF fr om 952.01 to
1222.99 MHz. Set to 1030 MHz for
nor mal oper ation.
RF LEVEL
Adjust ATC- 1400A RF LEVEL Contr ol
to set RF LEVEL - dBm Display fr om
127 ( - 127 dBm) to 0 (0 dBm) . Normal
oper ating r ange is - 69 to - 21 dBm.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set Ar f field
from -3.0 to +3.0 in dB to offset cable
loss and/or other exter nal factor s.
Pr ess S- 1403DL ENTER Key.
INTERROGATION RATE
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 1
Keys in sequence to enter C71
Inter r ogation Tr igger Setup Scr een.
C71
SETUP - INTERROGATION TRIGGER
TrigSource:TrigGen
TrigGen:
450Hz
1- 2- 2
Page 21
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
CAUTION:
CONTINUOUS HIGH PRF
WIT H HIG H UUT PO WER
MAY DAMAG E S- 1403DL
( SEE 2.1.3 IN 1- 2- 2) .
Set
inter r ogation
r ate
or
pulse
r epetition fr equency ( PRF ) accor ding
to one of four ways as follows:
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to TrigGen and
T r igG en fr om 1 to 2500 Hz. Set
from 1 to 500 Hz for normal
oper ation.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to SelfInterr. Adjust
ATC- 1400A PRF/SQ TR
Thumbwheels to set PRF fr om 0 to
7999. Set from 0 to 500 for
nor mal oper ation.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to Ext Syn cIn.
Connect exter nal tr igger sour ce
pr oviding T T L level inter r ogation
tr igger pulse to S- 1403DL EXT
SYNC IN Connector . Leading
edge of P 1 or pr epulse ( when
enabled) occur s 17.95 µs after
leading edge of exter nal sync
pulse. Adjust exter nal tr igger
sour ce as desir ed.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to BurstKey to allow
manual tr igger ing of a single
inter r ogation by pr essing the S1403DL BURST Key.
PULSE WIDT H
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR PULSE WIDTH
VAR/CAL Switch to CAL for 0.8 µs
nominal width of P 1 , P 2 (SLS) (if
(if
activated)
activated)
and
P3
inter r ogation pulses.
Set XPDR
PULSE WIDT H VAR/CAL Switch to
VAR and use AT C- 1400A XPDR
PULSE WIDT H T humbwheels to adjust
width fr om 0.20 to 1.85 µs.
STEP
PRO CEDURE
P 2 ( SLS) LEVEL
Set ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O N.
Set P 2 ( SLS) level
using
ATC- 1400A
SLS/ECHO
Thumbwheels. Adjust level fr om - 19
to +6 dB, relative to P 1 level. Ver ify
suppr ession occur s when P 2 level is
≥ P 1 level.
Ver ify suppr ession does
not occur when P 2 level exceeds P 1
level by ≥ 9 dB.
P 2 (SLS) PO SITION
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL
Switch to CAL for nominal P 2 ( SLS)
position of 2.0 µs following P 1 leading
edge. Set XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL Switch
to - ' or + ' and adjust ATC- 1400A
XPDR P 2 /P 3 DEV Thumbwheels fr om
0.00 to 1.85 to set position fr om 0.15
to 3.85 µs following P 1 leading edge.
P 3 LEVEL
Set ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O F F. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND
and P3 Keys in sequence to move
cur sor to C10 Function 03 ACS P3
field. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
set P3 to VAR. Set P 3 level using
ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO Thumbwheels.
Adjust level fr om - 19 to +6 dB,
relative to P 1 level. 0 dB is nor mal
oper ating level ( P3:CAL ).
For P 3
deactivation, pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL
Key to set P3 to O F F.
P 3 PO SITIO N
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV P 3 /CAL
Switch to CAL for nominal P 3 position.
Refer to Appendix E for nominal
position. Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV
P 3 /CAL Switch to - ' or + ' and adjust
DEV
ATC- 1400A
XPDR
P 2 /P 3
Thumbwheels fr om 0.00 to 1.85 to
deviate position - 1.85 to +1.85 µs
fr om nominal.
1- 2- 2
Page 22
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
P 4 L EVEL
Set AT C- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O F F. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND
and P4/P6 Keys in sequence to move
cur sor to C10 Function 03 ACS P4
field. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
set P4 to VAR. Set P 4 level using
AT C- 1400A SLS/ECHO T humbwheels.
Adjust level fr om - 19 to +6 dB,
relative to P 1 level. 0 dB is nor mal
oper ating level ( P4:CAL ).
For P 4
deactivation, pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL
Key to set P4 to O F F.
P 4 WIDTH
Use
S-1403DL
CURSO R
Keys,
O N/CAL Key and SLEW Contr ol to set
P4:Wd: field as desir ed. Set to CAL
for nominal 0.8 µs P 4 pulse width.
Var y P 4 pulse width ( 0.2 to 3.55 µs)
by setting P4:Wd: field fr om -0.60 to
+2.75 ( µs fr om nominal width) .
NOTE: Setting P 4 wider than 1.5 µs
tur ns an AT CRBS O nly All
Call to an ATCRBS/Mode S
All Call. ATCRBS O nly All
Call inter r ogations r equir e P 4
width <1.2 µs.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Set level from -19 to +6 dB
(relative to P 1 ) using ATC- 1400A
SLS/ECHO Thumbwheels.
Set width fr om 0.2 to 5 µs using
ATC- 1400A INTRF PULSE WIDTH
Contr ol.
SUPPRESSO R PULSE
Connect ATC- 1400A SUPPRESSO R
O UTPUT
Connector
to
UUT
suppr essor input.
Set ATC- 1400A
SUPPRESSO R O N/O FF Switch to O N
to activate 33 µs wide ( fixed)
suppr essor pulse.
Adjust level fr om 3 to 27 V using
ATC- 1400A SUPPRESSO R VAR
Adjustment.
Set ATC-1400A DBL INTERR/INTRF
PULSE Thumbwheels to O F F to
position suppr essor pulse 0.8 µs
before P 3 . Set DBL INTERR/INTRF
PULSE Thumbwheels from 017.5
INTERF- to 399.9 INTERF+ to
adjust suppr essor pulse position
fr om - 17.5 to +399.9 µs relative to
P 1 . ( Suppr essor pulse r eplaces
inter fer ence pulse when both ar e
activated.)
P 4 PO SIT IO N
ANT B
Use
S-1403DL
CURSO R
Keys,
O N/CAL Key and SLEW Contr ol to set
P4:Dv: field as desir ed. Set to CAL
for nominal P 4 leading edge position
(2.0 µs following P 3 leading edge) .
Set P 4 position fr om 0.05 to 3.95 µs
following P 3 by setting P4:Dv: field
from -1.95 to +1.95 ( µs fr om nominal
position) .
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and ANT B Keys
in sequence to move cur sor to AntB
field. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
activate inter r ogations thr ough ANT B
Connector .
Use SLEW Contr ol and
Keyboar d to enter value fr om -0.95 to
+0.95 ( offset in 0.05 µs incr ements
fr om ANT A inter r ogations) . Without
the
Multi- Level
Diver sity
( MLD)
option, ANT B output level is - 50 dBm.
INTERFERENCE PULSE
Set AT C- 1400A DBL INT ERR/INTRF
PULSE
Thumbwheels
fr om
017.5
INTERF- to 399.9 INTERF+ to enable
and position inter fer ence pulse at 17.5 to +399.9 µs fr om leading edge
of P 1 or pr epulse, if active.
If MLD is installed, set ANT B output
level. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys
and SLEW Contr ol to set menu to
C20. Use CURSOR Keys to select Brf
fields.
Use SLEW Contr ol and
Keyboar d to set fir st field fr om - 80 to
- 20 dBm and second field fr om -3.0 to
+3.0 dB ( used to offset cable loss) .
1- 2- 2
Page 23
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
5. If desir ed, set optional outputs as
follows:
PREPULSE O UT
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and P PULS
Keys in sequence to move cur sor to
C75 Setup Scr een Pr ePulseO ut field.
Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
activate pr epulse thr ough S- 1403DL
PREPULSE O UT Connector . Use S1403DL SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d
to enter 0 to 260 µs ( time fr om
pr epulse leading edge to P 1 leading
edge) .
EXT SYNC O UT
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and EX SYN
Keys in sequence to move cur sor to
C73 Setup Scr een Enable field. Use
S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and O N/CAL
Key to set ACS Enable field O N for
activating exter nal sync pulse thr ough
S- 1403DL EXT SYNC O UT Connector .
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d to set Dv
field fr om -9.95 to +9.95 µs ( time fr om
exter nal sync pulse leading edge to
P 1 leading edge) ( - , P 1 follows
exter nal sync; +, external sync follows
P 1 ).
C73
SETUP - EXT SYNC OUT
ATC ModeS ACS ACL
Enable:OFF OFF
ON OFF
Dv:+1.00µS
SCO PE TRIG O UT
Set scope tr igger output thr ough S1403DL SCO PE T RIG O UT Connector
for
desir ed
O scilloscope
display.
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 2
Keys in sequence to enter C72 Setup
Scr een.
C72
SETUP - SCOPE TRIGGER
ATC ModeS ACS ACL
Enable:ON ON
ON OFF
Source:CAL 200
CAL CAL
(in µS)
STEP
PRO CEDURE
Set scope tr igger as follows:
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
ACS Enable to O N to activate
scope tr igger .
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
ACS Sour ce to CAL ( ATC- 1400A
contr ols scope tr igger position) .
Set ATC- 1400A T O /TAC/T D Switch
to T O for viewing inter r ogation at
ATC- 1400A G EN Connector or T D
for viewing r eply at ATC- 1400A
XMTR Connector .
Connect
S- 1403DL
UUT
XMTR
Connector to O scilloscope for viewing
UUT r eplies at S- 1403DL ANT B
Connector .
6. Verify UUT replies as follows:
Ver ify ATCRBS only tr ansponder s
r eply to nor mal inter r ogations without
suppr ession.
Ver ify
Mode
S
tr ansponder s do not r eply.
FREQUENCY
Ver ify UUT tr ansmit fr equency on
ATC-1400A XMTR FREQ MHz Display.
ACCURACY
Set ATC- 1400A DISPLAY SELECT
Contr ol to XPDR CODE and ver ify
r eply code on ATC- 1400A DISPLAY
SELECT Readout.
View r eply
Channel 2.
pulses
on
O scilloscope
REPLY DELAY
Ver ify r eply delay ( P 3 leading edge to
F 1 leading edge) in Dly field. Ver ify
Dly field indicates 3.000 µs ( ± 0.5 µs) .
For detailed r eply delay infor mation,
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 4 Keys
in sequence to display C40 Reply
Delay Contr ol Menu. If desir ed, pr ess
S- 1403DL CL/ESC Key to r eset fields.
1- 2- 2
Page 24
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
PERCENT REPLY
Ver ify per cent r eply in C10/C20 ACS
Scr een AntA% and AntB% fields.
STEP
PROCEDURE
7. Ver ify
UUT
Mode
infor mation as follows:
S
squitter
INTERVAL
For detailed per cent r eply infor mation,
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 3 Keys
in sequence to display C30 Per cent
Reply Contr ol Menu. If desir ed, pr ess
S- 1403DL CL/ESC Key to r eset fields.
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, FUNC#, 0 and
3 Keys in sequence to select ACS
Scr een.
Ver ify inter val between
squitter s in Sqtr field. ( Nor mally 0.8
to 1.2 seconds.)
PO WER
For DF17 type squitter inter vals,
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 6 Keys
in sequence to display C60 Squitter ( 2
of 2) Contr ol Menu.
Ver ify UUT power thr ough ANT A ( RF
I/O Connector ) shown on ATC- 1400A
XMTR PWR WATTS Display. Select
r eply pulse to measur e as follows:
Set AT C- 1400A F 2 /P 2 F 1 /P 1 Switch
to F 1 /P 1 to measur e pulse power
of F 1 r eply pulse only.
C60
SQUITTER (2of2)
DF CA
AA
ME
II ANT TIME
11 4 A07613
0 A
1.00
17I 4 A07613 1A8C9A3124BA53 0 A 10.05
Set F 2 /P 2 F 1 /P 1 Switch to F 2 /P 2 for
S- 1403DL to contr ol pulse power
measur ement selection.
Ver ify squitter inter vals in DF17X
PERIO D field accor ding to 1- 2- 2,
Table 3.
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and PPG
Keys in sequence to display C74
PPMG Setup Scr een.
ADDRESS
C74
ATC
Enable:ON
Pulse:A2
SETUP ModeS
OFF
P116
PPMG (POWER)
DELM
OFF
1
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to set ATC Enable
field to O N and select one of 16
possible AT CRBS r eply pulses for
AT C Pulse field.
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 5 Keys
in sequence to display C50 Squitter ( 1
of 2) Contr ol Menu. Ver ify Mode S
Addr ess ( air cr aft addr ess) in Addr
fields.
C50
SQUITTER (1of2)
Addr:h=A07613,o=50073023,Tail=N129KS
Country=United States
Counts/120s:DF11=110,DF17= 36,DF17S= 24
INFORMATION
Ver ify Tail and Countr y fields.
View squitter fields in hexadecimal:
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 6 Keys
in sequence to display C60 Squitter ( 2
of 2) Contr ol Menu. Use S- 1403DL
CURSO R Keys and O N/CAL Key to
set DF17 type (A, I, O , P, S or T).
Refer to 1- 2- 2, Table 4 for type
descr iption.
1- 2- 2
Page 25
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.4.3
G eneral Test Sequ ence
Refer to 1- 2- 2, Figur e 5.
SIG NAL
1.
DESCRIPTIO N
SIG NAL
5. Scope Tr ig O ut
The S- 1403DL tr ansmits the active
high scope tr igger pulse thr ough the
SCO PE TRIG O UT Connector ( J7) .
Position,
r efer enced
to
ANT
A
inter r ogations, depends on the ATC1400A T O /TAC/T D Switch setting:
Self Interr In (if selected)
Active low pulse fr om the ATC- 1400A
tr igger s the inter r ogation pr ocess
( C71
Inter r ogation
T r igger
Setup
Scr een Tr ig Sour ce field set to
SelfInterr) .
The self inter r ogate
pulse r ising edge occur s 17.95 µs
pr ior to leading edge of P 1 or pr epulse
( when enabled) .
T he S- 1403DL
r eceives the self inter r ogate pulse
thr ough the AUXILIARY Connector
( J10) .
T O ( for viewing inter r ogations)
Leading edge occur s 1.0 µs pr ior
to P 1 leading edge and tr ailing
edge occur s 1.0 µs prior to P 4
leading edge.
T D ( for viewing r eplies)
2. Ext Sync In (if selected)
Active high pulse occur s 17.95 pr ior
to leading edge of P 1 or pr epulse
( when enabled) .
T he S- 1403DL
r eceives the pulse thr ough the EXT
SYNC IN Connector ( J4) .
The
exter nal sync input r eplaces the self
inter r ogate input in tr igger ing the
inter r ogation
pr ocess
( C71
Inter r ogation Tr igger Setup Scr een
Trig Source field set to Ext Syn cIn).
3. Pr epulse O ut ( when enabled)
Active high pulse, 1.0 µs wide, occur s
17.95 µs after the sync pulse r ising
edge ( self inter r ogate, exter nal sync
input or inter nal tr igger gener ator )
and 0 to 260 µs, as selected, pr ior to
P 1 leading edge of the inter r ogation.
T he S- 1403DL tr ansmits the pr epulse
thr ough
the
PREPULSE
O UT
Connector ( J9) .
4. Ext Sync O ut ( when enabled)
DESCRIPTIO N
Leading edge of 8.0 µs wide pulse
occur s 2.0 µs following P 3 (1.0 µs
prior to F 1 leading edge of the
expected r eply) .
6.
ATCRBS O ut
Active low pulse, 3.0 µs wide, occur s
1.0 µs pr ior to P 1 leading edge. The
S- 1403DL tr ansmits the pulse thr ough
the ATCRBS O UT Connector ( J5) .
7. ANT B ( when enabled)
Active high ANT B inter r ogation
pulses
modulate
RF
tr ansmitted
thr ough
the
S- 1403DL
ANT
B
Connector ( J2) .
The S- 1403DL
offsets P 1 leading edge of the ANT B
inter r ogation fr om P 1 leading edge of
the ANT A inter r ogation accor ding to
the AntB field setting in the C10/C20
ATC Scr een. ANT B and ANT A pulse
char acter istics ar e the same except
for pulse level.
Active high pulse, 1.0 µs wide, occur s
fr om - 9.95 to +9.95 µs, as selected,
relative to P 1 leading edge of the
inter r ogation.
T he
S- 1403DL
tr ansmits the pulse thr ough the EXT
SYNC O UT Connector ( J8) .
1- 2- 2
Page 26
Dec 1/03
UUT REPLY RECEIVED BY
IF SELECTED
O
P1
2.0 µ s
P2
MODE SPACING
P1
T
UUT REPLY DELAY
(3.0 µ s 0.5 µ s TYPICAL)
0.8 µ s
0.95 µ s
1.0 µs
3.0 µs
1.0 µs
-9.95 TO +9.95 µ s
0 TO 260 µ s
DEVIATION =
1.0 µs
IF SELECTED
50% VIDEO
ATC-1400A, SENT TO S-1403DL
(J10, PIN 11)
(ATCRBS ONLY XPDR)
PPMG (J14)
EXT SLS
(J10, PIN 6)
EXT PULSE
(J10, PIN 5)
ANT B (J2)
ATCRBS
OUT (J5)
WHEN ENABLED
WHEN ENABLED
EXT SYNC
OUT (J8)
SCOPE TRIG
OUT (J7)
WHEN ENABLED
17.95 µ s
IF SELECTED
PREPULSE
OUT (J9)
EXT SYNC
IN (J4)
SELF INTERR
(J10, PIN 14)
P3
0.8 µ s
P2
2.0 µ s
P4
0.8 µ s
P3
1.0 µs
F1
1 µs
A1
20.3 µ s
< 1.0 µ s PRIOR TO SELECTED PULSE
0.8 µ s
P4
D
8.0 µ s
T
8.0 µ s ( 0.01 µ s)
MODE A ONLY ALL CALL
F2
SPI
02402003
MODE C ONLY ALL CALL 21.0 µ s ( 0.01 µ s)
MODE
SPACING
INTERROGATION
TYPE
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ACS Function Timing Diagr am
Figur e 5
1- 2- 2
Page 27
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SIG NAL
DESCRIPTIO N
8. Ext Pulse
Active low pulses tr ansmitted thr ough
the S- 1403DL AUXILIARY Connector
( J10) modulate the ATC- 1400A RF
output.
Pulse char acter istics var y
accor ding to test par ameter settings.
Refer to Step 4 of ACS F unction
Pr ocedur e ( 2.4.2 in 1- 2- 2) .
9. Ext SLS ( when enabled)
Active low gate pulse enables ATC1400A SLS/ECHO T humbwheels to
contr ol the level of P 2 (SLS), P 3
and/or P 4 depending on the ATC1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O F F Switch
position, C10/C20 P3 field setting and
C10/C20 P4 field setting.
10. PPMG ( if selected)
The pulse power measur ement gate
( PPMG ) occur s <1.0 µs pr ior to the
eading edge of the selected pulse.
T he S- 1403DL tr ansmits the PPMG
pulse thr ough the PPMG Connector
( J14) to the ATC- 1400A.
NOTE: The ATC- 1400A ignor es
PPMG if the AT C- 1400A F 2 /P 2
F 1 /P 1 Switch is set to F 1 /P 1 .
11. 50% Video
The Mode S T est System r eceives the
UUT ( ATCRBS only tr ansponder ) r eply
video thr ough ANT A ( AT C- 1400A RF
I/O Connector ) .
The AT C- 1400A
sends the r eply video to the S- 1403DL
thr ough the AUXILIARY Connector
( J10) .
When the ACS Function
oper ates without pulse adjustments,
the Mode S T est System expects no
r eply
video
fr om
Mode
S
tr ansponder s.
1- 2- 2
Page 28
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.5 ACL FUNCTION
2.5.1
Descript ion
In the ACL F unction, the Mode S Test
System tr ansmits ATCRBS/Mode S All Call
inter r ogations shown in Appendix E. The
Mode S T est System uses the ACL Function
to ver ify AT CRBS and Mode S tr ansponder s
r espond and oper ate cor r ectly.
2.5.2
STEP
PROCEDURE
INT/EXT to accept exter nal pulse
modulation thr ough S- 1403DL EXT
MO D IN Connector in addition to
nor mal inter nal modulation.
INT for nor mal Mode S Test
System inter nal modulation.
Proced u re
1. Connect test equipment accor ding to
1- 2- 2, Figur e 2.
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R and O N/CAL
Keys to set AntBModSr c ( modulation
for signal out S- 1403DL ANT B
Connector ) as desir ed.
2. Apply power to Mode S Test System.
MO DE SELECTIO N
3. Press S-1403DL 2ND, FUNC#, 0 and
4 Keys in sequence to select ACL
Scr een. If necessar y, use S- 1403DL
CURSO R Keys and SLEW Control to
set menu to C10.
Use ATC- 1400A XPDR MO DE Contr ol
to select inter r ogation mode (1, 2, T,
A, B, C or D).
STEP
PROCEDURE
C10 f04:ACL (All Call Long)
Arf:-0.2
P4:CAL,Wd:-0.10,Dv:+1.05
P3:CAL
DF=11,AA=123456 Dly=128.0000 Sqtr= 0.98
AntA%:ATC= 0,S= 90 AntB%= 90 AntB:+.95
4. Set test par ameter s as follows:
INTERROGATION MODULATION
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and EX MO D
Keys in sequence to move cur sor to
C75 Setup Scr een AntAModSr c.
C75
SETUP - MISC
AntAEnable:ON
PrePulseOut:253µs
AntAModSrc:INT
AntBModSrc:INT
Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
AntAModSr c ( modulation for signal
out AT C- 1400A RF I/O Connector ) to:
EXT to deactivate inter nal pulse
modulation and use exter nal
modulation thr ough S- 1403DL EXT
MO D IN Connector . The Mode S
T est System disr egar ds inter nal
pulse contr ol settings for the
applicable antenna connector .
FREQUENCY
Adjust ATC-1400A FREQ /FUNCTIO N
Thumbwheels and ∆F Thumbwheels to
set inter r ogation RF fr om 952.01 to
1222.99 MHz. Set to 1030 MHz for
nor mal oper ation.
RF LEVEL
Adjust ATC- 1400A RF LEVEL Contr ol
to set RF LEVEL - dBm Display fr om
127 ( - 127 dBm) to 0 (0 dBm) . Normal
oper ating r ange is - 69 to - 21 dBm.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set Ar f field
from -3.0 to +3.0 in dB to offset cable
loss and/or other exter nal factor s.
Pr ess S- 1403DL ENTER Key.
INTERROGATION RATE
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 1
Keys in sequence to enter C71
Inter r ogation Tr igger Setup Scr een.
C71
SETUP - INTERROGATION TRIGGER
TrigSource:TrigGen
TrigGen:
450Hz
1- 2- 2
Page 29
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
CAUTION:
CONTINUOUS HIGH PRF
WIT H HIG H UUT PO WER
MAY DAMAG E S- 1403DL
( SEE 2.1.3 IN 1- 2- 2) .
Set
inter r ogation
r ate
or
pulse
r epetition fr equency ( PRF ) accor ding
to one of four ways as follows:
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to TrigGen and
T r igG en fr om 1 to 2500 Hz. Set
from 1 to 500 Hz for normal
oper ation.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to SelfInterr. Adjust
ATC- 1400A PRF/SQ TR
Thumbwheels to set PRF fr om 0 to
2500. Set from 0 to 500 for
nor mal oper ation.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to Ext Syn cIn.
Connect exter nal tr igger sour ce
pr oviding T T L level inter r ogation
tr igger pulse to S- 1403DL EXT
SYNC IN Connector . Leading
edge of P 1 or pr epulse ( when
enabled) occur s 17.95 µs after
leading edge of exter nal sync
pulse. Adjust exter nal tr igger
sour ce as desir ed.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to BurstKey to allow
manual tr igger ing of a single
inter r ogation by pr essing the S1403DL BURST Key.
PULSE WIDT H
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR PULSE WIDTH
VAR/CAL Switch to CAL for 0.8 µs
nominal width of P 1 , P 2 (SLS) (if
(if
activated)
activated)
and
P3
inter r ogation pulses.
Set XPDR
PULSE WIDT H VAR/CAL Switch to
VAR and use AT C- 1400A XPDR
PULSE WIDT H T humbwheels to adjust
width fr om 0.20 to 1.85 µs.
STEP
PRO CEDURE
P 2 ( SLS) LEVEL
Set ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O N.
Set P 2 ( SLS) level
using
ATC- 1400A
SLS/ECHO
Thumbwheels. Adjust level fr om - 19
to +6 dB, relative to P 1 level. Ver ify
suppr ession occur s when P 2 level is
≥ P 1 level.
Ver ify suppr ession does
not occur when P 2 level exceeds P 1
level by ≥ 9 dB.
P 2 (SLS) PO SITION
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL
Switch to CAL for nominal P 2 ( SLS)
position of 2.0 µs following P 1 leading
edge. Set XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL Switch
to - ' or + ' and adjust ATC- 1400A
XPDR P 2 /P 3 DEV Thumbwheels fr om
0.00 to 1.85 to set position fr om 0.15
to 3.85 µs following P 1 leading edge.
P 3 LEVEL
Set ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O F F. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND
and P3 Keys in sequence to move
cur sor to C10 Function 04 ACL P3
field. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
set P3 to VAR. Set P 3 level using
ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO Thumbwheels.
Adjust level fr om - 19 to +6 dB,
relative to P 1 level. 0 dB is nor mal
oper ating level ( P3:CAL ).
For P 3
deactivation, pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL
Key to set P3 to O F F.
P 3 PO SITIO N
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV P 3 /CAL
Switch to CAL for nominal P 3 position.
Refer to Appendix E for nominal
position. Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV
P 3 /CAL Switch to - ' or + ' and adjust
DEV
ATC- 1400A
XPDR
P 2 /P 3
Thumbwheels fr om 0.00 to 1.85 to
deviate position - 1.85 to +1.85 µs
fr om nominal.
1- 2- 2
Page 30
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
P 4 L EVEL
Set AT C- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O F F. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND
and P4/P6 Keys in sequence to move
cur sor to C10 F unction 04 ACL P4
field. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
set P4 to VAR. Set P 4 level using
AT C- 1400A SLS/ECHO T humbwheels.
Adjust level fr om - 19 to +6 dB,
relative to P 1 level. 0 dB is nor mal
oper ating level ( P4:CAL ).
For P 4
deactivation, pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL
Key to set P4 to O F F.
P 4 WIDTH
Use
S-1403DL
CURSO R
Keys,
O N/CAL Key and SLEW Contr ol to set
P4:Wd: field as desir ed. Set to CAL
for nominal 1.6 µs P 4 pulse width.
Var y P 4 pulse width ( 0.2 to 3.55 µs)
by setting P4:Wd: field fr om -1.40 to
+1.95 ( µs fr om nominal width) .
NOTE: Setting P 4 width <1.2 µs tur ns
an AT CRBS/Mode- S All Call
to an AT CRBS O nly All Call.
ATCRBS/Mode S All Call
inter r ogations r equir e P 4
width >1.5 µs.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Set level from -19 to +6 dB
(relative to P 1 ) using ATC- 1400A
SLS/ECHO Thumbwheels.
Set width fr om 0.2 to 5 µs using
ATC- 1400A INTRF PULSE WIDTH
Contr ol.
SUPPRESSO R PULSE
Connect ATC- 1400A SUPPRESSO R
O UTPUT
Connector
to
UUT
suppr essor input.
Set ATC- 1400A
SUPPRESSO R O N/O FF Switch to O N
to activate 33 µs wide ( fixed)
suppr essor pulse.
Adjust level fr om 3 to 27 V using
ATC- 1400A SUPPRESSO R VAR
Adjustment.
Set ATC-1400A DBL INTERR/INTRF
PULSE Thumbwheels to O F F to
position suppr essor pulse 0.8 µs
before P 3 . Set DBL INTERR/INTRF
PULSE Thumbwheels from 017.5
INTERF- to 399.9 INTERF+ to
adjust suppr essor pulse position
fr om - 17.5 to +399.9 µs relative to
P 1 . ( Suppr essor pulse r eplaces
inter fer ence pulse when both ar e
activated.)
P 4 PO SIT IO N
ANT B
Use
S-1403DL
CURSO R
Keys,
O N/CAL Key and SLEW Contr ol to set
P4:Dv: field as desir ed. Set to CAL
for nominal P 4 leading edge position
(2.0 µs following P 3 leading edge) .
Set P 4 position fr om 0.05 to 3.95 µs
following P 3 by setting P4:Dv: field
from -1.95 to +1.95 ( µs fr om nominal
position) .
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and ANT B Keys
in sequence to move cur sor to AntB
field. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
activate inter r ogations thr ough ANT B
Connector .
Use SLEW Contr ol and
Keyboar d to enter value fr om -0.95 to
+0.95 ( offset in 0.05 µs incr ements
fr om ANT A inter r ogations) . Without
the
Multi- Level
Diver sity
( MLD)
option, ANT B output level is - 50 dBm.
INTERFERENCE PULSE
Set AT C- 1400A DBL INT ERR/INTRF
PULSE
Thumbwheels
fr om
017.5
INTERF- to 399.9 INTERF+ to enable
and position inter fer ence pulse at 17.5 to +399.9 µs fr om leading edge
of P 1 or pr epulse, if active.
If MLD is installed, set ANT B output
level. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys
and SLEW Contr ol to set menu to
C20. Use CURSOR Keys to select Brf
fields.
Use SLEW Contr ol and
Keyboar d to set fir st field fr om - 80 to
- 20 dBm and second field fr om -3.0 to
+3.0 dB ( used to offset cable loss) .
1- 2- 2
Page 31
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
5. If desir ed, set optional outputs as
follows:
PREPULSE O UT
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and P PULS
Keys in sequence to move cur sor to
C75 Setup Scr een Pr ePulseO ut field.
Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
activate pr epulse thr ough S- 1403DL
PREPULSE O UT Connector . Use S1403DL SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d
to enter 0 to 260 µs ( time fr om
pr epulse leading edge to P 1 leading
edge) .
EXT SYNC O UT
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and EX SYN
Keys in sequence to move cur sor to
C73 Setup Scr een Enable field. Use
S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and O N/CAL
Key to set ACL Enable field O N for
activating exter nal sync pulse thr ough
S- 1403DL EXT SYNC O UT Connector .
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d to set Dv
field to -9.95 to +9.95 µs ( time fr om
exter nal sync pulse leading edge to
P 1 leading edge) ( - , P 1 follows
exter nal sync; +, external sync follows
P 1 ).
C73
SETUP - EXT SYNC OUT
ATC ModeS ACS ACL
Enable:OFF OFF
OFF ON
Dv:+1.00µS
SCO PE TRIG O UT
Set scope tr igger output thr ough S1403DL SCO PE T RIG O UT Connector
for
desir ed
O scilloscope
display.
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 2
Keys in sequence to enter C72 Setup
Scr een.
C72
SETUP - SCOPE TRIGGER
ATC ModeS ACS ACL
Enable:ON ON
OFF ON
Source:CAL CAL
CAL CAL
(in µS)
STEP
PRO CEDURE
Set scope tr igger as follows:
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
ACL Enable to O N to activate
scope tr igger .
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
ACL Sour ce to CAL ( ATC- 1400A
contr ols tr igger position) or a
numer ic value (S-1403DL controls
trigger position).
For S- 1403DL contr ol, use S1403DL SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d
to delay tr igger in µs following P 1
leading edge of the ANT A
inter r ogation. For detailed r eply
view, set ACL Sour ce field
accor ding to the following sum
( Maximum field setting is 255 µs) :
P 1 - P 3 Mode Spacing ( 5 to 25 µs) +
P 3 - P 4 spacing ( 0.05 to 3.95 µs) +
expected r eply delay ( 128 µs) +
r eply P 1 to desir ed tr igger point ( 0
to 120 µs) .
Set ATC- 1400A T O /TAC/T D Switch
to T O for viewing inter r ogation at
ATC- 1400A G EN Connector or T D
for viewing r eply at ATC- 1400A
XMTR Connector .
Connect
S- 1403DL
UUT
XMTR
Connector to O scilloscope for viewing
r eplies
at
S- 1403DL
ANT
B
Connector .
6. Verify UUT replies as follows:
FREQUENCY
Ver ify UUT tr ansmit fr equency on
ATC-1400A XMTR FREQ MHz Display.
ACCURACY
Press S-1403DL 2ND, FUNC#, 0 and
4 Keys in sequence to select ACL
Scr een. Ver ify DF field indicates 11
and AA field indicates cor r ect air cr aft
addr ess.
View r eply
Channel 2.
pulses
on
O scilloscope
1- 2- 2
Page 32
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
REPL Y DEL AY
Ver ify r eply delay ( SPR to P 1 leading
edge in r eply) in Dly field. Ver ify Dly
field indicates 128.000 µs ( ± 0.5 µs) .
For detailed r eply delay infor mation,
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 4 Keys
in sequence to display C40 Reply
Delay Contr ol Menu. If desir ed, pr ess
S- 1403DL CL/ESC Key to r eset fields.
PERCENT REPLY
Ver ify per cent r eply in C10/C20 ACL
Scr eens, AntA% and AntB% fields.
For detailed per cent r eply infor mation,
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 3 Keys
in sequence to display C30 Per cent
Reply Contr ol Menu. If desir ed, pr ess
S- 1403DL CL/ESC Key to r eset fields.
PO WER
Ver ify UUT power thr ough ANT A ( RF
I/O Connector ) shown on ATC- 1400A
XMTR PWR WATTS Display. Select
r eply pulse to measur e as follows:
Set AT C- 1400A F 2 /P 2 F 1 /P 1 Switch
to F 1 /P 1 to measur e pulse power
of P 1 r eply pulse only.
Set F 2 /P 2 F 1 /P 1 Switch to F 2 /P 2 for
S- 1403DL to contr ol pulse power
measur ement selection.
STEP
PROCEDURE
NOTE: The S- 1403DL enables the
measur ement gate pr ior to the
r ising edge of the pulse to be
measur ed. Measur ement
continues until the next falling
edge. Adjacent pulses in the
pulse position modulated
Mode S r eplies may cause
er r oneous power r eadings
with conditions as follows:
If the measur ement pulse
data is Zer o followed by a
O ne, the selected pulse
and following pulse ar e
measured together
because the following
pulse has the first
detectable falling edge.
PPMG
Pn (>4) Pn+1
Zero One
02402007
If the measurement pulse
data is One and the
preceding pulse data is
Zero, the power reading is
zero because of not
detecting a rising edge.
Pn-1 Pn(>5)
Zero One
PPMG
02402008
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and PPG
Keys in sequence to display C74
PPMG Setup Scr een.
C74
ATC
Enable:ON
Pulse:A2
SETUP ModeS
ON
P116
PPMG (POWER)
DELM
OFF
1
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to set ModeS
Enable field to O N. Select from 1
to 116 possible Mode S r eply
pulses for ModeS Pulse field.
1- 2- 2
Page 33
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.5.3
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
7. Ver ify
UUT
Mode
infor mation as follows:
G eneral Test Sequence
Refer to 1- 2- 2, Figur e 6.
S
squitter
INTERVAL
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, F UNC#, 0 and
4 Keys in sequence to select ACL
Scr een.
Ver ify inter val between
squitter s in Sqtr field. ( Nor mally 0.8
to 1.2 seconds.)
F or DF 17 type squitter inter vals,
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 6 Keys
in sequence to display C60 Squitter ( 2
of 2) Contr ol Menu.
C60
SQUITTER (2of2)
DF CA
AA
ME
II ANT TIME
11 4 A07613
0 A
1.00
17I 4 A07613 1A8C9A3124BA53 0 A 10.05
Ver ify squitter inter vals in DF17X
PERIO D field accor ding to 1- 2- 2,
Table 3.
ADDRESS
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 5 Keys
in sequence to display C50 Squitter ( 1
of 2) Contr ol Menu. Ver ify Mode S
Addr ess in Addr fields.
C50
SQUITTER (1of2)
Addr:h=A07613,o=50073023,Tail=N129KS
Country=United States
Counts/120s:DF11=110,DF17= 36,DF17S= 24
INFORMATION
Ver ify Tail and Countr y fields.
View squitter fields in hexadecimal:
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 6 Keys
in sequence to display C60 Squitter ( 2
of 2) Contr ol Menu. Use S- 1403DL
CURSO R Keys and O N/CAL Key to
set DF17 type (A, I, O , P, S or T).
Refer to 1-2-2, Table 4.
SIG NAL
1.
DESCRIPTIO N
Self Interr In (if selected)
Active low pulse fr om the ATC- 1400A
tr igger s the inter r ogation pr ocess
( C71
Inter r ogation
Tr igger
Setup
Scr een Tr ig Sour ce field set to
SelfInterr) .
The self inter r ogate
pulse r ising edge occur s 17.95 µs
pr ior to leading edge of P 1 or pr epulse
( when enabled) .
The S- 1403DL
r eceives the self inter r ogate pulse
thr ough the AUXILIARY Connector
( J10) .
2. Ext Sync In (if selected)
Active high pulse occur s 17.95 pr ior
to leading edge of P 1 or pr epulse
( when enabled) .
The S- 1403DL
r eceives the pulse thr ough the EXT
SYNC IN Connector ( J4) .
The
exter nal sync input r eplaces the self
inter r ogate input in tr igger ing the
inter r ogation
pr ocess
( C71
Inter r ogation Tr igger Setup Scr een
Trig Source field set to Ext SyncIn).
3. Pr epulse O ut ( when enabled)
Active high pulse, 1.0 µs wide, occur s
17.95 µs after the sync pulse r ising
edge ( self inter r ogate, exter nal sync
input or inter nal tr igger gener ator )
and 0 to 260 µs, as selected, pr ior to
P 1 leading edge of the inter r ogation.
The S- 1403DL tr ansmits the pr epulse
thr ough
the
PREPULSE
O UT
Connector ( J9) .
4. Ext Sync O ut ( when enabled)
Active high pulse, 1.0 µs wide, occur s
fr om - 9.95 to +9.95 µs, as selected,
relative to P 1 leading edge of the
inter r ogation.
The
S- 1403DL
tr ansmits the pulse thr ough the EXT
SYNC O UT Connector ( J8) .
1- 2- 2
Page 34
Dec 1/03
50% VIDEO
(J10, PIN 11)
PPMG (J14)
EXT SLS
(J10, PIN 6)
EXT PULSE
(J10, PIN 5)
ANT B (J2)
ATCRBS
OUT (J5)
0.8 µ s
0.95 µ s
1.0 µs
O
P1
T
1.0 µs
P2
P3
0.8 µ s
P2
P4
0.8 µ s
0.0
P1
127 µ s
P3
1.0 µs
TIME IN µs
UUT REPLY DELAY
(128 µs 0.25 µs TYPICAL)
P1
2.0 µ s
MODE SPACING
3.0 µs
1.0 µs
-9.95 TO +9.95 µ s
0 TO 260 µ s
DEVIATION =
1.0 µs
IF SELECTED
UUT REPLY RECEIVED BY
ATC-1400A, SENT TO S-1403DL
IF SELECTED
WHEN ENABLED
WHEN ENABLED
EXT SYNC
OUT (J8)
SCOPE TRIG
OUT (J7)
WHEN ENABLED
17.95 µ s
IF SELECTED
PREPULSE
OUT (J9)
EXT SYNC
IN (J4)
SELF INTERR
(J10, PIN 14)
1.0
P2
1.0 µ s
3.5
P3
4.5
P4
8.0
0
BIT
2
1
BIT
3
1
BIT
n-2
1
BIT
n-1
0
BIT
n
9.0
P6
P7
Pn-2
Pn-1
02402004
Pn
DATA BLOCK 56 µ s OR 112 µ s
P5
0
BIT
1
PPM ENCODED REPLY DATA FORMS
THE DATA BLOCK. A PULSE IN THE
1ST HALF OF THE BIT POSITION
INDICATES ONE. A PULSE IN THE
2ND HALF INDICATES ZERO. THE
EXAMPLE REPLY WAVEFORM SHOWS
A BIT SEQUENCE OF 001...110.
21.0 µ s ( 0.01 µ s)
MODE C/MODE S ALL CALL
< 1.0 µ s PRIOR TO
SELECTED PULSE
1.6 µ s
P4
D
8.0 µ s
T
8.0 µ s ( 0.01 µ s)
MODE A/MODE S ALL CALL
1.0 µs
MODE
SPACING
INTERROGATION
TYPE
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ACL Function Timing Diagr am
Figur e 6
1- 2- 2
Page 35
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SIG NAL
DESCRIPTIO N
5. Scope Tr ig O ut
The S- 1403DL tr ansmits the active
high scope tr igger pulse thr ough the
SCO PE T RIG O UT Connector ( J7) .
Position,
r efer enced
to
ANT
A
inter r ogations, depends on the ATC1400A T O /TAC/T D Switch setting:
T O ( for viewing inter r ogations)
Leading edge occur s 1.0 µs pr ior
to P 1 leading edge and tr ailing
edge occur s 1.0 µs prior to P 4
leading edge.
T D ( for viewing r eplies)
Leading edge of 8.0 µs wide pulse
occur s 127 µs following P 4 (1.0 µs
prior to P 1 leading edge of the
expected r eply) .
Setting S- 1403DL C72 Scope
T r igger Setup Scr een ModeS
Sour ce to a numer ic value sets
scope tr igger leading edge at 0 to
255 µs from P 1 of the ANT A
inter r ogation.
6.
ATCRBS O ut
Active low pulse, 3.0 µs wide, occur s
1.0 µs pr ior to P 1 leading edge of the
ANT A inter r ogation. The S- 1403DL
tr ansmits the pulse thr ough the
ATCRBS O UT Connector ( J5) .
7. ANT B ( when enabled)
Active high ANT B inter r ogation
pulses
modulate
RF
tr ansmitted
thr ough
the
S- 1403DL
ANT
B
Connector ( J2) .
T he S- 1403DL
offsets P 1 leading edge of the ANT B
inter r ogation fr om P 1 leading edge of
the ANT A inter r ogation accor ding to
the AntB field setting in the C10/C20
ATC Scr een. ANT B and ANT A pulse
char acter istics ar e the same except
for pulse level.
SIG NAL
DESCRIPTIO N
8. Ext Pulse
Active low pulses tr ansmitted thr ough
the S- 1403DL AUXILIARY Connector
( J10) modulate the ATC- 1400A RF
output.
Pulse char acter istics var y
accor ding to test par ameter settings.
Refer to Step 4 of ACL Function
Pr ocedur e ( 2.5.2 in 1- 2- 2) .
9. Ext SLS ( when enabled)
Active low gate pulse enables ATC1400A SLS/ECHO Thumbwheels to
contr ol the level of P 2 ( SLS) or P 3
depending
on
the
ATC- 1400A
SLS/ECHO O N/O FF Switch position
and C10/C20 P3 field setting.
10. PPMG ( if selected)
The pulse power measur ement gate
( PPMG ) occur s <1.0 µs pr ior to the
leading edge of the selected pulse.
The S- 1403DL tr ansmits the PPMG
pulse thr ough the PPMG Connector
( J14) to the ATC- 1400A.
NOTE: The ATC- 1400A ignor es
PPMG if the ATC- 1400A F 2 /P 2
F 1 /P 1 Switch is set to F 1 /P 1 .
11. 50% Video
The Mode S Test System r eceives the
UUT r eply video thr ough ANT A ( ATC1400A RF I/O Connector ) . The ATC1400A sends the r eply video to the S1403DL
thr ough
the
AUXILIARY
Connector ( J10) .
1- 2- 2
Page 36
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.6 INTLCE FUNCTION
2.6.1
Descript ion
In the INT LCE F unction, the Mode S Test
System tr ansmits AT CRBS inter r ogations
inter laced with Mode S inter r ogations. The
Mode S Test System measur es r eply
char acter istics to ver ify UUT oper ation in a
nor mal mixed envir onment.
The Mode S Test System tr ansmits:
ATCRBS inter r ogations accor ding to the
selected mode and PRF.
Mode S inter r ogations accor ding to the
sequence menus and S- 1403DL
C10/C20 f05 Ratio:1to field setting.
INTERROGATION
NUMBER SET BY
PRF (EACH SYNC)
Ratio: 1: 1
Ratio: 1: 2
Ratio: 1: 3
Ratio: 1: 4
1
A Mode S inter r ogation follows the fir st
ATCRBS inter r ogation. After sending the
number of ATCRBS inter r ogations set in the
S- 1403DL C10/C20 f05 Ratio:1to field, the
Mode S Test System tr ansmits the next
Mode S inter r ogation. Each Mode S
inter r ogation ther eafter follows the set
number of ATCRBS inter r ogations. Refer
to 1- 2- 2, Figur e 7. When tr ansmitted, P 1 of
the Mode S inter r ogation follows P 1 of the
ATCRBS inter r ogation after a 200 µs fixed
delay.
2
ATCRBS
MODE S
ATCRBS
ATCRBS
MODE S
ATCRBS
ATCRBS
3
4
ATCRBS
MODE S
ATCRBS
ATCRBS
ATCRBS
MODE S
ATCRBS
MODE S
ATCRBS
ATCRBS
ATCRBS
MODE S
ATCRBS
ATCRBS
ATCRBS
MODE S
5
MODE S
MODE S
ATCRBS
MODE S
ATCRBS
MODE S
ATCRBS
ATCRBS
MODE S
AND SO ON THROUGH Ratio 1:999
02402009
INT LCE Function Inter r ogation Sequence
Figur e 7
1- 2- 2
Page 37
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.6.2
ST EP
Pro ced u re
PRO CEDURE
1. Connect test equipment accor ding to
1- 2- 2, Figur e 2.
2. Apply power to Mode S Test System.
3. Ver ify Mode S T est System is not in
any function using sequence menus.
( S- 1403DL C10/C20 Contr ol Menu
Scr een does not indicate f02:SEQ ,
f05:INTLCE;
f06:DI;1st:SEQ ,
f06:DI;2nd:SEQ or f07:BURST ;SEQ .)
Use S- 1403DL Keyboar d to select any
other function, if necessar y.
4. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 6
Keys to display C76 SMENU Setup
Scr een. Set as follows:
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
O N/CAL Key to set SmenuRadix to
desir ed data for mat ( HEX
[hexadecimal] or OCTAL ).
Use S-1403DL CURSOR, ON/CAL
and ENTER Keys for changing
SetAllSmenu to O F F ( deactivates
all sequence menus) , DEFAULT
( activates/r esets default sequence
menus, deactivates all other s) or
ZERO (sets all fields except ADDR
to 0) . Refer to 1- 1- 2, Table 5 for
default sequence menus.
Use S-1403DL ON/CAL and ENTER
Keys to set ADDR in all sequence
menus by changing SetAllSmenu
to XPDR ( tr ansponder addr ess) or
USER ( addr ess fr om User = field) .
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to set alter nate
addr esses ( G lobalAddr :User =) and
par ity ( AP XO R=) fields as desir ed
for checking oper ation with bogus
addr esses or bad AP fields.
C76
SETUP - SMENU
SmenuRadix:OCTAL
SetAllSmenu:XPDR
GlobalAddr:Xpdr=17725762,AP XOR=00000000
GlobalAddr:User=10273645,AP XOR=00000001
STEP
PRO CEDURE
5. Pr ess S- 1403DL S MENU Key
display Mode S Sequence Menu.
to
S001:D;UF00,RL=0,CL=0,AQ=0,
+
ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;DF00,VS=0,SL=0,RI=00,AC=+ 31200,
ADDR=17725762
6. Set inter r ogation sequence as follows:
ACTIVATION
Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
activate or deactivate sequence menu.
FORMAT
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
O N/CAL Key to select format type for
active sequence menu.
Set to S
( shor t 56- bit tr ansmission) , L ( long
112- bit tr ansmission) or D ( decoded,
used for for mats with defined fields) .
UPLINK FORMAT
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d to select
desir ed uplink for mat.
DATA FIELDS
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to load data
fields accor ding to Appendix D. Refer
to Appendix B for defined fields and
1- 2- 2, Table 5 for converting data.
7. Press S-1403DL 2ND, FUNC#, 0 and
5 Keys in sequence to select Inter lace
Scr een. If necessar y, use S- 1403DL
CURSO R Keys and SLEW Control to
set menu to C10.
C10 f05:INTLCE;Ratio:1to 25
AntA%:ATC= 98,S=
Arf:+1.0
Dly= 2.9875 Sqtr= 1.05
2 AntB%=100 AntB:+.95
8. Press S-1403DL CURSO R Key ( →) to
move cur sor to Ratio:1to field. Use S1403DL SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d to
set number of ATCRBS inter r ogations
( 1 to 999) tr ansmitted for each Mode
S inter r ogation.
1- 2- 2
Page 38
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
9. Set test par ameter s as follows:
MO DE SELECTIO N
Use AT C- 1400A XPDR MO DE Contr ol
to select inter r ogation mode (1, 2, T,
A, B, C or D).
FREQUENCY
Adjust ATC-1400A FREQ /FUNCTIO N
Thumbwheels and ∆F Thumbwheels to
set inter r ogation RF fr om 952.01 to
1222.99 MHz. Set to 1030 MHz for
nor mal oper ation.
RF LEVEL
Adjust ATC- 1400A RF LEVEL Contr ol
to set RF LEVEL - dBm Display fr om
127 ( - 127 dBm) to 0 (0 dBm) . Normal
oper ating r ange is - 69 to - 21 dBm.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set Ar f field
from -3.0 to +3.0 in dB to offset cable
loss and/or other exter nal factor s.
Pr ess S- 1403DL ENT ER Key.
INTERROGATION RATE
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 1
Keys in sequence to enter C71
Inter r ogation T r igger Setup Scr een.
C71
SETUP - INTERROGATION TRIGGER
TrigSource:TrigGen
TrigGen:
450Hz
CAUTION:
CONTINUOUS HIGH PRF
WITH HIGH UUT POWER
MAY DAMAG E S- 1403DL
( SEE 2.1.3 IN 1- 2- 2) .
Set
inter r ogation
r ate
or
pulse
r epetition fr equency ( PRF ) accor ding
to one of four ways as follows:
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to TrigGen and
TrigGen fr om 1 to 1250 Hz. Set
from 1 to 500 Hz for normal
oper ation.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to SelfInterr. Set PRF
from 0 to 1250 Hz on AT C- 1400A
PRF/SQ TR Thumbwheels. Set
from 0 to 500 for nor mal oper ation.
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to Ext SyncIn.
Connect exter nal tr igger sour ce
pr oviding TTL level inter r ogation
tr igger pulse to S- 1403DL EXT
SYNC IN Connector . Leading
edge of P 1 or pr epulse ( when
enabled) occur s 17.95 µs after
leading edge of exter nal sync
pulse. Adjust exter nal tr igger
sour ce as desir ed.
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to BurstKey to allow
manual tr igger ing of a single
inter r ogation by pr essing the S1403DL BURST Key.
P 2 ( SLS) LEVEL
Set ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O N.
Set P 2 ( SLS) level
using
ATC- 1400A
SLS/ECHO
Thumbwheels. Adjust level fr om - 19
to +6 dB, relative to P 1 level. Ver ify
suppr ession occur s when P 2 level is
≥ P 1 level.
Ver ify suppr ession does
not occur when P 2 level exceeds P 1
level by ≥ 9 dB.
INTERFERENCE PULSE
Set ATC- 1400A DBL INTERR/INTRF
PULSE
Thumbwheels
fr om
017.5
INTERF- to 399.9 INTERF+ to enable
and position inter fer ence pulse at 17.5 to +399.9 µs fr om leading edge
of P 1 or pr epulse, if active.
Set level from -19 to +6 dB
(relative to P 1 ) using ATC- 1400A
SLS/ECHO Thumbwheels.
Set width fr om 0.2 to 5 µs using
ATC- 1400A INTRF PULSE WIDTH
Contr ol.
1- 2- 2
Page 39
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
SUPPRESSO R PULSE
Connect AT C- 1400A SUPPRESSO R
O UTPUT
Connector
to
UUT
suppr essor input.
Set ATC- 1400A
SUPPRESSO R O N/O FF Switch to O N
to activate 33 µs wide ( fixed)
suppr essor pulse.
STEP
10. If desir ed, set optional outputs as
follows:
PREPULSE O UT
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and P PULS
Keys in sequence to move cur sor to
C75 Setup Scr een Pr ePulseO ut field.
Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
activate pr epulse thr ough S- 1403DL
PREPULSE O UT Connector . Use S1403DL SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d
to enter 0 to 260 µs ( time fr om
pr epulse leading edge to P 1 leading
edge) .
Adjust level fr om 3 to 27 V using
ATC- 1400A SUPPRESSO R VAR
Adjustment.
Set ATC-1400A DBL INTERR/INTRF
PULSE T humbwheels to O F F to
position suppr essor pulse 0.8 µs
prior to P 3 . Set DBL
INTERR/INTRF PULSE
Thumbwheels from 017.5 INTERFto 399.9 INTERF+ to adjust
suppr essor pulse position fr om 17.5 to +399.9 µs relative to P 1 .
( Suppr essor pulse r eplaces
inter fer ence pulse when both ar e
activated.)
C75
SETUP - MISC
AntAEnable:ON
PrePulseOut:253µs
AntAModSrc:INT
AntBModSrc:INT
EXT SYNC O UT
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and EX SYN
Keys in sequence to move cur sor to
C73 Setup Scr een Enable field. Pr ess
O N/CAL Key to set ATC Enable field
O N for activating exter nal sync pulse
thr ough S- 1403DL EXT SYNC O UT
Connector . Use S- 1403DL CURSO R
Keys and SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d
to set Dv field from -9.95 to +9.95 µs
( time fr om exter nal sync pulse leading
edge to P 1 leading edge) ( - , P 1
follows exter nal sync; +, exter nal sync
follows P 1 ).
ANT B
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and ANT B Keys
in sequence to move cur sor to AntB
field. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
activate inter r ogations thr ough ANT B
Connector .
Use SLEW Contr ol and
Keyboar d to enter value fr om -0.95 to
+0.95 ( offset in 0.05 µs incr ements
fr om ANT A inter r ogations) . Without
the
Multi- Level
Diver sity
( MLD)
option, ANT B output level is - 50 dBm.
If MLD is installed, set ANT B output
level. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys
and SLEW Contr ol to set menu to
C20. Use CURSOR Keys to select Brf
fields.
Use SLEW Contr ol and
Keyboar d to set fir st field fr om - 80 to
- 20 dBm and second field fr om -3.0 to
+3.0 dB ( used to offset cable loss) .
PRO CEDURE
C73
SETUP - EXT SYNC OUT
ATC ModeS ACS ACL
Enable:ON OFF
OFF OFF
Dv:-2.25µS
SCO PE TRIG O UT
Set scope tr igger output thr ough S1403DL SCO PE TRIG O UT Connector
for
desir ed
O scilloscope
display.
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 2
Keys in sequence to enter C72 Setup
Scr een.
C72
SETUP - SCOPE TRIGGER
ATC ModeS ACS ACL
Enable:ON OFF
ON OFF
Source:CAL CAL
CAL CAL
(in µS)
1- 2- 2
Page 40
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
STEP
Set scope tr igger as follows:
REPLY DELAY
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 4 Keys
in sequence to display C40 Reply
Delay Contr ol Menu. If desir ed, pr ess
S- 1403DL CL/ESC Key to r eset fields.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
AT C Enable to O N.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
AT C Sour ce to CAL ( AT C- 1400A
contr ols scope tr igger position) .
Ver ify ATC fields indicate 3.0000 µs
( ± 0.5 µs) , Min= ≥ 2.5000 µs and Max=
≤ 3.5000 µs, for ATCRBS r eply delay
( P 3 leading edge to F 1 leading edge) .
Set AT C- 1400A T O /TAC/T D Switch
to T O ( AT CRBS inter r ogation/r eply
at ATC- 1400A G EN Connector ) or
T D ( Mode S inter r ogation/r eply at
AT C- 1400A XMT R Connector ) .
Ver ify ModeS fields show 128.0000 µs
( ± 0.5 µs) , Min= ≥127.5000 µs and
Max= ≤128.5000 µs, for Mode S r eply
delay ( SPR to r eply P 1 leading edge) .
Connect
S- 1403DL
UUT
XMTR
Connector to O scilloscope for viewing
UUT r eplies at S- 1403DL ANT B
Connector .
PERCENT REPLY
Ver ify per cent
INTLCE Scr een
fields.
11. Verify UUT replies as follows:
r eply in C10/C20
AntA% and AntB%
For detailed per cent r eply infor mation,
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 3 Keys
in sequence to display C30 Per cent
Reply Contr ol Menu. If desir ed, pr ess
S- 1403DL CL/ESC Key to r eset fields.
FREQUENCY
Ver ify UUT tr ansmit fr equency on
ATC-1400A XMTR FREQ MHz Display.
ACCURACY
PO WER
Set ATC- 1400A DISPLAY SELECT
Contr ol to XPDR CODE.
Verify
ATCRBS r eply shown on ATC- 1400A
DISPLAY SELECT Readout.
Ver ify UUT power thr ough ANT A ( RF
I/O Connector ) shown on ATC- 1400A
XMTR PWR WATTS Display. Select
r eply pulse ( only for ATCRBS r eplies)
to measur e as follows:
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR MO DE
Contr ol to A to verify octal ID.
Set ATC- 1400A F 2 /P 2 F 1 /P 1 Switch
to F 1 /P 1 to measur e pulse power
of F 1 r eply pulse only.
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR MO DE
Contr ol to AC 2 to ver ify altitude in
feet.
Pr ess S- 1403DL S MENU Key. Use
S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol ( cur sor in S
field) to display each active sequence
menu. Ver ify r eply data shown in S1403DL Sequence Menu scr eens.
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
O N/CAL Key to set desired format
type in RPLY field (D for decoded
subfields or N for not decoded data) .
( S- 1403DL displays r eply data using
the r adix selected in Step 4.)
View r eply
Channel 2.
PROCEDURE
pulses
on
Set F 2 /P 2 F 1 /P 1 Switch to F 2 /P 2 for
S- 1403DL to contr ol pulse power
measur ement selection.
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and PPG
Keys in sequence to display C74
PPMG Setup Scr een.
C74
ATC
Enable:ON
Pulse:B1
SETUP ModeS
ON
P116
PPMG (POWER)
DELM
OFF
1
O scilloscope
1- 2- 2
Page 41
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.6.3
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
Refer to 1- 2- 2, Figur e 8.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to set ATC Enable
field to O N and select one of 16
possible AT CRBS r eply pulses for
AT C Pulse field.
12. Ver ify
UUT
Mode
infor mation as follows:
G eneral Test Sequence
S
squitter
INTERVAL
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, F UNC#, 0 and
5 Keys in sequence to select Inter lace
Scr een.
Ver ify inter val between
squitter s in Sqtr field. ( Nor mally 0.8
to 1.2 seconds.)
F or DF 17 type squitter inter vals,
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 6 Keys
in sequence to display C60 Squitter ( 2
of 2) Contr ol Menu.
C60
SQUITTER (2of2)
DF CA
AA
ME
II ANT TIME
11 4 A07613
0 A
1.00
17I 4 A07613 1A8C9A3124BA53 0 A 10.05
Ver ify squitter inter vals in DF17X
PERIO D field accor ding to 1- 2- 2,
Table 3.
ADDRESS
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 5 Keys
in sequence to display C50 Squitter ( 1
of 2) Contr ol Menu. Ver ify Mode S
Addr ess in Addr fields.
C50
SQUITTER (1of2)
Addr:h=A07613,o=50073023,Tail=N129KS
Country=United States
Counts/120s:DF11=110,DF17= 36,DF17S= 24
INFORMATION
Ver ify Tail and Countr y fields.
View squitter fields in hexadecimal:
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 6 Keys
in sequence to display C60 Squitter ( 2
of 2) Contr ol Menu. Use S- 1403DL
CURSO R Keys and O N/CAL Key to
set DF17 type (A, I, O , P, S or T).
Refer to 1-2-2, Table 4.
SIG NAL
1.
DESCRIPTIO N
Self Interr In (if selected)
Active low pulse fr om the ATC- 1400A
tr igger s the inter r ogation pr ocess
( C71
Inter r ogation
Tr igger
Setup
Scr een Tr ig Sour ce field set to
SelfInterr) .
The self inter r ogate
pulse r ising edge occur s 17.95 µs
pr ior to leading edge of the ATCRBS
inter r ogation P 1 or pr epulse ( when
enabled) . T he S- 1403DL r eceives the
self inter r ogate pulse thr ough the
AUXILIARY Connector ( J10) .
2. Ext Sync In (if selected)
Active high pulse occur s 17.95 pr ior
to leading edge of P 1 or pr epulse
( when enabled) .
The S- 1403DL
r eceives the pulse thr ough the EXT
SYNC IN Connector ( J4) .
The
exter nal sync input r eplaces the self
inter r ogate input in tr igger ing the
inter r ogation
pr ocess
( C71
Inter r ogation Tr igger Setup Scr een
Trig Source field set to Ext SyncIn).
3. Pr epulse O ut ( when enabled)
Active high pulse, 1.0 µs wide, occur s
17.95 µs after the sync pulse r ising
edge ( self inter r ogate, exter nal sync
input or inter nal tr igger gener ator )
and 0 to 260 µs, as selected, pr ior to
the ATCRBS inter r ogation P 1 leading
edge.
The S- 1403DL tr ansmits the
pr epulse thr ough the PREPULSE O UT
Connector ( J9) .
4. Ext Sync O ut ( when enabled)
Active high pulse, 1.0 µs wide, occur s
fr om - 9.95 to +9.95 µs, as selected,
r elative to the ATCRBS inter r ogation
P 1 leading edge.
The S- 1403DL
tr ansmits the pulse thr ough the EXT
SYNC O UT Connector ( J8) .
1- 2- 2
Page 42
Dec 1/03
50% VIDEO
(J10, PIN 11)
P2
P2
P2
MODE SPACING
P1
P1
UUT REPLY RECEIVED BY
ATC-1400A, SENT TO S-1403DL
UUT REPLY DELAY
(3.0 µ s ±0.5 µ s TYPICAL)
P3
200 µ s
P3
F1
1 µs
1.0 µs
ATCRBS REPLY
IF SELECTED (MEASURES ONLY ATCRBS REPLY PULSES)
MODE S (SEQ) INTERROGATIONS ONLY
DPSK OUT
(J15)
PPMG (J14)
WHEN ENABLED
1.0 µs
EXT SLS
(J10, PIN 6)
EXT PULSE
(J10, PIN 5)
ANT B (J2)
ATCRBS
OUT (J5)
3.0 µs
T
O
WIDTH = MODE SPACING + 3.0 µ s
1.0 µs
-9.95 TO +9.95 µ s
0 TO 260 µ s
1.0 µs
IF SELECTED
DEVIATION = ± 0.95 µ s
WHEN ENABLED
EXT SYNC
OUT (J8)
SCOPE TRIG
OUT (J7)
WHEN ENABLED
17.95 µ s
IF SELECTED
PREPULSE
OUT (J9)
EXT SYNC
IN (J4)
SELF INTERR
(J10, PIN 14)
P1
3.5 µ s
P1
SPR
T
D
WIDTH = 132.75 µ s
F2
1.25 µ s
MODE S REPLY
UUT REPLY DELAY
(128 µ s ±.25 µ s TYPICAL)
< 1.0 µ s PRIOR TO SELECTED PULSE
1.0 µs
02402005
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
INT LCE Function Timing Diagr am
Figur e 8
1- 2- 2
Page 43
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SIG NAL
DESCRIPTIO N
5. Scope Tr ig O ut
The S- 1403DL tr ansmits the active
high scope tr igger pulse thr ough the
SCO PE T RIG O UT Connector ( J7) .
Position,
r efer enced
to
ANT
A
inter r ogations, depends on the ATC1400A T O /TAC/T D Switch setting:
T O ( for viewing AT CRBS
inter r ogations and r eplies)
Leading edge occur s 1.0 µs pr ior
to P 1 leading edge of the AT CRBS
inter r ogation and tr ailing edge
occur s 1.0 µs prior to F 1 leading
edge of the expected r eply.
T D ( for viewing Mode S
inter r ogations and r eplies)
Leading edge of 132.75 µs wide
pulse occur s 1.0 µs prior to P 1
leading edge of the Mode S
inter r ogation.
6.
ATCRBS O ut
Active low pulse, 3.0 µs wide, occur s
1.0 µs pr ior to P 1 leading edge of the
ATCRBS inter r ogation. The S- 1403DL
tr ansmits the pulse thr ough the
ATCRBS O UT Connector ( J5) .
7. ANT B ( when enabled)
Active high ANT B inter r ogation
pulses
modulate
RF
tr ansmitted
thr ough
the
S- 1403DL
ANT
B
Connector ( J2) .
T he S- 1403DL
offsets P 1 leading edge of the ANT B
inter r ogation fr om P 1 leading edge of
the ANT A inter r ogation accor ding to
the AntB field setting in the C10/C20
ATC Scr een. ANT B and ANT A pulse
char acter istics ar e the same except
for pulse level.
SIG NAL
DESCRIPTIO N
8. Ext Pulse
Active low pulses tr ansmitted thr ough
the S- 1403DL AUXILIARY Connector
( J10) modulate the ATC- 1400A RF
output to pr ovide the inter r ogation
pulses.
The Mode S inter r ogation,
when tr ansmitted, occur s 200 µs
following P 1 leading edge of the
ATCRBS inter r ogation.
9. Ext SLS ( when enabled)
Active low gate pulse enables ATC1400A SLS/ECHO Thumbwheels to
contr ol
the
level
of
P2
( SLS)
depending
on
the
ATC- 1400A
SLS/ECHO O N/O FF Switch position.
10. DPSK O ut
The DPSK output contains the uplink
for mat data infor mation used to
modulate the ANT A inter r ogation
signal. The data constantly changes
accor ding to the uplink for mats
selected
for
the
inter r ogation
sequence. Refer to Step 6 of INTLCE
Function Pr ocedur e ( 2.6.2 in 1- 2- 2) .
The S- 1403DL tr ansmits the DPSK
modulation thr ough the DPSK O UT
Connector ( J15) to the ATC- 1400A.
11. PPMG ( if selected)
The pulse power measur ement gate
( PPMG ) occur s <1.0 µs pr ior to the
leading edge of the selected ATCRBS
r eply pulse. The S- 1403DL tr ansmits
the PPMG pulse thr ough the PPMG
Connector ( J14) to the ATC- 1400A.
NOTE: The ATC- 1400A ignor es
PPMG if the ATC- 1400A F 2 /P 2
F 1 /P 1 Switch is set to F 1 /P 1 .
12. 50% Video
The Mode S Test System r eceives the
UUT r eply video thr ough ANT A ( ATC1400A RF I/O Connector ) . The ATC1400A sends the r eply video to the S1403DL
thr ough
the
AUXILIARY
Connector ( J10) .
1- 2- 2
Page 44
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.7 DI FUNCTION
2.7.1
Descript ion
In the DI Function, the Mode S Test System
tr ansmits two inter rogations in a single
inter r ogation per iod.
The inter r ogations
consist of any combination of AT CRBS, All
Call and/or Mode S.
The Mode S Test
System uses the DI function to ver ify
tr ansponder oper ation and r ecover y.
2.7.2
Proced u re
STEP
PROCEDURE
1. Connect test equipment accor ding to
1- 2- 2, Figur e 2.
2. Apply power to Mode S Test System.
3. Press S-1403DL 2ND, FUNC#, 0 and
6 Keys in sequence to select Double
Inter r ogation Scr een.
If necessar y,
use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to set menu to C10.
C10 f06:DI;1st:ACS,2nd:SEQ
Arf:+0.0
P4:CAL,Wd:+0.00,Dv:+0.00
P3:CAL
Dly= 3.0125 Sqtr= 1.00
AntA%:ATC= 70,S= 30 AntB%=100 AntB:+.50
4. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set 1st: ( fir st
inter r ogation)
and
2nd:
( second
inter r ogation)
fields
to
ATC
( ATCRBS) ,
SEQ
( Mode
S
inter r ogations
set
in
sequence
menus) , ACS ( AT CRBS O nly All Call)
or ACL ( AT CRBS/Mode S All Call) .
5. Set AT C- 1400A DBL INT ERR/INTRF
PULSE T humbwheels to DOUBLE.
Set
desir ed
spacing
between
inter r ogations ( DI delay, P 1 leading
edge to P 1 leading edge) fr om 000.0
( or 040.0 if 1st:SEQ and 2nd:SEQ in
Step 4) to 399.9 µs.
NOTE: Some settings of the ATC1400A DBL INT ERR/INTRF
PULSE T humbwheels may
cause invalid r eply delay
information. Refer to REPLY
DELAY in Step 12.
STEP
PROCEDURE
If using Mode S inter r ogations (SEQ ),
set sequence menus accor ding to
Steps 6 thr ough 8 pr ior to selecting
SEQ as fir st or second inter r ogation.
If using only ATCRBS and/or All Call
inter r ogations, go to Step 9.
6. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 6
Keys to display C76 SMENU Setup
Scr een. Set as follows:
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
O N/CAL Key to set SmenuRadix to
desir ed data for mat ( HEX
[hexadecimal] or OCTAL).
Use S-1403DL CURSOR, ON/CAL
and ENTER Keys for changing
SetAllSmenu to O F F ( deactivates
all sequence menus) , DEFAULT
( activates/r esets default sequence
menus, deactivates all other s) or
ZERO ( sets all fields except ADDR
to 0) . Refer to 1- 1- 2, Table 5 for
default sequence menus.
Use S-1403DL ON/CAL and ENTER
Keys to set ADDR in all sequence
menus by changing SetAllSmenu
to XPDR ( tr ansponder addr ess) or
USER ( addr ess fr om User = field) .
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to set alter nate
addr esses ( G lobalAddr :User =) and
par ity ( AP XO R=) fields as desir ed
for checking oper ation with bogus
addr esses or bad AP fields.
C76
SETUP - SMENU
SmenuRadix:OCTAL
SetAllSmenu:DEFAULT
GlobalAddr:Xpdr=17725762,AP XOR=00000000
GlobalAddr:User=10273645,AP XOR=00000001
7. Pr ess S- 1403DL S MENU Key
display Mode S Sequence Menu.
to
S001:D;UF00,RL=0,CL=0,AQ=0,
+
ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;DF00,VS=0,SL=0,RI=00,AC=+ 31200,
ADDR=17725762
1- 2- 2
Page 45
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
8. Set inter r ogation sequence as follows:
ACTIVATION
Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
activate or deactivate sequence menu.
FORMAT
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
O N/CAL Key to select format type for
active sequence menu.
Set to S
( shor t 56- bit tr ansmission) , L ( long
112- bit tr ansmission) or D ( decoded,
used for for mats with defined fields) .
UPLINK FORMAT
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d to select
desir ed uplink for mat.
DATA FIELDS
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to load data
fields accor ding to Appendix D. Refer
to Appendix B for defined fields and
1- 2- 2, Table 5 for converting data.
SCO PE TRIG G ER
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
O N/CAL
Key
to
activate
+
or
deactivate - scope tr igger . For stable
display, activate scope tr igger for only
one sequence menu.
9. Set test par ameter s as follows:
MO DE SELECTIO N
If ATC, ACS or ACL was selected as
fir st and/or second inter r ogation in
Step 4, use AT C- 1400A XPDR MO DE
Contr ol to select inter r ogation mode
( 1, 2, T, A, B, C or D).
NOTE: Inter r ogation Mode Selected
sets one or both
inter r ogations depending on
inter r ogations selected in
Step 4.
STEP
PRO CEDURE
FREQUENCY
Adjust ATC- 1400A FREQ /FUNCTIO N
Thumbwheels and ∆F Thumbwheels to
set inter r ogation RF fr om 952.01 to
1222.99 MHz. Set to 1030 MHz for
nor mal oper ation.
RF LEVEL
Adjust ATC- 1400A RF LEVEL Contr ol
to set RF LEVEL - dBm Display fr om
127 ( - 127 dBm) to 0 (0 dBm) . Normal
oper ating r ange is - 69 to - 21 dBm.
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set Ar f field
from -3.0 to +3.0 in dB to offset cable
loss and/or other exter nal factor s.
Pr ess S- 1403DL ENTER Key.
INTERROGATION RATE
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 1
Keys in sequence to enter C71
Inter r ogation Tr igger Setup Scr een.
C71
SETUP - INTERROGATION TRIGGER
TrigSource:TrigGen
TrigGen:
450Hz
CAUTION:
CONTINUOUS HIGH PRF
WITH HIGH UUT POWER
MAY DAMAG E S- 1403DL
( SEE 2.1.3 IN 1- 2- 2) .
Set
inter r ogation
r ate
or
pulse
r epetition fr equency ( PRF) accor ding
to one of four ways as follows:
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to TrigGen and
TrigGen fr om 1 to 1250 Hz.
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to SelfInterr. Adjust
ATC- 1400A PRF/SQ TR
Thumbwheels to set PRF fr om 0 to
4000 when both inter r ogations ar e
set to ATC ( 1st:ATC,2nd:ATC) in
Step 4. Set fr om 0 to 1250 for
other inter r ogation combinations.
1- 2- 2
Page 46
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
TrigSource to ExtSyncIn. Connect
exter nal tr igger sour ce pr oviding
T T L level inter r ogation tr igger
pulse to S- 1403DL EXT SYNC IN
Connector . Leading edge of P 1 or
pr epulse ( when enabled) occur s
17.95 µs after leading edge of
exter nal sync pulse. Adjust
exter nal tr igger sour ce as desir ed.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
T r igSour ce to BurstKey to allow
manual tr igger ing of a single
inter r ogation by pr essing the S1403DL BURST Key.
SUPPRESSO R PULSE
Connect AT C- 1400A SUPPRESSO R
O UTPUT
Connector
to
UUT
suppr essor input.
Set ATC- 1400A
SUPPRESSO R O N/O FF Switch to O N
to activate 33 µs wide ( fixed)
suppr essor pulse to r eplace fir st
inter r ogation.
Adjust level fr om 3 to 27 V using
ATC- 1400A SUPPRESSO R VAR
Adjustment.
Set ATC-1400A DBL INTERR/INTRF
PULSE T humbwheels from 000.0 to
399.9 µs to set spacing between
suppr essor pulse leading edge to
second inter r ogation P 1 leading
edge.
ANT B
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and ANT B Keys
in sequence to move cur sor to AntB
field. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
activate inter r ogations thr ough ANT B
Connector .
Use SLEW Contr ol and
Keyboar d to enter value fr om -0.95 to
+0.95 ( offset in 0.05 µs incr ements
fr om ANT A inter r ogations) . Without
the
Multi- Level
Diver sity
( MLD)
option, ANT B output level is - 50 dBm.
STEP
PROCEDURE
If MLD is installed, set ANT B output
level. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys
and SLEW Contr ol to set menu to
C20. Use CURSOR Keys to select Brf
fields.
Use SLEW Contr ol and
Keyboar d to set fir st field fr om - 80 to
- 20 dBm and second field fr om -3.0 to
+3.0 dB ( used to offset cable loss) .
10. Set pulse char acter istics for fir st
inter r ogation accor ding to 1st: field
setting ( second inter r ogation pulse
char acter istics not adjustable) .
PULSE WIDTH
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR PULSE WIDTH
VAR/CAL Switch to CAL for 0.8 µs
nominal width of P 1 , P 2 (if activated)
and P 3 ( if activated and applicable)
inter r ogation pulses.
Set XPDR
PULSE WIDTH VAR/CAL Switch to
VAR and use ATC- 1400A XPDR
PULSE WIDTH Thumbwheels to adjust
width fr om 0.20 to 1.85 µs.
P 2 LEVEL ( 1st : SEQ )
Set ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O F F. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND
and P2 Keys in sequence to move
cur sor to C10 Function 06 DI P2 field.
Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
P2 to VAR. Set P 2 level using ATC1400A
SLS/ECHO
Thumbwheels.
Adjust level fr om - 19 to +6 dB,
relative to P 1 level. 0 dB is nor mal
oper ating level ( P2:CAL ).
For P 2
deactivation, pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL
Key to set P2 to O F F.
P 2 PO SITIO N ( 1st : SEQ )
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL
Switch to CAL for nominal P 2 position
of 2.0 µs following P 1 leading edge.
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL
Switch to - ' or + ' and adjust ATC1400A XPDR P 2 /P 3 DEV Thumbwheels
from 0.00 to 1.85 to set position fr om
0.15 to 3.85 µs following P 1 leading
edge.
1- 2- 2
Page 47
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
P 2 ( SLS) LEVEL ( 1st : ATC, ACS or
ACL)
Set ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O N.
Set P 2 ( SLS) level
using
AT C- 1400A
SLS/ECHO
T humbwheels. Adjust level fr om - 19
to +6 dB, relative to P 1 level. Ver ify
suppr ession occur s when P 2 level is
≥ P 1 level.
Ver ify suppr ession does
not occur when P 2 level exceeds P 1
level by ≥ 9 dB.
P 2 (SLS) PO SITION (1st:ATC, ACS
or ACL)
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL
Switch to CAL for nominal P 2 ( SLS)
position of 2.0 µs following P 1 leading
edge. Set XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL Switch
to - ' or + ' and adjust ATC- 1400A
XPDR P 2 /P 3 DEV Thumbwheels fr om
0.00 to 1.85 to set position fr om 0.15
to 3.85 µs following P 1 leading edge.
P 3 LEVEL ( 1st : AT C, ACS o r ACL )
Set ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O F F. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND
and P3 Keys in sequence to move
cur sor to C10 F unction 06 DI P3 field.
Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
P3 to VAR. Set P 3 level using ATC1400A
SLS/ECHO
T humbwheels.
Adjust level fr om - 19 to +6 dB,
relative to P 1 level. 0 dB is nor mal
oper ating level ( P3:CAL ).
For P 3
deactivation, pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL
Key to set P3 to O F F.
P 3 PO SITIO N ( 1st : AT C, ACS o r ACL)
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV P 3 /CAL
Switch to CAL for nominal P 3 position.
Refer to Appendix E for nominal
position. Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV
P 3 /CAL Switch to - ' or + ' and adjust
DEV
ATC- 1400A
XPDR
P 2 /P 3
Thumbwheels fr om 0.00 to 1.85 to
deviate position - 1.85 to +1.85 µs
fr om nominal.
STEP
PRO CEDURE
P 4 LEVEL ( 1st : ACS or ACL)
Set ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O F F. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND
and P4/P6 Keys in sequence to move
cur sor to C10 Function 06 DI P4 field.
Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
P4 to VAR. Set P 4 level using ATC1400A
SLS/ECHO
Thumbwheels.
Adjust level fr om - 19 to +6 dB,
relative to P 1 level. 0 dB is nor mal
oper ating level ( P4:CAL ).
For P 4
deactivation, pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL
Key to set P4 to O F F.
P 4 WIDTH (1st:ACS or ACL)
Use
S-1403DL
CURSO R
Keys,
O N/CAL Key and SLEW Contr ol to set
P4:Wd: field as desir ed. Set to CAL
for nominal P 4 pulse width ( 0.8 µs for
ACS, 1.6 µs for ACL). Vary P 4 pulse
width by setting P4:Wd: field in
0.05 µs incr ements fr om nominal
width. Var y P 4 pulse width fr om 0.2
to 3.55 µs by setting P4:Wd: field fr om
-0.60 to +2.75 for ACS or fr om -1.40
to +1.95 for ACL.
NOTE: Setting P 4 wider than 1.5 µs
tur ns an ACS to an ACL.
Setting P 4 width <1.2 µs tur ns
an ACL to an ACS. ACS
inter r ogations r equir e P 4
width <1.2 µs. ACL
inter r ogations r equir e P 4
width >1.5 µs.
P 4 PO SITION (1st:ACS or ACL)
Use
S-1403DL
CURSO R
Keys,
O N/CAL Key and SLEW Contr ol to set
P4:Dv: field as desir ed. Set to CAL
for nominal P 4 leading edge position
(2.0 µs following P 3 leading edge) .
Set P 4 position fr om 0.05 to 3.95 µs
following P 3 by setting P4:Dv: field
from -1.95 to +1.95 ( µs fr om nominal
position) .
1- 2- 2
Page 48
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
STEP
PROCEDURE
P 5 ( SLS) LEVEL ( 1st : SEQ )
SPR CO NTRO L ( 1st : SEQ )
Set AT C_1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O N.
Set P 5 ( SLS) level
using
AT C- 1400A
SLS/ECHO
T humbwheels. Adjust level fr om - 19
to +6 dB, relative to P 1 level. Ver ify
suppr ession occur s when P 5 level
exceeds P 6 level by 3 dB or mor e.
Ver ify suppr ession does not occur
when P 6 level exceeds P 5 level by
12 dB or mor e.
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and SPR Keys
in sequence to move cur sor to C10
Function 02 SEQ SPR field.
Pr ess
O N/CAL Key to activate ( O N) or
deactivate (O F F) SPR.
P 5 (SLS) PO SITION (1st:SEQ )
Adjust P 5 ( SLS) position by changing
SPR position ( center of P 5 tr acks
SPR). Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys
and SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d to set
SPR:Dv field from -1.00 to +1.00 (time
deviated fr om nominal position in
0.05 µs incr ements) .
SPR PO SITIO N ( 1st : SEQ )
Use
S- 1403DL
CURSO R
Keys,
O N/CAL Key and SLEW Contr ol to set
SPR:Dv: field as desir ed. Set to CAL
for nominal SPR position ( 1.25 µs
following P 6 leading edge) . Set SPR
position fr om 0.25 to 2.25 µs following
P 6 by setting SPR:Dv: field fr om -1.00
to +1.00 ( in µs fr om nominal position) .
( All DPSK modulated data shifts
accor dingly.)
11. If desir ed, set optional outputs as
follows:
P 6 CONTROL (1st:SEQ)
PREPULSE O UT
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and P4/P6 Keys
in sequence to move cur sor to C10
F unction 02 SEQ P6 field.
Pr ess
O N/CAL Key to activate ( CAL ) or
deactivate (O F F) P 6 .
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and P PULS
Keys in sequence to move cur sor to
C75 Setup Scr een Pr ePulseO ut field.
Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
activate pr epulse thr ough S- 1403DL
PREPULSE O UT Connector . Use S1403DL SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d
to enter 0 to 260 µs ( time fr om
pr epulse leading edge to P 1 leading
edge) .
P 6 WIDTH (1st:SEQ)
Use
S-1403DL
CURSO R
Keys,
O N/CAL Key and SLEW Contr ol to set
P6:Wd: field as desir ed. Set to CAL
for nominal P 6 pulse width ( 16.25 µs
for shor t 56- bit data field or 30.25 µs
for long 112- bit data field) . Var y P 6
pulse width fr om -1.50 to +1.50 ( µs
fr om nominal width) .
C75
SETUP - MISC
AntAEnable:ON
PrePulseOut:253µs
AntAModSrc:INT
AntBModSrc:INT
P 6 PO SIT IO N ( 1st : SEQ )
Use
S-1403DL
CURSO R
Keys,
O N/CAL Key and SLEW Contr ol to set
P6:Dv: field as desir ed. Set to CAL
for nominal P 6 leading edge position
(3.5 µs following P 1 leading edge) .
Set P 6 position fr om 1.55 to 5.45 µs
following P 1 by setting P6:Dv: field
from -1.95 to +1.95 ( µs fr om nominal
position) .
1- 2- 2
Page 49
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
EXT SYNC O UT
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and EX SYN
Keys in sequence to move cur sor to
C73 Setup Scr een Enable field. Use
S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and O N/CAL
Key to set applicable Enable field O N
for activating exter nal sync pulse
thr ough S- 1403DL EXT SYNC O UT
Connector . Use S- 1403DL CURSO R
Keys and SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d
to set Dv field from -9.95 to +9.95 µs
( time fr om exter nal sync pulse leading
edge to P 1 leading edge) ( - , P 1
follows exter nal sync; +, exter nal sync
follows P 1 ).
C73
SETUP - EXT SYNC OUT
ATC ModeS ACS ACL
Enable:ON OFF
OFF OFF
Dv:-2.25µS
SCO PE TRIG O UT
Set scope tr igger output thr ough S1403DL SCO PE T RIG O UT Connector
for
desir ed
O scilloscope
display.
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 2
Keys in sequence to enter C72 Setup
Scr een.
C72
SETUP - SCOPE TRIGGER
ATC ModeS ACS ACL
Enable:OFF OFF
ON OFF
Source:CAL CAL
CAL CAL
(in µS)
Set scope tr igger as follows:
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Enable field of fir st inter r ogation
type to O N, depending on scope
tr igger field setting in individual
sequence menus if SEQ is
selected as fir st inter r ogation.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Sour ce field of fir st inter r ogation
type to CAL ( AT C- 1400A contr ols
tr igger position) or a numer ic value
(S-1403DL controls trigger
position).
STEP
PRO CEDURE
For S- 1403DL contr ol, use S1403DL SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d
to delay tr igger in µs following P 1
leading edge of the first ANT A
inter r ogation. For detailed Mode S
r eply view, set applicable Sour ce
field as follows accor ding to the
fir st inter r ogation type ( Maximum
field settings ar e 35 µs for ATC or
255 µs for
Mode S [SEQ ], ACS and ACL) :
F or SEQ ( Mode S) , P 1 - SPR
Spacing ( 1.8 to 7.7 µs) + expected
r eply delay ( 128 µs) + r eply P 1 to
desir ed tr igger point ( 0 to 120 µs) .
F or ACL , P 1 - P 3 Mode Spacing ( 5
to 25 µs) + P 3 - P 4 spacing ( 0.05 to
3.95 µs) + expected r eply delay
( 128 µs) + r eply P 1 to desir ed
tr igger point ( 0 to 120 µs) .
Set ATC- 1400A T O /TAC/T D Switch
to T O ( fir st inter r ogation/r eply at
ATC- 1400A G EN Connector ) or T D
( second inter r ogation/r eply at
ATC- 1400A XMTR Connector ) .
Connect
S- 1403DL
UUT
XMTR
Connector to O scilloscope for viewing
UUT r eplies at S- 1403DL ANT B
Connector .
12. Verify UUT replies as follows:
FREQUENCY
Ver ify UUT tr ansmit fr equency on
ATC-1400A XMTR FREQ MHz Display.
ACCURACY
For ATCRBS r eplies, set ATC- 1400A
DISPLAY SELECT Contr ol to XPDR
CODE. Ver ify ATCRBS r eply shown
on ATC- 1400A DISPLAY SELECT
Readout.
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR MO DE
Contr ol to A to verify octal ID.
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR MO DE
Contr ol to AC 2 to ver ify altitude in
feet.
1- 2- 2
Page 50
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
STEP
PROCEDURE
For Mode S r eplies, pr ess S- 1403DL S
MENU Key.
Use S- 1403DL SLEW
Contr ol ( cur sor in S field) to display
each active sequence menu. Ver ify
r eply
data
shown
in
S- 1403DL
Sequence Menu scr eens.
Use S1403DL CURSO R Keys and O N/CAL
Key to set desir ed for mat type in
RPLY field (D for decoded subfields or
N for not decoded data) . ( S- 1403DL
displays r eply data using the r adix
selected in Step 6.)
View r eply
Channel 2.
pulses
on
Fir st r eply is to second
inter r ogation, but is within
the r eply delay r ange of
possible Mode S r eply to
fir st inter r ogation ( 1st:ACS
and 2nd:ATC, ACS or
ACL) .
P 1 of second inter r ogation
occur s pr ior to expected
ATCRBS r eply delay fr om
fir st inter r ogation
(1st:ATC, ACS or ACL).
O scilloscope
P 1 of second inter r ogation
occur s pr ior to tr ailing
edge of last pulse in fir st
inter r ogation.
REPL Y DEL AY
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 4 Keys
in sequence to display C40 Reply
Delay Contr ol Menu. If desir ed, pr ess
S- 1403DL CL/ESC Key to r eset fields.
PERCENT REPLY
Ver ify per cent r eply in C10/C20 DI
Scr een AntA% and AntB% fields.
If applicable, ver ify ATCRBS r eply
delay ( P 3 leading edge to F 1 leading
edge) in ATC fields. Ver ify ATC fields
indicate 3.0000 µs ( ± 0.5 µs) , Min=
≥2.5000 µs and Max= ≤3.5000 µs.
For detailed per cent r eply infor mation,
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 3 Keys
in sequence to display C30 Per cent
Reply Contr ol Menu. If desir ed, pr ess
S- 1403DL CL/ESC Key to r eset fields.
If applicable, ver ify Mode S r eply
delay ( SPR or P 4 leading edge to P 1
leading edge in r eply) in ModeS
fields. Ver ify ModeS fields indicate
128.0000
µs
( ± 0.5
µs) ,
Min=
≥127.5000 µs and Max= ≤128.5000 µs.
PO WER
Ver ify UUT power thr ough ANT A ( RF
I/O Connector ) shown on ATC- 1400A
XMTR PWR WATTS Display. Select
r eply pulse ( only for r eplies to fir st
inter r ogation) to measur e as follows:
NOTE: Invalid r eply delay infor mation
may r esult if DI delay set by
the AT C- 1400A DBL
INTERR/INTRF PULSE
T humbwheels causes the
following conditions:
Set ATC- 1400A F 2 /P 2 F 1 /P 1 Switch
to F 1 /P 1 to measur e pulse power
of F 1 or P 1 r eply pulse only.
Set F 2 /P 2 F 1 /P 1 Switch to F 2 /P 2 for
S- 1403DL to contr ol pulse power
measur ement selection.
P 1 of second inter r ogation
placed within r eply delay
r ange of possible Mode S
r eply to fir st inter r ogation
( 1st:SEQ , ACS or ACL) .
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and PPG
Keys in sequence to display C74
PPMG Setup Scr een.
C74
ATC
Enable:OFF
Pulse:A1
SETUP ModeS
ON
P24
PPMG (POWER)
DELM
OFF
1
1- 2- 2
Page 51
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
STEP
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to set AT C and
ModeS Enable fields to O N.
Select one of 16 possible AT CRBS
r eply pulses for ATC Pulse field.
Select from 1 to 60 ( shor t r eply) or
116 ( long r eply) possible Mode S
r eply pulses for ModeS Pulse field.
NOTE: The S- 1403DL enables the
measur ement gate pr ior to the
r ising edge of the pulse to be
measur ed. Measur ement
continues until the next falling
edge. Adjacent pulses in the
pulse position modulated
Mode S r eplies may cause
er r oneous power r eadings
with conditions as follows:
If the measur ement pulse
data is Zer o followed by a
O ne, the selected pulse
and following pulse ar e
measured together
because the following
pulse has the first
detectable falling edge.
PPMG
Pn (>4) Pn+1
Zero One
02402007
If the measur ement pulse
data is O ne and the
pr eceding pulse data is
Z er o, the power r eading is
zer o because of not
detecting a rising edge.
Pn-1 Pn(>5)
Zero One
PPMG
02402008
PRO CEDURE
13. Ver ify
UUT
Mode
infor mation as follows:
S
squitter
INTERVAL
Press S-1403DL 2ND, FUNC#, 0 and
6 Keys in sequence to select DI
Scr een.
Verify interval between
squitters in Sqtr field. ( nor mally 0.8 to
1.2 seconds.)
For DF17 type squitter inter vals,
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 6 Keys
in sequence to display C60 Squitter ( 2
of 2) Contr ol Menu.
C60
SQUITTER (2of2)
DF CA
AA
ME
II ANT TIME
11 4 A07613
0 A
1.00
17I 4 A07613 1A8C9A3124BA53 0 A 10.05
Ver ify squitter inter vals in DF17X
PERIO D field accor ding to 1- 2- 2,
Table 3.
ADDRESS
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 5 Keys
in sequence to display C50 Squitter ( 1
of 2) Contr ol Menu. Ver ify Mode S
Addr ess in Addr fields.
C50
SQUITTER (1of2)
Addr:h=A07613,o=50073023,Tail=N129KS
Country=United States
Counts/120s:DF11=110,DF17= 36,DF17S= 24
INFORMATION
Ver ify Tail and Countr y fields.
View squitter fields in hexadecimal:
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 6 Keys
in sequence to display C60 Squitter ( 2
of 2) Contr ol Menu. Use S- 1403DL
CURSO R Keys and O N/CAL Key to
set DF17 type (A, I, O , P, S or T).
Refer to 1-2-2, Table 4.
1- 2- 2
Page 52
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.7.3
G eneral Test Sequ ence
Refer to 1- 2- 2, F igur e 9.
SIG NAL
1.
DESCRIPT IO N
SIG NAL
5. Scope Tr ig O ut
The S- 1403DL tr ansmits the active
high scope tr igger pulse thr ough the
SCO PE TRIG O UT Connector ( J7) .
Position,
r efer enced
to
ANT
A
inter r ogations, depends on the ATC1400A T O /TAC/T D Switch setting:
Self Interr In (if selected)
Active low pulse fr om the ATC- 1400A
tr igger s the inter r ogation pr ocess
( C71
Inter r ogation
T r igger
Setup
Scr een T r ig Sour ce field set to
SelfInterr) .
The self inter r ogate
pulse r ising edge occur s 17.95 µs
pr ior to leading edge of the ATCRBS
inter r ogation P 1 or pr epulse ( when
enabled) . T he S- 1403DL r eceives the
self inter r ogate pulse thr ough the
AUXILIARY Connector ( J10) .
T O ( for viewing fir st inter r ogations
and r eplies)
Leading edge occur s 1.0 µs pr ior
to P 1 leading edge of the fir st
inter r ogation and tr ailing edge
occur s 1.0 µs prior to F 1 or P 1
leading edge of the expected
r eply.
2. Ext Sync In (if selected)
Active high pulse occur s 17.95 pr ior
to leading edge of P 1 or pr epulse
( when enabled) .
T he S- 1403DL
r eceives the pulse thr ough the EXT
SYNC IN Connector ( J4) .
The
exter nal sync input r eplaces the self
inter r ogate input in tr igger ing the
inter r ogation
pr ocess
( C71
Inter r ogation Tr igger Setup Scr een
Trig Source field set to Ext SyncIn).
3. Pr epulse O ut ( when enabled)
Active high pulse, 1.0 µs wide, occur s
17.95 µs after the sync pulse r ising
edge ( self inter r ogate, exter nal sync
input or inter nal tr igger gener ator )
and 0 to 260 µs, as selected, pr ior to
the fir st inter r ogation P 1 leading edge.
T he S- 1403DL tr ansmits the pr epulse
thr ough
the
PREPULSE
O UT
Connector ( J9) .
4. Ext Sync O ut ( when enabled)
Active high pulse, 1.0 µs wide, occur s
fr om - 9.95 to +9.95 µs, as selected,
r elative to the fir st inter r ogation P 1
leading
edge.
T he
S- 1403DL
tr ansmits the pulse thr ough the EXT
SYNC O UT Connector ( J8) .
DESCRIPTIO N
T D ( for viewing second
inter r ogations and r eplies)
Leading edge occur s 1.0 µs pr ior
to P 1 leading edge of the second
inter r ogation and tr ailing edge
occur s 1.0 µs prior to F 1 or P 1
leading edge of the expected
r eply.
6.
ATCRBS O ut (1st:ATC, ACS or ACL)
Active low pulse, 3.0 µs wide, occur s
1.0 µs pr ior to P 1 leading edge of the
fir st inter r ogation.
The S- 1403DL
tr ansmits the pulse thr ough the
ATCRBS O UT Connector ( J5) .
7. ANT B ( when enabled)
Active high ANT B inter r ogation
pulses
modulate
RF
tr ansmitted
thr ough
the
S- 1403DL
ANT
B
Connector ( J2) .
The S- 1403DL
offsets P 1 leading edge of the ANT B
inter r ogation fr om P 1 leading edge of
the ANT A inter r ogation accor ding to
the AntB field setting in the C10/C20
ATC Scr een. ANT B and ANT A pulse
char acter istics ar e the same except
for pulse level.
1- 2- 2
Page 53
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SIG NAL
DESCRIPTIO N
8. Ext Pulse
Active low pulses tr ansmitted thr ough
the S- 1403DL AUXILIARY Connector
( J10) modulate the ATC- 1400A RF
output to pr ovide the inter r ogation
pulses.
T he second inter r ogation
follows P 1 leading edge of the fir st
inter r ogation accor ding to the ATC1400A
DBL
INT ERR/INTRF
Thumbwheels setting in µs.
9. Ext SLS ( when enabled)
Active low gate pulse enables ATC1400A SLS/ECHO T humbwheels to
contr ol
the
level
of
P2
( SLS)
depending
on
the
AT C- 1400A
SLS/ECHO O N/O F F Switch position.
10. DPSK O ut ( 1st:SEQ or 2nd:SEQ )
T he DPSK output contains the uplink
for mat data infor mation used to
modulate the ANT A inter r ogation
signal. The data constantly changes
accor ding to the uplink for mats
selected
for
the
inter r ogation
sequence.
Refer to Step 8 of DI
Function Pr ocedur e ( 2.7.2 in 1- 2- 2) .
T he S- 1403DL tr ansmits the DPSK
modulation thr ough the DPSK O UT
Connector ( J15) to the ATC- 1400A.
11. PPMG ( if selected)
The pulse power measur ement gate
( PPMG ) occur s <1.0 µs pr ior to the
leading edge of the selected r eply
pulse to the fir st inter r ogation. The
S- 1403DL tr ansmits the PPMG pulse
thr ough the PPMG Connector ( J14) to
the ATC- 1400A.
NOTE: The ATC-1400A ignores PPMG
if the AT C- 1400A F 2 /P 2 F 1 /P 1
Switch is set to F 1 /P 1 .
12. 50% Video
The Mode S T est System r eceives the
UUT r eply video thr ough ANT A ( ATC1400A RF I/O Connector ) . The ATC1400A sends the r eply video to the S1403DL
thr ough
the
AUXILIARY
Connector ( J10) .
1- 2- 2
Page 54
Dec 1/03
50% VIDEO
(J10, PIN 11)
PPMG (J14)
ATC, SEQ, ACS OR ACL
(1ST INTERROGATION)
DI DELAY
P2
P5
UUT REPLY RECEIVED BY
ATC-1400A, SENT TO S-1403DL
UUT REPLY DELAY
(3.0 µ s/128.0 µ s)
IF SELECTED (MEASURES ONLY REPLY PULSES TO 1ST INTERROGATION)
ONLY WITH SEQ (MODE S) INTERROGATIONS
DPSK OUT
(J15)
P1
P1
P2 FOR ATC, ACS OR ACL/P5 FOR SEQ
WHEN ENABLED
DEVIATION = ± 0.95 µ s
1.0 µs
3.0 µs
T
O
WIDTH=MODE DELAY
1.0 µs
-9.95 TO +9.95 µ s
0 TO 260 µ s
EXT SLS
(J10, PIN 6)
EXT PULSE
(J10, PIN 5)
ANT B (J2)
ATCRBS
OUT (J5)
1.0 µs
IF SELECTED
NOT WITH SEQ 1ST INTERROGATION
WHEN ENABLED
EXT SYNC
OUT (J8)
SCOPE TRIG
OUT (J7)
WHEN ENABLED
17.95 µ s
IF SELECTED
PREPULSE
OUT (J9)
EXT SYNC
IN (J4)
SELF INTERR
(J10, PIN 14)
F1 or P1
1 µs
P1
< 1.0 µ s PRIOR TO SELECTED PULSE
ATC, SEQ, ACS OR ACL
(2ND INTERROGATION)
P1
02402006
MODE DELAY: FOR ATC OR ACS (MODE SPACING + 3.0µ s)
FOR SEQ (132.75 µ s)
FOR ACL (MODE SPACING + 128µ s)
T
D
WIDTH=MODE DELAY
1.0 µs
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
DI Function Timing Diagr am
Figur e 9
1- 2- 2
Page 55
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.8 BURST FUNCTION
2.8.1
Descript ion
In the Bur st F unction, the Mode S Test
System tr ansmits a cer tain number of
inter r ogations for a specified time per iod.
T he Mode S Test System uses the Bur st
F unction to ver ify the r eply r ate capability
of the tr ansponder against specifications
listed in RTCA DO - 181.
2.8.2
Pro ced u re
ST EP
STEP
PRO CEDURE
REPLY
RATE TEST
MESSAGE
RATIO
BN
PRF
50/s
2 Shorts/1 Long
50
50
18/100 ms
2 Shorts/1 Long
18
180
8/25 ms
1 Short/1 Long
8
400
4/1.6 ms
1 Short/1 Long
4
2500
Mode S Reply Rate Testing
Table 7
PRO CEDURE
1. Connect test equipment accor ding to
1- 2- 2, Figur e 2.
2. Apply power to Mode S Test System.
3. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, F UNC#, 0 and
7 Keys in sequence to select Bur st
Scr een. If necessar y, use S- 1403DL
CURSO R Keys and SLEW Control to
set menu to C10.
C10 f07:BURST;SEQ: 400
Arf:+0.8
P6:CAL,Wd:+0.00,Dv:+0.00 P2:CAL
SPR:ON ,Dv:+0.00 Dly=128.0000 Sqtr= 1.00
AntA%:ATC= 0,S= 95 AntB%= 90 AntB:+.90
4. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol
and
Keyboar d
to
set
inter r ogation type to ATC ( ATCRBS) ,
SEQ ( Mode S inter r ogations set in
sequence menus) , ACS ( ATCRBS
O nly All Call) or ACL ( AT CRBS/
Mode S All Call) .
5. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to enter Bur st
Number ( BN) ( ATC:, SEQ :, ACS: or
ACL: field) . ( T he Bur st Number sets
the number of inter r ogations sent out
in a single BURST activation.) Set BN
accor ding to 1- 2- 2, Tables 6 and 7 for
testing RTCA DO-181 reply rate
requirements.
REPLY
RATE TEST
RATIO/
FORMAT
BN
PRF
60/s
2 Shorts/1 Long
60
60
120/100 ms ≤10 unique UF16 120 1200
T CAS Reply Rate T esting
Table 6
If using Mode S inter r ogations (SEQ ),
set sequence menus accor ding to
Steps 6 thr ough 8 pr ior to selecting
SEQ as inter r ogation type. If using
only ATC, ACS or ACL , go to Step 9.
6. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 6
Keys to display C76 SMENU Setup
Scr een. Set as follows:
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
O N/CAL Key to set SmenuRadix to
desir ed data for mat ( HEX
[hexadecimal] or OCTAL).
Use S-1403DL CURSOR, ON/CAL
and ENTER Keys for changing
SetAllSmenu to O F F ( deactivates
all sequence menus) , DEFAULT
( activates/r esets default sequence
menus, deactivates all other s) or
ZERO ( sets all fields except ADDR
to 0) . Refer to 1- 1- 2, Table 5 for
default sequence menus.
Use S-1403DL ON/CAL and ENTER
Keys to set ADDR in all sequence
menus by changing SetAllSmenu
to XPDR ( tr ansponder addr ess) or
USER ( addr ess fr om User = field) .
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to set alter nate
addr esses ( G lobalAddr :User =) and
par ity ( AP XO R=) fields as desir ed
for checking oper ation with bogus
addr esses or bad AP fields.
C76
SETUP - SMENU
SmenuRadix:OCTAL
SetAllSmenu:DEFAULT
GlobalAddr:Xpdr=17725762,AP XOR=00000000
GlobalAddr:User=10273645,AP XOR=00000001
1- 2- 2
Page 56
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
STEP
PROCEDURE
7. Pr ess S- 1403DL S MENU Key
display Mode S Sequence Menu.
to
S001:D;UF00,RL=0,CL=0,AQ=0,
+
ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;DF00,VS=0,SL=0,RI=00,AC=+ 31200,
ADDR=17725762
8. Set inter r ogation sequence as follows:
PROCEDURE
9. Set test par ameter s as follows:
MO DE SELECTIO N
If ATC, ACS or ACL was selected as
inter r ogation type in Step 4, use ATC1400A XPDR MO DE Contr ol to select
inter r ogation mode ( 1, 2, T, A, B, C or
D).
ACTIVATION
FREQUENCY
Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
activate or deactivate sequence menu.
Adjust ATC-1400A FREQ /FUNCTIO N
Thumbwheels and ∆F Thumbwheels to
set inter r ogation RF fr om 952.01 to
1222.99 MHz. Set to 1030 MHz for
nor mal oper ation.
NOTE: Each Mode S inter r ogation
sequence uses the same
active sequence menus
starting with the first active
sequence menu. If SEQ :
value is less than number of
active sequence menus, the
sequence continuously star ts
over r unning thr ough the
active sequence menus until
the BURST sequence finishes.
FORMAT
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
O N/CAL Key to select format type for
active sequence menu.
Set to S
( shor t 56- bit tr ansmission) , L ( long
112- bit tr ansmission) or D ( decoded,
used only for uplink for mats with
defined subfields) .
Pr ogr am using
for mats and r equests for r eplies
containing shor t and long messages
accor ding to 1- 2- 2, Tables 6 and 7,
for testing r eply r ate r equir ements.
UPLINK FORMAT
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d to select
desir ed uplink for mat.
DATA FIELDS
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to load data
fields accor ding to Appendix D. Refer
to Appendix B for defined fields and
1- 2- 2, T able 5 for converting data.
RF LEVEL
Adjust ATC- 1400A RF LEVEL Contr ol
to set RF LEVEL - dBm Display fr om
127 ( - 127 dBm) to 0 (0 dBm) . Normal
oper ating r ange is - 69 to - 21 dBm.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set Ar f field
from -3.0 to +3.0 in dB to offset cable
loss and/or other exter nal factor s.
Pr ess S- 1403DL ENTER Key.
INTERROGATION RATE
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 1
Keys in sequence to enter C71
Inter r ogation Tr igger Setup Scr een.
C71
SETUP - INTERROGATION TRIGGER
TrigSource:TrigGen
TrigGen:
450Hz
Set
inter r ogation
r ate
or
pulse
r epetition fr equency ( PRF) one of two
ways as follows:
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to TrigGen and
TrigGen fr om 1 to 2500 Hz.
1- 2- 2
Page 57
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Tr igSour ce to SelfInterr. Adjust
ATC- 1400A PRF/SQ TR
Thumbwheels to set PRF fr om 0 to
7999 for ATC or ACS
interrogations. Set fr om 0 to 2500
for ACL or SEQ ( Mode S)
inter r ogations.
F or specific r eply r ate r equir ements,
set PRF accor ding to 1- 2- 2, Tables 6
and 7.
INTERFERENCE PULSE
Set ATC- 1400A DBL INT ERR/INTRF
PULSE
Thumbwheels
fr om
017.5
INTERF- to 399.9 INTERF+ to enable
and position inter fer ence pulse at 17.5 to +399.9 µs fr om leading edge
of P 1 or pr epulse, if active.
Set level from -19 to +6 dB
(relative to P 1 ) using ATC- 1400A
SLS/ECHO T humbwheels.
Set width fr om 0.2 to 5 µs using
ATC- 1400A INTRF PULSE WIDT H
Contr ol.
SUPPRESSO R PULSE
Connect AT C- 1400A SUPPRESSO R
O UTPUT
Connector
to
UUT
suppr essor input.
Set ATC- 1400A
SUPPRESSO R O N/O FF Switch to O N
to activate 33 µs wide ( fixed)
suppr essor pulse.
Adjust level fr om 3 to 27 V using
ATC- 1400A SUPPRESSO R VAR
Adjustment.
Set ATC-1400A DBL INTERR/INTRF
PULSE T humbwheels to O F F to
position suppr essor pulse 0.8 µs
before P 3 . Set DBL INTERR/INTRF
PULSE T humbwheels from 017.5
INTERF- to 399.9 INTERF+ to
adjust suppr essor pulse position
fr om - 17.5 to +399.9 µs relative to
P 1 . ( Suppr essor pulse r eplaces
inter fer ence pulse when both ar e
activated.)
STEP
PRO CEDURE
ANT B
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and ANT B Keys
in sequence to move cur sor to AntB
field. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
activate inter r ogations thr ough ANT B
Connector .
Use SLEW Contr ol and
Keyboar d to enter value fr om -0.95 to
+0.95 ( offset in 0.05 µs incr ements
fr om ANT A inter r ogations) . Without
the
Multi- Level
Diver sity
( MLD)
option, ANT B output level is - 50 dBm.
If MLD is installed, set ANT B output
level. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys
and SLEW Contr ol to set menu to
C20. Use CURSOR Keys to select Brf
fields.
Use SLEW Contr ol and
Keyboar d to set fir st field fr om - 80 to
- 20 dBm and second field fr om -3.0 to
+3.0 dB ( used to offset cable loss) .
10. Set pulse char acter istics accor ding to
inter r ogation type as follows:
PULSE WIDTH
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR PULSE WIDTH
VAR/CAL Switch to CAL for 0.8 µs
nominal width of P 1 , P 2 (if activated)
and P 3 ( if activated and applicable)
inter r ogation pulses.
Set XPDR
PULSE WIDTH VAR/CAL Switch to
VAR and use ATC- 1400A XPDR
PULSE WIDTH Thumbwheels to adjust
width fr om 0.20 to 1.85 µs.
P 2 LEVEL ( SEQ )
Set ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O F F. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND
and P2 Keys in sequence to move
cur sor to C10 Function 07 BURST P2
field. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
set P2 to VAR. Set P 2 level using
ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO Thumbwheels.
Adjust level fr om - 19 to +6 dB,
relative to P 1 level. 0 dB is nor mal
oper ating level ( P2:CAL ).
For P 2
deactivation, pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL
Key to set P2 to O F F.
1- 2- 2
Page 58
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
STEP
PROCEDURE
P 2 PO SITIO N ( SEQ )
P 3 PO SITION (ATC, ACS or ACL)
Set AT C- 1400A XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL
Switch to CAL for nominal P 2 position
of 2.0 µs following P 1 leading edge.
Set AT C- 1400A XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL
Switch to - ' or + ' and adjust ATC1400A XPDR P 2 /P 3 DEV T humbwheels
from 0.00 to 1.85 to set position fr om
0.15 to 3.85 µs following P 1 leading
edge.
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV P 3 /CAL
Switch to CAL for nominal P 3 position.
Refer to Appendix E for nominal
position. Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV
P 3 /CAL Switch to - ' or + ' and adjust
DEV
ATC- 1400A
XPDR
P 2 /P 3
Thumbwheels fr om 0.00 to 1.85 to
deviate position - 1.85 to +1.85 µs
fr om nominal.
P 2 ( SLS) LEVEL ( ATC, ACS or ACL)
P 4 LEVEL ( ACS or ACL)
Set ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O N.
Set P 2 ( SLS) level
using
AT C- 1400A
SLS/ECHO
T humbwheels. Adjust level fr om - 19
to +6 dB, relative to P 1 level. Ver ify
suppr ession occur s when P 2 level is
≥ P 1 level.
Ver ify suppr ession does
not occur when P 2 level exceeds P 1
level by ≥ 9 dB.
Set ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O F F. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND
and P4/P6 Keys in sequence to move
cur sor to C10 Function 07 BURST P4
field. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
set P4 to VAR. Set P 4 level using
ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO Thumbwheels.
Adjust level fr om - 19 to +6 dB,
relative to P 1 level. 0 dB is nor mal
oper ating level ( P4:CAL ).
For P 4
deactivation, pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL
Key to set P4 to O F F.
P 2 (SLS) PO SITION (ATC, ACS or
ACL)
Set AT C- 1400A XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL
Switch to CAL for nominal P 2 ( SLS)
position of 2.0 µs following P 1 leading
edge. Set XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL Switch
to - ' or + ' and adjust ATC- 1400A
XPDR P 2 /P 3 DEV Thumbwheels fr om
0.00 to 1.85 to set position fr om 0.15
to 3.85 µs following P 1 leading edge.
P 3 L EVEL ( AT C, ACS o r ACL)
Set AT C- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O F F. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND
and P3 Keys in sequence to move
cur sor to C10 F unction 07 BURST P3
field. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
set P3 to VAR. Set P 3 level using
AT C- 1400A SLS/ECHO T humbwheels.
Adjust level fr om - 19 to +6 dB,
relative to P 1 level. 0 dB is nor mal
oper ating level ( P3:CAL ).
For P 3
deactivation, pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL
Key to set P3 to O F F.
P 4 WIDTH (ACS or ACL)
Use
S- 1403DL
CURSO R
Keys,
O N/CAL Key and SLEW Contr ol to set
P4:Wd: field as desir ed. Set to CAL
for nominal P 4 pulse width ( 0.8 µs for
ACS, 1.6 µs for ACL). Vary P 4 pulse
width by setting P4:Wd: field in
0.05 µs incr ements fr om nominal
width. Var y P 4 pulse width fr om 0.2
to 3.55 µs by setting P4:Wd: field fr om
-0.60 to +1.95 for ACS or fr om -1.40
to +1.95 for ACL.
NOTE: Setting P 4 wider than 1.5 µs
tur ns an ACS to an ACL.
Setting P 4 width <1.2 µs tur ns
an ACL to an ACS. ACS
inter r ogations r equir e P 4
width <1.2 µs. ACL
inter r ogations r equir e P 4
width >1.5 µs.
1- 2- 2
Page 59
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
STEP
PRO CEDURE
P 4 POSITION (ACS or ACL)
P 6 PO SITIO N ( SEQ )
Use
S-1403DL
CURSO R
Keys,
O N/CAL Key and SLEW Contr ol to set
P4:Dv: field as desir ed. Set to CAL
for nominal P 4 leading edge position
(2.0 µs following P 3 leading edge) .
Set P 4 position fr om 0.05 to 3.95 µs
following P 3 by setting P4:Dv: field
from -1.95 to +1.95 ( µs fr om nominal
position) .
Use
S-1403DL
CURSO R
Keys,
O N/CAL Key and SLEW Contr ol to set
P6:Dv: field as desir ed. Set to CAL
for nominal P 6 leading edge position
(3.5 µs following P 1 leading edge) .
Set P 6 position fr om 1.55 to 5.45 µs
following P 1 by setting P6:Dv: field
from -1.95 to +1.95 ( µs fr om nominal
position) .
P 5 ( SLS) L EVEL ( SEQ )
SPR CONTROL (SEQ)
Set ATC_1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O N.
Set P 5 ( SLS) level
using
AT C- 1400A
SLS/ECHO
T humbwheels. Adjust level fr om - 19
to +6 dB, relative to P 1 level. Ver ify
suppr ession occur s when P 5 level
exceeds P 6 level by 3 dB or mor e.
Ver ify suppr ession does not occur
when P 6 level exceeds P 5 level by
12 dB or mor e.
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and SPR Keys
in sequence to move cur sor to C10
Function 02 SEQ SPR field.
Pr ess
O N/CAL Key to activate ( O N) or
deactivate (O F F) SPR.
P 5 ( SLS) PO SITIO N ( SEQ )
Adjust P 5 ( SLS) position by changing
SPR position ( center of P 5 tr acks
SPR). Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys
and SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d to set
SPR:Dv field from -1.00 to +1.00 (time
deviated fr om nominal position in
0.05 µs incr ements) .
SPR PO SITIO N ( SEQ )
Use
S-1403DL
CURSO R
Keys,
O N/CAL Key and SLEW Contr ol to set
SPR:Dv: field as desir ed. Set to CAL
for nominal SPR position
( 1.25 µs following P 6 leading edge) .
Set SPR position fr om 0.25 to 2.25 µs
following P 6 by setting SPR:Dv: field
from -1.00 to +1.00 ( in µs fr om
nominal
position) .
( All
DPSK
modulated data shifts accor dingly.)
11. If desir ed, set optional outputs as
follows:
P 6 CONTROL (SEQ)
PREPULSE O UT
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and P4/P6 Keys
in sequence to move cur sor to C10
F unction 02 SEQ P6 field.
Pr ess
O N/CAL Key to activate ( CAL ) or
deactivate (O F F) P 6 .
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and P PULS
Keys in sequence to move cur sor to
C75 Setup Scr een Pr ePulseO ut field.
Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
activate pr epulse thr ough S- 1403DL
PREPULSE O UT Connector . Use S1403DL SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d
to enter 0 to 260 µs ( time fr om
pr epulse leading edge to P 1 leading
edge) .
P 6 WIDTH (SEQ)
Use
S-1403DL
CURSO R
Keys,
O N/CAL Key and SLEW Contr ol to set
P6:Wd: field as desir ed. Set to CAL
for nominal P 6 pulse width ( 16.25 µs
for shor t 56- bit data field or 30.25 µs
for long 112- bit data field) . Var y P 6
pulse width fr om -1.50 to +1.50 ( µs
fr om nominal width) .
C75
SETUP - MISC
AntAEnable:ON
PrePulseOut: 10µs
AntAModSrc:INT
AntBModSrc:INT
1- 2- 2
Page 60
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
EXT SYNC O UT
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and EX SYN
Keys in sequence to move cur sor to
C73 Setup Scr een Enable field. Use
S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and O N/CAL
Key to set applicable Enable field O N
for activating exter nal sync pulse
thr ough S- 1403DL EXT SYNC O UT
Connector . Use S- 1403DL CURSO R
Keys and SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d
to set Dv field from -9.95 to +9.95 µs
( time fr om exter nal sync pulse leading
edge to P 1 leading edge) ( - , P 1
follows exter nal sync; +, exter nal sync
follows P 1 ).
C73
SETUP - EXT SYNC OUT
ATC ModeS ACS ACL
Enable:ON OFF
OFF OFF
Dv:-2.25µS
SCO PE TRIG O UT
Set scope tr igger output thr ough S1403DL SCO PE T RIG O UT Connector
for
desir ed
O scilloscope
display.
Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 2
Keys in sequence to enter C72 Setup
Scr een.
C72
SETUP - SCOPE TRIGGER
ATC ModeS ACS ACL
Enable:OFF ON
ON OFF
Source:CAL CAL
CAL CAL
(in µS)
Set scope tr igger as follows:
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Enable field of inter r ogation type
to O N.
STEP
PROCEDURE
For S- 1403DL contr ol, use S1403DL SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d
to delay tr igger in µs following P 1
leading edge of the first ANT A
inter r ogation. For detailed Mode S
r eply view, set applicable Sour ce
field as follows accor ding to the
inter r ogation type selected in Step
4 ( Maximum field settings ar e
ATC:35 µs or 255 µs for Mode S
[SEQ ], ACS and ACL) :
F or SEQ , P 1 - SPR Spacing ( 1.8 to
7.7 µs) + expected r eply delay
( 128 µs) + r eply P 1 to desir ed
tr igger point ( 0 to 120 µs) .
F or ACL , P 1 - P 3 Mode Spacing ( 5
to 25 µs) + P 3 - P 4 spacing ( 0.05 to
3.95 µs) + expected r eply delay
( 128 µs) + r eply P 1 to desir ed
tr igger point ( 0 to 120 µs) .
Set ATC- 1400A T O /TAC/T D Switch
to T O ( inter r ogation at AT C- 1400A
G EN Connector ) or T D ( r eply at
ATC- 1400A XMTR Connector ) .
Connect
S- 1403DL
UUT
XMTR
Connector to O scilloscope for viewing
UUT r eplies at S- 1403DL ANT B
Connector .
12. Pr ess S- 1403DL BURST Key to
activate Burst function, transmitting
specified inter r ogation sequence.
13. Verify UUT replies as follows:
FREQUENCY
Ver ify UUT tr ansmit fr equency on
ATC-1400A XMTR FREQ MHz Display.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Sour ce field of inter r ogation type
to CAL ( AT C- 1400A contr ols
tr igger position) or a numer ic value
(S-1403DL controls trigger
position).
1- 2- 2
Page 61
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
STEP
PRO CEDURE
ACCURACY
PERCENT REPLY
For ATCRBS r eplies, set AT C- 1400A
DISPLAY SELECT Contr ol to XPDR
CODE. Ver ify AT CRBS r eply shown
on ATC- 1400A DISPLAY SELECT
Readout.
Ver ify per cent r eply in C10/C20 Bur st
Scr een AntA% and AntB% fields.
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR MO DE
Contr ol to A to verify octal ID.
Set ATC- 1400A XPDR MO DE
Contr ol to AC 2 to ver ify altitude in
feet.
For Mode S r eplies, pr ess S- 1403DL S
MENU Key.
Use S- 1403DL SLEW
Contr ol ( cur sor in S field) to display
each active sequence menu. Ver ify
r eply
data
shown
in
S- 1403DL
Sequence Menu scr eens.
Use S1403DL CURSO R Keys and O N/CAL
Key to set desir ed for mat type in
RPLY field (D for decoded subfields or
N for not decoded data) . ( S- 1403DL
displays r eply data using the r adix
selected in Step 6.)
View r eply
Channel 2.
pulses
on
For detailed per cent r eply infor mation,
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 3 Keys
in sequence to display C30 Per cent
Reply Contr ol Menu. If desir ed, pr ess
S- 1403DL CL/ESC Key to r eset fields.
NOTE: The S- 1403DL measur es
per cent r eply for the total
number of Bur st
inter r ogations.
14. Ver ify
UUT
Mode
infor mation as follows:
S
squitter
INTERVAL
Press S-1403DL 2ND, FUNC#, 0 and
7 Keys in sequence to select Bur st
Scr een.
Ver ify inter val between
squitter s in Sqtr field. ( Nor mally 0.8
to 1.2 seconds.)
O scilloscope
REPLY DEL AY
Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, F UNC#, 0 and
7 Keys in sequence to select Bur st
Scr een.
Ver ify r eply delay in Dly
field.
F or AT CRBS r eplies, ver ify Dly field
indicates 3.000 µs ( ± 0.5 µs) r eply
delay ( P 3 leading edge to F 1 leading
edge) .
F or Mode S r eplies, ver ify Dly field
indicates 128.000 µs ( ± 0.5 µs) r eply
delay ( SPR or P 4 leading edge to P 1
leading edge in r eply) .
For detailed r eply delay infor mation,
pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 4 Keys
in sequence to display C40 Reply
Delay Contr ol Menu. If desir ed, pr ess
S- 1403DL CL/ESC Key to r eset fields.
1- 2- 2
Page 62
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
T HIS PAG E INTENTIO NALLY LEFT BLANK.
1- 2- 2
Page 63
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.9 T EST MENU T EST S
2.9.1
MT L Test
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
1. Connect test equipment accor ding to
1- 2- 2, Figur e 2.
2. Apply power to Mode S Test System.
3. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 1
Keys in sequence to display C71
Inter r ogation T r igger Setup Scr een.
C71
SETUP - INTERROGATION TRIGGER
TrigSource:TrigGen
TrigGen:
100Hz
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol
and
Keyboar d
to
set
T r igSour ce to SelfInterr, TrigGen or
Ext SyncIn.
Set PRF for selected sour ce ≥ 100 Hz
( 500 to 1000 Hz for ATC) .
F or
SelfInterr,
set
AT C- 1400A
PRF/SQ TR Thumbwheels.
F or TrigGen, set Tr igG en field.
F or Ext Syn cIn, adjust exter nal device
PRF thr ough S- 1403DL EXT SYNC IN
Connector .
NOTE: The higher the PRF, the
quicker the MTL Test r uns.
4. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 1 and 0
Keys in sequence to display C10
Contr ol Menu.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set function
field to f 01: ATC, f 02: SEQ , f 03: ACS
or f 04: ACL .
If using Mode S Sequence function
( SEQ ) , set sequence menus accor ding
to Steps 6 thr ough 8 pr ior to setting
C10
Contr ol
Menu
to
f 02: SEQ .
O ther wise, go to Step 8.
STEP
PRO CEDURE
5. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 6
Keys to display C76 SMENU Setup
Scr een. Set as follows:
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
O N/CAL Key to set SmenuRadix to
desir ed data for mat ( HEX
[hexadecimal] or OCTAL).
Use S-1403DL CURSOR, ON/CAL
and ENTER Keys for changing
SetAllSmenu to O F F ( deactivates
all sequence menus) , DEFAULT
( activates/r esets default sequence
menus, deactivates all other s) or
ZERO ( sets all fields except ADDR
to 0) . Refer to 1- 1- 2, Table 5 for
default sequence menus.
Use S-1403DL ON/CAL and ENTER
Keys to set ADDR in all sequence
menus by changing SetAllSmenu
to XPDR ( tr ansponder addr ess) or
USER ( addr ess fr om User = field) .
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to set alter nate
addr esses ( G lobalAddr :User =) and
par ity ( AP XO R=) fields as desir ed
for checking oper ation with bogus
addr esses or bad AP fields.
C76
SETUP - SMENU
SmenuRadix:OCTAL
SetAllSmenu:DEFAULT
GlobalAddr:Xpdr=17725762,AP XOR=00000000
GlobalAddr:User=10273645,AP XOR=00000001
6. Pr ess S- 1403DL S MENU Key
display Mode S Sequence Menu.
to
S001:D;UF00,RL=0,CL=0,AQ=0,
+
ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;DF00,VS=0,SL=0,RI=00,AC=+ 31200,
ADDR=17725762
1- 2- 2
Page 64
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
7. Set inter r ogation sequence as follows:
ACTIVATION
Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to
activate or deactivate sequence menu.
FORMAT
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
O N/CAL Key to select format type for
active sequence menu.
Set to S
( shor t 56- bit tr ansmission) , L ( long
112- bit tr ansmission) or D ( decoded,
used for for mats with defined fields) .
UPLINK FORMAT
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol or Keyboar d to select
desir ed uplink for mat.
DATA FIELDS
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to load data
fields accor ding to Appendix D. Refer
to Appendix B for defined fields and
1- 2- 2, T able 5 for converting data.
Go to Step 9.
8. If ATC, ACS or ACL was selected as
oper ating function in Step 5, set ATC1400A XPDR MO DE Contr ol to A or C.
9. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, T MENU, 2 and
3 Keys in sequence to display
Miscellaneous
MT L
T est
Menu
Scr een.
T23
Reply%:100
Antenna:B
MISC - MTL
Time:25sec
Error: 2=Pass
PASS
MTL:-65.7dBm
STEP
PROCEDURE
10. If MLD option is installed, use S1403DL
CURSO R
Keys,
SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to select
Antenna A or B ( other wise Antenna A
is only selection) .
11. Pr ess S- 1403DL
initiate test.
BURST
Key
to
12. After completion ( test has 99 second
limit to find MTL) or pr essing S1403DL CL/ESC Key to stop test,
ver ify status field on the r ight side of
the top line and ERRO R field. Refer
to 1- 2- 2, Table 8.
#
ERROR
DESCRIPTION
3 High RF Check
Fail
<90% (ATCRBS and all
calls) or <99% (Mode S)
reply at ≥-21 dBm.
4 Low RF Check
Fail
>10% reply at <-81 dBm.
5 MTL Too High
Found MTL >-69 dBm
(ATCRBS and all calls)
or >-71 dBm (Mode S).
6 MTL Too Low
Found MTL <-77 dBm.
7 MTL+3dB Check
Fail
Found MTL, but <90%
(ATCRBS and all calls)
or <99% (Mode S) reply
at MTL+3dB.
8 Can’t find MTL
Can’t find MTL or MTL
not stable.
9 User Aborted Test
Test stopped by user.
MTL Er r or Codes
Table 8
Befor e accepting tests r esulting in
er r or s, ver ify test inter r ogations ar e
set cor r ectly and check per cent r eply
under nor mal conditions.
1- 2- 2
Page 65
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.9.2
EL M T est s
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
STEP
1. Connect test equipment accor ding to
1- 2- 2, Figur e 2.
If ATC- 1400A F 2 /P 2 F 1 /P 1 Switch
is set to F 2 /P 2 , pr ess S- 1403DL
2ND and PPG Keys in sequence to
display C74 PPMG Setup Scr een.
2. Apply power to Mode S Test System.
3. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 1
Keys in sequence to display C71
Inter r ogation T r igger Setup Scr een.
C71
SETUP - INTERROGATION TRIGGER
TrigSource:TrigGen
TrigGen:
10Hz
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol
and
Keyboar d
to
set
T r igSour ce to SelfInterr, TrigGen or
Ext SyncIn.
Set PRF for selected source to 10 Hz.
F or
SelfInterr,
set
AT C- 1400A
PRF/SQ TR Thumbwheels.
F or TrigGen, set Tr igG en field.
F or Ext Syn cIn, adjust exter nal device
PRF thr ough S- 1403DL EXT SYNC IN
Connector .
4. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, T MENU, 3 and
1 Keys in sequence to display ELM
Setup Scr een.
T31
ResrvDelay:
CloseDelay:
UelmSpacing:
ELM - SETUP
100µs
100µs
100µs
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set fields as
desir ed. Refer to 1- 2- 2, F igur es 10
and 11.
5. For power measur ements, set Mode S
Test System as follows:
Set AT C- 1400A F 2 /P 2 F 1 /P 1 Switch
to F 1 /P 1 to measur e pulse power
of P 1 r eply pulse only or F 2 /P 2 for
S- 1403DL to contr ol pulse power
measur ement selection.
PRO CEDURE
C74
ATC
Enable:ON
Pulse:F1
SETUP ModeS
ON
P100
PPMG (POWER)
DELM
ON
1
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to set ModeS
Enable field to O N. Select from 1
to 116 possible Mode S r eply
pulses for ModeS Pulse field.
If conducting DELM testing, set
DELM field to O N and DELM Pulse
field fr om 1 to 16 to select desir ed
r eply segment.
6. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 6
Keys to display C76 SMENU Setup
Scr een.
C76
SETUP - SMENU
SmenuRadix:OCTAL
SetAllSmenu:XPDR
GlobalAddr:Xpdr=17725762,AP XOR=00000000
GlobalAddr:User=10273645,AP XOR=00000001
Set as follows:
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
O N/CAL Key to set SmenuRadix to
desir ed data for mat ( HEX
[hexadecimal] or OCTAL).
Use S-1403DL ON/CAL and ENTER
Keys for changing SetAllSmenu,
setting ADDR field in all currently
active sequence menus, to XPDR
( tr ansponder addr ess for nor mal
oper ation) .
7. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, T MENU, 3 and
0 Keys in sequence to display ELM
Test Menu.
T30
ELM MENU
1)
4)DELM
7)
2)UELM
5)DELM-MULTI 8)
3)UELM-MULTI 6)
9)
1- 2- 2
Page 66
Dec 1/03
PRF
TRIGGER
UELM
UF5
EXAMPLE
17.95 µs
DF21
UELM PROTOCOL
DELAY
RESERVATION
ELM#1
UELM
ELM#2
UF24
DF24
UELM MULTISITE PROTOCOL
SPACING
UF24
≥ 50 µs
DELAY
CLOSEOUT
≥ 100 µ s
≥ 352.75 µ s
NOTE: THE DF24 REPLY COMES AFTER THE LAST UF24 TRANSMISSION.
NOTE: TWO TO SIXTEEN UF24 INTERROGATIONS MAY BE TRANSMITTED.
DF24
≥ 100 µ s
≥ 352.75 µs
EXAMPLE
SPACING
#2
UF24
#1
≥ 50 µs
0.95 µs
UF24
PRF
TRIGGER
UF5
EXAMPLE
DF21
EXAMPLE
02402013
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
UELM Sample Timing Diagr ams
Figur e 10
1- 2- 2
Page 67
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
STEP
8. For
UELM
Singlesite
oper ation,
continue with Step 9.
F or UELM
Multisite oper ation, go to Step 14.
F or DELM Singlesite oper ation, go to
Step
19.
For
DELM Multisite
oper ation, go to Step 24.
UELM Singlesite
9. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2 Key to display T32
UELM Test Scr een.
T32
ELM - UP
ELM
XMT
ERROR
S415-419
5
2=Pass
Press BURST to start test
PASS
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to select
Sequence Menu for ELM data.
PRO CEDURE
11. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set S###
field to next Sequence Menu.
S416:D;UF24,RC=1,NC=03,MC=71000000000000
+ 0000000000000,
ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;
*** No Reply ***
If O FF, pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL
Key to activate Sequence Menu.
Refer to section 9 in Appendix B.
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Sequence Menu for mat field to D,
UF to 24, RC= to 1 if inter mediate
segment or 2 if final segment and
NC= to NC= field setting in prior
Sequence Menu minus one.
Set ELM field to desir ed Sequence
Menu for fir st ELM segment.
Refer to Appendix D and set MC=
as desir ed.
Set XMT field to number of desir ed
Comm- C message segments to be
tr ansmitted ( automatically setting
second ELM field to Sequence
Menu for last ELM segment) .
For final segment, set RPLY
format field to D.
10. Pr ess
S- 1403DL
S
MENU
and
applicable number Keys to display
Sequence Menu for first ELM segment.
S415:D;UF24,RC=0,NC=04,MC=71000000000000
+ 0000000000000,
ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;
*** No Reply ***
If O FF, pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL
Key to activate Sequence Menu.
Refer to section 9 in Appendix B.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Sequence Menu for mat field to D,
UF to 24, RC= to 0 and NC= to
T32 UELM Test Scr een XMT field
setting minus one.
Refer to Appendix D and set MC=
as desir ed, consider ing subfields.
12. Repeat Step 11 until all applicable
Sequence Menus ar e set as desir ed.
S419:D;UF24,RC=2,NC=00,MC=71000000000000
+ 0000000000000,
ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;DF24,KE=1,ND=00,MD=00174000000000
0000000000000,
ADDR=17725762
13. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, T MENU, 3 and
2 Keys in sequence to display T32
UELM Test Menu subscr een.
G o to Step 29.
NOTE: UELM UF24 inter r ogations limit
some var iable par ameter s as
follows:
Fixes ANT B deviation at 0 µs.
Fixes pr epulse offset at 0 µs.
Limits exter nal sync pulse to only
positive deviation ( 0 to 9.95 µs) .
Fixes scope tr igger to coincide with
P1.
Pr ovides PPMG for only the last
UELM.
1- 2- 2
Page 68
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
UELM Multisite
14. Pr ess S- 1403DL 3 Key to display T33
UELM Multisite T est Menu subscr een.
T33
RESV
S813
ELM - UP - MULTI
FAIL
ELM
XMT CLOS ERROR
S814-829 16 S830 10=ResvNoRply
Press BURST to start test
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to select
Sequence Menu bins for ELM data.
STEP
16. Per for m Steps 10 thr ough 12 until all
Sequence Menus with ELMs ar e set.
17. Pr ess
S- 1403DL
applicable number
Sequence
Menu
Inter r ogation.
If O FF, pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL
Key to activate Sequence Menu.
Refer to Appendix D and sections
3 and 4 in Appendix B. Use S1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Sequence Menu for mat field to D,
UF to 4 or 5, RR= to ≥ 20o, DI= to
code cor r esponding to SD=
contents and SD= as desir ed,
consider ing subfields ( accor ding to
DI= setting for nor mal oper ation)
( SD:MES=2) .
Set ELM field to desir ed Sequence
Menu for fir st ELM segment ( no
need to be in sequence with
RESV) .
Set XMT field to number of desir ed
Comm- C message segments to be
tr ansmitted ( automatically setting
ELM second field to Sequence
Menu for last ELM segment) .
15. Pr ess
S- 1403DL
S
MENU
and
applicable number Keys to display
Sequence
Menu
for
Reser vation
Inter r ogation.
S813:D;UF05,PC=0,RR=22,DI=1,SD=171240,
+
ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;DF21,FS=1,DR=00,UM=76,ID=0123,
MB=0403473337000000000, ADDR=17725762
If O FF, pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL
Key to activate Sequence Menu.
Refer to Appendix D and sections
3 and 4 in Appendix B. Use S1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Sequence Menu for mat field to D,
UF to 4 or 5, RR= to ≥ 20o, DI= to
code cor r esponding to SD=
contents and SD= as desir ed,
consider ing subfields ( accor ding to
DI= setting for nor mal oper ation)
( SD:MES=1 or 5) .
S
MENU
and
Keys to display
for
Closeout
S830:D;UF05,PC=0,RR=22,DI=1,SD=170440,
+
ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;DF21,FS=1,DR=00,UM=74,ID=0123,
MB=0403473337000000000
ADDR=17725762
Set RESV field to Sequence Menu
used for Reser vation Inter r ogation.
Set CLO S field to Sequence Menu
for Closeout Inter r ogation ( no
need to be in sequence with ELM) .
PROCEDURE
18. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, T MENU, 3 and
3 Keys in sequence to display T33
UELM Multisite Test Menu subscr een.
G o to Step 29.
DELM Singlesite
19. Pr ess S- 1403DL 4 Key to display T34
DELM Test Menu subscr een.
T34
ELM - DOWN
ELM
EXP/RCV ERROR
S975-990
16 16 2=Pass
Press BURST to start test
PASS
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to select
Sequence Menu for ELM data. Set
ELM field to desir ed Sequence Menu
for first ELM segment.
1- 2- 2
Page 69
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
20. Pr ess
S- 1403DL
S
MENU
and
applicable number Keys to display
Sequence Menu for first ELM segment.
S975:D;UF24,RC=3,NC=00,MC=37777770000000
+ 0000000000000,
ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;DF24,KE=1,ND=17,MD=00100000000000
0000000000000,
ADDR=17725762
If O FF, pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL
Key to activate Sequence Menu.
Refer to section 9 in Appendix B.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Sequence Menu for mat field to D,
UF to 24, RC= to 3 and NC= to 0.
Refer to Appendix D and set MC=
as desir ed, consider ing subfields.
Set SRS subfield for desir ed
number of r eply segments.
Set RPLY format field to D.
21. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set S###
field to next Sequence Menu.
S976:Reply Only
RPLY:D;DF24,KE=1,ND=16,MD=00000000000000
0000000000000,
ADDR=17725762
If O FF, pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL
Key to activate Sequence Menu.
Set format field to Reply Only.
Set RPLY format field to D.
22. Repeat Step 21 until all applicable
Sequence Menus ar e set.
23. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, T MENU, 3 and
4 Keys in sequence to display T34
DELM Test Menu subscr een.
G o to Step 29.
STEP
PRO CEDURE
DELM Multisite
24. Pr ess S- 1403DL 5 Key to display T35
DELM Multisite Test Menu subscr een.
T35
ELM - DOWN - MULTI
FAIL
RESV
ELM
CLOS EXP/RCV ERROR
S950 S951-966 S967 16 14 2=ElmBadND
Press ESC to stop test
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to select
Sequence Menu bins for ELM data.
Set RESV field to Sequence Menu
used for Reser vation Inter r ogation.
Set ELM field to desir ed Sequence
Menu for fir st ELM segment ( no
need to be in sequence with
RESV) .
Set CLO S field to Sequence Menu
for Closeout Inter r ogation ( no
need to be in sequence with ELM) .
25. Pr ess
S- 1403DL
S
MENU
and
applicable number Keys to display
Sequence
Menu
for
Reser vation
Inter r ogation.
S950:D;UF04,PC=0,RR=22,DI=1,SD=171460,
+
ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;DF20,FS=1,DR=00,UM=77,AC=+
0,
MB=0403473337000000000, ADDR=17725762
If O FF, pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL
Key to activate Sequence Menu.
Refer to Appendix D and sections
3 and 4 in Appendix B. Use S1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Sequence Menu for mat field to D,
UF to 4 or 5, RR= to ≥ 20o, DI= to
code cor r esponding to SD=
contents and SD= as desir ed,
consider ing subfields ( accor ding to
DI= setting for nor mal oper ation)
( SD:MES=3 or 6) .
26. Per for m Steps 20 thr ough 22 until all
Sequence Menus with ELMs ar e set.
1- 2- 2
Page 70
Dec 1/03
PRF
TRIGGER
UF24
UF4
EXAMPLE
DF24
DF24
DF20
DELAY
RESERVATION
≥ 100 µ s
≥ 352.75 µs
#2
#1
EXAMPLE
17.95 µs
17.95 µs
PRF
TRIGGER
DELM PROTOCOL
#1
DF24
#2
DF24
#16
DF24
DELM MULTISITE PROTOCOL
UF24
≥ 2392.75 µs
DELAY
CLOSEOUT
≥ 100 µ s
NOTE: ONE TO SIXTEEN DF24 REPLIES MAY BE RECEIVED.
DF24
#16
UF4
EXAMPLE
DF20
EXAMPLE
02402014
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
DELM Sample Timing Diagr ams
Figur e 11
1- 2- 2
Page 71
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
27. Pr ess
S- 1403DL
applicable number
Sequence
Menu
Inter r ogation.
S
MENU
and
Keys to display
for
Closeout
S967:D;UF04,PC=0,RR=22,DI=1,SD=171000,
+
ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;DF20,FS=1,DR=00,UM=74,AC=+
0,
MB=0403473337000000000 ADDR=17725762
If O FF, pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL
Key to activate Sequence Menu.
Refer to Appendix D and sections
3 and 4 in Appendix B. Use S1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
Sequence Menu for mat field to D,
UF to 4 or 5, RR= to ≥ 20o, DI= to
code cor r esponding to SD=
contents and SD= as desir ed,
consider ing subfields ( accor ding to
DI= setting for nor mal oper ation)
( SD:MES=4) .
28. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, T MENU, 3 and
5 Keys in sequence to display T35
DELM Multisite T est Menu subscr een.
29. Pr ess S- 1403DL
initiate test.
BURST
Key
to
30. After completion or pr essing S1403DL CL/ESC Key to stop test,
ver ify status field on the r ight side of
the top line and ERRO R field. Refer
to 1- 2- 2, T ables 9 and 10.
31. Pr ess
S- 1403DL
S
MENU
and
applicable S### Keys in sequence to
view
data.
Repeat
for
other
applicable Sequence Menus.
32. Ver ify power shown on AT C- 1400A
XMTR PWR WATTS Display.
#
ERROR
DESCRIPTION
10
ResvNoRply
Mode S reply not received.
12
ResvBadDF
DF20 or DF21 not received.
14
ResvBadIDS
IDS≠2.
15
ResvBadIIS
IIS≠IIS in reservation
interrogation.
20
AckNoRply
Mode S reply not received.
22
AckBadDF
DF24 not received.
24
AckBadKE
KE≠1.
25
AckBadTAS
TAS≠number of UELM
segments transmitted.
30
ClosNoRply
Mode S reply not received.
32
ClosBadDF
DF20 or DF21 not received.
34
ClosBadIDS
IDS≠2.
35
ClosBadIIS
IIS≠0.
UELM Er r or Codes
Table 9
#
ERROR
DESCRIPTION
10
ResvNoRply
Mode S reply not received.
12
ResvBadDF
DF20 or DF21 not received.
14
ResvBadDR
DR<16.
15
ResvBadIIS
IIS≠IIS in reservation
interrogation.
20
ElmNoRply
Mode S reply not received.
22
ElmBadDF
DF24 not received.
24
ElmBadKE
KE≠0.
25
ElmBadTAS
TAS≠SRS in reservation
interrogation.
26
ElmBadND
ND≠correct unique segment
number, 0 to number of last
segment minus 1.
27
ElmExpRcv
EXP/RCV fields do not
match-missing reply/replies.
30
ClosNoRply
Mode S reply not received.
32
ClosBadDF
DF20 or DF21 not received.
34
ClosBadDR
DR≠0.
35
ClosBadIIS
IIS≠IIS in closeout
interrogation.
36
ClosBadIIS
IIS≠IIS in reservation
interrogation.
DELM Er r or Codes
Table 10
1- 2- 2
Page 72
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.10
MEMO RY OPERATION
2.10.1
Save
The Save function allows stor age of up to
five sets of par ticular user settings ( not
UUT data) . Calibr ation, setup for r emote
oper ation, IFR Bus contr ol and ATC- 1400A
setup ar e not affected or stor ed in the
available memor y slots.
STEP
PROCEDURE
2. Refer to 1- 1- 2 or 1- 2- 2 to configur e S1403DL scr eens as desir ed.
3. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and SAVE Keys
in
sequence
to
enter
Save
Configur ation Scr een.
SAVE CONFIGURATION
Slot 1: xpdrtest1
26mar97,14:45:10
STEP
Saved
Press ENTER
to save.
4. Use S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to select
desir ed memor y Slot 1 to 5.
Recall
PROCEDURE
1. Apply power to S- 1403DL.
2. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and RECALL
Keys in sequence to enter Recall
Configur ation Scr een.
MR
1. Apply power to S- 1403DL.
MS
2.10.2
RECALL CONFIGURATION
Slot 1: xpdrtest1
26mar97,14:45:10
Recalled
Press ENTER
to recall.
3. Use S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to select
desir ed memor y Slot 0 to 5. ( Memor y
Slot 0 contains Factor y Default
settings.)
4. Pr ess S- 1403DL ENTER Key to r ecall
configur ation.
Ver ify
S- 1403DL
displays Recalled in upper r ight
cor ner of scr een to confir m r ecall
action.
5. Pr ess S- 1403DL ENT ER Key with
cur sor in Slot # field to save
configur ation.
Ver ify
S- 1403DL
displays Saved in upper r ight cor ner
of scr een to confir m save action.
NOTE: T he S- 1403DL displays the
date and time of stor age, and
name if applicable.
6. If optional name is desir ed, use S1403DL CURSO R Keys to enter name
field.
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys to
select char acter ( move cur sor ) and
SLEW Contr ol to set or edit selected
char acter s. ( Name can be up to
16 char acter s in length.)
NOTE: By per for ming only Steps 1, 3,
4 and 6, the name field can
be edited any time without
affecting the contents of the
memor y slot.
1- 2- 2
Page 73
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2.11
PRINT SCREEN
2.12
The pr int scr een featur e allows an ASCII
captur e of any display scr een complete with
data.
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
1. Apply power to S- 1403DL.
2. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 8 and 1
Keys in sequence to enter C81
System Scr een.
C81
SYSTEM - RS232 CONTROL
RCI:ENABLE
Screen Dump:ENABLE
RCI Echo:YES
Screen Border:7BIT
Screen EOL:CR/LF
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
O N/CAL Key or SLEW Contr ol to set
scr een dump par ameter s as follows:
Set Scr een Dump to ENABLE.
Set Scr een Bor der to 8BIT (IBM
char acter s) , 7BIT or NONE; as
desir ed and accor ding to output
device ( pr inter or computer with
pr ogr am to view data) .
Set Scr een EO L ( end of line output
terminator) to CR/LF, L F, CR or
NUL accor ding to output device.
3. Per for m desir ed function or test with
S- 1403DL or Mode S Test System.
STAND ALONE OPERATION
The S- 1403DL Stand Alone mode allows
Mode S testing thr ough a single antenna
without connecting the ATC- 1400A. O nly
SLS, inter fer ence and suppr essor pulses
cannot be simulated.
All UUT data and
measurements are obtainable in Stand Alone
mode except for power and fr equency.
STEP
1. Apply power to S- 1403DL
ATC- 1400A connected.
C79
SETUP - ATC1400A CONTROLS
ATCRBS:C
P123Wd: 1.05µS
RF I/O:NORM Mode:DI
P2Dv: CAL
Scope :To
Spc: 333.3µS P3Dv:+1.95µS
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
O N/CAL Key or SLEW Contr ol to set
fields accor ding to simulated ATC1400A contr ols ( 1- 2- 2, Table 11) .
3. Connect tr ansponder UUT
1403DL ANT B Connector .
6. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND and PRT SCR
Keys in sequence to send data.
XPDR MODE Control
P123Wd
XPDR PULSE WIDTH Thumbwheels
O mit step por tions involving power
and fr equency measur ements.
O mit step por tions involving SLS,
inter fer ence or suppr essor pulses.
Repeat Step 2 of this pr ocedur e
for step por tions involving
applicable ATC- 1400A contr ols.
CW/NORM/OFF Switch
Mode
DBL INTERR/INTRF PULSE Thumbwheels (mode part)
P2Dv
XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL Switch and XPDR P 2 /P 3 DEV Thumbwheels
Scope
T O /TAC/T D Switch
P3Dv
S-
SIMULATED ATC-1400A CONTROLS
ATCRBS
Spc
to
4. Per for m testing, as desir ed, accor ding
to pr ocedur es in 2.2 thr ough 2.9 in 12- 2 with following stipulations:
5. Connect S- 1403DL RS- 232 Connector
to input connector of output device.
RF I/O
without
2. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 9
Keys in sequence to enter C79 Setup
Scr een.
4. Use S- 1403DL Keyboar d to display
desir ed scr een.
FIELD
PRO CEDURE
DBL INTERR/INTRF PULSE Thumbwheels (spacing part)
XPDR DEV P 3 /CAL Switch and XPDR P 2 /P 3 DEV Thumbwheels
Stand Alone Mode Simulated ATC- 1400A Contr ols
Table 11
1- 2- 2
Page 74
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
3. PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
3.1 GENERAL
3.5 TEST RECO RD
The Per for mance Evaluation ver ifies S1403DL display and Mode S T est System
fr ont
panel
contr ol
oper ation.
The
Per for mance Evaluation Pr ocedur e is a
cover s- on test designed to give the user a
high level of confidence the Mode S Test
System is oper ating pr oper ly.
Use the
Per for mance Evaluation when the oper ating
condition of the Mode S T est System is in
question or when or ientation to the Mode S
Test System is desir ed ( new or infr equent
user ) .
T he
Per for mance
Evaluation
Pr ocedur e r equir es appr oximately thr ee
hour s to per for m.
A Per for mance Evaluation Data Sheet is
pr ovided for r ecor ding the r esults obtained
while
per for ming
the
Per for mance
Evaluation Pr ocedur e.
Refer to 1- 1- 2, Figur e 1 for S- 1403DL
contr ols, connector s and indicator s. Refer
to 1- 1- 2, F igur e 2 for S- 1403DL Keyboar d
r efer ences. Refer to 1- 1- 2, Figur e 48 for
ATC- 1400A
contr ols,
connector s
and
indicators.
3.2 PRE- O PERATIO NAL CONDITIONS
Read all steps pr ior to per for ming
Per for mance Evaluation Pr ocedur e.
NOTE: Repr oducing copies of the
Per for mance Evaluation Data Sheet
is r ecommended, r ather than using
the copy in this manual.
3.6 PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
PRO CEDURE
TEST EQ UIPMENT: Dual Pulse G ener ator
Fr equency Counter
Fr equency Standar d
O scilloscope
Power Meter
Spectr um Analyzer
STEP
PROCEDURE
INITIAL CONDITIONS AND SETTINGS
1. Set ATC- 1400A as follows:
the
Connect the S- 1403DL to the ATC- 1400A
accor ding to 1.4 in 1- 2- 1.
3.3. TEST EQ UIPMENT REQ UIREMENTS
Appendix C contains a compr ehensive list
of test equipment suitable for per for ming
the Per for mance Evaluation Pr ocedur e.
O ther
test
equipment
meeting
the
specifications listed in Appendix C may be
substituted for the r ecommended models.
NOTE: F or cer tain pr ocedur es in this
manual, the test equipment listed in
Appendix C may exceed the
minimum r equir ed specifications.
3.4 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
Per for mance
checks
validate
specific
har dwar e, softwar e and signal oper ation.
Should the per for mance checks confir m
incor r ect oper ation, the S- 1403DL must be
r ecalibr ated. Ser vice including calibr ation
must be per for med only by qualified ser vice
per sonnel. Refer to 1- 4- 1.
CONTROL
CW/NORM/OFF Switch
SLS/ECHO ON/OFF Switch
MAN/AUTO/MAN STEP
Switch
XPDR DEV P 3 /CAL Switch
XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL Switch
SETTING
NORM
OFF
MAN
CAL
CAL
ON
PRF/SQTR ON/OFF Switch
OFF
TACAN ON/OFF Switch
C
XPDR MODE Control
DISPLAY SELECT Control PRF SQTR Hz
PRF/SQUITTER
0200
Thumbwheels
DBL INTERR/INTRF
000.0 OFF
Thumbwheels
FREQ/FUNCTION SELECT
1030 XPDR
Thumbwheels
OFF
∆F Thumbwheels
SELF-INTERR/OFF Switch
All other controls
OFF
initial setting
not required
2. Connect ATC- 1400A G EN Connector
to O scilloscope Channel 1 input
accor ding to 1- 2- 3, Figur e 12.
1- 2- 3
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SCOPE TRIG OUT
FREQUENCY
COUNTER
EXT PRF OUT
S-1403DL
TRIG
SCOPE
ATC-1400A
CHAN 1
GEN
POWER
METER
FREQUENCY
STANDARD
RF I/O
02403004
Function and RF Level Tests Setup Diagr am
Figur e 12
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
3. Connect O scilloscope Exter nal T r igger
to S- 1403DL SCO PE T RIG O UT
Connector accor ding to 1- 2- 3, F igur e
12.
4. Apply power to Mode S Test System.
5. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 2
Keys in sequence to enter C72 Setup
Scr een.
C72
SETUP - SCOPE TRIGGER
ATC ModeS ACS ACL
Enable: ON ON
ON ON
Source:CAL CAL
CAL CAL
(in µS)
6. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
O N/CAL Key to set all Enable fields to
O N and all Sour ce fields to CAL .
7. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 5
Keys in sequence to enter the C75
Setup Scr een
C75
SETUP - MISC
AntAEnable:ON
PrePulseOut:OFF
AntAModSrc:INT
AntBModSrc:INT
8. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol
and
Keyboar d
to
set
AntAEnable to O N, AntAModSrc to
INT,
AntBModSrc
to
INT
and
Pr ePulseO ut to O F F.
9. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 8 and 4
Keys in sequence to enter the C84
System Scr een
STEP
PRO CEDURE
C84
SYSTEM - IFR BUS
1400 Control: MASTER
Must power down
1403 Bus Address: 3
before settings
take effect.
10. If necessar y, use S- 1403DL CURSO R
Keys, SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to
set 1400 Contr ol to MASTER. If 1400
Contr ol setting changed, pr ess S1403DL PO WER Switch O F F ( O ) and
back O N ( I) to r ecycle power .
S- 1403DL TO ATC- 1400A
COMMUNICATION
11. Ver ify S- 1403DL shows sign on
sequence scr eens:
Fr ont Panel
Pr ocessor F/W, Star tup Applications,
Restor e Envir onment Settings and
Main Pr ocessor F/W Scr eens.
12. After sign on per iod has ended, ver ify
S- 1403DL MENU Display shows Main
Contr ol Menu.
C00
1)FUNC A
2)FUNC B
3)%REPLY
MAIN CMENU
4)REPLY DELAY 7)SETUP MENU
5)SQTR 1of2
8)SYSTEM MENU
6)SQTR 2of2
9)CAL MENU
13. Press S-1403DL 2ND, FUNC#, 0 and
1 Keys in sequence.
14. Ver ify S- 1403DL MENU Display shows
ATC Scr een with P3:CAL. If needed,
pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, P3 and O N/CAL
Keys to set P3:CAL .
1- 2- 3
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
C10 f01:ATC (ATCRBS)
STEP
PROCEDURE
27. Ver ify
P3
is
O scilloscope.
not
displayed
on
Arf:+1.2
P3:CAL
Altitude:------- Dly=-------- Sqtr=----AntA%:ATC= 0,S= 0 AntB%= 0 AntB:+.95
28. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
P3:CAL .
15. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 1
Keys in sequence to enter the C71
Setup Scr een.
29. Set ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch
to
ON
and
ATC- 1400A
SLS/ECHO Thumbwheels to +0.
C71
SETUP - INTERROGATION TRIGGER
TrigSource:TrigGen
TrigGen:
1500Hz
16. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol
and
Keyboar d
to
set
T r igSour ce to TrigGen and Tr igG en to
1500 Hz.
17. Connect
F r equency
Standar d
to
F r equency
Counter
and
connect
F r equency Counter to S- 1403DL EXT
PRF O UT Connector accor ding to
1- 2- 3, Figur e 12.
18. Ver ify F r equency Counter indicates
1500 Hz ( ± 1.0525 Hz) ( tests same
har dwar e that measur es UUT squitter
intervals) .
19. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol
and
Keyboar d
to
set
Tr igSour ce to SelfInterr.
ATC FUNCTION
20. Set AT C- 1400A T O /TAC/T D Switch to
TO.
21. Ver ify P 1 leading edge to P 3 leading
edge is 21.0 µs ( ± 10 ns) .
22. Set AT C- 1400A XPDR MO DE Contr ol
to A.
23. Ver ify P 1 leading edge to P 3 leading
edge is 8.0 µs ( ± 10 ns) .
24. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, P3 and O N/CAL
Keys in sequence to set P3:VAR.
25. Adjust
AT C- 1400A
SLS/ECHO
Thumbwheels and ver ify P 3 level
changes accor dingly.
26. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
P3:O F F.
30. Ver ify P 1 leading edge to P 2 leading
edge is 2.0 µs ( ± 10 ns) .
31. Adjust
ATC- 1400A
SLS/ECHO
Thumbwheels and ver ify P 2 level
changes accor dingly.
32. Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL
Switch to - ' .
33. Adjust ATC- 1400A XPDR P 2 /P 3 DEV
Thumbwheels and ver ify P 2 moves
closer to P 1 .
34. Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL
Switch to + ' .
35. Adjust ATC- 1400A XPDR P 2 /P 3 DEV
Thumbwheels and ver ify P 2 moves
away fr om P 1 .
36. Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL
Switch to CAL .
37. Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV P 3 /CAL
Switch to - ' .
38. Adjust ATC- 1400A XPDR P 2 /P 3 DEV
Thumbwheels and ver ify P 3 moves
closer to P 1 .
39. Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV P 3 /CAL
Switch to + ' .
40. Adjust ATC- 1400A XPDR P 2 /P 3 DEV
Thumbwheels and ver ify P 3 moves
away fr om P 1 .
41. Set ATC- 1400A XPDR DEV P 3 /CAL
Switch to CAL .
42. Set ATC- 1400A XPDR PULSE WIDTH
VAR/CAL Switch to VAR.
43. Adjust
ATC- 1400A
XPDR
PULSE
WIDTH Thumbwheels and ver ify P 1 ,
P 2 and P 3 pulse widths change
accor dingly.
1- 2- 3
Page 3
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
44. Set ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O F F.
SEQ FUNCTION
45. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, F UNC#, 0 and
2 Keys in sequence.
46. Ver ify S- 1403DL MENU Display shows
Sequence Scr een with P6, P2 and
SPR,Dv: fields set to CAL and
SPR:O N.
If needed, use S- 1403DL
CURSO R Keys and SLEW Control to
set P6, P2 and SPR,Dv fields to CAL
and SPR:O N.
C10 f02:SEQ (ModeS)
Arf:+1.2
P6:CAL,Wd: CAL ,Dv: CAL
P2:CAL
SPR:ON ,Dv: CAL Dly=-------- Sqtr=----AntA%:ATC= 0,S= 0 AntB%= 0 AntB:+.95
47. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 6
Keys in sequence to display C76
Setup Scr een.
C76
SETUP - SMENU
SmenuRadix:OCTAL
SetAllSmenu:DEFAULT
GlobalAddr:Xpdr=17725762,AP XOR=00000000
GlobalAddr:User=10273645,AP XOR=00000001
STEP
PRO CEDURE
54. Use S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to enter
Sequence Menu S003.
55. Ver ify Sequence Menu S003 displays
decoded UF05 in octal for mat.
S003:D;UF05,PC=0,RR=00,DI=0,SD=000000,
+
ADDR=XPDR
RPLY:D;
*** NO REPLY ***
56. Use S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to enter
Sequence Menu S004.
57. Ver ify Sequence Menu S004 displays
decoded UF11 in octal for mat.
S004:D;UF11,PR=00,IC=00,CL=0
+
ADDR=XPDR
RPLY:D;
*** NO REPLY ***
58. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 6
Keys in sequence to display C76
Setup Scr een.
59. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to set SMENU Radix to
HEX.
48. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to set SmenuRadix to
OCTAL
and
SetAllSmenu
to
DEFAULT .
60. Pr ess S- 1403DL S MENU Key.
49. Pr ess S- 1403DL ENT ER Key.
62. Ver ify Sequence Menu S005 displays
decoded UF16 in hexadecimal for mat.
50. Pr ess S- 1403DL S MENU Key.
51. Ver ify Sequence Menu S001 displays
decoded UF 00 in octal for mat.
S001:D;UF00,RL=0,AQ=0,BD=000,
+
ADDR=XPDR
RPLY:D;
*** NO REPLY ***
52. Use S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to enter
Sequence Menu S002.
53. Ver ify Sequence Menu S002 displays
decoded UF 04 in octal for mat.
S002:D;UF04,PC=0,RR=00,DI=0,SD=000000,
+
ADDR=XPDR
RPLY:D;
*** NO REPLY ***
61. Use S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to enter
Sequence Menu S005.
S005:D;UF16,RL=0,AQ=0,
+ MU=00000000000000,
RPLY:D;
*** NO REPLY ***
ADDR=3FABF2
63. Use S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to enter
Sequence Menu S006.
64. Ver ify Sequence Menu S006 displays
decoded UF20 in hexadecimal for mat.
S006:D;UF20,PC=0,RR=14,DI=0,SD=0000,
+ MA=00000000000000,
ADDR=3FABF2
RPLY:D;
*** NO REPLY ***
65. Use S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to enter
Sequence Menu S007.
1- 2- 3
Page 4
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
STEP
PROCEDURE
66. Ver ify Sequence Menu S07 displays
decoded UF 21 in hexadecimal for mat.
81. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
Sequence Scr een P2:CAL .
S007:D;UF21,PC=0,RR=14,DI=0,SD=0000,
+ MA=00000000000000,
ADDR=3FABF2
RPLY:D;
*** NO REPLY ***
82. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, P4( P6) and
O N/CAL Keys in sequence to set
Sequence Scr een P6:O F F.
67. Use S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to enter
Sequence Menu S008.
68. Ver ify Sequence Menu S008 displays
decoded UF 00 in hexadecimal for mat.
S008:D;UF00,RL=0,AQ=0,BD=00,
+
ADDR=3FABF2
RPLY:D;
*** NO REPLY ***
69. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 6
Keys in sequence to display C76
Setup Scr een.
70. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Control to set Set All to O F F.
71. Pr ess S- 1403DL ENT ER Key.
72. Pr ess S- 1403DL S MENU Key.
73. Use S-1403DL CURSO R and O N/CAL
Keys to activate and set S000: D; UF00
with active tr igger +.
74. Ver ify P 1 leading edge to P 2 leading
edge is 2.0 µs ( ± 10 ns) .
75. Ver ify P 1 leading edge to P 6 leading
edge is 3.5 µs ( ± 10 ns) .
leading
edge
to
76. Ver ify
P2
Synchr onous Phase Rever sal ( SPR) is
2.75 µs ( ± 10 ns) .
is
83. Ver ify
P6
O scilloscope.
not
displayed
on
84. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
Sequence Scr een P6:CAL .
85. Pr ess S- 1403DL → CURSO R Key and
O N/CAL Key to set Sequence Scr een
P6:CAL,Wd: +0.00.
86. Use S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to adjust
P6:,Wd: field fr om negative to positive
width
var ies
and
ver ify
P6
accor dingly.
87. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
Sequence Scr een P6:CAL,Wd: CAL .
88. Pr ess S- 1403DL → CURSO R Key and
O N/CAL Key to set Sequence Scr een
P6:CAL,Wd: CAL,Dv:+0.00.
89. Use S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to adjust
P6:,Dv: field fr om negative to positive
position
changes
and
ver ify
P6
accor dingly.
90. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
Sequence
Scr een
P6:CAL,Wd:
CAL,Dv: CAL .
91. Set ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch
to
ON
and
SLS/ECHO
Thumbwheels to +0.
92. Ver ify P 5 SLS pulse over laps SPR.
77. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, P2 and O N/CAL
Keys in sequence to set Sequence
Scr een P2:VAR.
93. Adjust
ATC- 1400A
SLS/ECHO
Thumbwheels and ver ify P 5 level
changes accor dingly.
78. Adjust
AT C- 1400A
SLS/ECHO
Thumbwheels and ver ify P 2 level
changes accor dingly.
94. Pr ess S- 1403DL
O N/CAL Keys in
SPR: O FF.
79. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
Sequence Scr een P2:O F F.
95. Ver ify SPR is
O scilloscope.
is
80. Ver ify
P2
O scilloscope.
not
displayed
on
2ND, SPR and
sequence to set
not
displayed
on
96. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
Sequence Scr een SPR:O N.
1- 2- 3
Page 5
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
STEP
PRO CEDURE
97. Pr ess S- 1403DL → CURSO R Key and
O N/CAL
Key
to
set
SPR:
ON,Dv:+0.00.
108. Adjust
ATC- 1400A
SLS/ECHO
Thumbwheels and ver ify P 4 level
changes accor dingly.
98. Use S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to adjust
SPR:,Dv: field fr om a negative to
positive value and ver ify P 5 and SPR
positions change accor dingly.
109. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
ACL Scr een P4:O F F.
99. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
Sequence Scr een SPR: O N,Dv: CAL .
100. Set ATC- 1400A SLS/ECHO O N/O FF
Switch to O F F.
ACS FUNCTION
101. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, F UNC#, 0 and
3 Keys in sequence.
102. Ver ify S- 1403DL MENU Display shows
ACS Scr een with P4 and P3 fields set
to CAL.
If needed, use S- 1403DL
CURSO R Keys and SLEW Control to
set P4 and P3 fields to CAL .
C10 f03:ACS (All Call Short)
Arf:+1.2
P4:CAL,Wd: CAL ,Dv: CAL
P3:CAL
DF=--,AA=------ Dly=-------- Sqtr=----AntA%:ATC= 0,S= 0 AntB%= 0 AntB:+.95
103. Ver ify P 1 leading edge to P 4 leading
edge is 10.0 µs ( ± 10 ns) .
104. Ver ify P 4 width is 0.8 µs ( ± 10 ns) .
ACL FUNCTION
105. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, F UNC#, 0 and
4 Keys in sequence.
106. Ver ify S- 1403DL MENU Display shows
ACL Scr een with P4 and P3 fields set
to CAL.
If needed, use S- 1403DL
CURSO R Keys and SLEW Control to
set P4 and P3 fields to CAL .
C10 f04:ACL (All Call Long)
Arf:+1.2
P4:CAL,Wd: CAL ,Dv: CAL
P3:CAL
DF=--,AA=------ Dly=-------- Sqtr=----AntA%:ATC= 0,S= 0 AntB%= 0 AntB:+.95
is
110. Ver ify
P4
O scilloscope.
not
displayed
on
111. Pr ess O N/CAL Key to set ACL Scr een
P4:CAL .
112. Ver ify P 4 pulse width is 1.6 µs
( ± 10 ns) .
113. Pr ess S- 1403DL → CURSO R Key and
O N/CAL Key to set P4:CAL,Wd:+0.00.
114. Use S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to adjust
P4:,Wd: field fr om a negative to
positive value and ver ify P 4 width
var ies accor dingly.
115. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
ACL Scr een P4:CAL,Wd: CAL .
116. Pr ess S- 1403DL → CURSO R Key and
O N/CAL Key to set ACL Scr een
P4:CAL,Wd: CAL,Dv:+0.00.
117. Use S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to adjust
P4:,Dv: field fr om negative to positive
position
var ies
and
ver ify
P4
accor dingly.
118. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
ACL Scr een P4:CAL,Wd: CAL,Dv:
CAL .
INTLCE FUNCTION
119. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 2
Keys in sequence to enter C72 Setup
Scr een.
120. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R and O N/CAL
Keys to set Mode S Enable field to
O F F.
121. Press S-1403DL 2ND, FUNC#, 0 and
5 Keys in sequence.
107. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, P4( P6) and
O N/CAL Keys to set ACL Scr een
P4:VAR.
1- 2- 3
Page 6
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
STEP
PROCEDURE
122. Ver ify S- 1403DL MENU Display shows
Inter lace Scr een.
136. Ver ify fir st inter r ogation ATCRBS
pulse patter n consists of P 1 and P 3 .
C10 f05:INTLCE;Ratio:1to
137. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 2
Keys in sequence to enter C72 Setup
Scr een.
AntA%:ATC=
0,S=
1
Arf:+1.2
Dly=-------- Sqtr=----0 AntB%= 0 AntB:+.95
123. Pr ess S- 1403DL → CURSO R and 1
Keys to set INTLCE,Ratio:1to 1.
124. Ver ify AT CRBS pulse patter n consists
of P 1 and P 3 .
125. Use O scilloscope ∆time
r efer ence P 1 leading edge.
start
to
126. Use O scilloscope ∆time stop to verify
P 1 of Mode S inter r ogation occur s
200 µs ( ± 100 ns) following P 1 of the
AT CRBS inter r ogation.
127. Ver ify Mode S pulse patter n consists
of P 1 , P 2 and P 6 .
128. Use S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to set
INTLCE,Ratio:1to 2.
129. Ver ify two ATCRBS inter r ogations
occur between Mode S inter r ogations.
DI FUNCTION
138. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R and O N/CAL
Keys to set Mode S Enable field to
O N.
139. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R and O N/CAL
Keys to set DI,1st:SEQ .
140. Ver ify fir st inter r ogation Mode S pulse
pattern consists of P 1 , P 2 and P 6 .
141. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
DI,1st:ACS.
142. Ver ify fir st inter r ogation ATCRBS O nly
All Call pulse patter n consists of P 1 ,
P 3 and shor t P 4 .
143. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
Contr ol Menu #1 DI,1st:ACL .
144. Ver ify fir st inter r ogation ATCRBS/
Mode S All Call pulse patter n consists
of P 1 , P 3 and long P 4 .
145. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
DI,1st:ATC.
130. Press S-1403DL 2ND, FUNC#, 0 and
6 Keys in sequence.
146. Use O scilloscope ∆time
r efer ence P 1 leading edge.
131. Ver ify * DI/INTF ERRO R * indication
flashes in top line of S- 1403DL MENU
Display.
147. Use O scilloscope ∆time stop to verify
P 1 of second inter r ogation occur s
200 µs ( ± 15 ns) following P 1 of the
fir st inter r ogation.
132. Set AT C- 1400A DBL INT ERR/INTRF
PULSE
T humbwheels
to
200.0
DOUBLE.
133. Set
AT C- 1400A
Thumbwheels to 100.
PRF/SQ TR
134. Ver ify S- 1403DL MENU Display shows
Double Inter r ogation Scr een.
C10 f06:DI;1st:ATC,2nd:ATC
Arf:+1.2
P3:CAL
Altitude:------- Dly=-------- Sqtr=----AntA%:ATC= 0,S= 0 AntB%= 0 AntB:+.95
135. Use S-1403DL CURSO R and O N/CAL
Keys to set DI,1st:ATC,2nd:ATC.
start
to
148. Ver ify second inter r ogation ATCRBS
pulse patter n consists of P 1 and P 3 .
149. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
DI,2nd:SEQ .
150. Ver ify second inter r ogation Mode S
pulse patter n consists of P 1 , P 2 and
P6.
151. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
DI,2nd:ACS.
152. Ver ify second inter r ogation ATCRBS
O nly All Call pulse patter n consists of
P 1 , P 3 and shor t P 4 .
1- 2- 3
Page 7
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
STEP
153. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
DI,2nd:ACL .
154. Ver ify second inter r ogation ATCRBS/
Mode S All Call pulse patter n consists
of P 1 , P 3 and long P 4 .
BURST FUNCTION
155. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, F UNC#, 0 and
7 Keys in sequence.
156. Ver ify * DI/INTF ERRO R * indication
flashes in top line of S- 1403DL MENU
Display.
157. Set ATC- 1400A DBL INT ERR/INTRF
PULSE Thumbwheels to 200.0 O FF.
158. Ver ify S- 1403DL MENU Display shows
Bur st Scr een.
C10 f07:BURST;SEQ:250
Arf:+1.2
P6:CAL,Wd: CAL ,Dv: CAL
P2:CAL
SPR:ON ,Dv: CAL Dly=-------- Sqtr=----AntA%:ATC= 0,S= 0 AntB%= 0 AntB:+.95
159. Pr ess S- 1403DL → CURSO R, 1, 0, 0,
0
and
ENTER
Keys
to
set
BURST;AT C: 1000.
160. Pr ess S- 1403DL BURST
activate BURST Function.
Key
to
161. Ver ify
AT CRBS
inter r ogation
is
displayed on O scilloscope for five
seconds.
162. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys
Keyboar d to set SEQ : 250.
163. Set
AT C- 1400A
Thumbwheels to 50.
and
PRF /SQ TR
164. Pr ess S- 1403DL BURST
activate BURST Function.
Key
to
165. Ver ify
Mode
S
inter r ogation
is
displayed on O scilloscope for five
seconds.
ANT A RF VERNIER
166. Pr ess S- 1403DL S MENU Key.
167. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R and O N/CAL
Keys to set S000: L; UF00 with active
tr igger +.
PRO CEDURE
S000:L;UF00,000000000000000000000
+
ADDR=XPDR
RPLY:D;
*** NO REPLY ***
168. Press S-1403DL 2ND, FUNC#, 0 and
2 Keys in sequence to enter SEQ
Scr een.
169. Connect Power Meter to ATC- 1400A
RF I/O Connector accor ding to 1- 2- 3,
Figur e 12.
170. Set
ATC- 1400A
Switch to CW.
CW/NO RM/O FF
171. Pr ess S- 1403DL ARF LVL, 0 and
ENTER Keys in sequence to set
Ar f:+0.0.
172. Adjust ATC- 1400A RF LEVEL Contr ol
until RF LEVEL - dBm Display r eads
04 (-4 dBm).
173. Recor d Power
r efer ence level.
Meter
r eading
for
174. Adjust S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to set
Ar f:+3.0.
175. Ver ify Power Meter displays Step 173
r efer ence level + 3.0 dB ( ± 0.3 dB) .
176. Adjust S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to set
Ar f:-3.0.
177. Ver ify Power Meter displays Step 173
r efer ence level - 3.0 dB ( ± 0.3 dB) .
178. Disconnect Power Meter fr om
ATC- 1400A RF I/O Connector .
NOTE: Steps 179 thr ough 188 per tain
to S- 1403DL Test Auxiliar ies
without the MLD option
installed. Steps 189 thr ough
210 per tain to S- 1403DL Test
Auxiliar ies with the MLD
option installed.
ANT B RF LEVEL (w/o MLD)
179. Connect Spectr um Analyzer to
ATC- 1400A RF I/O Connector .
180. Adjust ATC- 1400A RF LEVEL Contr ol
until RF LEVEL - dBm Display r eads
50 ( - 50 dBm) .
1- 2- 3
Page 8
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
STEP
181. Adjust S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to set
Ar f:+0.0.
182. Set Spectr um Analyzer as follows:
CONTROL
Frequency Span
Resolution Bandwidth
Sweep Rate
Log Scale
Triggering
183. Set
ATC- 1400A
Switch to NORM.
SETTING
Zero
3 MHz
5 or 10 µs
1 or 2 dB/Div
Video
CW/NO RM/O FF
184. Adjust Spectr um Analyzer for stable
display and r ecor d signal level as
r efer ence.
185. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, ANT B and
O N/CAL Keys in sequence to set
AntB: field to numer ical value.
186. Disconnect Spectr um Analyzer fr om
ATC- 1400A RF I/O Connector .
187. Connect Spectr um Analyzer
1403DL ANT B Connector .
to
S-
188. Ver ify level equals Step 184 r efer ence
( ± 1 dB) .
ANT B RF L EVEL /VERNIER ( w / MLD)
189. Connect Spectr um Analyzer to
ATC- 1400A RF I/O Connector .
190. Adjust ATC- 1400A RF LEVEL Contr ol
until RF LEVEL - dBm Display r eads
20 ( - 20 dBm) .
191. Adjust S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to set
Ar f:+0.0.
192. Set Spectr um Analyzer as follows:
CONTROL
Frequency Span
Resolution Bandwidth
Sweep Rate
Log Scale
Triggering
193. Set
ATC- 1400A
Switch to NORM.
SETTING
Zero
3 MHz
5 or 10 µs
1 or 2 dB/Div
Video
CW/NO RM/O FF
194. Adjust Spectr um Analyzer for stable
display and r ecor d signal level as
r efer ence.
PROCEDURE
195. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, ANT B and
O N/CAL Keys in sequence to set
AntB: field to numer ical value.
196. Disconnect Spectr um Analyzer fr om
ATC- 1400A RF I/O Connector .
197. Connect Spectr um Analyzer to
S- 1403DL ANT B Connector .
198. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU and 2 Keys
to enter the Function B Scr een.
199. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys
SLEW Control to set Brf:- 20+0.0.
and
200. Ver ify level is equal
r efer ence ( ± 0.5 dB) .
194
to
Step
201. Disconnect Spectr um Analyzer fr om
S- 1403DL ANT B Connector .
202. Connect Power Meter to S- 1403DL
ANT B Connector .
203. Set CW/NO RM/O FF Switch to CW.
204. Recor d Power
r efer ence level.
Meter
r eading
for
205. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys
SLEW Control to set Brf:- 20+3.0.
and
206. Ver ify Power Meter r eading is equal to
Step 204 r efer ence level + 3.0 dB
( ± 0.3 dB) .
207. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys
SLEW Control to set Brf:- 20- 3.0.
and
208. Ver ify Power Meter r eading is equal to
Step 204 r efer ence level - 3.0 dB
( ± 0.3 dB) .
209. Disconnect Power Meter fr om
S- 1403DL ANT B Connector .
210. Set
ATC- 1400A
Switch to NORM.
CW/NO RM/O FF
PREPULSE
211. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, FUNC#, 0 and
1 Keys in sequence to enter ATC
Scr een.
212. Set
ATC- 1400A
Thumbwheels to 200.
PRF/SQ TR
1- 2- 3
Page 9
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
STEP
213. Disconnect S- 1403DL SCO PE T RIG
O UT Connector fr om O scilloscope
Exter nal Tr igger .
214. Connect S- 1403DL PREPULSE O UT
Connector to O scilloscope Channel 2
input accor ding to 1- 2- 3, F igur e 13.
PRO CEDURE
EXT SYNC O UT
222. Connect S- 1403DL PREPULSE O UT
Connector to O scilloscope Exter nal
Tr igger accor ding to 1- 2- 3, Figur e 14.
EXT SYNC OUT
PREPULSE OUT
S-1403DL
PREPULSE OUT
CHAN 2
CHAN 2
SCOPE
CHAN 1
CHAN 1
ATC-1400A
GEN
GEN
02403006
02403005
Pr epulse Test Setup Diagr am
F igur e 13
215. Set
O scilloscope
Channel 2.
TRIG
SCOPE
ATC-1400A
to
tr igger
on
216. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, P PULS and
O N/CAL Keys in sequence to activate
C75 Setup Scr een Pr ePulseO ut field.
C75
SETUP - MISC
AntAEnable:ON
PrePulseOut:
AntAModSrc:INT
AntBModSrc:INT
0µS
217. Pr ess S- 1403DL 0 and ENT ER Keys
to set PrePulseO ut: 0µS.
218. Ver ify pr epulse is coincident with P 1
( ± 100 ns) .
219. Use S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to set
Pr ePulseO ut:260µS.
220. Ver ify P 1 leading edge moves to
260 µs following pr epulse leading
edge ( ± 100 ns) .
221. Disconnect
S- 1403DL
O UT Connector fr om
Channel 2 input.
S-1403DL
PREPULSE
O scilloscope
Ext Sync O ut Test Setup Diagr am
Figur e 14
223. Use S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to set
Pr ePulseO ut: 12µS.
224. Connect S- 1403DL EXT SYNC O UT
Connector to O scilloscope Channel 2
input accor ding to 1- 2- 3, Figur e 14.
225. Set O scilloscope for exter nal tr igger .
226. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, EXT SYN and,
if needed, O N/CAL Keys in sequence
to set C73 Setup Scr een ATC Enable
field O N.
227. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Control to set Dv:+0.00µS.
228. Set O scilloscope for Exter nal Tr igger
with both active channels displayed.
229. Ver ify Ext Sync pulse is coincident
with P 1 ( ± 100 ns) .
230. Use S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to set
Dv:+9.95µS.
231. Ver ify Ext Sync
accor dingly.
pulse
follows
P1
232. Pr ess S- 1403DL +/- Key to change
Dv:-9.95µS.
233. Ver ify Ext Sync pulse pr ecedes P 1
accor dingly.
1- 2- 3
Page 10
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
234. Disconnect
S- 1403DL
O UT Connector fr om
Exter nal Tr igger .
STEP
PROCEDURE
PREPULSE
O scilloscope
240. Set
Dual
Pulse
G ener ator
to
appr oximately 1 kHz Single Pulse
O utput and Inter nal Sync.
235. Disconnect S- 1403DL EXT SYNC O UT
Connector fr om O scilloscope Channel
2 input.
241. Ver ify P 1 occur s appr oximately 18 µs
after O scilloscope tr igger .
EXT SYNC IN
236. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 1
Keys in sequence to display C71
Setup Scr een.
C71
SETUP - INTERROGATION TRIGGER
TrigSource:ExtSyncIn
TrigGen:10.0000Sec
242. Var y Dual
Contr ol.
Pulse
G ener ator
PRF
243. Ver ify inter r ogation r ate tr acks Dual
Pulse G ener ator PRF.
244. Pr ess
O N/CAL
Key
Tr igSour ce:SelfInterr.
to
set
245. Disconnect Dual Pulse G ener ator
Sync O ut fr om O scilloscope Exter nal
Tr igger .
237. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key to set
Tr igSour ce:Ext Syn cIn.
238. Connect Dual Pulse G ener ator TTL
O utput to S- 1403DL EXT SYNC IN
Connector accor ding to 1- 2- 3,
Figur e 15.
239. Connect Dual Pulse G ener ator Sync
O ut to O scilloscope Exter nal Tr igger
accor ding to 1- 2- 3, F igur e 15.
EXT SYNC IN
246. Disconnect Dual Pulse G ener ator TTL
O utput fr om S- 1403DL EXT SYNC IN
Connector .
EXT MO D IN
247. Connect S- 1403DL PREPULSE O UT
Connector to Dual Pulse G ener ator
Tr igger
input
and
O scilloscope
Exter nal Tr igger accor ding to 1- 2- 3,
Figur e 16.
PREPULSE OUT
S-1403DL
EXT MOD IN
S-1403DL
TTL
ATC-1400A
GEN
DUAL
PULSE
GEN
TTL
ATC-1400A
SYNC OUT
TRIG
DUAL
PULSE
GEN
GEN
CHAN 1
TRIG
TRIG
SCOPE
CHAN 1
SCOPE
02403007
Ext Sync In Test Setup Diagr am
F igur e 15
02403008
Ext Mod In Test Setup Diagr am
Figur e 16
1- 2- 3
Page 11
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
STEP
248. Select Exter nal Tr igger mode on Dual
Pulse G ener ator . Set for dual pulse
output.
249. Connect Dual Pulse G ener ator TTL
O utput to S- 1403DL EXT MO D IN
Connector accor ding to 1- 2- 3,
Figur e 16.
250. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, EX MO D and
O N/CAL Keys in sequence to set C75
Setup Scr een AntAModSr c:EXT.
NOTE: The S- 1403DL EX MO D and
O N/CAL Keys ar e the same
key.
251. Ver ify pulses pr esent at AT C- 1400A
G EN Connector coincide with Dual
Pulse G ener ator output.
252. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
O N/CAL Key to set AntAModSrc:INT
and Pr ePulseO ut:O F F.
253. Disconnect Dual Pulse G ener ator fr om
S- 1403DL and O scilloscope.
ATCRBS DISCRETE
PRO CEDURE
SCOPE TRIG
OUT
ATCRBS OUT
S-1403DL
CHAN 2
SCOPE
ATC-1400A
CHAN 1
GEN
02403009
ATCRBS Discr ete and Scope Tr igger Tests
Setup Diagr am
Figur e 17
260. Select O scilloscope
tr igger .
positive
slope
261. Set ATC- 1400A T O /TAC/T D Switch to
TO.
262. Ver ify
O scilloscope
scope tr igger pulses.
displays
two
254. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, F UNC#, 0 and
5 Keys in sequence to display
Inter lace Scr een.
263. Ver ify fir st scope tr igger pulse leading
edge occur s befor e P 1 of ATCRBS
inter r ogation.
255. Pr ess S- 1403DL → CURSO R and 1
Keys to set INTLCE,Ratio:1to 1.
264. Ver ify second scope tr igger pulse
leading edge occur s befor e P 1 of
Mode S inter r ogation.
256. Connect S- 1403DL
ATCRBS
OUT
Connector to O scilloscope Channel 2
accor ding to 1- 2- 3, F igur e 17.
257. Select O scilloscope Inter nal T r igger
Channel 2, negative slope.
258. Ver ify 3.0 µs wide T T L active low
pulse occur s 1.0 µs prior to P 1 .
SCO PE TRIG G ER
259. Disconnect O scilloscope Channel 2
input fr om S- 1403DL ATCRBS OUT
Connector and r econnect to S- 1403DL
SCO PE
T RIG
O UT
Connector
accor ding to 1- 2- 3, F igur e 17.
265. Set ATC- 1400A T O /TAC/T D Switch to
TD.
266. Ver ify leading edge of fir st scope
tr igger pulse occur s 2.0 µs after
leading edge of P 3 in ATCRBS
inter r ogation.
267. Ver ify leading edge of second scope
tr igger pulse occur s appr oximately
in
Mode
S
132
µs
after
P1
inter r ogation.
268. Remove power fr om the Mode S Test
System.
269. Disconnect test equipment.
1- 2- 3
Page 12
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
3.7 PERFORMANCE EVALUATION DATA SHEET
T he following data sheet may be r epr oduced by individual user s.
TECHNICIAN: ______________________________________
DATE: ________________
ATC- 1400A S/N: _______________________ S- 1403DL S/N:
______________________
ST EP
DATA
RESULT
S- 1403DL t o AT C- 1400A CO MMUNICATIO N
11.
S- 1403DL displays sign on sequence scr eens.
_______ ( √ )
12.
S- 1403DL displays Main Contr ol Menu.
_______ ( √ )
14.
S- 1403DL displays ATC Scr een with CAL settings.
_______ (√ )
18.
S- 1403DL PRF 1500 Hz ( 1498.0475 to 1500.1525 Hz)
_______
ATC FUNCTION
21.
Mode C P 3 position fr om P 1 21.0 µs ( 20.99 to 21.01 µs)
_______
23.
Mode A P 3 position fr om P 1 8.0 µs ( 7.99 to 8.01 µs)
_______
25.
P 3 level var ies.
_______ (√ )
27.
P 3 is deactivated.
_______ (√ )
30.
P 2 position fr om P 1 2.0 µs ( 1.99 to 2.01 µs)
_______
31.
P 2 ( SLS) level var ies.
_______ (√ )
33.
P 2 ( SLS) position moves closer to P 1 .
_______ ( √ )
35.
P 2 ( SLS) position moves away fr om P 1 .
_______ ( √ )
38.
P 3 position moves closer to P 1 .
_______ ( √ )
40.
P 3 position moves away fr om P 1 .
_______ ( √ )
43.
P 1 , P 2 ( SLS) and P 3 pulse widths var y.
_______ (√ )
SEQ F UNCT IO N
46.
S- 1403DL displays SEQ Scr een with CAL settings.
_______ (√ )
51.
Sequence Menu S001 displays decoded UF00 in octal.
_______ (√ )
53.
Sequence Menu S002 displays decoded UF04 in octal.
_______ (√ )
55.
Sequence Menu S003 displays decoded UF05 in octal.
_______ (√ )
57.
Sequence Menu S004 displays decoded UF11 in octal.
_______ (√ )
62.
Sequence Menu S005 displays decoded UF16 in hexadecimal.
_______ (√ )
64.
Sequence Menu S006 displays decoded UF20 in hexadecimal.
_______ (√ )
66.
Sequence Menu S007 displays decoded UF21 in hexadecimal.
_______ (√ )
68.
Sequence Menu S008 displays decoded UF00 in hexadecimal.
_______ (√ )
1- 2- 3
Page 13
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
DATA
RESULT
74.
P 2 position fr om P 1 2.0 µs ( 1.99 to 2.01 µs)
_______
75.
P 6 position fr om P 1 3.5 µs ( 3.49 to 3.51 µs)
_______
76.
SPR position fr om P 2 2.75 µs ( 2.74 to 2.76 µs)
_______
78.
P 2 level var ies.
_______ (√ )
80.
P 2 is deactivated.
_______ (√ )
83.
P 6 is deactivated.
_______ (√ )
86.
P 6 width var ies.
_______ (√ )
89.
P 6 position var ies.
_______ (√ )
92.
P 5 ( SLS) over laps SPR position.
_______ (√ )
93.
P 5 ( SLS) level var ies.
_______ (√ )
95.
SPR is deactivated.
_______ (√ )
98.
P 5 ( SLS) and SPR positions var y.
_______ (√ )
ACS FUNCTION
102.
S- 1403DL displays ACS Scr een with CAL settings.
_______ ( √ )
103.
P 4 position fr om P 1 10.0 µs ( 9.99 to 10.01 µs)
_______
104.
P 4 width 0.8 µs ( 0.79 to 0.81 µs)
_______
ACL FUNCTION
106.
S- 1403DL displays ACL Scr een with CAL settings.
_______ ( √ )
108.
P 4 level var ies.
_______ (√ )
110.
P 4 is deactivated.
_______ (√ )
112.
P 4 width 1.6 µs ( 1.59 to 1.61 µs)
_______
114.
P 4 width var ies.
_______ (√ )
117.
P 4 position var ies.
_______ (√ )
INTLCE FUNCTION
122.
S- 1403DL displays INTLCE Scr een.
_______ ( √ )
124.
ATCRBS pulse patter n consists of P 1 and P 3 .
_______ ( √ )
126.
P 1 of Mode S inter r ogation position fr om P 1 of ATCRBS
inter r ogation 200 µs ( 199.9 to 200.1 µs)
_______
127.
Mode S pulse patter n consists of P 1 , P 2 and P 6 .
_______ ( √ )
129.
T wo ATCRBS inter r ogations occur between Mode S
inter r ogations for Ratio:1: 2.
_______ (√ )
1- 2- 3
Page 14
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
DATA
RESULT
DI FUNCTION
131.
S- 1403DL displays * DI/INTF ERRO R * message.
_______ (√ )
134.
S- 1403DL displays DI Scr een.
_______ ( √ )
136.
F ir st inter r ogation ATCRBS pulse patter n consists of P 1 and P 3 . _______ ( √ )
140.
F ir st inter r ogation Mode S pulse patter n consists of P 1 , P 2
and P 6 .
_______ ( √ )
F ir st inter r ogation ATCRBS O nly All Call pulse patter n
consists of P 1 , P 3 and shor t P 4 .
_______ ( √ )
Fir st inter r ogation ATCRBS/Mode S All Call pulse patter n
consists of P 1 , P 3 and long P 4 .
_______ ( √ )
P 1 of second inter r ogation position fr om P 1 of first
inter r ogation 200 µs ( 199.985 to 200.015 µs)
_______
Second inter r ogation ATCRBS pulse patter n consists of
P 1 and P 3 .
_______ ( √ )
Second inter r ogation Mode S pulse patter n consists of
P 1 , P 2 and P 6 .
_______ ( √ )
Second inter r ogation ATCRBS O nly All Call pulse patter n
consists of P 1 , P 3 and shor t P 4 .
_______ ( √ )
Second inter r ogation ATCRBS/Mode S All Call pulse patter n
consists of P 1 , P 3 and long P 4 .
_______ ( √ )
142.
144.
147.
148.
150.
152.
154.
BURST FUNCTION
156.
S- 1403DL displays * DI/INTF ERRO R * message.
_______ (√ )
158.
S- 1403DL displays BURST Scr een.
_______ ( √ )
161.
AT CRBS inter r ogation displays for 5 seconds.
_______ ( √ )
165.
Mode S inter r ogation displays for 5 seconds.
_______ ( √ )
ANT A RF VERNIER
173.
- 4 dBm Power Meter r efer ence level
_______
175.
Step 173 r efer ence level + 3.0 dB ( ± 0.3 dB)
_______
177.
Step 173 r efer ence level - 3.0 dB (± 0.3 dB)
_______
ANT B RF LEVEL ( w /o MLD)
184.
- 50 dBm Spectr um Analyzer r efer ence level
_______
188.
ANT B level = Step 184 r efer ence level ( ± 1 dB)
_______
1- 2- 3
Page 15
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
DATA
RESULT
ANT B RF L EVEL /VERNIER ( w / MLD)
194.
- 20 dBm Spectr um Analyzer r efer ence level
_______
200.
ANT B level = Step 194 r efer ence level ( ± 0.5 dB)
_______
204.
- 20 dBm Power Meter r efer ence level
_______
206.
Step 204 r efer ence level + 3.0 dB ( ± 0.3 dB)
_______
208.
Step 204 r efer ence level - 3.0 dB (± 0.3 dB)
_______
PREPULSE
218.
Pr epulse position coincident with P 1 ( ± 100 ns)
_______
220.
P 1 position 260 µs after pr epulse ( 259.9 to 260.1 µs)
_______
EXT SYNC O UT
229.
Ext Sync pulse position coincident with P 1 ( ± 100 ns)
_______
231.
Ext Sync pulse follows P 1 .
_______ ( √ )
233.
Ext Sync pulse pr ecedes P 1 .
_______ ( √ )
EXT SYNC IN
241.
P 1 position ≈ 18 µs after O scilloscope tr igger
_______ (√ )
243.
Inter r ogation tr acks Dual Pulse G ener ator PRF.
_______ ( √ )
EXT MO D IN
251.
ATC- 1400A G EN Connector pulses coincide with Dual Pulse
G ener ator output.
_______ ( √ )
ATCRBS DISCRETE
258.
3.0 µs wide ATCRBS discr ete pulse occur s 1.0 µs prior to P 1 .
_______ ( √ )
SCO PE T RIG G ER
262.
O scilloscope displays two scope tr igger pulses.
_______ (√ )
263.
T O fir st scope tr igger pulse leading edge occur s befor e
P 1 of AT CRBS inter r ogation.
_______ ( √ )
T O second scope tr igger leading edge occur s befor e
P 1 of Mode S inter r ogation.
_______ ( √ )
T O fir st scope tr igger pulse leading edge occur s 2.0 µs
after leading edge of P 3 in ATCRBS inter r ogation.
_______ ( √ )
T O second scope tr igger leading edge occur s ≈ 132 after
leading edge of P 1 in Mode S inter r ogation.
_______ ( √ )
264.
266.
267.
1- 2- 3
Page 16
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
4. REMOTE OPERATION
4.1 GENERAL
The Mode S T est System with the S1403DL pr ovides multiple options for
r emote oper ation:
par allel G PIB contr ol
thr ough the AT C- 1400A, ser ial RS- 232
contr ol thr ough the S- 1403DL or par allel
G PIB contr ol thr ough the S- 1403DL.
All
r emote options can oper ate simultaneously
as long as commands used do not inter fer e
with each other ( convenient for sending
quer ies thr ough one connector while
contr olling oper ation thr ough another ) .
4.2 FRONT PANEL OPERATION
Sending a command thr ough the ATC1400A G PIB Connector ( J14) automatically
locks out fr ont panel oper ation ( local
oper ation) .
Fr ont panel contr ols r emain
locked out until an exclamation mar k ( ! ) is
sent to the AT C- 1400A to r etur n to nor mal
oper ation.
T he S- 1403DL has fr ont panel contr ol
capabilities
dur ing
r emote
oper ation
thr ough the S- 1403DL RS- 232 Connector
( J12) or G PIB Connector ( J21) , unless
commanded other wise.
Adjusting fr ont
panel contr ols dur ing r emote oper ation may
inter fer e with nor mal oper ation.
4.3 O PERATING PRO CEDURES
4.3.1
ATC- 1400A G PIB Conf igurat ion
STEP
PROCEDURE
1. Apply power to Mode S Test System.
2. Connect exter nal G PIB contr ol device
to ATC- 1400A G PIB Connector ( J14)
using IEEE- 488 G PIB cable.
Use a double shielded and pr oper ly
ter minated IEEE- 488 inter face cable.
3. Set desir ed G PIB addr ess with ATC1400A G PIB ADDRESS Dip Switches.
4. Initiate par allel r emote oper ation.
5. Star t all command lines to S- 1403DL
with AXn= wher e n equals S- 1403DL
C84 System Scr een 1403 Bus Addr ess
setting ( default is 3) .
Send old- style commands using the
default old- style par ser .
Send new
commands using the SCPI par ser .
Send AXn=SCPI as last command
on old- style command line to
switch to SCPI par ser .
Send AXn=S1403c or
AXn=SYSTem: LANG uage: S1403C
as last command on SCPI
command line to switch back to
old- style par ser .
6. Send ATC- 1400A commands befor e
and on a separ ate line fr om S- 1403DL
commands.
NOTE: Failur e to place commands on
separ ate lines may r etur n
false indications.
NOTE: Command lines thr ough the
ATC- 1400A have a maximum
length of 68 char acter s
including pr efix and line
ter minator char acter s.
7. When finished with r emote oper ation,
send ! command to r etur n to fr ont
panel oper ation ( local contr ol) .
1- 2- 4
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
4.3.2
S- 1403DL RS- 232 Conf igurat ion
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
1. Apply power to S- 1403DL.
2. Connect exter nal ser ial contr ol device
to S- 1403DL RS- 232 Connector ( J12) .
Use a double shielded and pr oper ly
ter minated RS- 232 inter face cable.
S-1403DL
DCD
TXD
RXD
DSR
GND
DTR
CTS
RTS
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
HOST
DCD
RX
TX
DTR
GND
DSR
RTS
CTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Refer to 1- 2- 4, Figur es 18 thr ough 21.
NOTE: T he S- 1403DL RS- 232
Connector ( J12) connects
dir ectly to a computer type
device or thr ough a null
modem adapter to a modem
type device.
3. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 8 and 1
Keys in sequence to display C81
System Scr een.
C81
SYSTEM - RS232 CONTROL
RCI:ENABLE
Screen Dump:DISABLE
RCI Echo:YES
Screen Border:7BIT
Screen EOL:CR/LF
Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys,
SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to set
fields as follows:
Set RCI to ENABLE.
Set RCI Echo to YES to echo back
commands to contr oller or NO to
disable r emote echo ( usual modem
oper ation) .
Set Scr een Dump to DISABLE for
nor mal r emote oper ation.
4. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 8 and 2
Keys in sequence to display C82
System Scr een.
C82
SYSTEM - RS232 INTERFACE
Baud:38400
Hndshk:XON/XOFF
Data:8
HndshkOn: 90%
Stop:1
Parity:NONE
HndshkOff:10%
02403016
RS- 232 Host Cable Connections ( 9- Pin)
Figur e 18
S-1403DL
DCD
TXD
RXD
DSR
GND
DTR
CTS
RTS
HOST
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TX
RX
RTS
CTS
DSR
GND
DCD
PIN 20
DTR
02403017
RS- 232 Host Cable Connections ( 25- Pin)
Figur e 19
S-1403DL
DCD
TXD
RXD
DSR
GND
DTR
CTS
RTS
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
MODEM
DCD
RX
TX
DTR
GND
DSR
RTS
CTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
02403018
RS- 232 Modem Cable Connections ( 9- Pin)
Figur e 20
S-1403DL
DCD
TXD
RXD
DSR
GND
DTR
CTS
RTS
MODEM
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TX
RX
RTS
CTS
DSR
GND
DCD
PIN 20
DTR
02403019
RS- 232 Modem Cable Connections ( 25- Pin)
Figur e 21
1- 2- 4
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
4.3.3
STEP
PROCEDURE
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set fields as
follows:
Set Baud to baud r ate compatible
with ser ial contr oller and modem,
if used.
Set Hndshk to handshake mode
compatible with ser ial contr oller or
NONE for modem oper ation.
Set Data to number of data bits
per wor d accor ding to ser ial
contr oller setting.
Set Stop to number of stop bits per
word according to serial controller
setting.
Set Parity according to serial
contr oller par ity setting.
If needed, set HndshkO n to 90%
and HndshkO ff to 10% ( defaults) .
5. If applicable, call modem.
6. Initiate ser ial r emote oper ation.
Send new commands using the default
SCPI par ser . Send old- style
commands using the old- style par ser .
Send SCPI as last command on
old- style command line to switch to
SCPI par ser .
Send S1403c or
SYSTem: LANG uage: S1403C as
last command on SCPI command
line to switch back to old- style
par ser .
S- 1403DL G PIB Conf igurat ion
STEP
PROCEDURE
1. Apply power to S- 1403DL.
2. Connect exter nal G PIB contr ol device
to S- 1403DL G PIB Connector ( J21)
using IEEE- 488 G PIB cable.
Use a double shielded and pr oper ly
ter minated IEEE- 488 inter face cable.
3. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 8 and 3
Keys in sequence to display C83
System Scr een.
C82
RCI:ENABLE
Address:31
SYSTEM - GPIB
Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set fields as
follows:
Set RCI to ENABLE.
Set Addr ess to desir ed G PIB
addr ess.
4. Initiate par allel r emote oper ation,
sending commands to G PIB addr ess
set in Step 3.
Send new commands using the default
SCPI
par ser .
Send
old- style
commands using the old- style par ser .
Send SCPI as last command on
old- style command line to switch to
SCPI par ser .
Send S1403C or
SYSTem: LANG uage: S1403C as
last command on SCPI command
line to switch back to old- style
par ser .
1- 2- 4
Page 3
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
4.4 TEST MACRO LANGUAGE (TMAC)
T MAC is the Remote Command Inter pr eter
( RCI) used for pr ogr amming and r emotely
oper ating the S- 1403DL Test Auxiliar y ( new
SCPI- style
commands
only) .
T MAC
pr ovides a for mat to stor e and per for m user
defined test sequences. TMAC, based on
the IEEE- 488.2 for mat, suppor ts the SCPI
Standar d.
A main str ength of T MAC is the capability
to define macr o commands. Step by step
test pr ocedur es ar e developed, stor ed and
r emotely
implemented
thr ough
T MAC.
T MAC also pr ovides a var iety of data
str uctur es to assist in developing test
pr ocedur es. Macr os can be executed fr om
other macr os, passing par ameter s fr om one
macr o to another , allowing complicated
pr ocedur es to be divided into smaller tasks.
Multitasking
commands
allow
sever al
macr os to alter nate command execution,
giving the appear ance of being executed
simultaneously.
Macr os declar ed as pr ogr ams can be
assigned by r emote oper ation.
Macr o
pr ogr ams may then be activated thr ough
fr ont panel oper ation under the User Menu.
A full explanation of the T MAC language is
beyond the scope of the Mode S Test
System O per ation Manual. T ables 13 and
12 in 1- 2- 4 list the specific instr ument
commands. For a complete explanation of
the TMAC language including the use of
macr os, macr o pr ogr ams, var iables, data
str uctur es, flow contr ol commands and
multitasking commands, r efer to the S1403DL TMAC User s Manual ( 1002- 2400600) .
1- 2- 4
Page 4
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
4.5 COMMAND SYNTAX
The S- 1403DL accepts and executes both
old- style S- 1403C commands and new
IEEE- 488.2/SCPI commands.
To ensur e
full backwar d compatibility of the S- 1403C
commands, the old- style commands cannot
be mixed with the new commands on the
same line. Many old- style commands have
a cor r esponding new command.
The S- 1403DL has two commands for
changing between the old- style and SCPIstyle par ser s. Both commands, SCPI (for
SCPI par ser ) and S1403c ( for old- style
par ser ) , ar e available on either par ser .
The SCPI par ser also pr ovides a new
command, SYSt em: L ANG u ag e S1403C, for
the old- style par ser .
The command to
change par ser s must be the last command
on the line.
All commands and data ar e pr intable ASCII
char acter s.
Commands ar e enter ed using shor t or long
for m. The par ser accepts the exact shor t
or long for m but not other var iations. The
shor t for m is shown in upper case and the
long for m is shown as the entir e command
in upper and lower case. All old and new
commands, though, ar e case insensitive.
Italicized items indicate var iables.
Delimiter s separ ate or classify commands.
T he
S- 1403DL
uses
the
following
delimiter s:
=
r epr esents a set value to oper ation.
?
r epr esents a get value oper ation.
.
r epr esents an enable oper ation.
;
separ ates individual set value to
fields ( and same fields in r eplies) .
:
separ ates old- style individual
commands to the S- 1403DL or
ATC- 1400A.
Command lines sent thr ough the ATC1400A to the S- 1403DL Test Auxiliar y must
include the pr efix, AXn= with n set
accor ding to the C84 IFR BUS System
Scr een 1403 Bus Addr ess setting ( 2 to 7) .
For backwar d compatibility, the IFR Bus
Addr ess is set to 3 ( default) . The pr efix,
AXn= is optional thr ough the S- 1403DL
G PIB or RS- 232 Connector s.
Er r or conditions identified in local oper ation
ar e also active in r emote oper ation. The S1403DL
only
sends
er r or
messages,
though, when r equested by an er r or quer y.
Valid er r or messages fr om the S- 1403DL
cause the ATC- 1400A to set bit 1 of the
SRQ r egister .
While bit 1 of the SRQ
r egister is active, the er r or quer y, ERRM?
(old-style)
or
SYSTem: ERRor: S1403c?
( SCPI) , is sent to r eceive the message and
clear the r egister .
If bit 1 of the SRQ
r egister is not set when the command is
issued the r eply is NONE to indicate no
errors.
Remote oper ation and local oper ation
per for m the same functions except for
decoded sequence menus.
F or r emote
oper ation, data for sequence menus must
be enter ed as shor t or long data fields.
A helpful hint for setting sequence menu
data is setting the desir ed data in decoded
for mat fr om the fr ont panel. After setting
desir ed data, changing the sequence menu
to an undecoded for mat allows the oper ator
to see and r ecor d the data field r equir ed to
set the sequence menu r emotely.
1- 2- 4
Page 5
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
4.6 COMMANDS
Command line descr iptions signify var iable
entr y fields as follows:
<italics> wher e italics r epr esents the value,
data or contr ol entr y field.
Entr y fields ar e set to default or fr ont panel
values set befor e switching to r emote
oper ation.
F or quick r efer ence, T able 13 in 1- 2- 4
shows old- style commands and T able 12
shows
new
SCPI- style
commands
in
oper ating or der .
Detailed explanation of
commands
with
r efer ence
to
scr een
location
for
compar able
fr ont
panel
oper ation ar e listed in alphabetical or der .
O ld- style commands ar e listed in 4.6.1 and
new SCPI- style commands ar e listed in
4.6.2. T able 14 in 1- 2- 4 compar es old- style
and new SCPI- style commands.
COMMAND
4.6.1
SCPI/IEEE- 488.2 Commands
Br ackets [] indicate optional command
wor ds or data ( e.g. G ENer ator ANTA,O N or
G ENer ator :STATe ANTA,O N wor k the same
for the command G ENer ator [:STATe] <ant>,
<on/off>) .
The two- state var iables r epr esented by
<on/off>, <ant> and <true/false> also
accept the number 1 for O N, ANTB or
TRUE; and 0 for O FF, ANTA or FALSE.
Most str ing inputs r equir e quotation mar ks
(“”) around the string as indicated in the
command descr iptions.
RANGE/VALUES
FORMat <type>
ASCii/BINary/HEXadecimal/
OCTal
DEFINITION
Sets format for numerical data
returns.
S1403c
Switches to old-style command
interpreter.
SCPI
Switches to new SCPI-style
command interpreter.
SYSTem:LANGuage S1403C
Switches to old-style command
interpreter.
INTerrogation:TRIGger:BURSt
Same as pressing BURST Key.
HCOPy[:IMMediate]
Performs screen dump out
RS-232 Connector.
HCOPy:SDUMp[:IMMediate]
Performs screen dump out
RS-232 Connector.
PSCReen
Performs screen dump out
RS-232 Connector.
C10/C20 Function Screens
GENerator[:STATe] <ant>,<on/off>
ANTA/ANTB (0/1),ON/OFF
(1/0)
GENerator[:STATe]?
Enables/disables interrogation
for specified antenna.
Returns interrogation status for
specified antenna.
GENerator:LEVel:OFFSet
<ant>,<fine>
ANTA/ANTB (0/1),-3.0 to +3.0
GENerator:LEVel:OFFSet?
Sets ANTB vernier in dB.
Returns ANTB vernier setting in
dB.
GENerator:TIMe:OFFSet <value>
-0.95 to +0.95
Sets ANTB interrogation
position in µs, relative to ANTA.
S- 1403DL SCPI- Style Command List
Table 12
1- 2- 4
Page 6
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
COMMAND
RANGE/VALUES
GENerator:TIMe:OFFSet?
DEFINITION
Returns ANTB interrogation
position setting in µs from
ANTA.
GENerator:LEVel <ant>,<course>
ANTB (1),-20 to -83
Sets ANTB level in dBm.
GENerator:LEVel? <ant>
ANTB (1)
Returns ANTB level setting in
dBm.
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:ATCrbs
Starts ATC function.
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:SEQuence
Starts SEQ function.
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:ACS
Starts ACS function.
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:ACL
Starts ACL function.
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:INTerlace
[<n>]
1 to 999
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:INTerlace?
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:DI
[<f1>,<f2>]
Starts Interlace/sets ATCRBS to
Mode S interrogation ratio.
Returns ATCRBS to Mode S
interrogation ratio setting.
“ATC”/”SEQ”/”ACS”/”ACL”,
“ATC”/”SEQ”/”ACS”/”ACL”
Starts DI/sets both interrogation
types.
1 to 9999
Starts Burst/sets interrogation
type and number.
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:DI?
Returns DI interrogation types.
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:BURSt
[<f1>,<BN>]
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:BURSt?
Returns Burst number setting.
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:BURSt:
CONDition?
Returns Burst Function status.
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:
ATCMonitor
Starts ATCRBS Monitor Pulse
Function.
INTerrogation:FUNCtion?
Returns active interrogation
function with parameters.
INTerrogation:P3 <level>
“CAL”/“VAR”/“OFF”
INTerrogation:P3?
INTerrogation:P6
<level>[,<width>[,<dev>]]
“CAL”/“OFF”,”CAL”/-1.50 to
+1.50,”CAL”/-1.95 to +1.95
INTerrogation:P6?
INTerrogation:P2 <level>
INTerrogation:P6:SPR?
INTerrogation:P4
<level>[,<width>[,<dev>]]
Sets P 6 pulse level, width and
position.
Returns P 6 pulse level, width
and position setting.
“CAL”/“VAR”/“OFF”
INTerrogation:P2?
INTerrogation:P6:SPR
<on/off>[,<dev>]
Sets P 3 pulse level.
Returns P 3 pulse level setting.
Sets P 2 pulse level.
Returns P 2 pulse level setting.
ON/OFF,”CAL”/-1.00 to +1.00
Sets SPR control and position.
Returns SPR control and
position setting.
“CAL”/“VAR”/“OFF”,”CAL”/0.20 Sets P 4 pulse level, width and
to 3.55,”CAL”/-1.95 to +1.95
position.
INTerrogation:P4?
Returns P 4 pulse level, width
and position setting.
REPLy:ATCrbs?
Returns Mode C reply altitude or
Mode A reply identification.
REPLy:DELay:FIRSt?
Returns reply delay for current
function.
S- 1403DL SCPI- Style Command List
Table 12 ( Cont)
1- 2- 4
Page 7
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
COMMAND
RANGE/VALUES
DEFINITION
REPLy:JITTer? <rtype>
“ATC” or “MODES”
Returns measured reply jitter.
REPLy:MODES? [<rformat>]
”A”/”N”
Returns data in set format from
Mode S replies to ATC, ACS or
ACL interrogations.
REPLy:SPACing? “ATC”
Returns F 1 to F 2 pulse spacing.
REPLy:WIDTh? <rtype>
“ATC” or “MODES”
Returns reply pulse widths.
REPLy:TIMeout <time>
1.000 to 65.535
Sets time limit to look for reply
in seconds.
C30 Percent Reply Screen
REPLy:PERCent? [<ant>[,<rtype>]] ANTA/ANTB,”TOTAL”/”ATC”/
”MODES”/”BAD”/”NOREPLY”
Sets percent reply through
selected antenna for set type.
REPLy:PERCent:CLEar
Clears percent reply readings.
C40 Reply Delay Screen
REPLy:DELay? [<type>]
“ATC”/”MODES”
REPLy:DELay:CLEar
Returns reply delay in µs.
Clears reply delay readings.
C50/C60 Squitter Screens
SQTR:ADDRess?
Returns squitter address.
SQTR:TAIL?
Returns squitter tail number
and country.
SQTR:COUNt:PERiod <t>
10 to 300
SQTR:COUNt:PERiod?
Sets period in seconds for
counting squitters.
Returns period setting in
seconds for counting squitters.
SQTR:COUNt? [<type>]
"ATC"/“DF11”/”DF17”/”DF17A”/ Returns squitter count during
"DF17E"/”DF17I”/”DF17O”/
set period for selected type.
”DF17P”/”DF17S”/”DF17T”/
"DF17V"/"MODES"
SQTR:COUNt:CLEar
Clears squitter count readings.
SQTR:TIMe? <type>[,<format>]
“DF11”/”DF17A”/"DF17E"
”DF17I”/”DF17O”/”DF17P”/
”DF17S”/”DF17T”/"DF17V"/
"MODES",“A”/“N”
SQTR:TIMe:CLEar
Returns squitter time intervals
in seconds and data in selected
format.
Clears squitter time readings.
SQTR:CAPTure:CONDition?
Returns capture buffer status.
SQTR:CAPTure[:STATe] <on/off>
ON/OFF (1/0)
SQTR:CAPTure[:STATe]?
Enables/disables squitter
capture.
Returns squitter capture status.
SQTR:CAPTure:CLEar
Clears all buffer entries.
SQTR:CAPTure:COUNt?
Returns number of entries in
capture buffer and capacity.
SQTR:CAPTure:FILTer <filter>
1 to 256
SQTR:CAPTure:FILTer?
Sets squitter capture filter.
Returns squitter capture filter
setting.
SQTR:CAPTure:GET? [<format>]
“A”/”N”
Returns squitter capture buffer
data.
S- 1403DL SCPI- Style Command List
T able 12 ( Cont)
1- 2- 4
Page 8
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
COMMAND
RANGE/VALUES
SQTR:CAPTure:MODE <mode>
CONTinuous or SINGleshot
DEFINITION
Sets squitter capture buffer
mode.
SQTR:CAPTure:MODE?
Returns squitter capture buffer
mode.
SQTR:TIME:TIMeout <type>,<time> "ATC"/“DF11”/”DF17A”/
"DF17E"/”DF17I”/”DF17O”/
”DF17P”/”DF17S”/”DF17T”/
"DF17V"/"MODE4"/"MODES",
1.000 to 65.535
Sets time limit to look for
selected squitters in seconds.
SQTR:TIME:TIMeout:DEFault
Sets time limits to look for
squitters to default values.
C71 Setup Interrogation Trigger Screen
INTerrogation:TRIGger:SOURce
<src>
“SELFint”/”SYNC”/”TRIGgen”/
”BURSt”
INTerrogation:TRIGger:SOURce?
Sets interrogation trigger
source.
Returns interrogation trigger
source setting.
INTerrogation:TRIGger:GENerator
<num> <hz/sec>
0.004 to 99.9999 SEC or 1 to
2500 HZ
INTerrogation:TRIGger:GENerator?
Sets internal trigger generator.
Returns internal trigger
generator setting.
C72 Setup Scope Trigger Screen
INTerrogation:SCOPe
<type>,<on/off>[,<dev>]
“ATC”/”MODES”/”ACS”/”ACL”,
ON/OFF (1/0),0 to 255 (varies
with <type>)
INTerrogation:SCOPe?
Sets SCOPE TRIG OUT
Connector pulse.
Returns SCOPE TRIG OUT
Connector pulse settings.
C73 Setup Ext Sync Out Screen
INTerrogation:SYNC:OUT
<type>,<on/off>
“ATC”/”MODES”/”ACS”/”ACL”,
ON/OFF
INTerrogation:SYNC:OUT?
Sets EXT SYNC OUT Connector
output.
Returns EXT SYNC OUT
Connector output setting.
INTerrogation:SYNC:OUT:
DEViation <value>
-9.95 to +9.95
INTerrogation:SYNC:OUT:
DEViation?
Sets EXT SYNC OUT Connector
pulse position in µs from P 1 .
Returns set EXT SYNC OUT
Connector pulse position.
C74 Setup PPMG Screen
INTerrogation:PPMG
<type>,<on/off>[,<pulse#>]
“ATC”/”MODES”/”DELM”,
Sets PPMG control for specified
ON/OFF (0/1),(<pulse#> varies pulse.
with <type>)
INTerrogation:PPMG? <type>
“ATC”/”MODES”/”DELM”
Returns PPMG control pulse
setting for specified type.
C75 Setup Miscellaneous Screen
GENerator[:STATe] <ant>,<on/off>
GENerator[:STATe]?
ANTA/ANTB (0/1),ON/OFF
(1/0)
Enables/disables interrogation
for specified antenna.
Returns interrogation status for
specified antenna.
S- 1403DL SCPI- Style Command List
Table 12 ( Cont)
1- 2- 4
Page 9
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
COMMAND
RANGE/VALUES
DEFINITION
INTerrogation:MODulation
<ant>,<src>
ANTA/ANTB (0/1),
“INT”/”EXT”/”INTExt”
Specifies modulation source for
selected antenna.
INTerrogation:MODulation? <ant>
ANTA/ANTB (0/1)
Returns modulation source
setting for selected antenna.
INTerrogation:PPULse
<on/off>[,<dev>]
ON/OFF (1/0),0 to 260
Sets prepulse status and
position.
INTerrogation:PPULse?
Returns prepulse status and
position settings.
C76 Setup SMenu Screen
INTerrogation:SMENu:FORMat < f>
“HEXadecimal”/”OCTal”
INTerrogation:SMENu:FORMat?
Sets numerical format for
sequence menu data.
Returns numerical format
setting for sequence menu
data.
INTerrogation:SMENu:SET:ALL <x> “OFF”/”XPDR”/”USER”/”ZERO”/ Modifies all sequence menus.
”DEFault”
INTerrogation:SMENu:GLOBal:
ADDRess <gtype>,<addr>
“USER”,0 to #HFFFFFF
Sets global transponder
address.
INTerrogation:SMENu:GLOBal:
ADDRess? <gtype>
“XPDR”/“USER”
Returns global transponder
address setting.
INTerrogation:SMENu:GLOBal:
APXor <gtype>,<xor>
“XPDR”/“USER”,0 to
#HFFFFFF
Sets global XOR mask.
INTerrogation:SMENu:GLOBal:
APXor? <gtype>
“XPDR”/“USER”
Returns global XOR mask
setting.
C79 Setup ATC-1400A Controls Screen
ATC1400a:ATCrbs <m>
“1”, “2”, “T”, “A”, “B”, “C” or “D” Specifies ATCRBS mode.
ATC1400a:ATCrbs?
Returns ATCRBS mode setting.
ATC1400a:RF <o>
“NORM” or “CW”
ATC1400a:RF?
Specifies RF output control.
Returns RF output control
setting.
ATC1400a:SCOPe <r>
“TO” or “TD”
ATC1400a:SCOPe?
Specifies scope sync position.
Returns scope sync position
setting.
ATC1400a:MODE <m>,<loc>
“DI or “OFF” and 0 to 399.9
ATC1400a:MODE?
Specifies DI spacing in µs.
Returns DI spacing setting.
ATC1400a:P123:WIDTh <w>
“CAL” or 0 to 1.95
ATC1400a:P123:WIDTh?
Specifies pulse width in µs.
Returns pulse width setting.
ATC1400a:P2:DEViation <d>
“CAL” or -1.95 to +1.95
ATC1400a:P2:DEViation?
Specifies P 2 deviation in µs.
Returns P 2 deviation setting.
ATC1400a:P3:DEViation <d>
“CAL” or -1.95 to +1.95
ATC1400a:P3:DEViation?
Specifies P 3 deviation in µs.
Returns P 3 deviation setting.
C81 System RS232 Control Screen
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:RCI ON/OFF (1/0)
<on/off>
Enables/disables control
through RS-232 Connector.
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
RCI?
Returns control status through
RS-232 Connector.
S- 1403DL SCPI- Style Command List
T able 12 ( Cont)
1- 2- 4
Page 10
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
COMMAND
RANGE/VALUES
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
ECHO <on/off>
ON/OFF (1/0)
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
ECHO?
DEFINITION
Enables/disables RS-232
remote command echo.
Returns RS-232 remote
command echo status.
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
DUMP <on/off>[,<bdr>,<eol>]
ON/OFF (1/0),8/7/0,”CRLF”/
”LF”/”CR”/”NUL”
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
DUMP?
Sets RS-232 screen dump
parameters.
Returns RS-232 screen dump
parameter settings.
C82 System RS232 Interface Screen
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
BAUD <rate>
110/150/300/600/1200/2400/
Sets RS-232 baud rate.
4800/9600/19200/38400/57600
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
BAUD?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
BITS <b>
Returns RS-232 baud rate
setting.
7/8
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
BITS?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
SBITs <b>
Returns RS-232 bits per word
setting.
1/2
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
SBITs?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
PARity <p>
NONE/ODD/EVEN
Sets RS-232 parity check mode.
Returns RS-232 check mode
setting.
NONE/XON
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
PACE?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
CONTrol:RTS <hndshk>
Sets RS-232 stop bits per word.
Returns RS-232 stop bits per
word setting.
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
PARity?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
PACE <hndshk>
Sets RS-232 bits per word.
Sets RS-232 software
handshaking (pacing) mode.
Returns RS-232 software
handshaking mode setting.
ON/STANdard/RFR
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
CONTrol:RTS?
Sets RS-232 hardware
handshaking (pacing) mode.
Returns RS-232 hardware
handshaking mode setting.
C83 System GPIB Screen
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RCI
<on/off>
ON/OFF (1/0)
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RCI?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:
ADDRess <a>
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:
ADDRess?
Enables/disables control
through GPIB Connector.
Returns control status through
GPIB Connector.
0 to 31
Sets S-1403DL GPIB address.
Returns S-1403DL GPIB
address.
S- 1403DL SCPI- Style Command List
Table 12 ( Cont)
1- 2- 4
Page 11
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
COMMAND
RANGE/VALUES
DEFINITION
C84 System IFR Bus Screen
SYSTem:COMMunicate:ATC1400:
CONTrol <c>
“MASTer”/”SLAVe”/”ALONe”
SYSTem:COMMunicate:ATC1400:
CONTrol?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:ATC1400:
S1403c:ADDRess <a>
Sets S-1403DL control
relationship with ATC-1400A.
Returns S-1403DL control
relationship with ATC-1400A.
2 to 7
SYSTem:COMMunicate:ATC1400:
S1403c:ADDRess?
Sets S-1403DL IFR BUS
address.
Returns S-1403DL IFR BUS
address setting.
C85 System Keyboard Screen
SYSTem:KEY:REPeat
<delay>,<rate>
0.1 to 2.0,0.1 to 2.0
SYSTem:KEY:REPeat?
Sets Keyboard control
parameters.
Returns Keyboard control
parameter settings.
C86 System Clock Screen
SYSTem:DATE <y>,<m>,<d>
0000 to 9999,1 to 12,1 to 31
Sets current date.
0 to 23,0 to 59,0 to 59
Sets current time.
SYSTem:DATE?
Returns current date setting.
SYSTem:TIME <h>,<m>,<s>
SYSTem:TIME?
Returns current time setting.
C89 Version System Screen
*IDN?
Returns identification, serial
number and firmware versions.
*OPT?
(1-no option/3-MLD option)
Returns option code.
S000 to S999 Sequence Menu Screens
INTerrogation:SMENu < smenu#>,
<on/off>[,<iformat>[,<data>]]
0 to 999,ON/OFF (1/0),
”A”/”D”/”N”/”R”/”S”/”L”,(<data>
varies with <iformat>)
Sets interrogation data for
specific sequence menu.
INTerrogation:SMENu? < smenu#>[, 0 to 999,”A”/”N”
<iformat>]
Returns interrogation data
settings for specific sequence
menu.
INTerrogation:SMENu:BITS
<smenu#>,<startbit#>,<bitlen>,
“<data>“
0 to 999,1 to 112,1 to 112,
(value for up to 112 bits of
data in quotes)
Sets selected interrogation data
bits of selected sequence
menu.
INTerrogation:SMENu:BITS?
<smenu#>,<startbit#>,<bitlen>
0 to 999,1 to 112,1 to 112
Returns setting of selected data
bits of selected sequence
menu.
INTerrogation:SCOPe:SMENu
<smenu#>,<on/off>
0 to 999,ON/OFF (1/0)
Activates/deactivates SCOPE
TRIG OUT Connector pulse for
selected sequence menu.
INTerrogation:SCOPe:SMENu?
<smenu#>
0 to 999
Returns status of SCOPE TRIG
OUT Connector pulse for
selected sequence menu.
REPLy:SMENu?
<smenu#>[,<rformat>]
0 to 999,”A”/”N”
Returns selected sequence
menu reply data in set format.
REPLy:SMENu:BITS?
<smenu#>,<startbit#>,<bitlen>
0 to 999,1 to 112,1 to 32
Returns selected sequence
menu reply data.
S- 1403DL SCPI- Style Command List
T able 12 ( Cont)
1- 2- 4
Page 12
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
COMMAND
RANGE/VALUES
DEFINITION
T23 Miscellaneous MTL Screen
TEST:MTL:ANTenna
ANTA/ANTB (0/1)
TEST:MTL:ANTenna?
Selects MTL test antenna.
Returns MTL test antenna
setting.
TEST:MTL:STARt
Initiates MTL test.
TEST:MTL:TIMe?
Returns MTL test run time in s.
TEST:MTL?
Returns MTL test errors.
TEST:MTL:LEVel?
Returns MTL with units.
T31 ELM Setup Screen
TEST:ELM:SETup:REServation:
DELay <time>
100 to 63000
Sets reservation delay in µs.
TEST:ELM:SETup:REServation:
DELay?
Returns reservation delay
setting in µs.
TEST:ELM:SETup:CLOseout:DELay 100 to 63000
<time>
Sets closeout delay in µs.
TEST:ELM:SETup:CLOseout:
DELay?
Returns closeout delay setting
in µs.
TEST:ELM:SETup:UELM:SPACing
<time>
50 to 63000
Sets UELM spacing in µs.
Returns UELM spacing in µs.
TEST:ELM:SETup:UELM:SPACing?
T32/T33 UELM Test Screens
TEST:ELM:UP:SMENu <rsmenu#>[, 0 to 999,0 to 999,0 to 984,2 to Selects UELM sequence menus.
<csmenu#>[,<esmenu#>[,<elm#>]]] 16
TEST:ELM:UP:SMENu? [m]
“MULTisite”
Returns selected UELM
sequence menus.
TEST:ELM:UP:STARt [m]
“MULTisite”
Initiates UELM test.
“MULTisite”
Returns UELM test errors.
TEST:ELM:UP? [m]
T34/T35 DELM Test Screens
TEST:ELM:DOWN:SMENu
<rsmenu#>[,<csmenu#>[,
<esmenu#>]]
0 to 999,0 to 999,0 to 984
Selects DELM sequence menus.
TEST:ELM:DOWN:SMENu? [m]
“MULTisite”
Returns selected DELM
sequence menus.
TEST:ELM:DOWN:STARt [m]
“MULTisite”
Initiates DELM test.
TEST:ELM:DOWN:ELM:RECeived?
TEST:ELM:DOWN? [m]
Returns number of expected
and received DELM segments.
“MULTisite”
Returns DELM test errors.
General Test Menu Commands
TEST:RUNning?
Returns current running status
of Test Menu test.
TEST:STOP
Stops any running test.
S- 1403DL SCPI- Style Command List
Table 12 ( Cont)
1- 2- 4
Page 13
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
COMMAND
RANGE/VALUES
DEFINITION
MS/MR Save and Recall Configuration Screens
MEMory:STORe <n> or “<name>“
1 to 5 or “(stored name)”
Saves current settings in
selected memory slot.
MEMory:CATalog? <n>
0 to 5
Returns stored memory slot
name.
MEMory:LOAD <n> or “<name>“
0 to 5 or “(stored name)”
Recalls settings from selected
memory slot.
MEMory:NAME <n>,“<name>“
1 to 5,“(≤16 characters)”
Renames selected saved
memory slot.
MEMory:CLEar <n>
1 to 5
Clears selected memory slot.
MEMory:CLEar:ALL
Clears all memory slots.
MENU Display Commands
DISPlay:CMENu <n>
0 to 99
DISPlay:CURRent?
Displays specified Control
Menu screen.
Returns screen designator.
DISPlay:SMENu <n>
0 to 999
Displays specified Sequence
Menu screen.
DISPlay:TMENu <n>
0 to 99
Displays specified Test Menu
screen.
S- 1403DL SCPI- Style Command List
T able 12 ( Cont)
1- 2- 4
Page 14
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SCPI/IEEE- 488.2 Co mmand Det ails
*IDN?
S cr e e n :
Purpose:
C89
R e t u r n s T e s t S e t i d e n t i f i ca t i o n
parameters
Command: *IDN?
R e p l y:
AEROFLEX,S1403DL,<sn>,
< m p > - < b i > - < p p > - < f p > w h e r e < sn >
is the serial number of the queried
S-1403DL, <mp> is 0300 to 9999
( M a i n P r o c e s s o r f i r m w a r e ve r si o n
number), <bi> is 0100 to 9999
(Bios version number),<pp> is 0300
to 9999 (Pulse Processor firmware
version number) and <fp> is 0300
t o 9 9 9 9 ( F r o n t P a n e l P r o ce sso r
firmware version number).
Example:
*IDN?
AEROFLEX,S1403DL,1001,0403-0104-0403-0302
*OPT?
S cr e e n :
P u r p o se :
C89
Returns installed option
information.
Command: *OPT?
Reply:
< n > w h e r e < n > i s 0 ( n o t se t ) , 1 ( n o
options), 2 (MLD option installed),
4 ( M o d B p u l s e b o a r d i n st a l l e d ) o r 6
(2+4).
Example: *OPT?
1
ATC1400a:ATCrbs
(Stand Alone only)
S cr e e n :
C79
Purpose:
Specifies the ATCRBS mode
(simulates ATC-1400A XPDR MODE
Control).
Command: ATC1400a:ATCrbs <m> where <m>
is “1”, “2”, “T”, “A”, “B”, “C” or “D”.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : A T C 1 4 0 0 a : A T C r b s “ A ” o r
ATC1400a:ATCrbs “1”
ATC1400a:ATCrbs?
S cr e e n :
C79
Purpose:
Returns the specified ATCRBS
mode.
Command: ATC1400a:ATCrbs?
Reply:
<m> where <m> is 1, 2, T, A, B, C
or D.
Example: ATC1400a:ATCrbs?
D
ATC1400a:MODE
( S t a n d A l o n e o n l y)
S cr e e n :
C79
Purpose:
Activates and specifies Double
Interrogation spacing (simulates
ATC-1400A DBL INTERR/INTRF
P U L S E T h u m b w h e e l s) .
Command: ATC1400a:MODE <m>,<loc> where
<m> is “DI” or “OFF” and <loc> is 0
t o 3 9 9 . 9 i n µ s ( 0 . 1 µ s st e p s) .
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : A T C 1 4 0 0 a : M O D E “ D I ” , 3 9 9 . 9
ATC1400a:MODE?
S cr e e n :
C79
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s st a t u s o f t h e I n t e r f e r e n ce
Pulse or Double Interrogation
spacing.
Command: ATC1400a:MODE?
Reply:
<m>,<loc> where <m> is INTRF, DI
or OFF and <loc> is -17.5 to 399.9
i n µ s f o r I n t e r f e r e n ce P u l se
location or 0 to 399.9 in µs for DI
spacing.
E xa m p l e : A T C 1 4 0 0 a : M O D E ?
INTRF,-17.5
ATC1400a:P123:WIDTh
( S t a n d A l o n e o n l y)
S cr e e n :
C79
P u r p o se :
S p e ci f i e s t h e P 1 , P 2 a n d P 3 p u l se
width.
Command: ATC1400a:P123:WIDTh <w> where
<w> is “CAL” or 0 to 1.95 in µs
( 0 . 0 5 µ s st e p s) .
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : A T C 1 4 0 0 a : P 1 2 3 : W I D T h 1 . 5 0
ATC1400a:P123:WIDTh?
S cr e e n :
C79
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s t h e P 1 , P 2 a n d P 3 p u l se
width.
Command: ATC1400a:P123:WIDTh?
Reply:
<w> where <w> is CAL or 0 to 1.95
i n µ s.
E xa m p l e : A T C 1 4 0 0 a : P 1 2 3 : W I D T h ?
CAL
1- 2- 4
Page 15
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ATC1400a:P2:DEViation
(Stand Alone only)
S cr e e n :
C79
Purpose:
Specifies the P2 pulse deviation.
Command: ATC1400a:P2:DEViation <d> where
<d> is “CAL” or -1.95 to +1.95 in µs
(0.05 µs steps).
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : A T C 1 4 0 0 a : P 2 : D E V i a t i o n 0 . 9 5
ATC1400a:P2:DEViation?
S cr e e n :
C79
Purpose:
Returns the P2 pulse deviation.
Command: ATC1400a:P2:DEViation?
Reply:
<d> where <d> is CAL or -1.95 to
+1.95 in µs.
E xa m p l e : A T C 1 4 0 0 a : P 2 : D E V i a t i o n ?
0.95
ATC1400a:P3:DEViation
(Stand Alone only)
S cr e e n :
C79
Purpose:
Specifies the P3 pulse deviation.
Command: ATC1400a:P3:DEViation <d> where
<d> is “CAL” or -1.95 to +1.95 in µs
(0.05 µs steps).
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : A T C 1 4 0 0 a : P 3 : D E V i a t i o n 0 . 9 5
ATC1400a:P3:DEViation?
S cr e e n :
C79
Purpose:
Returns the P3 pulse deviation.
Command: ATC1400a:P3:DEViation?
Reply:
<d> where <d> is CAL or -1.95 to
+1.95 in µs.
E xa m p l e : A T C 1 4 0 0 a : P 3 : D E V i a t i o n ?
-1.95
ATC1400a:RF
(Stand Alone only)
Screen:
C79 Stand-alone only.
Purpose:
Specifies the RF output control.
Command: ATC1400a:RF<o> where<o> is
“OFF”, “NORM” or “CW”.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : A T C 1 4 0 0 a : R F “ N O R M ”
ATC1400a:RF?
S cr e e n :
C79
Purpose:
Returns the RF output control.
Command: ATC1400a:RF?
Reply:
<o> where <o> is OFF, NORM or
CW.
Example: ATC1400a:RF?
CW
ATC1400a:SCOPe
( S t a n d A l o n e o n l y)
S cr e e n :
C79
Purpose:
Specifies the scope sync location.
Command: ATC1400a:SCOPe <r> where <r> is
“TO” or “TD”.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : A T C 1 4 0 0 a : S C O P e “ T D ”
ATC1400a:SCOPe?
S cr e e n :
C79
Purpose:
Returns the scope sync location.
Command: ATC1400a:SCOPe?
R e p l y:
<r> where <r> is TO or TD.
Example: ATC1400a:SCOPe?
TO
DISPlay:CMENu
S cr e e n :
C00 to C99
Purpose:
Displays the specified Control
Menu screen.
C o m m a n d : D I S P l a y: C M E N u [ < n > ] w h e r e < n > i s
value 0 - 99
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : D I S P l a y: C M E N u 2 0
DISPlay:CURRent?
S cr e e n :
A l l scr e e n s
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s scr e e n d e si g n a t o r .
C o m m a n d : D I S P l a y: C U R R e n t ?
Reply:
<scrn des> where <scrn des> is
C00 - C99, S0 - S999, T0 - T99,
MR, MS, etc.
E x a m p l e : D I S P l a y: C U R R e n t ?
C10
DISPlay:SMENu
S cr e e n :
S0 to S999
Purpose:
Displays the specified Sequence
Menu screen.
C o m m a n d : D I S P l a y: S M E N u [ < n > ] w h e r e < n > i s
value 0 - 999
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : D I S P l a y: S M E N u 1 0 0
DISPlay:TMENu
S cr e e n :
T00 to T99
Purpose:
Displays the specified Test Menu
screen.
C o m m a n d : D I S P l a y: T M E N u [ < n u m b e r > ] w h e r e
<number> is 00 to 99.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : D I S P l a y: T M E N u 3 5
1- 2- 4
Page 16
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
FORMat
S cr e e n :
Purpose:
GENerator:LEVel:OFFSet
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
P u r p o se :
S e t s t h e R F ve r n i e r f o r sp e ci f i e d
antenna.
Command: GENerator:LEVel:OFFSet
<ant>,<fine> where <ant> is ANTA
or ANTB and <fine> is -3.0 to
+ 3 . 0 i n d B ( 0 . 1 d B st e p s) .
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : G E N e r a t o r : L E V e l : O F F S e t A N T A , 3 . 0
GENerator[:STATe]
Screen:
C10, C20, C75
Purpose:
Enables or disables the
interrogation signal for the
specified antenna.
Command: GENerator[:STATe] <ant>, <on/off>
Reply:
None
Example: GENerator:STATe ANTA,ON
GENerator 0,1
GENerator:LEVel:OFFSet?
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s t h e R F ve r n i e r se t t i n g f o r
the specified antenna.
Command: GENerator:LEVel:OFFSet? <ant>
where <ant> is ANTA or ANTB
Reply:
<fine> where <fine> is -3.0 to +3.0
in dB.
E xa m p l e : G E N e r a t o r : L E V e l : O F F S e t ? A N T A
3.0
(Remote Only)
Sets format for numerical data
returns (sequence menus use
INTerrogation:SMENu:FORMat).
C o m m a n d : F O R M a t < t y p e > w h e r e < t yp e > i s
ASCii (decimal), BINary,
HEXadecimal or OCTal
Reply:
None
Example: FORMat HEXadecimal
GENerator[:STATe]?
Screen:
C10, C20, C75
Purpose:
Returns the status of the
interrogation signal for the
specified antenna.
Command: GENerator[:STATe]?<ant>
Reply:
<on/off> (1 or 0)
Example: GENerator:STATe? ANTA
GENerator? 0
1
GENerator:LEVel
S cr e e n :
C20
Purpose:
Sets the ANTB output attenuation
level.
C o m m a n d : G E N e r a t o r : L E V e l < a n t > , < co a r se >
w h e r e < a n t > i s A N T B ( c u r r e n t l y,
o n l y v a l i d e n t r y ) a n d < c o a r se > i s 20 to -83 in dBm if MLD option is
installed or -50 (only valid value) in
dBm if MLD option is not installed.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : G E N e r a t o r : L E V e l A N T B , - 2 0
GENerator:LEVel?
S cr e e n :
C20
P u r p o se :
Returns the ANT B output
attenuation level.
Command: GENerator:LEVel? <ant> where
< a n t > i s A N T B ( c u r r e n t l y, o n l y va l i d
entry)
Reply:
<coarse> where <coarse> is -20 to
-83 in dBm.
E xa m p l e : G E N e r a t o r : L E V e l ? 1
-20
GENerator:TIMe:OFFSet
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
P u r p o se :
S e t s t h e A N T B i n t e r r o g a t i o n si g n a l
p o si t i o n i n r e l a t i o n t o t h e A N T A
signal.
C o m m a n d : G E N e r a t o r : T I M e : O F F S e t < va l u e >
w h e r e < va l u e > i s - 0 . 9 5 t o + 0 . 9 5 i n
µ s ( 0 . 0 5 µ s st e p s) .
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : G E N e r a t o r : T I M e : O F F S e t 0 . 1 0
GENerator:TIMe:OFFSet?
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
P u r p o se :
Returns the ANT B interrogation
signal position in relation to the
A N T A si g n a l .
Command: GENerator:TIMe:OFFSet?
Reply:
< va l u e > w h e r e < va l u e > i s - 0 . 9 5 t o
+ 0 . 9 5 i n µ s.
E xa m p l e : G E N e r a t o r : T I M e : O F F S e t ?
0.95
HCOPy[:IMMediate]
S cr e e n :
Varies
P u r p o se :
S a m e a s p r e ssi n g t h e 2 N D a n d
P R T S C R K e ys i n se q u e n ce o n t h e
F r o n t P a n e l t o p e r f o r m a scr e e n
dump of the current screen out the
R S - 2 3 2 C o n n e ct o r i f e n a b l e d .
C o m m a n d : H C O P y[ : I M M e d i a t e ]
Reply:
screen dump data
E xa m p l e : H C O P y
1- 2- 4
Page 17
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
HCOPy:SDUMp[:IMMediate]
S cr e e n :
Varies
Purpose:
Same as pressing the 2ND and
PRTSCR Keys in sequence on the
Front Panel to perform a screen
dump of the current screen out the
R S - 2 3 2 C o n n e ct o r i f e n a b l e d .
Command: HCOPy:SDUMp[:IMMediate]
Reply:
screen dump data
E xa m p l e : H C O P : S D U M
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:ACL
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
Purpose:
Enables the ACL function.
Command: INTerrogation:FUNCtion:ACL
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : F U N C t i o n : A C L
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:ACS
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
P u r p o se :
E n a b l e s t h e A C S f u n ct i o n .
Command: INTerrogation:FUNCtion:ACS
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : F U N C t i o n : A C S
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:ATCMonitor
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
Purpose:
E n a b l e s t h e A T C R B S M o n i t o r P u l se
F u n ct i o n .
Command: INTerrogation:FUNCtion:
ATCMonitor
Reply:
None
Example: INTerrogation:FUNCtion:ATCM
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:ATCrbs
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
Purpose:
Enables the ATC function.
Command: INTerrogation:FUNCtion:ATC
Reply:
None
Example: INTerrogation:FUNCtion:ATC
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:BURSt
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
Purpose:
Enables the BURST function,
se l e ct i n g t h e i n t e r r o g a t i o n f u n c t i o n
t yp e a n d n u m b e r o f i n t e r r o g a t i o n s
for the BURST function.
Command: INTerrogation:FUNCtion:BURSt
[<f1>,<n1>] where <f1> is “ATC”,
“SEQ”, “ACS” or “ACL” and <BN> is
1 to 9999. No entry uses current
settings.
Reply:
None
Example: INT:FUNC:BURS “ATC”,5
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:BURSt?
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
Purpose:
Returns the interrogation function
type and the number of
interrogations for the BURST
function.
Command: INTerrogation:FUNCtion:BURSt?
Reply:
<f1>,<BN> where <f1> is ATC,
SEQ, ACS or ACL and <BN> is 1 to
9999.
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : F U N C t i o n : B U R S t ?
ATC,100
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:BURSt:CONDition?
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s t h e B U R S T F u n ct i o n
st a t u s.
Command: INTerrogation:FUNCtion:BURSt:
CONDition?
Reply:
<bursting/finished> (1 or 0)
Example: INT:FUNC:BURS:COND?
0
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:DI
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
Purpose:
Enables the Double Interrogation
( D I ) f u n ct i o n a n d sp e ci f i e s t h e
interrogation function types for the
D I f u n ct i o n .
Command: INTerrogation:FUNCtion:DI
[<f1>,<f2>] where <f1> is “ATC”,
“SEQ”, “ACS” or “ACL” and <f2> is
“ATC”, “SEQ”, “ACS” or “ACL”. No
e n t r y u se s cu r r e n t se t t i n g s.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : F U N C t i o n : D I “ A T C ”
or INT:FUNC:DI “ATC”,”SEQ”
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:DI?
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
Purpose:
Returns the interrogation function
t yp e s se l e ct e d f o r t h e D o u b l e
Interrogation function.
Command: INTerrogation:FUNCtion:DI?
Reply:
<f1>,<f2> where <f1> is ATC, SEQ,
ACS or ACL and <f2> is ATC, SEQ,
ACS or ACL
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : F U N C t i o n : D I ?
ATC,SEQ
1- 2- 4
Page 18
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:INTerlace
Screen:
C10, C20
Purpose:
Enables the Interlace (INTLCE)
function and sets the ratio of
A T C R B S t o M o d e S i n t e r r o g a t i o n s.
C o m m a n d : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : F U N C t i o n : I N T e r l a ce
[<n>] where <n> is 1 to 999
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : F U N C t i o n : I N T 5
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:INTerlace?
Screen:
C10, C20
Purpose:
Returns the Interlace function
ATCRBS interrogation ratio.
C o m m a n d : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : F U N C t i o n : I N T e r l a ce ?
Reply:
<n> where <n> is 1 to 999
Example: INTerrogation:FUNCtion:INT?
10
INTerrogation:FUNCtion:SEQuence
Screen:
C10, C20
Purpose:
Enables the Sequence (SEQ)
function.
C o m m a n d : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : F U N C t i o n : S E Q u e n ce
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : F U N C t i o n : S E Q u e n ce
INTerrogation:FUNCtion?
Screen:
C10,C20
Purpose:
R e t u r n s t h e a c t i v e t e s t f u n ct i o n
with selected parameters.
Command: INTerrogation:FUNCtion?
Reply:
<f> where <f> is ATC, SEQ, ACL,
ACS, INT, DI, BURS or ATCM.
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : F U N C t i o n ?
ATC
INTerrogation:MODulation
S cr e e n :
C75
Purpose:
S p e c i f i e s t h e m o d u l a t i o n so u r ce f o r
s e l e ct e d a n t e n n a
Command: INTerrogation:MODulation
<ant>,<src> where <ant> is ANTA
or ANTB and <src> is “INT”, “EXT”
or “INTExt”.
Reply:
None
Example: INT:MOD ANTA,”EXT”
INTerrogation:MODulation?
S cr e e n :
C75
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s m o d u l a t i o n so u r ce f o r t h e
selected antenna
Command: INTerrogation:MODulation? <ant>
where <ant> is ANTA or ANTB.
Reply:
< sr c > w h e r e < sr c > i s I N T , E X T o r
INTE
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : M O D u l a t i o n ? A N T A
EXT
INTerrogation:P2
( S E Q f u n ct i o n s)
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
P u r p o se :
Sets the P2 pulse level when
operating with Mode S
i n t e r r o g a t i o n s ( m u st b e f i r st i n D I ) .
Command: INTerrogation:P2 <level> where
< l e v e l > i s “ C A L ” ( se t s p u l se l e ve l
to P1), “VAR” (allows ATC-1400A
E S = co m m a n d t o se t p u l se l e ve l ) o r
“ O F F ” ( d i sa b l e s P 2 p u l se ) .
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : P 2 “ C A L ”
INTerrogation:P2?
( S E Q f u n ct i o n s)
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s t h e cu r r e n t st a t u s o f t h e P 2
pulse.
Command: INTerrogation:P2?
Reply:
<level> where <level> is CAL, VAR
or OFF.
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : P 2 ?
CAL
INTerrogation:P3
( A T C , A C S o r A C L f u n ct i o n s)
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
P u r p o se :
Sets the P3 pulse level when
operating with ATCRBS or All Call
i n t e r r o g a t i o n s ( m u st b e f i r st i n D I ) .
Command: INTerrogation:P3 <level> where
< l e v e l > i s “ C A L ” ( se t s p u l se l e ve l
to P1), “VAR” (allows ATC-1400A
E S = co m m a n d t o se t p u l se l e ve l ) o r
“ O F F ” ( d i sa b l e s P 3 p u l se ) .
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : P 3 “ V A R ”
1- 2- 4
Page 19
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
INTerrogation:P3?
( A T C , A C S o r A C L f u n ct i o n s)
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
Purpose:
Returns the current status of the P3
pulse level.
Command: INTerrogation:P3?
Reply:
< l e ve l > w h e r e < l e v e l > i s C A L , V A R
or OFF.
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : P 3 ?
VAR
INTerrogation:P4
(ACS or ACL functions)
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
P u r p o se :
Sets P4 pulse conditions when
operating with All Call
interrogations (must be first in DI).
Command: INTerrogation:P4 <level>[,<width>
[,<dev>]] where <level> is “CAL”
(sets pulse level to P1), “VAR”
(allows ATC-1400A ES= command
t o se t p u l s e l e v e l ) o r “ O F F ”
( d i sa b l e s P 4 p u l s e ) ; < w i d t h > i s
“CAL” or 0.20 to 3.55 in µs and
<dev> is “CAL” or -1.95 to +1.95
from CAL in µs.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : INTerrogation:P4 “CAL”,”CAL”,”CAL”
INTerrogation:P4 “VAR”,0.20,1.95
INTerrogation:P4?
(ACS or ACL functions)
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
Purpose:
Returns P4 pulse conditions with
current settings.
Command: INTerrogation:P4?
Reply:
< l e ve l > , < w i d t h > , < d e v > w h e r e
< l e ve l > i s C A L , V A R o r O F F ( p u l se
level), <width> is CAL or 0.20 to
3.55 in µs (pulse width) and <dev>
is CAL or -1.95 to +1.95 from CAL
in µs (pulse position).
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : P 4 ?
CAL,1.00,0.0
INTerrogation:P6
( S E Q f u n ct i o n s)
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
P u r p o se :
Sets P6 pulse conditions when
operating with Mode S
i n t e r r o g a t i o n s ( m u st b e f i r st i n D I ) .
Command: INTerrogation:P6 <level>[,<width>[,
<dev>]] where <level> is “CAL”
( e n a b l e s P 6 p u l se ) o r “ O F F ”
( d i s a b l e s P 6 p u l se ) , < w i d t h > i s
“CAL” or -1.50 to +1.50 from CAL
in 0.05 µs increments (pulse width)
and <dev> is “CAL” or -1.95 to
+1.95 from CAL in 0.05 µs
increments (pulse position)
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : P 6 “ C A L ” , - 1 . 5 0 , 1 . 9 5
INTerrogation:P6 “CAL”,”CAL”,”CAL”
INTerrogation:P6?
( S E Q f u n ct i o n s)
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
P u r p o se :
Returns P6 pulse conditions with
cu r r e n t se t t i n g s.
Command: INTerrogation:P6?
Reply:
<level>,<width>,<dev> where
< l e v e l > i s C A L o r O F F ( p u l se
st a t u s) , < w i d t h > i s C A L o r - 1 . 5 0 t o
+ 1 . 5 0 f r o m C A L i n µ s ( p u l se w i d t h )
and <dev> is CAL or -1.95 to +1.95
from CAL in µs (pulse position)
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : P 6 ?
CAL,-1.50,1.95
INTerrogation:P6:SPR
( S E Q f u n ct i o n s)
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
P u r p o se :
C o n t r o l s S P R i n M o d e S t e st
functions.
Command: INTerrogation:P6:SPR <on/off>[,
<dev>] where <on/off> enables or
d i sa b l e s S P R a n d < d e v > c o n t r o l s
S P R p o si t i o n ( “ C A L ” o r - 1 . 0 0 t o
+1.00 from CAL, rounded to
n e a r e s t 0 . 0 5 µ s) .
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : P 6 : S P R O N , 1 . 0 0
1- 2- 4
Page 20
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
INTerrogation:P6:SPR?
(SEQ functions)
Screen:
C10, C20
P u r p o se :
Returns current status of SPR.
Command: INTerrogation:P6:SPR?
Reply:
<on/off>,<dev> where <on/off> is
the SPR status (1 or 0) and <dev>
is SPR position (CAL or -1.00 to
+1.00 from CAL in µs.)
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : P 6 : S P R ?
1,1.00
INTerrogation:PPMG
S cr e e n :
C74
Purpose:
Sets Pulse Power Measurement
Gate (PPMG) control for specified
pulse in the UUT reply.
C o m m a n d : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : P P M G < t yp e > ,
< o n / o f f > [ , < p u l se # > ] w h e r e < t yp e >
is “ATC”, “MODES” or “DELM”;
<on/off> enables or disables power
and frequency measurement on
se l e ct e d p u l se a n d < p u l s e # > i s t h e
selected pulse, dependent on the
<type> as follows:
ATC: “F1”, “F2”, “A1”, “A2”, “A4”,
“B1”, “B2”, “B4”, “C1”, “C2”, “C4”,
“D1”, “D2”, “D4”, “X” or “SPI”
MODES: 1 to 116.
D E L M: 1 t o 1 6 .
Reply:
None
E x a m p l e : INTerrogation:PPMG “ATC”,ON,”D1”
INTerrogation:PPMG?
S cr e e n :
C74
Purpose:
Returns the Pulse Power
M e a s u r e m e n t G a t e ( P P M G ) se t t i n g s
for the specified type.
C o m m a n d : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : P P M G ? < t yp e > w h e r e
<type> is ATC, MODES or DELM
Reply:
< o n / o f f > , < p u l se # > w h e r e < o n / o f f >
i s P P M G s t a t u s ( 1 o r 0 ) a cco r d i n g
t o < t y p e > a n d < p u l se # > i s t h e
selected pulse.
Example: INTerrogation:PPMG? “ATC”
1,B2
INTerrogation:PPULse
S cr e e n :
C75
Purpose:
Sets the status and position of
prepulse through the S-1403DL
P R E P U L S E O U T C o n n e ct o r .
C o m m a n d : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : P P U L se
<on/off>[,<dev>] where <on/off>
e n a b l e s / d i s a b l e s p r e p u l se co n t r o l
a n d < d e v > se t s t h e p r e p u l se
position (0 to 260) in µs prior to
rising edge of P1.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : P P U L se O N , 1 0 0
INTerrogation:PPULse?
S cr e e n :
C75
Purpose:
R e t u r n s t h e s t a t u s a n d p o si t i o n o f
prepulse through the S-1403DL
PREPULSE OUT Connector.
C o m m a n d : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : P P U L se ?
Reply:
<on/off>,<dev> where <on/off> is
p r e p u l se co n t r o l st a t u s ( 1 o r 0 ) a n d
< d e v > i s t h e p r e p u l s e p o si t i o n ( 0 t o
2 6 0 ) i n µ s p r i o r t o r i si n g e d g e o f
P1.
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : P P U L se ?
1,100
INTerrogation:SCOPe
S cr e e n :
C72
P u r p o se :
S p e ci f i e s se t t i n g s f o r t h e t r i g g e r
pulse through the S-1403DL
S C O P E T R I G O U T C o n n e ct o r .
Command: INTerrogation:SCOPe
< t yp e > , < o n / o f f > [ , < d e v > ] w h e r e
< t yp e > i s “ A T C ” , “ M O D E S ” , “ A C S ”
o r “ A C L ” ; < o n / o f f > e n a b l e s/ d i sa b l e s
t r i g g e r f o r i n t e r r o g a t i o n t yp e a n d
<dev> is “CAL” (allows ATC-1400A
T Ø o r T D c o m m a n d t o s e t sco p e
t r i g g e r p o si t i o n ) o r t i m e i n µ s a f t e r
P1 of Antenna A interrogation.
V a l i d < d e v > va l u e s va r y a cco r d i n g
t o t yp e a s f o l l o w s:
A T C : 0 t o 3 5 i n µ s.
M O D E S : 0 t o 2 5 5 i n µ s.
A C S : 0 t o 2 5 5 i n µ s.
A C L : 0 t o 2 5 5 i n µ s.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : S C O P e “ A T C ” , O N , 3 0
1- 2- 4
Page 21
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
INTerrogation:SCOPe?
S cr e e n :
C72
P u r p o se :
Returns the status and position of
the trigger pulse through the S1403DL SCOPE TRIG OUT
Connector according to selected
interrogation type.
Command: INTerrogation:SCOPe? <type>
where <type> is "ATC", "MODES",
"ACS" or "ACL".
R e p l y:
<on/off>,<dev> where <on/off> is
t h e s co p e t r i g g e r s t a t u s ( 1 o r 0 )
and <dev> is “CAL” or a numeric
time in µs after P1 of Antenna A
interrogation (scope trigger
position).
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : S C O P e ? “ A T C ”
1,30
INTerrogation:SCOPe:SMENu
S cr e e n :
S0 to S999
Purpose:
Enables/disables scope trigger for
s p e c i f i c se q u e n c e m e n u
interrogation.
Command: INTerrogation:SCOPe:SMENu
<smenu#>,<on/off> where
<smenu#> is 0 to 999
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : S C O P e : S M E N u
100,ON
INTerrogation:SCOPe:SMENu?
S cr e e n :
S0 to S999
Purpose:
Returns the scope trigger status for
s p e c i f i c se q u e n c e m e n u
interrogation.
Command: INTerrogation:SCOPe:SMENu?
< s m e n u # > w h e r e < sm e n u # > i s 0 t o
999
Reply:
<on/off> (1 or 0)
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : S C O P e : S M E N u ? 1 0 0
1
INTerrogation:SMENu
S cr e e n :
S0 to S999
P u r p o se :
S e t s i n t e r r o g a t i o n d a t a f o r sp e ci f i c
sequence menu.
Command: INTerrogation:SMENu <smenu#>,
<on/off>[,<iformat>,[<data>]] where
<smenu#> is 0 to 999; <on/off>
activates/deactivates sequence
menu, <iformat> (N/A with <on/off>
se t t o O F F ) i s “ A ” ( a l l b i t s) , “ N ”
(auto size according to uplink
f o r m a t ) , “ S ” ( sh o r t ) , “ L ” ( l o n g ) , “ D ”
( d e co d e d d i sp l a y) o r “ R ” ( r e p l y o n l y
display) and <data> (N/A with
< o n / o f f > se t t o O F F o r < i f o r m a t >
se t t o “ D ” o r “ R ” ) i s a cco r d i n g t o
< i f o r m a t > a s f o l l o w s:
A : “ 5 6 o r 1 1 2 b i t s i n s e t n u m e r i ca l
f o r m a t ” ( m u st b e i n q u o t e s) .
N : < u f # > , ” < sb i t s o r l b i t s > “ , < a d d r >
S : < u f # > , ” < sb i t s > “ , < a d d r >
L: <uf#>,”<lbits>“,<addr> where
<uf#> is uplink format number in
d e c i m a l , < sb i t s > i s 2 7 b i t s i n s e t
n u m e r i ca l f o r m a t ( m u st b e i n
q u o t e s) , < l b i t s > i s 8 3 b i t s i n s e t
n u m e r i ca l f o r m a t ( m u st b e i n
quotes) and <addr> is 24-bit
a d d r e ss i n se t n u m e r i ca l f o r m a t o r
“XPDR” or “USER” or “XPDR-X” or
“ U S E R - X ” ( se e C 7 6 S e t u p M e n u
d e scr i p t i o n i n 1 - 1 - 2 ) .
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e :
INT:SMEN 1,ON,”A”,”#H12345670000123”
INT:SMEN 2,ON,”N”,4,”#H0000000”,#H3FABF2
1- 2- 4
Page 22
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
INTerrogation:SMENu?
S cr e e n :
S0 to S999
Purpose:
Returns set interrogation data for
sp e ci f i c se q u e n c e m e n u .
Command: INTerrogation:SMENu? <smenu#>,
< i f o r m a t > w h e r e < sm e n u # > i s 0 t o
9 9 9 a n d < i f o r m a t > i s “ A ” ( a l l b i t s)
or “N” (bits with uplink format # and
address broken out)
Reply:
<on/off>,<iformat>,<data> where
<on/off> is 1 or 0,<iformat> is A, N,
S or L (set interrogation format)
and <data> is according to
<iformat> as follows:
A: 56 or 112 bits in numerical
format set by INT:SMEN:FORM
command.
N: <uf#>,<sbits or lbits>,<addr>
S: <uf#>,”<sbits>“,<addr>
L: <uf#>,”<lbits>“,<addr> where
<uf#> is uplink format number in
decimal, <sbits> is 27 bits in
numerical format set by
INT:SMEN:FORM command, <lbits>
is 83 bits in numerical format set
by INT:SMEN:FORM command and
<addr> is 24-bit address in
numerical format set by
INT:SMEN:FORM command or
XPDR or USER or XPDR-X or
USER-X.
Example: INT:SMEN? 1,”N”
1,N,2,#H2345670,#H000123
INT:SMEN? 2,”A”
1,A,#H200000003FABF2
INTerrogation:SMENu:BITS?
S cr e e n :
S 0 t o S 9 9 9 ( R e m o t e O n l y) .
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s d a t a se t t i n g s f o r se l e ct e d
bits in selected sequence menu.
Command: INTerrogation:SMENu:BITS?
<smenu#>,<startbit#>,<bitlen>
where <smenu#> is 0 to 999,
< st a r t b i t # > i s 1 t o 1 1 2 a n d < b i t l e n >
is 1 to 112.
Reply:
<data> where <data> is in
n u m e r i ca l f o r m a t se t b y
INT:SMEN:FORM command.
E xa m p l e : I N T : S M E N : B I T S ? 5 , 3 2 , 1 6
#HF013
INTerrogation:SMENu:BITS
S cr e e n :
S 0 t o S 9 9 9 ( R e m o t e O n l y) .
Purpose:
Sets selected bits (interrogation
data) in selected sequence menu.
Command: INTerrogation:SMENu:BITS
<smenu#>,<startbit#>,<bitlen>,
“<data>“ where <smenu#> is 0 to
9 9 9 , < s t a r t b i t # > i s 1 t o 1 1 2 ( st a r t
bit according to Appendix D),
<bitlen> is 1 to 112 (number of bits
to modify) and “<data>“ is new
value for bit field in set numerical
format.
Example:
INTerrogation:SMENu:BITS 5,32,16,"#HF013"
INTerrogation:SMENu:GLOBal:ADDRess
S cr e e n :
C76
P u r p o se :
S e t s t h e g l o b a l t r a n sp o n d e r
a d d r e s s u s e d i n s e q u e n ce m e n u s.
Command: INTerrogation:SMENu:GLOBal:
A D D R e s s < g t yp e > , < a d d r > w h e r e
< g t yp e > i s “ U S E R ” a n d < a d d r > i s
t h e d e s i r e d t r a n s p o n d e r a d d r e ss.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e :
INT:SMEN:GLOB:ADDR “USER”,#Q17725762
INTerrogation:SMENu:FORMat
S cr e e n :
C76
Purpose:
Specifies the radix for all data
f i e l d s i n s e q u e n c e m e n u s e xce p t
for UF, DF, AC and ID.
Command: INTerrogation:SMENu:FORMat <f>
where <f> is "HEXadecimal" or
"OCTal".
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e :
INTerrogation:SMENu:FORMat "HEX"
INTerrogation:SMENu:FORMat?
S cr e e n :
C76
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s t h e sp e ci f i e d r a d i x f o r d a t a
f i e l d s i n s e q u e n c e m e n u s.
Command: INTerrogation:SMENu:FORMat?
Reply:
<f> where <f> is HEX or OCT.
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : S M E N U : F O R M a t ?
HEX
1- 2- 4
Page 23
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
INTerrogation:SMENu:GLOBal:ADDRess?
S cr e e n :
C76
Purpose:
Returns the global transponder
address.
Command: INTerrogation:SMENu:GLOBal:
ADDRess? <gtype> where <gtype>
is “USER” or “XPDR”.
Reply:
<addr> where <addr> is the user
address setting in numerical format
set by INT:SMEN:FORM command.
Example: INT:SMEN:GLOB:ADDR? “USER”
#Q17725762
INTerrogation:SMENu:SCOPe?
S cr e e n :
S 0 t o S 9 9 9 ( sa m e a s
INTerrogation:SCOPe:SMENu?)
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s t h e sco p e t r i g g e r st a t u s f o r
specific sequence menu
interrogation.
Command: INTerrogation:SMENu:SCOPe?
<smenu#> where <smenu#> is 0 to
999
Reply:
<on/off> (1 or 0)
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : S M E N u : S C O P e ? 1 0 0
1
INTerrogation:SMENu:GLOBal:APXor
S cr e e n :
C76
Purpose:
Specifies XOR mask used after the
AP conversion of the selected
global transponder address.
Command: INTerrogation:SMENu:GLOBal:
APXor <gtype>,<xor> where
<gtype> is “XPDR” or “USER” and
<xor> is the 24-bit mask in set
numerical format.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e :
INT:SMEN:GLOBal:APX “XPDR”,#Q00000001
INTerrogation:SMENu:SET:ALL
S cr e e n :
C76
Purpose:
Modifies all sequence menus.
C o m m a n d : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : S M E N u : S E T : A L L < x>
w h e r e < x> i s “ O F F ” ( t u r n s a l l
se q u e n ce m e n u s o f f ) , “ X P D R ” ,
( se t s A D D R i n t e r r o g a t i o n f i e l d i n a l l
sequence menus to the received
t r a n sp o n d e r a d d r e ss) , “ U S E R ” ( se t s
ADDR interrogation field in all
s e q u e n c e m e n u s t o t h e a d d r e s s se t
by the INT:SMEN:GLOB:ADDR
co m m a n d ) , “ Z E R O ” ( se t s d a t a
fields to zero, activates scope
t r i g g e r a n d se t s A D D R t o r e g u l a r
n u m e r i c, n o t g l o b a l ) o r “ D E F a u l t ”
( s e t s a l l s e q u e n c e m e n u s t o f a ct o r y
default according to C76 Setup
Menu description in 1-1-2).
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e :
INTerrogation:SMENu:SET:ALL "DEFault"
INTerrogation:SMENu:GLOBal:APXor?
S cr e e n :
C76
P u r p o se :
Returns the AP field XOR mask
se t t i n g f o r t h e s e l e c t e d g l o b a l
transponder/user address.
Command: INTerrogation:SMENu:GLOBal:
APXor? <gtype> where <gtype> is
“XPDR” or “USER”.
Reply:
<xor> where <xor> is the 24-bit
mask in numerical format set by
INT:SMEN:FORM command.
E xa m p l e : I N T : S M E N : G L O B : A P X ? “ U S E R ”
#H000001
INTerrogation:SMENu:SCOPe
S cr e e n :
S0 to S999 (same as
INTerrogation:SCOPe:SMENu)
Purpose:
Enables/disables scope trigger for
s p e c i f i c se q u e n c e m e n u
interrogation.
Command: INTerrogation:SMENu:SCOPe
<smenu#>,<on/off> where
<smenu#> is 0 to 999
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : S M E N u : S C O P e
100,ON
INTerrogation:SYNC:OUT
S cr e e n :
C73
Purpose:
Enables/disables the pulse out the
S-1403DL EXT SYNC OUT
Connector for the specified
interrogation type.
C o m m a n d : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : S Y N C : O U T < t yp e > ,
< o n / o f f > w h e r e < t yp e > i s “ A T C ” ,
“MODES”, “ACS” or “ACL”.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : I N T : S Y N C : O U T “ A T C ” , O F F
1- 2- 4
Page 24
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
INTerrogation:SYNC:OUT?
S cr e e n :
C73
Purpose:
R e t u r n s t h e s t a t u s o f t h e p u l se o u t
the S-1403DL EXT SYNC OUT
Connector for the specified
interrogation type.
C o m m a n d : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : S Y N C : O U T ? < t yp e >
where <type> is “ATC”, “MODES”,
“ACS” or “ACL”.
Reply:
<on/off> (1 or 0)
E xa m p l e : I N T : S Y N C : O U T ? “ M O D E S ”
0
INTerrogation:SYNC:OUT:DEViation
S cr e e n :
C73
P u r p o se :
Deviates position of pulse out the
S-1403DL EXT SYNC OUT
Connector in reference to
Antenna A P1 leading edge.
Command: INTerrogation:SYNC:OUT:
D E V i a t i o n < v a l u e > w h e r e < va l u e >
is -9.95 to +9.95 in µs (0.05 µs
steps).
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : I N T : S Y N C : O U T : D E V i a t i o n 1 . 0 0
INTerrogation:SYNC:OUT:DEViation?
S cr e e n :
C73
Purpose:
Returns deviation setting for pulse
out the S-1403DL EXT SYNC OUT
Connector in reference to
Antenna A P1 leading edge.
Command: INTerrogation:SYNC:OUT:
DEViation?
Reply:
<value> where <value> is -9.95 to
+9.95 in µs.
Example: INT:SYNC:OUT:DEV?
1.00
INTerrogation:TRIGger:BURSt
S cr e e n :
Varies
Purpose:
Same as pressing the BURST Key
on the Front Panel.
Command: INTerrogation:TRIGger:BURSt
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : T R I G g e r : B U R S t
INTerrogation:TRIGger:GENerator
S cr e e n :
C71
P u r p o se :
Sets internal trigger generator.
Command: INTerrogation:TRIGger:GENerator
<num> <hz/sec> where <num> is
0 . 0 0 0 4 t o 9 9 . 9 9 9 9 f o r s e co n d s
b e t w e e n i n t e r r o g a t i o n s ( < h z/ se c > i s
SEC) or 1 to 2500 for number of
interrogations per second
( < h z / s e c > i s H Z ) a n d < h z/ se c > i s
the unit of <num>.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : I N T : T R I G : G E N 1 . 0 S E C
INTerrogation:TRIGger:GENerator?
S cr e e n :
C71
P u r p o se :
Returns internal trigger generator
setting.
Command: INTerrogation:TRIGger:GENerator?
Reply:
<num> <hz/sec> where <num>
<hz/sec> is 0.004 to
9 9 . 9 9 9 9 s e c o r 1 t o 2 5 0 0 H z.
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : T R I G g e r : G E N e r a t o r ?
0.999 sec
INTerrogation:TRIGger:SOURce
S cr e e n :
C71
P u r p o se :
S e t s i n t e r r o g a t i o n t r i g g e r so u r ce .
C o m m a n d : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : T R I G g e r : S O U R ce
< sr c > w h e r e < sr c > i s “ S E L F i n t ” ,
“SYNC”, “TRIGgen” or “BURSt”.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e :
I N T e r r o g a t i o n : T R I G g e r : S O U R ce S E L F i n t
INTerrogation:TRIGger:SOURce?
S cr e e n :
C71
Purpose:
Returns the selected interrogation
t r i g g e r so u r ce .
C o m m a n d : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : T R I G g e r : S O U R ce ?
Reply:
< sr c > w h e r e < sr c > i s S E L F i n t ,
SYNC, TRIGgen or BURSt.
E xa m p l e : I N T e r r o g a t i o n : T R I G g e r : S O U R ce ?
TRIGGEN
MEMory:CATalog?
S cr e e n :
MS, MR
P u r p o se :
Returns specific memory slot name.
C o m m a n d : M E M o r y: C A T a l o g ? < n > w h e r e < n >
i s 0 t o 5 ( m e m o r y sl o t ) .
R e p l y:
“<name>“ where <name> is the
stored name, if applicable.
E xa m p l e : M E M o r y: C A T a l o g ? 1
“goodsave”
1- 2- 4
Page 25
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
MEMory:CLEar
S cr e e n :
(Remote Only)
Purpose:
Clears selected memory slot.
Command: MEMory:CLEar <n> or “<name>”
where <n> is 1 to 5 (memory slot)
or <name> is the stored name.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : M E M o r y : C L E a r “ m ysa v e ”
M E M o r y: C L E a r 2
MEMory:CLEar:ALL
S cr e e n :
(Remote Only)
Purpose:
Clears all memory slots.
Command: MEMory:CLEar:ALL
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : M E M o r y : C L E a r : A L L
MEMory:LOAD
Screen:
MR
Purpose:
Recalls settings from selected
memory slot.
Command: MEMory:LOAD <n> or “<name>”
where <n> is 0 to 5 memory Slot (0
-default settings except interpreter)
or <name> is the stored name.
Reply:
None
E x a m p l e : M E M o r y: L O A D “ yo u r sa ve ”
MEMory:LOAD 5
MEMory:NAME
Screen:
MS, MR
Purpose:
Renames specific memory slot.
Command: MEMory:NAME <n>,”<name>”
where <n> is 1 to 5 (memory slot)
and <name> is the user defined
name (≤16 characters).
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : M E M o r y: N A M E 1 , “ t e st sa ve ”
MEMory:STORe
Screen:
MS
Purpose:
Saves settings in memory slot.
Command: MEMory:STORe <n> or <name>
where <n> is 1 to 5 (memory slot)
or <name> is the stored name.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : M E M o r y : S T O R e 1
MEMory:STORe ”mysave”
PSCReen
S cr e e n :
P u r p o se :
Varies
S a m e a s p r e ssi n g t h e 2 N D a n d
P R T S C R K e ys i n se q u e n ce o n t h e
F r o n t P a n e l t o p e r f o r m a scr e e n
dump of the current screen out the
R S - 2 3 2 C o n n e ct o r i f e n a b l e d .
Command: PSCReen
Reply:
screen dump data
E xa m p l e : P S C R E E N
REPLy:ATCrbs?
S cr e e n :
C10
P u r p o se :
Returns altitude from Mode C or
i d e n t i f i c a t i o n f r o m M o d e A r e p l i e s.
C o m m a n d : R E P L y: A T C r b s?
Reply:
< a t y p e > , < va l u e > , < X > , < I P / E M>
w h e r e < a t yp e > i s A L T o r I D ,
< va l u e > i s i n f e e t f o r a l t i t u d e o r t h e
f o u r o ct a l n u m b e r s f o r t h e
identification code (preceded by ID
w i t h S P I p r e se n t ) , < X > i s X i f t h e X
p u l se i s p r e se n t ( b l a n k o t h e r w i se )
a n d < I P / E M> i s E M f o r a n
emergency identification reply or IP
for an identification of position
r e p l y ( b l a n k o t h e r w i se ) .
E xa m p l e : R E P L y: A T C r b s?
ALT,+105000
R E P L y: A T C r b s?
ID,ID7777,X,EM
REPLy:DELay?
S cr e e n :
C40
Purpose:
R e t u r n s r e p l y d e l a y m e a s u r e m e n t s.
C o m m a n d : R E P L y: D E L a y? [ < t yp e > ] w h e r e
< t yp e > i s “ A T C ” o r “ M O D E S ” i f
s p e c i f i e d . N o t s p e c i f y i n g < t yp e >
returns both types in succession
(ATC,MODES).
Reply:
<time>,<min>,<max> where <time>
is current reply delay measurement
i n µ s, < m i n > i s t h e m i n i m u m r e p l y
delay measurement in µs and
<max> is the maximum reply delay
m e a s u r e m e n t i n µ s.
E xa m p l e : R E P L y: D E L a y? “ M O D E S ”
127.0125,127.0125,127.075
REPLy:DELay:CLEar
S cr e e n :
C 4 0 ( e q u i va l e n t t o p r e ssi n g t h e
C L / E S C K e y i n t h i s scr e e n )
Purpose:
Initializes the min/max readings of
the reply delay measurement to 0.
C o m m a n d : R E P L y: D E L a y: C L E a r
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : R E P L y: D E L a y: C L E a r
1- 2- 4
Page 26
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
REPLy:DELay:FIRSt?
Screen:
C10, C20
Purpose:
Returns the reply delay reading for
the current function.
Command: REPLy:DELay:FIRSt?
Reply:
< t i m e > w h e r e < t i m e > i s t h e cu r r e n t
r e p l y d e l a y m e a s u r e m e n t i n µ s.
E xa m p l e : R E P L y : D E L a y : F I R S t ?
127.0125
REPLy:JITTer?
Screen:
(ATCRBS, C10/C20 ATC Mon
F u n c t i o n ; M o d e S , R e m o t e O n l y)
Purpose:
Returns the measured reply delay
j i t t e r f o r t h e s e l e c t e d t y p e o f r e p l y.
Command: REPLy:JITTer? <rtype> where
<rtype> is “ATC” or “MODES”.
Reply:
<jitter> where <jitter> is the reply
jitter in µs.
E x a m p l e : R E P L : JI T T ? “ A T C ”
0.2
REPLy:MODES?
Screen:
C10,C20
Purpose:
Returns Mode S reply data when
r e ce i ve d w i t h A T C , A C S o r A C L
interrogations.
C o m m a n d : R E P L y: M O D E S ? [ < r f o r m a t > ] w h e r e
o p t i o n a l < r f o r m a t > i s “ A ” ( a l l b i t s)
or “N” (auto size according to
downlink format). “N” is the default
<rformat>.
Reply:
<rformat>,<data> where <rformat>
is A or N (set reply format) and
<data> is according to <rformat> as
follows:
A: 56 or 112 bits in numerical
format set by INT:SMEN:FORM
co m m a n d
N: <df#>,<sbits or lbits>,<addr>
S: <df#>,”<sbits>“,<addr>
L: <df#>,”<lbits>“,<addr> where
<df#> is downlink format number in
d e ci m a l , < s b i t s > i s 2 7 b i t s i n
numerical format set by
INT:SMEN:FORM command, <lbits>
is 83 bits in numerical format set
by INT:SMEN:FORM command and
<addr> is 24-bit transponder
a d d r e s s i n n u m e r i c a l f o r m a t se t b y
INT:SMEN:FORM command.
Example: REPLy:MODES? ”A”
“A”,#HFFFFFF34123456
REPLy:PERCent?
S cr e e n :
C30
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s t h e p e r ce n t r e p l y t h r o u g h
the selected antenna for the
specified reply type.
C o m m a n d : R E P L y: P E R C e n t ? [ < a n t > [ , < r t yp e > ] ]
w h e r e < r t yp e > i s “ T O T A L ” , “ A T C ” ,
“MODES”, “BAD” or “NOREPLY”.
N o t s p e c i f y i n g < a n t > a n d < r t yp e >
r e t u r n s a l l p e r ce n t a g e s f o r b o t h
antennas (ANTA,ANTB). Not
s p e c i f y i n g < r t yp e > r e t u r n s a l l
p e r c e n t a g e s t h r o u g h t h e se l e ct e d
antenna (TOTAL,ATC,MODES,BAD,
NOREPLY).
Reply:
<percent> where <percent> is the
cu r r e n t r e p l y p e r ce n t a g e .
E xa m p l e : R E P L y: P E R C e n t ? A N T A , “ A T C ”
80
R e p l y: P E R C e n t ? A N T A
100,80,10,5,5
REPLy:PERCent:CLEar
S cr e e n :
C 3 0 ( e q u i va l e n t t o p r e ssi n g t h e
C L / E S C K e y i n t h i s scr e e n )
Purpose:
I n i t i a l i z e s t h e r e p o r t e d p e r ce n t
reply measurement to 0%.
C o m m a n d : R E P L y: P E R C e n t : C L E a r
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : R E P L y: P E R C e n t : C L E a r
1- 2- 4
Page 27
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
REPLy:SMENu?
S cr e e n :
S0 to S999
Purpose:
Returns reply data for specific
s e q u e n ce m e n u .
C o m m a n d : R E P L y: S M E N u ? < sm e n u # > [ ,
< r f o r m a t > ] w h e r e < sm e n u # > i s 0 t o
999 and optional <rformat> is “A”
(all bits) or “N” (auto size
according to downlink format). “N”
is the default <rformat>.
Reply:
<rformat>,<data> where <rformat>
is A or N (set reply format) and
<data> is according to <rformat> as
follows:
A: 56 or 112 bits in numerical
format set by INT:SMEN:FORM
command
N: <df#>,<sbits or lbits>,<addr>
S: <df#>,”<sbits>“,<addr>
L: <df#>,”<lbits>“,<addr> where
<df#> is downlink format number in
decimal, <sbits> is 27 bits in
numerical format set by
INT:SMEN:FORM command, <lbits>
is 83 bits in numerical format set
by INT:SMEN:FORM command and
<addr> is 24-bit transponder
address in numerical format set by
INT:SMEN:FORM command.
E xa m p l e : R E P L y: S M E N u ? 1 0 , ” A ”
“A”,#HFFFFFF34123456
REPLy:SPACing?
( A T C M o n F u n ct i o n )
S cr e e n :
C10, C20
P u r p o se :
Returns ATCRBS F1 to F2 reply
p u l s e s p a c i n g i n µ s.
C o m m a n d : R E P L y: S P A C i n g ? < r t yp e > w h e r e
< r t yp e > i s “ A T C ” ( o n l y va l i d e n t r y)
Reply:
<F1-F2space>
E xa m p l e : R E P L y: S P A C ? ” A T C ”
20.3000
REPLy:SMENu:BITS?
S cr e e n :
S0 to S999
Purpose:
Returns selected reply data for
s p e c i f i c se q u e n c e m e n u .
Command: REPly:SMENu:BITS? <smenu#>,
<startbit#>,<bitlen> where
< sm e n u # > i s 0 t o 9 9 9 , < s t a r t b i t # >
is 1 to 112 (start bit according to
Appendix D), <bitlen> is 1 to 32
(number of bits to get data).
Reply:
<data> where, <data> is the value
of the selected reply data bits in
the numerical format set by the
INT:SMEN:FORM command.
E xa m p l e : R E P L y : S M E N u : B I T S ? 5 , 3 2 , 1 6
#HF013
S1403c
S cr e e n :
P u r p o se :
REPLy:TIMeout
S cr e e n :
( R e m o t e O n l y)
P u r p o se :
Sets the time limit for getting no
reply.
C o m m a n d : R E P L y: T I M e o u t < t i m e > w h e r e
<time> is 1.000 to 65.535 in
seconds.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : R E P L : T I M 6 5
REPLy:WIDTh?
S cr e e n :
(ATCRBS, C10/C20 ATC Mon
F u n ct i o n ; M o d e S , R e m o t e O n l y)
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s w i d t h o f r e p l y p u l se s.
C o m m a n d : R E P L y: W I D T h ? < r t yp e > w h e r e
< r t yp e > i s “ A T C ” o r “ M O D E S ” .
Reply:
<F1width>,<F2width> for ATCRBS
o r < P 1 w i d t h > f o r M o d e S ; a l l i n µ s.
E xa m p l e : R E P L y: W I D T h ? ” M O D E S ”
0.5
( R e m o t e O n l y)
S w i t ch e s cu r r e n t R C I p o r t t o
S 1 4 0 3 C co m m a n d i n t e r p r e t e r .
Command: S1403c
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : S 1 4 0 3 c
SCPI
S cr e e n :
Purpose:
( R e m o t e O n l y)
Switches current RCI port to SCPIst yl e co m m a n d i n t e r p r e t e r .
Command: SCPI
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : S C P I
SQTR:ADDRess?
S cr e e n :
C50
P u r p o se :
R e p o r t s t h e t r a n sp o n d e r a d d r e ss.
C o m m a n d : S Q T R : A D D R e ss?
Reply:
<addr> where <addr> is the
t r a n sp o n d e r sq u i t t e r a d d r e ss.
Example: SQTR:ADDRess?
#HA55A6A
1- 2- 4
Page 28
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SQTR:CAPTure[:STATe]
S cr e e n :
(Remote Only)
Purpose:
Enables/disables squitter
capturing.
Command: SQTR:CAPTure[:STATe] <on/off>
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : S Q T R : C A P T u r e 1
SQTR:CAPTure:STATe ON
SQTR:CAPTure[:STATe]?
S cr e e n :
(Remote Only)
Purpose:
R e t u r n s s q u i t t e r c a p t u r i n g st a t u s.
Command: SQTR:CAPTure[:STATe]?
Reply:
<on/off> (1 or 0)
Example: SQTR:CAPTure?
SQTR:CAPTure:STATe?
ON
SQTR:CAPTure:CLEar
S cr e e n :
(Remote Only)
Purpose:
Clears all buffer entries.
Command: SQTR:CAPTure:CLEar
Reply:
None
Example: SQTR:CAPTure:CLEar
SQTR:CAPTure:CONDition?
Screen:
C50, C60
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s t h e sq u i t t e r ca p t u r e b u f f e r
status.
Command: SQTR:CAPTure:CONDition?
Reply:
<data/empty> (1 or 0)
E xa m p l e : S Q T R : C A P T u r e : C O N D i t i o n ?
1
SQTR:CAPTure:COUNt?
Screen:
(Remote Only) Indication in
C50,C60.
Purpose:
Returns number of entries held in
c a p t u r e b u f f e r a n d t o t a l b u f f e r si ze .
Command: SQTR:CAPTure:COUNt?
Reply:
< co u n t > , < s i z e > w h e r e < c o u n t > i s
the number of entries currently in
the buffer and <size> is the
maximum number of buffer entries
the capture buffer can hold.
Example: SQTR:CAPTure:COUNt?
3,256
SQTR:CAPTure:FILTer
S cr e e n :
( R e m o t e O n l y)
P u r p o se :
S e t s t h e sq u i t t e r ca p t u r e b u f f e r
f i l t e r f o r ca p t u r i n g sp e ci f i c sq u i t t e r
t yp e s.
Command: SQTR:CAPTure:FILTer <filter>
w h e r e < f i l t e r > i s a n O R m a sk o f
f o l l o w i n g v a l u e s i n s e t n u m e r i ca l
format:
1 = ATCRBS FRUIT,
2 = Non-DF11/17/MODE S FRUIT,
4 = DF11 squitter,
8 = D F 1 7 I sq u i t t e r ,
1 6 = D F 1 7 S sq u i t t e r ,
3 2 = D F 1 7 A sq u i t t e r ,
6 4 = D F 1 7 T / D F 1 7 V sq u i t t e r ,
1 2 8 = D F 1 7 E / D F 1 7 P sq u i t t e r ,
256 = DF17O squitter.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : S Q T R : C A P T u r e : F I L T e r # H 1 C
( D F 1 7 S , D F 1 7 I a n d D F 1 1 sq u i t t e r s)
SQTR:CAPTure:FILTer?
S cr e e n :
( R e m o t e O n l y)
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s t h e sq u i t t e r ca p t u r e b u f f e r
f i l t e r se t t i n g .
Command: SQTR:CAPTure:FILTer?
Reply:
<filter> where <filter> is the OR
mask setting with the following
values:
1 = ATCRBS FRUIT,
2 = Non-DF11/17/MODE S FRUIT,
4 = DF11 squitter,
8 = D F 1 7 I sq u i t t e r ,
1 6 = D F 1 7 S sq u i t t e r ,
3 2 = D F 1 7 A sq u i t t e r ,
6 4 = D F 1 7 T / D F 1 7 V sq u i t t e r ,
1 2 8 = D F 1 7 E / D F 1 7 P sq u i t t e r ,
256 = DF17O squitter.
E xa m p l e : S Q T R : C A P T u r e : F I L T e r ?
1 9 2 ( D F 1 7 P a n d D F 1 7 T sq u i t t e r s)
1- 2- 4
Page 29
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SQTR:CAPTure:GET?
S cr e e n :
(Remote Only)
Purpose:
Returns an entry from the capture
buffer.
Command: SQTR:CAPTure:GET? [<format>]
where <format> is “A” (all bits) or
“N” (data with downlink format and
address fields broken out). “N” is
the default <format>.
Reply:
<time>,<ant>,<format>,<data>
where <time> is time since
previous squitter in seconds, <ant>
i s r e ce i v i n g a n t e n n a ( 0 o r 1 ) ,
<format> is A or N and <data> is
a cco r d i n g t o < f o r m a t > a s f o l l o w s:
A: 56 or 112 bits in numerical
format set by INT:SMEN:FORM
command
N: <df#>,<sbits or lbits>,<addr>
where <df#> is downlink format
number in decimal, <sbits> is 27
bits in numerical format set by
INT:SMEN:FORM command, <lbits>
is 83 bits in numerical format set
by INT:SMEN:FORM command and
<addr> is 24-bit transponder
address in numerical format set by
INT:SMEN:FORM command.
E xa m p l e : S Q T R : C A P T u r e : G E T ? “ N ”
0.2,0,N,17,#H000000000000000000000,#HFFFFF3
SQTR:CAPTure:MODE
S cr e e n :
(Remote Only)
Purpose:
Sets buffer operation mode.
Command: SQTR:CAPTure:MODE <mode>
where <mode> is CONTinuous
( ke e p s f i l l i n g r e p l a c i n g o l d e s t b i t s )
or SINGleshot (stops when full).
Reply:
None
Example: SQTR:CAPTure:MODE SING
SQTR:CAPTure:MODE?
S cr e e n :
(Remote Only)
Purpose:
Returns buffer operation mode.
Command: SQTR:CAPTure:MODE? <mode>
where <mode> is CONTinuous
( ke e p s f i l l i n g r e p l a c i n g o l d e s t b i t s )
or SINGleshot (stops when full).
Reply:
<mode> where <mode> is
CONTINUOUS or SINGLESHOT.
E xa m p l e : S Q T R : C A P T u r e : M O D E ?
SINGLESHOT
SQTR:COUNt?
S cr e e n :
C50
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s n u m b e r o f sq u i t t e r s
received during set time period.
C o m m a n d : S Q T R : C O U N t ? [ < t yp e > ] w h e r e
< t yp e > i s " A T C " , “ D F 1 1 ” , “ D F 1 7 ” ,
“DF17A”, "DF17E", “DF17I”,
“DF17O”, “DF17P”, “DF17S”,
“DF17T”, "DF17V" or "MODES".
N o t s p e c i f y i n g < t yp e > r e t u r n s co u n t
f o r e a ch o f t h e sq u i t t e r t yp e s
(DF11, DF17, DF17A, DF17I,
DF17O, DF17P/DF17E, DF17S,
DF17T/DF17V)
Reply:
<count> where <count> is the
n u m b e r o f sq u i t t e r s r e ce i ve d .
E xa m p l e : S Q T R : C O U N t ? “ D F 1 7 A ”
3
SQTR:COUNt?
0,11,3,1,0,1,3,3
SQTR:COUNt:CLEar
S cr e e n :
C 5 0 ( e q u i va l e n t t o p r e ssi n g t h e
C L / E S C K e y i n t h i s scr e e n )
P u r p o se :
I n i t i a l i ze s ( cl e a r s) t h e sq u i t t e r
count measurements.
Command: SQTR:COUNt:CLEar
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : S Q T R : C O U N t : C L E a r
SQTR:COUNt:PERiod
S cr e e n :
C50
P u r p o se :
S e t s t h e t i m e t o co u n t sq u i t t e r s.
Command: SQTR:COUNt:PERiod <t> where
<t> is 10 to 300 in seconds.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : S Q T R : C O U N t : P E R i o d 1 2 0
SQTR:COUNt:PERiod?
S cr e e n :
C50
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s t h e t i m e p e r i o d se t t o
co u n t sq u i t t e r s.
Command: SQTR:COUNt:PERiod?
Reply:
<t> where <t> is 10 to 300 in
seconds.
E xa m p l e : S Q T R : C O U N t : P E R i o d ?
120
1- 2- 4
Page 30
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SQTR:GROUPing:DF17
S cr e e n :
(Remote Only)
P u r p o se s: I n i t i a l i z e s a n d s e t s t h e t y p e
parameters for counting, timing and
c a p t u r i n g D F 1 7 s q u i t t e r s.
Command: SQTR:GROUPing:DF17 <group>
where <group> is ORIGinal
(squitter types according to Table
D-6 [unchanging]) or RTCA
(squitter types according to Table
D-7 [subject to change with later
Main Processor versions to comply
w i t h l a t e s t R T C A g u i d e l i n e s] )
NOTE:
R e c y c l i n g T e s t S e t p o w e r r e se t s t h e
grouping to ORIGinal, the default.
E xa m p l e :
SQTR:GROUP:DF17 RTCA
SQTR:TAIL?
S cr e e n :
C50
Purpose:
Returns the aircraft tail number and
country.
Command: SQTR:TAIL?
Reply:
<tail>,<country> where <tail> is the
tail number and <country> is the
country name.
E xa m p l e : S Q T R : T A I L ?
N44KR,United States
SQTR:TIMe?
S cr e e n :
C60
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s r e q u e st e d sq u i t t e r
information for specified field.
C o m m a n d : S Q T R : T I M e ? < t yp e > [ , < f o r m a t > ]
w h e r e < t yp e > i s “ D F 1 1 ” , “ D F 1 7 A ” ,
"DF17E", “DF17I”, “DF17O”,
“DF17P”, “DF17S”, “DF17T” or
"DF17V" and <format> is “A” (all
b i t s) o r “ N ” ( d a t a w i t h d o w n l i n k
f o r m a t a n d a d d r e s s f i e l d s b r o ke n
out). “N” is the default <format>.
Reply:
< p r e v> , < m i n > , < m a x > , < a n t > ,
< f o r m a t > , < d a t a > w h e r e < p r e v> i s
time since previous squitter in
s e c o n d s , < m i n > i s l o w e st va l u e o f
a l l < p r e v> r e a d i n g s s i n c e p o w e r u p
o r l a st S Q T R : T I M e : C L E a r
c o m m a n d , < m a x > i s h i g h e st va l u e
o f a l l < p r e v> r e a d i n g s s i n ce p o w e r
up or last SQTR:TIMe:CLEar
c o m m a n d , < a n t > i s r e c e i vi n g
antenna (0 or 1), <format> is A or
N and <data> is according to
< f o r m a t > a s f o l l o w s:
A : 5 6 o r 1 1 2 b i t s i n n u m e r i ca l
f o r m a t se t b y I N T : S M E N : F O R M
command.
N : < d f # > < sb i t s o r l b i t s > , < a d d r >
where <df#> is downlink format
n u m b e r i n d e c i m a l , < sb i t s > i s 2 7
b i t s i n n u m e r i ca l f o r m a t se t b y
I N T : S M E N : F O R M co m m a n d , < l b i t s >
i s 8 3 b i t s i n n u m e r i c a l f o r m a t se t
by INT:SMEN:FORM command and
< a d d r > i s 2 4 - b i t t r a n sp o n d e r
a d d r e ss i n n u m e r i ca l f o r m a t se t b y
INT:SMEN:FORM command.
E xa m p l e :
SQTR:TIME? “DF11”,”A”
1.10,0.98,1.20,0,A,#H5C3217863FABF2
SQTR:TIMe:CLEar
S cr e e n :
C 6 0 ( e q u i va l e n t t o p r e ssi n g t h e
C L / E S C K e y i n t h i s scr e e n )
P u r p o se :
I n i t i a l i ze s ( cl e a r s) t h e sq u i t t e r t i m e
measurements.
Command: SQTR:TIMe:CLEar
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : S Q T R : T I M e : C L E a r
1- 2- 4
Page 31
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SQTR:TIMe:TIMeout
S cr e e n :
(Remote Only)
Purpose:
Sets time limit for looking at period
between squitters.
Command: SQTR:TIMe:TIMeout <type>,<time>
where <type> is "ATC", “DF11”,
“DF17A”, "DF17E", “DF17I”,
“DF17O”, “DF17P”, “DF17S”,
“DF17T”, "DF17V" or "MODES" and
<time> is 1.000 to 65.535 in
se co n d s .
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : S Q T R : T I M e : T I M e " D F 1 1 " , 1 . 5
SQTR:TIMe:TIMeout:DEFault
S cr e e n :
(Remote Only)
Purpose:
Sets time limits for looking at
periods between squitters to
default values. (Time limits for
ATCRBS fruit, DF17E, DF17O,
DF17P and Mode S fruit default to
65.535 seconds. Time limits for
DF17A, DF17T and DF17V default
to 1.5 seconds. The time limits for
DF11, DF17I and DF17S default to
3, 30 and 15 seconds, respectively.
Command: SQTR:TIMe:TIMeout:DEFault
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : S Q T R : T I M e : T I M e : D E F a u l t
SYSTem:COMMunicate:ATC1400a:CONTrol
S cr e e n :
C84
Purpose:
Specifies S-1403DL control
relationship with ATC-1400A.
Command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:ATC1400a:
C O N T r o l < c> w h e r e < c > i s
“MASTer” (S-1403DL controls ATC1400A), “SLAVe” (S-1403DL only
l i st e n s t o A T C - 1 4 0 0 A ) o r “ A L O N e ”
(S-1403DL Stand Alone mode).
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e :
SYST:COMM:ATC1400:CONT “MAST”
SYSTem:COMMunicate:ATC1400a:CONTrol?
S cr e e n :
C84
Purpose:
Returns the S-1403DL control
relationship ATC-1400A control
setting.
Command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:ATC1400a:
CONTrol?
Reply:
<type> where <type> is MAST,
SLAV or ALON.
E xa m p l e :
SYST:COMM:ATC1400:CONT?
MAST
SYSTem:COMMunicate:ATC1400a:S1403c:
ADDRess
S cr e e n :
C84
P u r p o se :
S e t s t h e I F R B u s a d d r e ss f o r S 1403DL remote commands.
C o m m a n d : S Y S T e m : C O M M u n i ca t e : A T C 1 4 0 0 a :
S 1 4 0 3 c: A D D R e ss < a > w h e r e < a > i s
2 to 7.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e :
SYST:COMM:ATC1400:S1403:ADDR 3
SYSTem:COMMunicate:ATC1400a:S1403c:
ADDRess?
S cr e e n :
C84
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s t h e se t I F R B u s a d d r e ss
f o r S - 1 4 0 3 D L r e m o t e co m m a n d s.
C o m m a n d : S Y S T e m : C O M M u n i ca t e : A T C 1 4 0 0 a :
S 1 4 0 3 c: A D D R e ss?
Reply:
<a> where <a> is 2 to 7.
E xa m p l e :
SYST:COMM:ATC1400:S1403:ADDR?
3
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess
S cr e e n :
C83
P u r p o se :
S e t s S - 1 4 0 3 D L G P I B a d d r e ss.
C o m m a n d : S Y S T e m : C O M M u n i ca t e : G P I B :
ADDRess <a> where <a> is 0 to 31.
Reply:
None
Example: SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDRess 15
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess?
S cr e e n :
C83
P u r p o se :
Returns the S-1403DL GPIB
address setting.
C o m m a n d : S Y S T e m : C O M M u n i ca t e : G P I B :
ADDRess?
Reply:
<a> where <a> is 0 to 31.
Example: SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDRess?
15
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RCI
S cr e e n :
C83
Purpose:
Enables/disables remote control
t h r o u g h S - 1 4 0 3 D L G P I B C o n n e ct o r .
C o m m a n d : S Y S T e m : C O M M u n i ca t e : G P I B : R C I
<on/off>
Reply:
None
Example: SYST:COMM:GPIB:RCI ON
1- 2- 4
Page 32
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RCI?
S cr e e n :
C83
Purpose:
Returns the S-1403DL GPIB remote
control status.
C o m m a n d : S Y S T e m : C O M M u n i ca t e : G P I B : R C I ?
Reply:
<on/off> (1 or 0)
E xa m p l e : S Y S T e m : C O M M u n i c a t e : G P I B : R C I ?
1
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:BAUD
S cr e e n :
C82
Purpose:
Sets RS-232 baud rate.
Command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
BAUD <rate> where <rate> is 110,
150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200, 38400 or 57600 in
bits per second.
Reply:
None
Example: SYST:COMM:SER:BAUD 9600
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:BAUD?
S cr e e n :
C82
Purpose:
Returns the RS-232 baud rate
setting.
Command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
BAUD?
Reply:
<rate> where <rate> is 110, 150,
300,600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400 or 57600 in bits per
second.
E xa m p l e : S Y S T : C O M M : S E R : B A U D ?
9600
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:BITS
S cr e e n :
C82
Purpose:
Sets RS-232 bits per word.
Command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
BITS <b> where <b> is 7 or 8.
Reply:
None
Example: SYST:COMM:SER:BITS 8
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:BITS?
S cr e e n :
C82
Purpose:
Returns the RS-232 bits per word
setting.
Command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
BITS?
Reply:
<b> where <b> is 7 or 8.
Example: SYST:COMM:SER:BITS?
8
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:RTS
S cr e e n :
C82
Purpose:
S e t s R S - 2 3 2 h a r d w a r e h a n d sh a ki n g
(pacing) mode.
C o m m a n d : S Y S T e m : C O M M u n i ca t e : S E R i a l :
CONTrol:RTS <hndshk> where
<hndshk> is ON, STANdard or
RFR.
Reply:
None
Example: SYST:COMM:SER:CONT:RTS STAN
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:RTS?
S cr e e n :
C82
P u r p o se :
Returns the RS-232 hardware
h a n d s h a k i n g ( p a c i n g ) m o d e se t t i n g .
C o m m a n d : S Y S T e m : C O M M u n i ca t e : S E R i a l :
CONTrol:RTS?
Reply:
<hndshk> where <hndshk> is ON,
STANdard or RFR.
Example: SYST:COMM:SER:CONT:RTS?
STAN
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:DUMP
S cr e e n :
C81
P u r p o se :
S e t s scr e e n d u m p p a r a m e t e r s.
C o m m a n d : S Y S T e m : C O M M u n i ca t e : S E R i a l :
DUMP <on/off> [,<bdr>,<eol>]
w h e r e < o n / o f f > e n a b l e s / d i sa b l e s
P R T S C R K e y t o p e r f o r m scr e e n
dump (1 or 0), <bdr> is the border
st yl e ( 8 [ 8 - b i t ] , 7 [ 7 - b i t ] o r 0
[none]) and<eol> is the end of line
ch a r a ct e r s ( “ C R L F ” , “ L F ” , “ C R ” o r
“NUL”). Default <bdr> and <eol>
a r e cu r r e n t se t t i n g s.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e :
SYST:COMM:SER:DUMP ON,8,”CRLF”
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:DUMP?
S cr e e n :
C81
Purpose:
Returns the screen dump
p a r a m e t e r se t t i n g s.
C o m m a n d : S Y S T e m : C O M M u n i ca t e : S E R i a l :
DUMP?
Reply:
<on/off>,<bdr>,<eol> where
<on/off> is 1 or 0, <bdr> is 8, 7 or
0 and <eol> is CRLF, LF, CR or
NUL.
Example: SYST:COMM:SER:DUMP?
1,7,CR
1- 2- 4
Page 33
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:ECHO
S cr e e n :
C81
Purpose:
Enables/disables RS-232 remote
co m m a n d s t o e c h o b a c k t o t h e
controller.
Command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
ECHO <on/off> (1 or 0).
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : S Y S T : C O M M : S E R : E C H O O N
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:ECHO?
S cr e e n :
C81
Purpose:
Returns the RS-232 echo setting.
Command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
ECHO?
Reply:
<on/off> where <on/off> is 1 or 0.
E xa m p l e : S Y S T : C O M M : S E R : E C H O ?
1
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:PACE
S cr e e n :
C82
Purpose:
S e t s R S - 2 3 2 s o f t w a r e h a n d s h a ki n g
(pacing) mode.
Command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
P A C E < h n d sh k > w h e r e < h n d sh k > i s
NONE or XON (XON/XOFF).
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : S Y S T : C O M M : S E R : P A C E X O N
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:PACE?
S cr e e n :
C82
Purpose:
Returns the RS-232 software
handshaking (pacing) mode setting.
Command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
PACE?
Reply:
< h n d sh k > w h e r e < h n d sh k > i s N O N E
or XON.
E xa m p l e : S Y S T : C O M M : S E R : P A C E ?
XON
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:PARity
S cr e e n :
C82
Purpose:
Sets RS-232 parity check mode.
Command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:
PARity <p> where <p> is NONE,
ODD or EVEN.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : S Y S T : C O M M : S E R : P A R N O N E
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:PARity?
S cr e e n :
C82
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s t h e R S - 2 3 2 p a r i t y ch e ck
mode setting.
C o m m a n d : S Y S T e m : C O M M u n i ca t e : S E R i a l :
PARity?
Reply:
<p> where <p> is NONE, ODD or
EVEN.
E xa m p l e : S Y S T : C O M M : S E R : P A R ?
NONE
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:RCI
S cr e e n :
C81
Purpose:
Enables/disables remote control
through S-1403DL RS-232
C o n n e ct o r .
C o m m a n d : S Y S T e m : C O M M u n i ca t e : S E R i a l : R C I
<on/off>
Reply:
None
Example: SYST:COMM:SER:RCI ON
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:RCI?
S cr e e n :
C81
P u r p o se :
Returns S-1403DL RS-232 remote
control status.
C o m m a n d : S Y S T e m : C O M M u n i ca t e : S E R i a l :
RCI?
Reply:
<on/off> (1 or 0)
E xa m p l e : S Y S T : C O M M : S E R i a l : R C I ?
1
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:SBITs
S cr e e n :
C82
P u r p o se :
S e t s R S - 2 3 2 st o p b i t s p e r w o r d .
C o m m a n d : S Y S T e m : C O M M u n i ca t e : S E R i a l :
SBITs <b> where <b> is 1 or 2.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : S Y S T : C O M M : S E R : S B I T 1
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:SBITs?
S cr e e n :
C82
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s t h e R S - 2 3 2 st o p b i t s p e r
w o r d se t t i n g .
C o m m a n d : S Y S T e m : C O M M u n i ca t e : S E R i a l :
S B I T s?
Reply:
<b> where <b> is 1 or 2.
E xa m p l e : S Y S T : C O M M : S E R : S B I T ?
1
SYSTem:DATE
S cr e e n :
C86
P u r p o se :
S e t s t h e cu r r e n t d a t e .
C o m m a n d : S Y S T e m : D A T E < y> , < m > , < d > w h e r e
< y> i s 0 0 0 0 t o 9 9 9 9 ( ye a r ) , < m > i s
1 to 12 (month) and <d> is 1 to 31
( d a y) .
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : S Y S T e m : D A T E 1 9 9 7 , 4 , 1 4
1- 2- 4
Page 34
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SYSTem:DATE?
S cr e e n :
C86
Purpose:
Returns the current date.
Command: SYSTem:DATE?
Reply:
<y>,<m>,<d> where <y> is 0000 to
9999 (year), <m> is 1 to 12 (month)
and <d> is 1 to 31 (day).
Example: SYSTem:DATE?
1997,4,14
SYSTem:TIME?
S cr e e n :
C86
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s t h e cu r r e n t t i m e .
Command: SYSTem:TIME?
Reply:
<h>,<m>,<s> where <h> is 0 to 23
(hour), <m> is 0 to 59 (minute) and
< s> i s 0 t o 5 9 ( se co n d ) .
E xa m p l e : S Y S T e m : T I M E ?
8,28,32
SYSTem:KEY:REPeat
S cr e e n :
C85
Purpose:
S e t s S - 1 4 0 3 D L K e y b o a r d co n t r o l
parameters.
Command: SYSTem:KEY:REPeat <delay>,
<rate> where <delay> is 0.1 to 2.0
i n s e c ( 0 . 1 s e c i n c r e m e n t s) ( t i m e t o
hold down a key before operation
repeats) and <rate> is 0.1 to 2.0 in
sec (0.1 sec increments) (time
period for each repeat operation
a f t e r i n i t i a l d e l a y) .
Reply:
None
Example: SYSTem:KEY:REPeat 0.8,0.2
TEST:ELM:DOWN?
S cr e e n :
T34, T35
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s t h e D E L M t e st st a t u s.
Command: TEST:ELM:DOWN? [<m>] where
< m > i s “ M U L T i si t e ” t o se l e ct
multisite test status.
Reply:
<error#>,<error> where <error#> is
t h e n u m e r i c e r r o r r e su l t o f t h e
D E L M t e s t a n d < e r r o r > i s t h e t e xt
e r r o r r e su l t o f t h e D E L M t e st .
Refer to Table 10 in 1-2-2.
E xa m p l e : T E S T : E L M : D O W N ?
2,PASS
SYSTem:KEY:REPeat?
S cr e e n :
C85
Purpose:
R e t u r n s t h e S - 1 4 0 3 D L K e yb o a r d
c o n t r o l p a r a m e t e r s e t t i n g s.
Command: SYSTem:KEY:REPeat?
Reply:
<delay>,<rate> where <delay> is
0.1 to 2.0 in seconds (time to hold
down a key before operation
repeats) and <rate> is 0.1 to 2.0 in
seconds (time period for each
repeat operation after initial delay).
Example: SYSTem:KEY:REPeat?
1.1,0.5
SYSTem:LANGuage S1403C
S cr e e n :
(Remote Only)
P u r p o se :
Switches current RCI port to
S1403C command interpreter.
Command: SYSTem:LANGuage S1403C
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : S Y S T e m : L A N G u a g e S 1 4 0 3 C
SYSTem:TIME
S cr e e n :
C86
P u r p o se :
Sets the current time.
Command: SYSTem:TIME <h>,<m>,<s> where
<h> is 0 to 23 (hour), <m> is 0 to
59 (minute) and <s> is 0 to 59
(second).
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : S Y S T e m : T I M E 8 , 2 8 , 3 2
TEST:ELM:DOWN:ELM:RECeived?
S cr e e n :
T34, T35
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s t h e n u m b e r o f e xp e ct e d
and actual ELMs.
C o m m a n d : T E S T : E L M : D O W N : E L M : R E C e i ve d ?
Reply:
< e x p e c t > , < a c t u a l > w h e r e < e xp e ct >
is the number of expected ELMs
and <actual> is the number of
ELMs actually received.
E xa m p l e : T E S T : E L M : D O W N : E L M : R E C e i ve d ?
16,14
TEST:ELM:DOWN:SMENu
S cr e e n :
T34, T35
Purpose:
Specifies the sequence menus for
the downlink ELM reply data,
Reservation and Closeout.
Command: TEST:ELM:DOWN:SMENu
< r sm e n u # > [ , < c s m e n u # > [ ,
<esmenu#>]] where <rsmenu#> is 0
to 999, <csmenu#> is 0 to 999
and<esmenu#> is 0 to 984.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e :
TEST:ELM:DOWN:SMENu 950,951,967
1- 2- 4
Page 35
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
TEST:ELM:DOWN:SMENu?
S cr e e n :
T34, T35
Purpose:
Returns the numbers of the
se q u e n c e m e n u s s e l e c t e d f o r t h e
downlink ELM reply data,
Reservation and Closeout.
Command: TEST:ELM:DOWN:SMENu?
Reply:
< r s m e n u # > , < csm e n u # > , < e sm e n u # >
where <rsmenu#> is 0 to 999,
<csmenu#> is 0 to 999
a n d < e sm e n u # > i s 0 t o 9 8 4 .
Example: TEST:ELM:DOWN:SMENu?
950,951,967
TEST:ELM:DOWN:STARt
Screen:
T34, T35 (equivalent to pressing
the BURST Key in this screen)
Purpose:
E x e r ci s e s t h e d o w n l i n k E L M
datalink feature of the transponder.
Command: TEST:ELM:DOWN:STARt [<m>]
w h e r e < m > i s “ M U L T i s i t e ” t o s e l e ct
multisite operation testing.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : T E S T : E L M : D O W N : S T A R
TEST:ELM:DOWN:STAR “MULT”
TEST:ELM:SETup:CLOseout:DELay
S cr e e n :
T31
Purpose:
Sets the delay from the end of the
last ELM reply to the start of the
first Closeout interrogation.
Command: TEST:ELM:SETup:CLOseout:DELay
<time> where <time> is 100 to
63000 in µs.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : T E S T : E L M : S E T u p : C L O s e o u t : D E L a y
1000
TEST:ELM:SETup:CLOseout:DELay?
S cr e e n :
T31
Purpose:
Returns the set delay from the end
of the last ELM reply to the start of
the first Closeout interrogation.
Command: TEST:ELM:SETup:CLOseout:
D E L a y?
Reply:
<time> where <time> is 100 to
63000 in µs.
E xa m p l e :
TEST:ELM:SETup:CLOseout:DELay?
1000
TEST:ELM:SETup:REServation:DELay
S cr e e n :
T31
P u r p o se :
Sets the delay from the end of the
r e se r va t i o n r e p l y t o t h e st a r t o f t h e
f i r st E L M i n t e r r o g a t i o n .
C o m m a n d : T E S T : E L M : S E T u p : R E S e r va t i o n :
DELay <time> where <time> is 100
t o 6 3 0 0 0 i n µ s.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e :
T E S T : E L M : S E T u p : R E S e r va t i o n : D E L a y 1 0 0 0
TEST:ELM:SETup:REServation:DELay?
S cr e e n :
T31
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s t h e se t d e l a y f r o m t h e e n d
o f t h e r e se r va t i o n r e p l y t o t h e st a r t
o f t h e f i r st E L M i n t e r r o g a t i o n .
C o m m a n d : T E S T : E L M : S E T u p : R E S e r va t i o n :
DELay?
Reply:
<time> where <time> is 100 to
6 3 0 0 0 i n µ s.
E xa m p l e :
T E S T : E L M : S E T u p : R E S e r va t i o n : D E L a y?
1000
TEST:ELM:SETup:UELM:SPACing
S cr e e n :
T31
P u r p o se :
S e t s t h e sp a ci n g b e t w e e n t h e st a r t
of UELMs.
Command: TEST:ELM:SETup:UELM:SPACing
<time> where <time> is 50 to
6 3 0 0 0 i n µ s.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : T E S T : E L M : S E T u p : U E L M : S P A C i n g
65
TEST:ELM:SETup:UELM:SPACing?
S cr e e n :
T31
Purpose:
Returns the set spacing between
t h e st a r t o f U E L M s.
Command: TEST:ELM:SETup:UELM:SPACing?
Reply:
<time> where <time> is 50 to
6 3 0 0 0 µ s.
E xa m p l e : T E S T : E L M : S E T u p : U E L M : S P A C i n g ?
65
1- 2- 4
Page 36
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
TEST:ELM:UP?
Screen:
T32, T33
Purpose:
R e t u r n s t h e U E L M t e s t st a t u s.
Command: TEST:ELM:UP? [<m>] where <m> is
“ M U L T i s i t e ” t o s e l e c t m u l t i si t e t e st
status.
Reply:
<error#>,<error> where <error#> is
the numeric error result of the
UELM test and <error> is the text
e r r o r r e s u l t o f t h e U E L M t e st .
Refer to Table 9 in 1-2-2.
Example: TEST:ELM:UP?
2,PASS
Example: TEST:ELM:UP?
1 0 , R e svN o R p l y
TEST:ELM:UP:SMENu
Screen:
T32, T33
Purpose:
Specifies the sequence menus for
t h e u p l i n k E L M d a t a , R e se r v a t i o n
and Closeout.
Command: TEST:ELM:UP:SMENu
< r s m e n u # > [ , < csm e n u # > [ ,
< e sm e n u # > [ , < e l m # > ] ] ] w h e r e
<rsmenu#> is 0 to 999, <csmenu#>
i s 0 t o 9 9 9 , < e sm e n u # > i s 0 t o 9 8 4
and <elm#> is 2 to 16 (number of
ELM segments to transmit).
Reply:
None
Example:
TEST:ELM:UP:SMENu 800,851,700,2
TEST:ELM:UP:SMENu?
Screen:
T32, T33
Purpose:
Returns the numbers of the
sequence menus selected for the
uplink ELM data, Reservation and
Closeout.
Command: TEST:ELM:UP:SMENu?
Reply:
< r s m e n u # > , < csm e n u # > ,
< e sm e n u # > , < e l m # > w h e r e
<rsmenu#> is 0 to 999, <csmenu#>
i s 0 t o 9 9 9 , < e sm e n u # > i s 0 t o 9 8 4
and <elm#> is 2 to 16.
E xa m p l e : T E S T : E L M : U P : S M E N u ?
800,851,700,2
TEST:ELM:UP:STARt
Screen:
T 3 2 , T 3 3 ( e q u i v a l e n t t o p r e ssi n g
t h e B U R S T K e y i n t h i s s cr e e n )
Purpose:
Exercises the uplink ELM datalink
feature of the transponder.
Command: TEST:ELM:UP:STARt [<m>] where
< m > i s “ M U L T i s i t e ” t o s e l e ct
multisite operation testing.
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : T E S T : E L M : U P : S T A R t
T E S T : E L M : U P : S T A R t “ M U L T i si t e ”
TEST:MTL?
S cr e e n :
T23
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s t h e cu r r e n t st a t u s o f t h e
MTL measurement.
Command: TEST:MTL?
Reply:
<Error#>,<Error> where <Error#> is
t h e n u m e r i c e r r o r r e su l t o f t h e M T L
t e s t a n d < e r r o r > i s t h e t e xt e r r o r
r e su l t o f t h e M T L t e st . R e f e r t o
Table 8 in 1-2-2.
E xa m p l e : T E S T : M T L ?
1,NOTRUN
TEST:MTL:ANTenna
S cr e e n :
T23
Purpose:
Specifies the antenna for the MTL
t e st .
Command: TEST:MTL:ANTenna <ant> where
<ant> is ANTA or ANTB (0 or 1)
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : T E S T : M T L : A N T e n n a A N T A
TEST:MTL:ANTenna 1
TEST:MTL:ANTenna?
S cr e e n :
T23
P u r p o se :
R e t u r n s t h e a n t e n n a se l e ct e d f o r
t h e M T L t e st .
Command: TEST:MTL:ANTenna?
Reply:
<ant> where <ant> is 0 (ANTA) or 1
(ANTB).
E xa m p l e : T E S T : M T L : A N T e n n a ?
0
TEST:MTL:LEVel?
S cr e e n :
T23
P u r p o se :
Returns the minimum triggering
l e ve l ( M T L ) o f t h e t e st e d
t r a n sp o n d e r .
Command: TEST:MTL:LEVel?
Reply:
< va l u e > < u n i t s > w h e r e < va l u e > i s
MTL value and <units> are
m e a su r e m e n t u n i t s ( cu r r e n t l y o n l y
dBm).
E xa m p l e : T E S T : M T L : L E V e l ?
78 dBm
TEST:MTL:STARt
S cr e e n :
T 2 3 ( e q u i va l e n t t o p r e ssi n g t h e
B U R S T K e y i n t h i s scr e e n )
Purpose:
F i n d s m i n i m u m t r i g g e r i n g l e ve l
( M T L ) o f t h e t r a n sp o n d e r .
Command: TEST:MTL:STARt
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : T E S T : M T L : S T A R t
1- 2- 4
Page 37
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
4.6.2
TEST:MTL:TIMe?
S cr e e n :
T23
Purpose:
R e t u r n s l e n g t h o f t i m e t h e M T L t e st
ran or has been running.
Command: TEST:MTL:TIMe?
Reply:
<value> where <value> is test run
time in seconds.
E xa m p l e : T E S T : M T L : T I M e ?
52
TEST:RUNning?
S cr e e n :
(Remote Only)
Purpose:
Returns current running status of a
Test Menu test.
Command: TEST:RUNning?
Reply:
< st a t u s> w h e r e < s t a t u s > i s 1 ( t e st
running) or 0 (test not running).
E xa m p l e : T E S T : R U N n i n g ?
1
O ld- St yle Commands
O ld- style command lines have a maximum
length of 68 char acter s including the length
of the AXn= pr efix, if used, and line
ter minator char acter s, if used.
Loading data into entr y fields is optional if
change is not desir ed.
Each field
pr eceding the field to be changed is
skipped by sending only the field delimiter :
e.g.
“ AX3=P4=;;+1.0" only updates P 4
pulse deviation without changing the
pr eceding level or width contr ol fields.
Replies to old- style quer ies contain the AX
number pr efix, 3: to set apar t S- 1403DL
infor mation
str ings
fr om
ATC- 1400A
infor mation str ings.
TEST:STOP
S cr e e n :
(Remote Only)
Purpose:
Stops any running test.
Command: TEST:STOP
Reply:
None
E xa m p l e : T E S T : S T O P
COMMAND
RANGE/VALUES
DEFINITION
VER?
mm.mm;ff.ff (01.00 to 99.99)
Returns Main (mm.mm) and
Front Panel (ff.ff) CPU software
version numbers.
NEWPB?
y (yes) or n (no)
Returns old Pulse PC Board
status.
MLDECL?
y (yes) or n (no)
Finds whether the MLD option is
installed or not.
SCPI
Switches to new SCPI command
interpreter (new for S-1403DL).
S1403C
Switches to old-style command
interpreter (new for S-1403DL).
ATC.
Enables ATC function.
SEQ.
Enables SEQ function.
ACS.
Enables ACS function.
ACL.
Enable ACL function.
INTLCE=<n>
1 to 999
Enables INTLCE function and
sets Mode S to ATCRBS ratio.
DI=<itype>;<itype>
ATC/ACS/ACL/SEQ;
ATC/ACS/ACL/SEQ
Enables DI function and sets
type of interrogations.
BURST=<itype>;<BN>
ATC/ACS/ACL/SEQ;
1 to 9999
Enables BURST function (type
and number of interrogations).
BURST.
No range or value
Activate BURST function.
S- 1403DL O ld- Style Command List
Table 13
1- 2- 4
Page 38
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
COMMAND
RANGE/VALUES
DEFINITION
MODE?
ATC/SEQ/ACS/ACL/
INTLCE;<n>/DI;<itype>;<itype>/
BURST;<itype>;<BN>
Returns current test function
settings.
RFLV=<n>
-3.0 to 3.0
Sets ANT A RF vernier level
(dB).
RFLV?
-3.0 to 3.0
Returns ANT A RF vernier level
(dB).
P4=<level>;<width>;<dev>
CAL/VAR/OFF;CAL/0.20 to 3.55;
CAL/-1.95 to 1.95
Sets P 4 (ACS/ACL) pulse level
control, width and position.
P4?
CAL/VAR/OFF; CAL/0.20 to
3.20; CAL/-1.95 to 1.95
Returns status of P 4 pulse.
P6=<level>;<width>;<dev>
CAL/OFF; CAL/-1.50 to 1.50;
CAL/-1.95 to 1.95
Activates and sets P 6 (SEQ)
pulse level, width and position.
P6?
CAL/OFF; CAL/-1.50 to 1.50;
CAL/-1.95 to 1.95
Returns status of P 6 pulse.
P2=<level>
CAL/VAR/OFF
Sets P 2 level control
P2?
CAL/VAR/OFF
Returns P 2 level control status.
P3=<level>
CAL/VAR/OFF
Sets P 3 level control.
P3?
CAL/VAR/OFF
Returns P 3 level control status.
SPR=<switch>;<dev>
ON/OFF; CAL/-1.00 to 1.00
Activates and sets SPR position.
SPR?
ON/OFF; CAL/-1.00 to 1.00
Returns SPR status.
RPDLY?
000.000 to 399.000
Returns UUT reply delay (µs).
SQTR?
0.00 to 9.99
Returns UUT squitter period
(seconds).
SQTR<type>?
DF11/DF17A/DF17I/DF17O/
DF17P/DF17S/DF17T
Returns selected squitter period
in seconds.
PRPLY?
0 to 100, 0 to 100; 0 to 100
Returns UUT % reply for ANT A
ATC, ANT A Mode S and ANT B.
APER?
0 to 100
Returns UUT ANT A ATCRBS %
reply.
SPER?
0 to 100
Returns UUT ANT A Mode S %
reply.
BPER?
0 to 100
Returns UUT ANT B % reply.
ANTB=<off/n>
OFF/-0.95 to 0.95
Activates ANT B (µs from ANT A
P 1 ).
ANTB?
OFF/-0.95 to 0.95
Returns ANT B status.
SQADD?
00000000 to 77777777
Returns squitter address.
PPULSE=<off/n>
0 to 260/OFF
Activates prepulse (µs prior to
P 1 ).
PPULSE?
0 to 260/OFF
Returns prepulse status.
EXSYN=<switch>;<n>;<switch>
ON/OFF;-9.95 to 9.95;ON/OFF
Activates Ext Sync output and
sets Ext Sync output position
(µs from P 1 ) or activates Ext
Sync Input.
EXSYN?
ON/OFF; -9.95 to 9.95 ON/OFF
Returns Ext Sync output and
input status.
S- 1403DL O ld- Style Command List
Table 13 ( Cont)
1- 2- 4
Page 39
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
RANGE/VALUES
DEFINITION
PPMG=<off/n>
COMMAND
OFF/1 to 16 (ATCRBS) or OFF/1
to 116 (Mode S)
Sets PPMG control for any reply
pulse.
PPMG?
OFF/1 to 16 (ATCRBS) or OFF/1
to 116 (Mode S)
Returns PPMG control status.
EXMOD=<switch>
ON/OFF
Sets ANT A for Ext Mod input
only.
EXMOD?
ON/OFF
Returns Ext Mod input only
status.
BRF=<course>
20 to 83
Sets ANT B output (-dBm).
BRF?
20 to 83
Returns ANT B output (-dBm).
BRFLV=<fine>
-3.0 to 3.0
Sets ANT B RF vernier level
(dB).
BRFLV?
-3.0 to 3.0
Returns ANT B RF vernier level
(dB).
SQ<nn>=<format>;<uf#>;
<data>;<addr>
<nn>=00 to 999; F/S/L; 00 to 31; Programs selected Sequence
Menu.
0 to 777777777 (short)/0 to
37777777777777777777777
77777(long); 0 to 77777777
SQ<nn>?
<nn>=00 to 999; F/S/L; 00 to 31; Returns selected Sequence
0 to 777777777 (short)/0 to
Menu status.
37777777777777777777777
77777 (long); 0 to 77777777
DFSQ<nn>?
<nn>=00 to 999; F/S/L; 00 to 31; Returns downlink format data for
selected Sequence Menu.
0 to 777777777 (short)/ 0 to
37777777777777777777777
77777 (long); 0 to 77777777
DFSQT<nn>?
<nn>=00 to 999; F/S/L
Returns downlink format type for
selected Sequence Menu.
DFSQF<nn>?
<nn>=00 to 999; 00 to 31
Returns downlink format number
for Sequence Menu.
DFSQD<nn>?
<nn>=00 to 999; 0 to 777777777
(short)/ 0 to 3777777777777
777777777777777 (long)
Returns downlink format data for
selected Sequence Menu.
DFSQA<nn>?
<nn>=00 to 999; 0 to 77777777
Returns downlink format address
for selected Sequence Menu.
SAVE<n>
1 or 2
Store current S-1403DL settings.
RECALL<n>
1 or 2
Recall S-1403DL stored
settings.
SEQN=<nn>
00 to 999 (decimal)
Activate MENU Display with
selected Sequence Menu.
CMENU<n>.
1 or 2
Activate MENU Display with C10
or C20 Control Menu.
ERRM?
DI/INTF or INPUT or NONE or
RECALL
Returns error status.
MTL=<itype>
ATC/SEQ/ACS/ACL
Start MTL test.
STATMTL?
BUSY/DONE/ERR1 to ERR5
MTL?
Returns MTL test status.
Returns UUT MTL (-dBm).
S- 1403DL O ld- Style Command List
T able 13 ( Cont)
1- 2- 4
Page 40
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
Old-St yle Command Details
ACL.
Enables ACL Test Function (ATCRBS/Mode S
All-Call interrogations [long P4]).
ACS.
Enables ACS Test Function (ATCRBS Only AllCall interrogations [short P4]).
ANTB=<off/n>
C o n t r o l s A N T B i n t e r r o g a t i o n s i g n a l p o si t i o n
(S-1403DL ANT B Connector). Entry field
disables ANT B signal (OFF) or offsets ANT B
s i g n a l ( - 1 . 9 5 t o + 1 . 9 5 , r o u n d e d t o n e a r e st
0.05 µs) from ANT A signal (ATC-1400A RF I/O
Connector).
ANTB?
Returns status of ANT B signal position (OFF
or -1.95 to +1.95 in microseconds) from ANT A
si g n a l .
APER?
Returns ANT A ATCRBS percent reply (0 to
100).
ATC.
Enables ATC Test Function (ATCRBS
interrogations only).
BPER?
Returns ANT B percent reply (0 to 100).
BRF=<coarse> (only with MLD option)
Sets ANT B attenuation by selecting an output
level (20 to 83) in -dBm.
BRF?
Returns ANT B output level setting in -dBm.
BRFLV=<fine> (only with MLD option)
S e t s A N T B R F ve r n i e r ( - 3 . 0 t o + 3 . 0 ) i n 0 . 1 d B
i n c r e m e n t s.
BRFLV?
R e t u r n s A N T B R F ve r n i e r se t t i n g i n d B .
BURST=<itype>;<BN>
Enables BURST function. The <itype> field
se l e ct s i n t e r r o g a t i o n t y p e ( A T C , S E Q , A C S o r
ACL). Percent reply is tested for the number
o f i n t e r r o g a t i o n s ( 1 t o 9 9 9 9 ) se t i n t h e B u r st
Number, <BN>, field.
BURST.
Activates BURST Test Function when enabled.
CMENU<n>.
Displays current Control Menu Function A
(<n>=1) or Function B screen (<n>=2).
DFSQ<nn>?
R e t u r n s M o d e S r e p l y d a t a a s r e ce i ve d
according to sequence menu (<nn>=00 to 999).
D a t a i s r e t u r n e d w i t h t yp e o f f o r m a t ( se q u e n ce
m e n u i s o f f [ F ] , sh o r t d a t a f i e l d [ S ] o r l o n g d a t a
f i e l d [ L ] ) , d o w n l i n k f o r m a t n u m b e r i n d e ci m a l
( 0 0 t o 3 1 ) , sh o r t ( 9 o ct a l d i g i t s) o r l o n g
( 2 8 o c t a l d i g i t s ) d a t a f i e l d a n d t r a n sp o n d e r
address in octal. If no data exists, S-1403DL
returns NO DATA message.
DFSQA<nn>?
R e t u r n s t h e t r a n sp o n d e r a d d r e ss ( 8 o ct a l
d i g i t s) r e ce i ve d i n M o d e S r e p l y a cco r d i n g t o
sequence menu (<nn>=00 to 999).
DFSQD<nn>?
R e t u r n s t h e sh o r t ( 9 o ct a l d i g i t s) o r l o n g ( 2 8
o c t a l d i g i t s ) d o w n l i n k d a t a f i e l d r e c e i ve d i n
Mode S reply according to sequence menu
(<nn>=00 to 999).
DFSQF<nn>?
Returns the downlink format number in
d e c i m a l , r e c e i v e d i n M o d e S r e p l y a cco r d i n g t o
sequence menu (<nn>=00 to 999).
DFSQT<nn>?
R e t u r n s o n l y t h e d o w n l i n k f o r m a t d a t a t yp e
( se q u e n ce m e n u i s o f f [ F ] , sh o r t d a t a f i e l d [ S ]
or long data field [L]) received in Mode S reply
according to sequence menu (<nn>=00 to 999).
DI=<itype>;<itype>
E n a b l e s D o u b l e I n t e r r o g a t i o n f u n ct i o n . E n t r y
fields select first and second interrogation
t yp e s ( A T C , S E Q , A C S o r A C L ) r e sp e ct i ve l y.
ERRM?
R e t u r n s e r r o r st a t u s f o r w h e n t h e G P I B
c o n t r o l l e r r e c e i v e s s e r i a l p o l l d a t a i n d i ca t i n g
a u xi l i a r y e r r o r ( S R Q b i t a ct i ve ) . G P I B r e p l i e s
w i t h o n e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g e r r o r m e ssa g e s:
D I / I N T F i n d i ca t e s S - 1 4 0 3 D L o r A T C - 1 4 0 0 A
( n o t b o t h ) i s se t f o r D o u b l e I n t e r r o g a t i o n s.
INPUT indicates invalid RCI command.
N O N E i n d i ca t e s n o e r r o r s.
R E C A L L i n d i c a t e s a n a t t e m p t t o r e ca l l
information data (RECALL<n>.) from an
e m p t y m e m o r y l o ca t i o n .
EXMOD=<switch>
E n a b l e s ( O F F ) o r d i sa b l e s ( O N ) i n t e r n a l A N T A
modulation.
1- 2- 4
Page 41
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
EXMOD?
Returns status of external modulation source.
Only external modulation is accepted for ANT
A (ON) or both external and internal
m o d u l a t i o n i s a cc e p t e d f o r A N T A ( O F F ) .
EXSYN=<switch>;<n>;<switch>
C o n t r o l s e x t e r n a l s y n c o u t p u t a n d i n p u t . F i r st
entry field enables (ON) or disables (OFF)
external sync output through S-1403DL EXT
S Y N C O U T C o n n e c t o r . S e c o n d e n t r y f i e l d se t s
e xt e r n a l syn c p u l s e o u t p u t p o s i t i o n f r o m - 9 . 9 5
to +9.95, rounded to nearest 0.05 µs, from
r i si n g e d g e o f P 1 . T h i r d e n t r y f i e l d e n a b l e s
(ON) or disables (OFF) external sync input
through S-1403DL EXT SYNC IN Connector.
Both external sync output and external sync
input cannot be enabled simultaneously.
EXSYN?
Returns external sync status with current entry
f i e l d se t t i n g s.
INTLCE=<n>
E n a b l e s I n t e r l a ce f u n c t i o n a n d s e t s t h e n u m b e r
<n> (1 to 999) of ATCRBS interrogations for
every Mode S interrogation transmitted.
MLDECL?
Returns status of MLD option. The reply is y
( ye s , t h e S - 1 4 0 3 s e r i e s T e s t S e t c o n t a i n s t h e
M L D o p t i o n ) o r n ( n o , t h e S - 1 4 0 3 s e r i e s T e st
Set does not contain the MLD option). This
co m m a n d i s f o r p r o g r a m s o p e r a t i n g M o d e S
T e st S y s t e m s w i t h a n d w i t h o u t t h e M L D o p t i o n .
Programs use the reply to this command to
o ve r l o o k co m m a n d s t h a t d o n o t a p p l y t o t h e
cu r r e n t l y o p e r a t i n g M o d e S T e s t S y s t e m .
NOTE:
A reply of 3:? indicates an old
so f t w a r e v e r s i o n ( b e f o r e 2 . 0 ) . R e f e r
to VER? command.
MODE?
R e t u r n s a ct i ve f u n c t i o n w i t h s e l e c t e d o p t i o n s
(ATC, SEQ, ACS, ACL, INTLCE;<n>,
D I ; < i t yp e > ; < i t yp e > o r B U R S T = < i t y p e > ; < B N > ) .
M T L = < i t yp e >
A ct i va t e s t h e t e s t f o r m e a s u r i n g m i n i m u m
triggering level (MTL) of the UUT for the
se l e ct e d i n t e r r o g a t i o n t y p e ( A T C , S E Q , A C S o r
ACL).
NOTE:
Test operation time depends on PRF
rate and the final MTL RF level.
MTL?
Returns the MTL value in -dBm for the UUT.
NEWPB?
R e t u r n s o l d P u l se P C B o a r d st a t u s. T h e r e p l y
i s y ( ye s, t h e S - 1 4 0 3 se r i e s T e st S e t co n t a i n s
t h e S - 1 4 0 3 C st yl e P u l se P C B o a r d ) o r n ( n o ,
t h e S - 1 4 0 3 se r i e s T e st S e t d o e s n o t co n t a i n
t h e S - 1 4 0 3 C st yl e P u l se P C B o a r d ) . T h i s
co m m a n d i s f o r p r o g r a m s o p e r a t i n g M o d e S
T e st S yst e m s w i t h o l d e r T e st S e t s.
NOTE:
A reply of 3:? indicates an old
so f t w a r e ve r si o n ( b e f o r e 2 . 0 ) . R e f e r
to VER? command.
P2=<level>
Sets P2 pulse level when operating in Mode S
test functions. Entry field sets pulse level to P1
( C A L ) , a l l o w s A T C - 1 4 0 0 A E S = co m m a n d t o se t
p u l se l e ve l ( V A R ) o r d i sa b l e s P 2 p u l se ( O F F ) .
P2?
R e t u r n s cu r r e n t st a t u s o f P 2 p u l se ( C A L , V A R
or OFF).
P3=<level>
S e t s P 3 p u l se l e ve l w h e n o p e r a t i n g i n A T C R B S
o r A l l - C a l l t e st f u n ct i o n s. E n t r y f i e l d se t s
p u l se l e ve l t o P 1 ( C A L ) , a l l o w s A T C - 1 4 0 0 A E S =
co m m a n d t o se t p u l se l e ve l ( V A R ) o r d i sa b l e s
P 3 p u l se ( O F F ) .
P3?
R e t u r n s cu r r e n t st a t u s o f P 3 p u l se ( C A L , V A R
or OFF).
P 4 = < l e v e l > ; < ca l / n > ; < ca l / n >
Sets P4 pulse conditions when operating in AllC a l l t e st f u n ct i o n s. F i r st e n t r y f i e l d se t s p u l se
level to P1 (CAL), allows ATC-1400A ES=
co m m a n d t o se t p u l se l e ve l ( V A R ) o r d i sa b l e s
P 4 p u l se ( O F F ) . S e co n d e n t r y f i e l d se t s p u l se
w i d t h ( C A L o r 0 . 2 0 t o 3 . 5 5 i n µ s) . T h i r d e n t r y
field controls pulse position (CAL or -1.95 to
+ 1 . 9 5 f r o m C A L , r o u n d e d t o n e a r e st 0 . 0 5 µ s) .
P4?
R e t u r n s st a t u s o f P 4 p u l se w i t h cu r r e n t e n t r y
field settings.
P 6 = < l e v e l > ; < ca l / n > ; < ca l / n >
Sets P6 pulse conditions when operating in
M o d e S t e st f u n ct i o n s. F i r st e n t r y f i e l d
e n a b l e s o r d i s a b l e s P 6 p u l se ( C A L o r O F F ) .
S e co n d e n t r y f i e l d se t s p u l se w i d t h ( C A L o r 1 . 5 0 t o + 1 . 5 0 f r o m C A L i n 0 . 0 5 µ s i n cr e m e n t s) .
T h i r d e n t r y f i e l d co n t r o l s p u l se p o si t i o n ( C A L
o r - 1 . 9 5 t o + 1 . 9 5 f r o m C A L , r o u n d e d t o n e a r e st
0 . 0 5 µ s) .
P6?
R e t u r n s st a t u s o f P 6 p u l se w i t h cu r r e n t e n t r y
field settings.
1- 2- 4
Page 42
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
PPMG=<off/n>
S e t s P u l se P o w e r M e a s u r e m e n t G a t e ( P P M G )
c o n t r o l f o r a n y p u l s e i n t h e U U T r e p l y. E n t r y
f i e l d d i s a b l e s P P M G ( O F F ) o r s e l e c t s p u l se t o
be measured for frequency and power. Pulse
selection is 1 to 16 for ATCRBS replies and 1
to 116 for Mode S downlink formats.
PPMG?
Returns PPMG control status.
PPULSE=<off/n>
Sets control for prepulse through the S-1403DL
P R E P U L S E O U T C o n n e ct o r . E n t r y f i e l d
d i s a b l e s p r e p u l s e ( O F F ) o r s e t s p r e p u l se
position (0 to 260) in microseconds prior to
r i si n g e d g e o f P 1 .
PPULSE?
Returns status of prepulse control.
PRPLY?
Returns percent reply (0 to 100) for ATCRBS
(ANT A), Mode S (ANT A) and ANT B.
RECALL<n>.
R e ca l l s a n d a c t i v a t e s a l l S - 1 4 0 3 D L s e t t i n g s
stored in memory location (<n> =1 or 2). If
memory location is empty, bit 1 of the SRQ
register is set indicating an error.
RFLV=<n>
S e t s R F ve r n i e r l e v e l ( - 3 . 0 t o + 3 . 0 ) i n 0 . 1 d B
i n c r e m e n t s.
RFLV?
R e t u r n s cu r r e n t R F v e r n i e r l e v e l ( - 3 . 0 t o + 3 . 0 )
in dB.
RPDLY?
Returns UUT reply delay in microseconds.
S P R = < s w i t c h > ; < ca l / n >
C o n t r o l s S P R i n M o d e S t e st f u n ct i o n s. F i r st
e n t r y f i e l d e n a b l e s ( O N ) o r d i sa b l e s S P R
( O F F ) . S e co n d e n t r y f i e l d co n t r o l s S P R
p o si t i o n ( C A L o r - 1 . 0 0 t o + 1 . 0 0 f r o m C A L ,
r o u n d e d t o n e a r e s t 0 . 0 5 µ s) .
SPR?
R e t u r n s cu r r e n t st a t u s o f S P R .
SQ<nn>=<format>;<uf#>;<data>;<addr>
P r o g r a m s se q u e n ce m e n u ( < n n > = 0 0 t o 9 9 9 ) .
E n t r y f i e l d s se t f o r m a t t yp e ( se q u e n ce m e n u
o f f [ F ] , sh o r t d a t a f i e l d [ S ] o r l o n g d a t a f i e l d
[ L ] ) , u p l i n k f o r m a t n u m b e r i n d e ci m a l ( 0 0 t o
3 1 ) , sh o r t ( 9 o ct a l d i g i t s) o r l o n g ( 2 8 o ct a l
d i g i t s ) d a t a f i e l d a n d U U T a d d r e s s i n o ct a l .
P r o g r a m se q u e n ce m e n u s p r i o r t o o p e r a t i n g i n
d e si r e d M o d e S t e st f u n ct i o n . R e f e r t o 4 . 7 i n
1 - 2 - 4 f o r p r o g r a m m i n g d a t a f i e l d s.
SQ<nn>?
Returns status of sequence menu (<nn>=00 to
999) showing entry field settings.
SQADD?
Returns the octal conversion of the UUT
address received in latest squitter.
SQTR?
R e t u r n s U U T sq u i t t e r p e r i o d ( 0 . 0 0 t o 9 . 9 9 ) i n
seconds.
S Q T R < t yp e > ?
R e t u r n s sq u i t t e r p e r i o d ( 0 . 0 0 t o 9 . 9 9 ) f o r
se l e ct e d t yp e o f sq u i t t e r i n se co n d s ( < t yp e > =
DF11, DF17A, DF17I, DF17O, DF17P, DF17S
or DF17T).
SCPI
S w i t ch e s t o n e w S C P I c o m m a n d i n t e r p r e t e r .
SAVE<n>.
E n a b l e s S - 1 4 0 3 D L t o s t o r e a l l c u r r e n t se t t i n g s
in memory location (<n>=1 or 2).
NOTE:
Saving only stores S-1403DL settings,
not ATC-1400A settings.
SEQ.
Enables SEQ Test Function (Mode S
interrogations only).
SEQN=<nn>
D i sp l a ys s e l e c t e d S e q u e n c e M e n u ( < n n > = 0 0 t o
999).
SPER?
Returns percent reply (0 to 100) for Mode S
( A N T A ) o n l y.
1- 2- 4
Page 43
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STATMTL?
R e t u r n s st a t u s o f M T L t e s t . R e p l y p o s s i b i l i t i e s
are:
B U S Y i n d i ca t e s M T L t e s t i n p r o g r e s s .
D O N E i n d i ca t e s M T L t e s t i s c o m p l e t e a n d
successful (UUT passed).
ERR1 indicates <90% reply (ATCRBS and
all calls) or <99% reply (Mode S) at
≥-21 dBm.
ERR2 indicates >10% reply at <-81 dBm.
E R R 3 i n d i ca t e s M T L i s > - 6 9 d B m ( A T C R B S
and all calls) or >-71 dBm (Mode S).
ERR4 indicates MTL is <-77 dBm or MTL
within range but <90% reply (ATCRBS and
all calls) or <99% reply (Mode S) at MTL +
3 dB.
E R R 5 i n d i ca t e s M T L c a n n o t b e f o u n d , M T L
i s u n st a b l e o r t e s t w a s s t o p p e d b y u s e r .
Initiate this command at greater than halfse co n d i n t e r va l s f o r m i n i m a l M T L a c q u i s i t i o n
time.
VER?
Returns Main Processor and Front Panel
Processor software versions. The reply is
<mm.mm>;<ff.ff>, where <mm.mm> is the Main
Processor software version number and <ff.ff>
is the Front Panel Processor software version
number. Possible replies are:
3 : ? i n d i ca t e s a n o l d s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n
(before 1.5).
01.nn;01.nn indicates S-1403 software
ve r s i o n s .
02.nn;02.nn indicates S-1403C software
ve r s i o n s .
03.nn;03.nn indicates S-1403DL software
ve r s i o n s .
0 4 . n n ; 0 4 . n n i n d i ca t e s S - 1 4 0 3 D L ( cu r r e n t
with SI-1404) software versions.
1- 2- 4
Page 44
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
OLD-STYLE
CMENUn.
SCPI-STYLE
OLD-STYLE
SCPI-STYLE
DISPlay:CMENu
SQTRDF17P?
SQTR:TIMe?
SEQN=
DISPlay:SMENu
SQTRDF17S?
SQTR:TIMe?
MODE?
CMENu:FUNCtion?
SQTRDF17T?
SQTR:TIMe?
ATC.
CMENu:FUNCtion:ATCrbs
RPDLY?
REPLy:DELay?
SEQ.
CMENu:FUNCtion:SEQuence
PRPLY?
REPLy:PERCent?
ACS.
CMENu:FUNCtion:ACS
APER?
REPLy:PERCent?
ACL.
CMENu:FUNCtion:ACL
SPER?
REPLy:PERCent?
INTLCE=
CMENu:FUNCtion:INTerlace
BPER?
REPLy:PERCent?
DI=
CMENu:FUNCtion:DI
PPULSE=
INTerrogation:PPulse
BURST=
CMENu:FUNCtion:BURSt
PPULSE?
INTerrogation:PPulse?
BURST.
INTerrogation:TRIGger:BURSt EXSYN=
INTerrogation:SYNC:OUT
ANTB=
GENerator[:STATe] and
GENerator:TIME:OFFSet
EXSYN?
INTerrogation:SYNC:OUT?
ANTB?
GENerator[:STATe]? and
GENerator:TIME:OFFSet?
PPMG=_
INTerrogation:PPMG
BRF=
GENerator:LEVel
PPMG?
INTerrogation:PPMG?
BRF?
GENerator:LEVel?
SQ<nn>=
INTerrogation:SMENu
RFLV=
GENerator:LEVel:OFFSet
SQ<nn>?
INTerrogation:SMENu?
BRFLV=
GENerator:LEVel:OFFSet
DFSQ<nn>?
REPLy:SMENu?
RFLV?
GENerator:LEVel:OFFSet?
DFSQT<nn>?
REPLy:SMENu?
BRFLV?
GENerator:LEVel:OFFSet?
DFSQF<nn>?
REPLy:SMENu?
P2=
INTerrogation:P2
DFSQD<nn>?
REPLy:SMENu?
P2?
INTerrogation:P2?
DFSQA<nn>?
REPLy:SMENu?
P3=
INTerrogation:P3
SAVE<n>
MEMory:STORe
P3?
INTerrogation:P3?
RECALL<n>
MEMory:LOAD
P4=
INTerrogation:P4
MTL=
TEST:MTL:STARt
P4?
INTerrogation:P4?
MTL?
TEST:MTL:LEVEL?
P6=
INTerrogation:P6
STATMTL?
TEST:MTL?
P6?
INTerrogation:P6?
SCPI
SCPI
SPR=
INTerrogation:P6:SPR
S1403C
S1403C or
SYSTem:LANGuage S1403C
SPR?
INTerrogation:P6:SPR?
SQTRDFCLEAR
SQTR:TIMe:CLEar
EXMOD=
INTerrogation:MODulation
SQTRBUFCAPTURE= SQTR:CAPTure[:STATe]
EXMOD?
INTerrogation:MODulation?
SQTRBUFFILTER=
SQTR:CAPTure:FILTer
SQTR?
SQTR:TIMe?
SQTRBUFCLEAR
SQTR:CAPTure:CLEar
SQADD?
SQTR:ADDRess?
SQTRBUFCOUNT?
SQTR:CAPTure:COUNt?
SQTRDF11?
SQTR:TIMe?
SQTRBUFGET?
SQTR:CAPTure:GET?
SQTRDF17A?
SQTR:TIMe?
MLDECL?
*OPT?
SQTRDF17I?
SQTR:TIMe?
VER?
*IDN?
SQTRDF17O?
SQTR:TIMe?
O ld- Style/SCPI- Style Command Compar ison
Table 14
1- 2- 4
Page 45
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
4.7 EXAMPL ES
4.7.1
Examp le #1
Send Uplink F or mat 05 ( Shor t For mat) in
Sequence Menu S002.
Example tr ansponder addr ess:
or 3FABF2h.
Example data
Appendix D) :
FIELD
field
17725762o
settings
( r efer
to
To conver t the binar y r epr esentation to
seven hexadecimal digits, r efer to 1- 2- 2,
Table 5 and cr eate a table similar to the
following:
BINARY
100
HEX
4
1001 0001 0100 0111 1100 0010
9
Set Example
follows:
SETTING DEFINITION
1
#1
4
old- style
7
C
command
PC
Data being sent is for information
only.
RR
Request identification of aircraft
being interrogated.
DI
SD field contains multisite
information.
SD
Field is composed of subfields IIS,
MBS, LOS, RSS and TMS.
S
Short data field length.
IIS
Interrogator identification.
05
Uplink Format 05 (decimal).
MB S
Reserve COMM-B for use.
444243702
Nine-digit (octal) data field.
ME S
Close out COMM-C and COMM-D
from use.
LOS
Lockout field listed in IIS, from
further All Call interrogations.
Continue to acknowledge other All
Call requests.
RSS
No request for field UM (not used).
TMS
Unlinked Message/Request,
acknowledge receipt.
COMMAND
10010
RR
001 0100 01 111
00 0010
1
DI
IIS MBS MES LOS RSS TMS
4
2
4
3
Eight-digit (octal) transponder
address.
INTerrogation:
SMENu
1
ON
“S”
BINARY 100 100 100 010 100 011 111 000 010
4
Sequence Menu S001.
COMMAND
T o conver t the binar y r epr esentation to
nine octal digits, r efer to 1- 2- 2, Table 5 and
cr eate a table similar to the following:
4
SQ1
Set Example #1 SCPI- style command as
follows:
SD
OCTAL
Instructs S-1403DL to transfer
command of tests to be
conducted from the Front
Panel to remote.
Command:
AX3=SQ01;S;05;444243702;17725762
Binar y r epr esentation of the 27 example
data field bits:
100
PC
7
0
as
DEFINITION
AX3=
17725762
2
2
5
“#Q444243702” or
“H49147C2”
#Q17725762 or
#H3FABF2
DEFINITION
Initiates sequence menu
command under the
interrogation subsystem.
Sequence Menu S001.
Activates sequence menu.
Short data field length.
Uplink Format 05
(decimal).
Nine-digit (octal) or
seven-digit (hexadecimal)
data field.
Eight-digit (octal) or sixdigit (hexadecimal)
transponder address.
Command (on one line):
INTerrogation:SMENu
1,ON,”S”,5,”#Q444243702,#Q17725762
or
INTerrogation:SMENu
1,ON,”S”,5,”#H49147C2,#H3FABF2
1- 2- 4
Page 46
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
4.7.2
Example #2
Send Uplink For mat 21 ( Long For mat) in
Sequence Menu S002.
Example tr ansponder addr ess:
or 3FABF2h.
Example data
Appendix D) :
FIELD
field
17725762o
settings
( r efer
SETTING DEFINITION
PC
Non-selective All-Call lockout.
RR
Identification of aircraft being
interrogated.
DI
Notice to expect extended
information.
SD
Field is composed of subfields IIS,
RRS, LOS and TMS.
IIS
Interrogator Identification.
RRS
Transmit reply in extended format.
LOS
Lockout all All-Call responses.
TMS
Linked first segment, multiple
addresses, priority individual call,
acknowledge.
MA
Field is composed of subfields ADS
and message.
ADS
*
to
To conver t the binar y r epr esentation to
28 octal digits, r efer to 1- 2- 2, Table 5 and
cr eate a table similar to the following:
BINARY
00
110
010
111
010
001
010
OCTAL
0
6
2
7
2
1
2
BINARY
100
101
101
011
100
000
000
OCTAL
4
5
5
3
4
0
0
BINARY
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
OCTAL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BINARY
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
OCTAL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
To conver t the binar y r epr esentation to
21 hexadecimal digits, r efer to 1- 2- 2,
T able 5 and cr eate a table similar to the
following:
BINARY
001
HEX
1
9
7
4
5
4
B
BINARY 0101 1100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
HEX
Extended message immediately
follows.
1001 0111 0100 0101 0100 1011
5
C
0
0
0
0
0
BINARY 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
Data bits not used in uplink format
message.
HEX
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Binar y r epr esentation of the 83 example
data field bits:
001
PC
10010
RR
111
DI
0100
IIS
0101
RRS
0
*
1
LOS
00
*
1011
TMS
SD
01011100
ADS
48-Zeros
Message
MA
1- 2- 4
Page 47
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
Set Example
follows:
#2
old- style
command
as
COMMAND
DEFINITION
AX3=
Command instructs S1403DL to transfer
command of tests from
Front Panel control to
remote.
SQ2
Sequence Menu S002.
L
21
Long data field length.
Uplink Format 21
(decimal).
0627...000
28-digit (octal) data
field.
17725762
Eight-digit (octal)
transponder address.
Command (on one line): AX3=SQ02;L;21;
0627212455340000000000000000;17725762
Set Example #2 SCPI- style command as
follows:
COMMAND
INTerrogation:
SMENu
2
DEFINITION
Initiates sequence menu
command under the
interrogation subsystem.
Sequence Menu S002.
ON
Activates sequence menu.
“L”
Long data field length.
5
Uplink Format 05 (decimal).
“ # Q 0 6 2 7 2 1 2 4 5 5 3 4 0 28-digit (octal) or 21-digit
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ” (hexadecimal) data field.
or
“H197454B5C00000
0000000”
#Q17725762 or
#H3FABF2
Eight-digit (octal) or sixdigit (hexadecimal)
transponder address.
Command (on one line):
INTerrogation:SMENu 1,ON,”S”,5,
”#Q0627212455340000000000000000”,
#Q17725762
or
INTerrogation:SMENu 1,ON,”S”,5,
”#H197454B5C000000000000”,#H3FABF2
1- 2- 4
Page 48
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
4.7.3
Example #3
Receive
Reply)
Downlink
F or mat
04
Example tr ansponder addr ess:
or 3FABF2h.
( Altitude
STEP
Refer to Appendix D for br eakdown of
individual data fields. ( The AC field
contains the last 13 bits shown in the
gr id.
The r eply indicates no active
bits for the FS, DR and UM fields.)
17725762o
O ld- Style Command: AX3=DFSQ <nn>?
with <nn> set to an applicable UF04
( RR<21o) sequence menu.
If bit position Q ( D 1 ) is 0, go to Step 7
for altitude r eadout.
O ld- Style Retur n: " 3:S;4;2035;17725762"
RESPONSE
Indicates reply from S-1403DL.
S
Short format.
4
BINARY ALTITUDE CODE (Q=1)
DEFINITION
3
2. Discar d bit positions M and Q .
3. Separ ate bits into thr ee fields and
conver t to hexadecimal as follows
( r efer to 1- 2- 2, Table 5) :
Downlink Format 04.
2035
Octal data field.
17725762
Example transponder address.
B10 B9
0
SCPI- Style Command:
REPLy:SMENu? <smenu#>,<rfor mat>
with <smenu#> set to an applicable UF04
( RR<21o) sequence menu and <rfor mat>
set to “N”.
4
Downlink Format 04.
1. Refer to 1- 2- 2, T able 5 and conver t
the octal data field digits to binar y
using the following for mat:
A4
X
B1
D1
B2
B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5
M
B4
Q
B3 B2 B1 B0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
2
0
C4
0
0
0
B1
B0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
D
( This altitude should agr ee with the
AC= field displayed in the sequence
menu with UF04 active.)
Example transponder address.
A2
B2
6725 - 1000 = 5725 feet
Hexadecimal data field.
PROCEDURE
C2
B3
6. Subtr act 1000 fr om answer in Step 5.
To conver t octal data to decimal altitude in
feet, per for m following pr ocedur e.
A1
B4
269 X 25 = 6725
T o conver t hexadecimal data to decimal
altitude in feet, star t at Step 4 in following
pr ocedur e.
C1
B5
4. Conver t 3- digit ( hexadecimal) altitude
code to decimal code.
DEFINITION
STEP
B6
5. Multiply decimal number by 25.
Indicates auto size reply format.
#H3FABF2
B7
10D = 269 ( [1 x 256 = 256] +
[0 x 16 = 0] + 13)
N
#H10D
0
B8
1
SCPI-Style Return:
N,4,#Q 2035,#Q 17725762
or
N,4,#H10D,#H3FABF2
RESPONSE
PROCEDURE
3
1
D2
1
B4
0
5
D4
1
MODE C ALTITUDE CODE (Q=0)
NOTE: For an example of Q =0, the
new example field is 2015.
7. Discar d bit positions X and D 1 .
8. Rear r ange data bits as follows:
D2
D4
A1
A2
A4
B1
B2
B4
C1
C2
C4
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
9. Refer
to
ATC- 1400A
O per ation
Manual for conver sion to altitude
( Altitude Tr ansmission Code Char t) .
( The example field tr anslates to
64,500 feet.)
1- 2- 4
Page 49
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
4.7.4
Examp le #4
Receive Downlink F or mat 05 ( Identification
Reply)
Example tr ansponder addr ess:
or 3FABF2h.
O ld- Style Retur n: " 3:S;5;11026;17725762"
3
Indicates reply from S-1403DL.
Short format.
5
C1
A1
C2
A2
C4
A4
X
B1
D1
B2
D2
B4
D4
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
2
Downlink Format 05.
11026
17725762
Octal data field.
SCPI- Style Command:
REPLy:SMENu? <smenu#>,<rfor mat>
with <smenu#> set to an applicable UF05
( RR<21o) sequence menu and <rfor mat>
set to “N”.
A2
A1
B4
B2
B1
C4
C2
C1
D4
D2
D1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
2
Indicates auto size reply format.
5
Downlink Format 05.
0
1
0
4
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
3
( This identification code should agr ee
with the ID= field displayed in the
sequence menu with UF05 active.)
DEFINITION
N
#H1216
A4
3. Refer to 1- 2- 2, Table 5 and conver t
the binar y bits to octal:
SCPI-Style Return:
N,4,#Q 11026,#Q 17725762
or
N,4,#H10D,#H3FABF2
#H3FABF2
6
2. Rear r ange binar y bits to the following
for mat, discar ding bit position X:
Example transponder address.
RESPONSE
1
Refer to Appendix D for br eakdown of
individual data fields. ( The ID field
contains the last 13 bits shown in the
gr ids. The r eply indicates no active
bits for the FS, DR and UM fields.)
DEFINITION
S
PRO CEDURE
Refer to 1- 2- 2, Table 5 and conver t
the octal data field digits to binar y
using the following for mat:
17725762o
O ld- Style Command: AX3=DFSQ <nn>?
with <nn> set to an applicable UF05
( RR<21o) sequence menu.
RESPONSE
STEP
Hexadecimal data field.
Example transponder address.
T o conver t data to
following pr ocedur e.
ST EP
ID
code,
per for m
PRO CEDURE
1. Refer to 1- 2- 2, T able 5 and conver t
the octal data field digits to binar y
using the following for mat:
C1
A1
C2
A2
C4
A4
X
B1
D1
B2
D2
B4
D4
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
2
6
1- 2- 4
Page 50
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SECTION 3 - SPECIFICATIONS
1. MODE S TEST SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE: T hese specifications super sede ATC- 1400A Specifications when the ATC- 1400A is
connected with the S- 1403DL. Refer to 1- 3- 1 in the ATC- 1400A O per ation Manual
for specifications not outlined in this section.
1.1 RF
1.1.1
Ant en n a A ( ANT A), RF I/O Connector
Fr equency:
Per ATC- 1400A Specifications
Level:
Per ATC- 1400A Specifications
Ver nier C ontr ol:
Range:
± 3.0 dB
Step:
0.1 dB
Accur acy:
± 0.05 dB or ± 10%
1.1.2
Antenna B (ANT B), ANT B Connector
Fr equency:
Accur acy:
1030 MHz
0.001%
Level:
Range:
- 50 dBm ( without MLD)
- 20 to - 83 dBm ( with MLD)
Step:
1 dB ( with MLD)
Accur acy:
± 1 dB r elative to ATC- 1400A at - 50 dBm
into 50 Ω ( without MLD)
± 0.5 dB r elative to ATC- 1400A at - 20 dBm
into 50 Ω (with MLD)
Attenuator Accur acy:
(with MLD)
LEVEL
ACCURACY
-30 dBm
±0.4 dB
-40 dBm
±0.4 dB
-50 dBm
±0.4 dB
-60 dBm
±0.5 dB
-70 dBm
±0.61 dB
-80 dBm
±0.72 dB
Ver nier C ontr ol:
Range:
± 3.0 dB
Step:
0.1 dB
Accur acy:
± 0.05 dB or ± 10%
1- 3- 1
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
1.2 PULSE CHARACTERISTICS
NOTE: Pulse char acter istics ar e ver ified fr om the RF I/O or ANT B Connector s using a
Heter odyne Monitor .
1.2.1
G eneral
ANT A:
Rise and Fall times:
Per ATC- 1400A Specifications
ANT B:
Rise T ime:
50 to 90 ns
F all T ime:
50 to 200 ns
O n/O ff Ratio:
>80 dB
P 1 Position (CAL):
Relative to ANT A P 1
Deviation:
Var iable fr om CAL (± 0.95 µs)
Step:
0.05 µs
ANT A to ANT B Tr acking Accur acy:
± 15 ns
PRF Limitations:
ATC Function:
7999 Hz
SEQ Function:
2500 Hz
ACS Function:
2500 Hz
ACL Function:
2500 Hz
INT LCE F unction:
1250 Hz
DI F unction:
1250 Hz
BURST Function:
7999 Hz ( ATC)
2500 Hz ( All other s)
ATCRBS Monitor Pulse F unction:
4000
PRF Accur acy ( Tr igG en) :
Range ( Hz) :
1 to 2500 Hz ( All functions except INTLCE
and DI)
1 to 1250 Hz ( INTLCE and DI)
Step Size:
1 Hz
Accur acy:
± 1 Hz, ± 0.0035% of setting
Range ( Sec) :
0.0004 to 99.9999 Sec ( All functions except
INTLCE and DI)
0.0008 to 99.9999 Sec ( INTLCE and DI)
Step Size:
0.1 ms
Accur acy:
± 100 ns, ± 0.0035% of setting
1- 3- 1
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
Exter nal Sync Input,
EXT SYNC IN Connector ( J4) :
Maximum Input Fr equency:
AT C F unction:
7999 Hz
SEQ F unction:
2500 Hz
ACS Function:
2500 Hz
ACL F unction:
2500 Hz
INT LCE F unction:
1250 Hz
DI F unction:
1250 Hz
BURST F unction:
7999 Hz ( ATC)
2500 Hz ( All other s)
Minimum Input Low T ime:
1.2.2
200 ns
ATC Function
P 2 SLS:
Amplitude ( CAL) ( ANT A) :
0 dB, r elative to P 1
Range:
Var iable fr om - 19 to +6 dB
Step:
1 dB
Accur acy:
± 0.3 dB for - 10 to +3 dB
Width ( CAL) ( ANT A) :
0.8 µs
Range:
Var iable fr om 0.2 to 1.85 µs
Step:
0.05 µs
Accur acy:
± 10 ns
Width ( CAL) ( ANT B) :
0.8 µs
Range:
Var iable fr om 0.2 to 1.85 µs
Step:
0.05 µs
Accur acy ( CAL) :
( Var iable ≤ 0.8 µs) :
( Var iable >0.8 µs) :
± 10 ns
± 20 ns
± 10 ns
Position ( CAL) ( ANT A and ANT B) :
2.0 µs following leading edge of P 1
Deviation:
Var iable fr om CAL (± 1.85 µs)
Step:
0.05 µs
Accur acy:
± 10 ns
1- 3- 1
Page 3
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
P3:
Amplitude ( CAL) ( ANT A) :
0 dB, r elative to P 1
Range:
Var iable fr om - 19 to +6 dB
Step:
1 dB
Accur acy:
± 0.3 dB for - 10 to +3 dB
Width ( CAL) ( ANT A) :
0.8 µs
Range:
Var iable fr om 0.20 to 1.85 µs
Step:
0.05 µs
Accur acy:
± 10 ns
Width ( CAL) ( ANT B) :
0.8 µs
Range:
Var iable fr om 0.20 to 1.85 µs
Step:
0.05 µs
Accur acy ( CAL) :
( Var iable <0.8 µs) :
( Var iable ≥ 0.8 µs) :
± 10 ns
± 20 ns
± 10 ns
Position (CAL) (P 1 to P 3 ) :
3.0 µs ( Mode 1)
5.0 µs ( Mode 2)
6.5 µs ( Mode T)
8.0 µs ( Mode 3/A)
17.0 µs ( Mode B)
21.0 µs ( Mode C)
25.0 µs ( Mode D)
Deviation:
Var iable fr om CAL (± 1.85 µs)
Step:
0.05 µs
Accur acy:
± 10 ns
Inter fer ence Pulse ( Pr ePulseO ut O FF or 0)
( <1200 PRF ) :
Amplitude:
0 dB, r elative to P 1
Range:
Var iable fr om - 19 to +6 dB
Step:
1 dB
Accur acy:
± 0.3 dB for - 10 to +3 dB
Width:
Var iable fr om 0.2 to 5 µs
Position:
Var iable fr om 17.5 µs prior to P 1 to 399.9 µs
following P 1
Step:
0.1 µs
Accur acy:
± 0.1 µs, ± 0.005% of pulse position selected
on the ATC- 1400A
1- 3- 1
Page 4
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
Suppr essor Pulse ( Pr ePulseO ut O FF or 0)
( <1200 PRF ) thr ough SUPPRESSO R
O UTPUT Connector :
Amplitude:
Per ATC- 1400A Specifications
Width:
Per ATC- 1400A Specifications
Position:
0.8 µs pr ior to leading edge of P 3
Deviation:
Var iable fr om 17.5 µs prior to P 1 to 399.9 µs
following P 1
Step:
0.1 µs
Accur acy:
± 0.1 µs, ± 0.005% of pulse position selected
on the ATC- 1400A
Pr epulse thr ough PREPULSE O UT
Connector :
Position:
Var iable fr om 0 to 260 µs pr ior to leading
edge of P 1
Step:
1 µs
Accur acy:
± 50 ns ± 0.005%
Exter nal Sync O utput thr ough EXT SYNC
O UT Connector :
Position:
Var iable fr om - 9.95 to +9.95 µs fr om r ising
edge of P 1
Step:
0.05 µs
Accur acy:
± 50 ns
ATCRBS Discr ete Pulse thr ough ATCRBS
O UT Connector :
Width:
Accur acy:
Position:
Accur acy:
3.0 µs
± 50 ns
1.0 µs pr ior to leading edge of P 1
± 50 ns
1- 3- 1
Page 5
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
1.2.3
SEQ Function
P2:
Amplitude ( CAL) ( ANT A) :
0 dB, r elative to P 1
Range:
Var iable fr om - 19 to +6 dB
Step:
1 dB
Accur acy:
± 0.3 dB for - 10 to +3 dB
Width ( CAL) ( ANT A) :
0.8 µs
Range:
Var iable fr om 0.20 to 1.85 µs
Step:
0.05 µs
Accur acy:
± 10 ns
Width ( CAL) ( ANT B) :
0.8 µs
Range:
Var iable fr om 0.20 to 1.85 µs
Step:
0.05 µs
Accur acy ( CAL) :
( Var iable <0.8 µs) :
( Var iable ≥ 0.8 µs) :
± 10 ns
± 20 ns
± 10 ns
Position ( CAL) ( ANT A and ANT B) :
2.0 µs following leading edge of P 1
Deviation:
Var iable fr om CAL (± 1.85 µs)
Step:
0.05 µs
Accur acy ( CAL) :
± 10 ns
P 5 SLS:
Amplitude ( CAL) ( ANT A) :
0 dB, r elative to P 1
Range:
Var iable fr om - 19 to +6 dB
Step:
1 dB
Accur acy:
± 0.5 dB for - 10 to +3 dB
Width ( CAL) ( ANT A) :
0.8 µs
Accur acy:
± 100 ns
Position ( CAL) ( ANT A) :
0.4 µs befor e Sync Phase Rever sal ( SPR)
Deviation:
Accur acy:
Contr olled by SPR deviation
± 100 ns
1- 3- 1
Page 6
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
P 6 ( ANT A and ANT B) :
Width ( CAL) :
16.25 µs for short formats
30.25 µs for long for mats
Range:
Var iable fr om CAL (± 1.5 µs)
Step:
0.05 µs
Accur acy:
± 10 ns
Position ( CAL) :
3.5 µs following leading edge of P 1
Deviation:
Var iable fr om CAL (± 1.95 µs)
Step:
0.05 µs
Accur acy:
± 10 ns
SPR ( ANT A and ANT B) :
Position ( CAL) :
2.75 µs following leading edge of P 2 (CAL)
Deviation:
Var iable fr om CAL (± 1 µs)
( DPSK data deviates accor dingly.)
Step:
0.05 µs
Accur acy:
± 10 ns
DPSK:
Phase Rever sal Time:
Inter fer ence Pulse:
<80 ns ( 10° to 170°)
Same as in ATC Function
Suppr essor Pulse ( Pr ePulseO ut O FF or 0)
( <1200 PRF ) thr ough SUPPRESSO R
O UTPUT Connector :
Amplitude:
Per ATC- 1400A Specifications
Width:
Per ATC- 1400A Specifications
Position:
0.8 µs pr ior to SPR (CAL)
Deviation:
Var iable fr om 17.5 µs prior to P 1 to 399.9 µs
following P 1
Step:
0.1 µs
Accur acy:
± 0.1 µs, ± 0.005% of pulse position selected
on the ATC- 1400A
Pr epulse thr ough PREPULSE O UT
Connector :
Same as in ATC Function
Exter nal Sync O utput thr ough EXT SYNC
O UT Connector :
Same as in ATC Function
1- 3- 1
Page 7
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
1.2.4
ACS/ACL Functions
P 2 SLS:
Same as in ATC Function
P 3 ( ANT A and ANT B) :
Same as in ATC Function
P4:
Amplitude ( CAL) ( ANT A) :
0 dB, r elative to P 1
Range:
Var iable fr om - 19 to +6 dB
Step:
1 dB
Accur acy:
± 0.3 dB for - 10 to +3 dB
Width ( CAL) ( ANT A) :
0.8 µs for short P 4 (ACS) or
1.6 µs for long P 4 (ACL)
Range:
Var iable ( independent of P 1 , P 2 and P 3 )
fr om 0.2 to 3.55 µs
Step:
0.05 µs
Accur acy:
± 10 ns
Width ( CAL) ( ANT B) :
0.8 µs for short P 4 (ACS) or
1.6 µs for long P 4 (ACL)
Range:
Var iable ( independent of P 1 , P 2 and P 3 )
fr om 0.2 to 3.55 µs
Step:
0.05 µs
Accur acy ( CAL) :
( Var iable <0.8 µs) :
( Var iable ≥ 0.8 µs) :
± 10 ns
± 20 ns
± 10 ns
Position ( CAL) :
2.0 µs following leading edge of P 3
Deviation:
Var iable fr om CAL (± 1.95 µs)
Step:
0.05 µs
Accur acy:
± 10 ns
Inter fer ence Pulse:
Same as in ATC Function
Suppr essor Pulse thr ough SUPPRESSO R
O UTPUT Connector :
Same as in ATC Function
Pr epulse thr ough PREPULSE O UT
Connector :
Same as in ATC Function
Exter nal Sync O utput thr ough EXT SYNC
O UT Connector :
Same as in ATC Function
1- 3- 1
Page 8
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
1.2.5
INTLCE Function
ATC Inter r ogations:
Same as in ATC Function ( CAL settings)
SEQ Inter r ogations:
Same as in SEQ Function ( CAL settings)
Position:
200 µs fr om ATC inter r ogation P 1 leading
edge to SEQ inter r ogation P 1 leading edge
Accur acy:
± 100 ns
1.2.6
DI Function
Fir st Inter r ogation:
Refer to applicable function.
Second Inter r ogation:
Refer to applicable function ( CAL settings) .
DI Spacing ( P 1 leading edge of 1st
inter r ogation to P 1 leading edge of 2nd
inter r ogation) :
ATC, ACS or ACL ( either inter r ogation) :
Range:
0 to 399.9 µs
Step:
0.1 µs
Accur acy:
± 50 ns, ± 0.005%
SEQ ( both inter r ogation) :
1.2.7
Range:
40.0 to 399.9 µs
Step:
0.1 µs
Accur acy:
± 50 ns, ± 0.005%
BURST Function
Inter r ogations:
1.2.8
Refer to applicable function.
ELM Function
SEQ Inter r ogations:
Refer to applicable function ( CAL settings) .
1- 3- 1
Page 9
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
1.3 UUT MEASUREMENTS
1.3.1
Reply Delay
ANT A:
ATC ( leading edge of P 3 [CAL] to
leading edge of F 1 ):
Range:
2 to 4 µs
Resolution:
12.5 ns
Accur acy:
± 50 ns
SEQ ( SPR to leading edge of r eply P 1 ):
Range:
126 to 130 µs
Resolution:
12.5 ns
Accur acy:
± 50 ns, ± 1 count
ACS/ACL:
ATCRBS Reply ( leading edge of
P 3 [CAL] to leading edge of F 1 ):
Range:
2 to 4 µs
Resolution:
12.5 ns
Accur acy:
± 50 ns, ± 1 count
Mode S Reply ( leading edge of P 4
[CAL] to leading edge of r eply P 1 ):
Range:
126 to 130 µs
Resolution:
12.5 ns
Accur acy:
± 50 ns, ± 1 count
ANT B:
ATC ( leading edge of P 3 [CAL]
to leading edge of F 1 ):
Range:
2 to 4 µs
Resolution:
12.5 ns
Accur acy:
± 100 ns, ± 1 count (UUT VIDEO Connector
unterminated)
± 200 ns, ± 1 count ( UUT VIDEO Connector
ter minated into 50 Ω)
1- 3- 1
Page 10
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ANT B ( Cont) :
SEQ ( SPR to leading edge of r eply P 1 ):
Range:
126 to 130 µs
Resolution:
12.5 ns
Accur acy:
± 100 ns, ± 1 count (UUT VIDEO Connector
unterminated)
± 200 ns, ± 1 count ( UUT VIDEO Connector
ter minated into 50 Ω)
ACS/ACL:
AT CRBS Reply ( leading edge of
P 3 [CAL] to leading edge of F 1 ):
Range:
2 to 4 µs
Resolution:
12.5 ns
Accur acy:
± 100 ns, ± 1 count (UUT VIDEO Connector
unterminated)
± 200 ns, ± 1 count ( UUT VIDEO Connector
ter minated into 50 Ω)
Mode S Reply ( leading edge of
P 4 [CAL] to leading edge of r eply
P 1 ):
1.3.2
Range:
126 to 130 µs
Resolution:
12.5 ns
Accur acy:
± 100 ns, ± 1 count (UUT VIDEO Connector
unterminated)
± 200 ns, ± 1 count ( UUT VIDEO Connector
ter minated into 50 Ω)
%Rep ly
ATCRBS Valid Reply ( ANT A and ANT B) :
Range:
0 to 100%
Resolution:
1%
Accur acy:
± 1 step
Mode S Valid Reply ( ANT A and ANT B) :
Range:
0 to 100%
Resolution:
1%
Accur acy:
± 1 step
1- 3- 1
Page 11
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
1.3.3
Pulse Charact erist ics
AT CRBS Monitor Pulse F unction ( AT C
Mon) :
Reply Pulse F 1 and F 2 Width ( into
ANT A or ANT B at 500 W) :
Resolution:
12.5 ns
Accur acy:
( ANT A) :
( ANT B) :
± 50 ns
± 100 ns
Reply Pulse F 1 to F 2 Spacing ( into
ANT A or ANT B at 500 W) :
Resolution:
12.5 ns
Accur acy:
( ANT A) :
( ANT B) :
± 50 ns
± 100 ns
1.4 INPUT/O UT PUT DRIVE L EVEL S
1.4.1
Miscellaneous O ut put s
SIGNAL NAME
1.4.2
LEVEL
LOAD
(CONNECTOR)
Voh (Min)
Vol (Max)
IMPEDANCE
SCOPE TRIG OUT (J7)
2.4 V
0.6 V
≥90 Ω
EXT SYNC OUT (J8)
2.4 V
0.6 V
≥90 Ω
EXT PRF OUT (J17)
2.4 V
0.6 V
≥90 Ω
ATCRBS OUT (J5)
2.4 V
0.6 V
≥90 Ω
PREPULSE OUT (J9)
2.4 V
0.6 V
≥90 Ω
ANT B VIDEO OUT (J6)
2.4 V
0.6 V
≥90 Ω
ANT B GEN OUT (J22)
2.4 V
0.6 V
≥90 Ω
Miscellaneous Inputs
SIGNAL NAME
LEVEL
INPUT
(CONNECTOR)
Vih (Min)
Vil (Max)
IMPEDANCE
EXT MOD IN (J3)
+2 to +15 V
0.0 to 0.7 V
≥1 kΩ (Typical)
EXT SYNC IN (J4)
+2 to +15 V
0.0 to 0.7 V
≥1 kΩ (Typical)
1- 3- 1
Page 12
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
1.5 PO WER REQ UIREMENT S
Sour ce Voltage and F r equency:
100 to 120 VAC, 60 Hz.
220 to 240 VAC, 50 Hz.
NOTE: Power consumption and nominal input cur r ent specifications do not apply to S1403DL T est Sets upgr aded fr om S- 1403 or S- 1403C Test Sets.
Power Consumption:
48 W Maximum
180 W Maximum with ATC- 1400A
40 W Nominal at 115 VAC
136 W Nominal at 115 VAC with ATC- 1400A
33 W Nominal at 230 VAC
129 W Nominal at 230 VAC with ATC- 1400A
Nominal Input Cur r ent:
0.44 A at 115 VAC
1.72 A at 115 VAC with ATC 1400A
0.23 A at 230 VAC
1.0 A at 230 VAC with ATC 1400A
1.6 FUSE REQ UIREMENTS
NOTE: O nly F 1 and F 2 F use specifications apply to S- 1403DL Test Sets upgr aded fr om S1403 or S- 1403C T est Sets.
F2 and F4:
100 to 120 VAC:
220 to 240 VAC:
1.0 A, 250 V, Type F
0.5 A, 250 V, Type F
F1 and F3:
100 to 120 VAC:
220 to 240 VAC:
3.0 A, 250 V, Type F
3.0 A, 250 V, Type F
1.7 SAFETY CONDITIONS
NOTE: T est Sets with upgr ade kits installed ar e not compliant to national or inter national
EMC and/or safety standar ds.
Use:
Indoor s
Altitude:
≤ 4000 meter s ( 13,124 feet)
Temper atur e:
5° to 40° C
Relative Humidity:
≤ 80% for temper atur es up to 31° C
decr easing linear ly to 50% at 40° C
Mains Supply Voltage F luctuations:
≤ ± 10% of the nominal voltage
Tr ansient O ver voltages:
Accor ding to Installation Categor y II
Pollution Degr ee:
2
1- 3- 1
Page 13
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
THIS PAG E INT ENTIO NALLY LEFT BLANK.
1- 3- 1
Page 14
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SECTION 4 - SHIPPING
1. SHIPPING TEST SETS
1.1 INFORMATION
1.2 REPACKING PROCEDURE
Test
Sets
r etur ned
to
factor y
for
calibr ation, ser vice or r epair must be
r epackaged and shipped accor ding to the
following conditions:
Make sur e bottom packing mold is
seated on floor of shipping container .
Authorizat ion
Place Test Set into shipping container ,
making sur e Test Set is secur ely seated
in bottom packing mold.
Do not r etur n any pr oducts to factor y
without fir st r eceiving author ization fr om
Aer oflex Customer Ser vice Depar tment.
CONTACT:
Aeroflex
Customer Ser vice
T elephone: ( 800) 835- 2350
F AX: ( 316) 524- 2623
Tagging Test Sets
All T est Sets must be tagged with:
Carefully wrap Test Set with
polyethylene sheeting to pr otect finish.
Place top packing mold over top of Test
Set and pr ess down until mold r ests
solidly in bottom packing mold.
Close shipping container lids and seal
with shipping tape or an industr ial
stapler . Tie all sides of container with
br eak r esistant r ope, twine or
equivalent.
Identification and addr ess of owner .
Natur e of ser vice or r epair r equir ed.
Model Number .
Ser ial Number .
Shipping Containers
Test Sets must be r epackaged in or iginal
shipping container s using or iginal packing
molds. If or iginal shipping container s and
mater ials
ar e
not
available,
contact
Aer oflex Customer Ser vice for shipping
instr uctions.
Freight Co st s
All fr eight costs on non- war r anty shipments
ar e assumed by the customer .
( See
“ War r anty Packet” for fr eight char ge policy
on war r anty claims.)
1- 4- 1
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
TOP PACKING
MOLD
TEST INSTRUMENT
WRAPPED WITH
POLYETHYLENE
SHEETING
HOLD DOWN
STRAP
BOTTOM PACKING
MOLD
SHIPPING CONTAINER
Repacking Pr ocedur e
Figur e 1
1- 4- 1
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SECTION 5 - STORAGE
1. STORING TEST SETS
Per for m the following stor age pr ecautions
whenever the Test Set is stor ed for
extended per iods:
Disconnect Test Set from any electr ical
power sour ce.
Disconnect and stor e ac power cable
and other accessor ies with Test Set.
Cover T est Set to pr event dust and
debr is fr om cover ing and enter ing Test
Set.
1- 5- 1
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
THIS PAG E INT ENTIO NALLY LEFT BLANK.
1- 5- 1
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
APPENDIX A - CONNECTOR PIN-OUT TABLES
1. TABLE OF S-1403DL I/O CONNECTORS
CONNECTOR
TYPE
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL TYPE
INPUT/OUTPUT
J10001
BNC Female
UUT VIDEO
50 Ω
OUTPUT
J10002
N Female
ANT B
50 Ω
INPUT/OUTPUT
A5A3J3
BNC Female
EXT MOD IN
TTL
INPUT
A5A3J4
BNC Female
EXT SYNC IN
TTL
INPUT
A5A3J5
BNC Female
ATCRBS OUT
TTL
OUTPUT
A5A3J6
BNC Female
ANT B VIDEO OUT
TTL
OUTPUT
A5A3J7
BNC Female
SCOPE TRIG OUT
TTL
OUTPUT
A5A3J8
BNC Female
EXT SYNC OUT
TTL
OUTPUT
A5A3J9
BNC Female
PREPULSE OUT
TTL
OUTPUT
A5A1J10
DB-25 Female
AUX BUS
VARIOUS
INPUT/OUTPUT
A5W2J11
DB-25 Female
IFR BUS
TTL
INPUT/OUTPUT
A5A1J12
DB-9 Male
RS-232
RS-232C
INPUT/OUTPUT
A5A1J13
SMB Male
RF LVL
0 TO 7 Vdc
OUTPUT
A5A1J14
SMB Male
PPMG
TTL
OUTPUT
A5A1J15
SMB Male
DPSK OUT
BIPOLAR
OUTPUT
J16
AC Receptacle
Female
AC
ac Power
OUTPUT
J17
RFI Pwr Filter/AC
Receptacle Male
AC
ac Power
INPUT
A5A3J17
BNC Female
EXT PRF OUT
TTL
OUTPUT
A5A3J18
BNC Female
MODE GRP TRIG IN
TTL
INPUT
A5A3J19
BNC Female
REPLY GRP TRIG IN
TTL
INPUT
A5A3J20
BNC Female
DECODED VIDEO IN
TTL
INPUT
A5W1J21
Champ-24 Female
GPIB
IEEE-488.2
INPUT/OUTPUT
A5A3J22
BNC Female
ANT B GEN OUT
TTL
OUTPUT
A5A3J23
BNC Female
DI SPARITY OUT
TTL
OUTPUT
A5A3J24
BNC Female
ENABL E TRIG IN
TTL
INPUT
A5A3J25
BNC Female
REPLY (TTL) OUT
TTL
OUTPUT
A5A3J26
BNC Female
REPLY (3-27 V) OUT
3-27 Vdc
OUTPUT
NOTE: Pr efix all connector r efer ence designator s ( except J10001 and J1002) with
24A1 for S- 1403DL w/o MLD or 27A1 for S- 1403DL w/ MLD.
I/O Connector s
Table 1
APPENDIX A
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2. S-1403DL AUX BUS CONNECTOR (J10) (TO ATC-1400A, J6) PIN-OUT
TABLE
PIN NO.
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL TYPE
INPUT/OUTPUT
POLARITY
1
GROUND
2
SPARE
3
SPARE
4
SPARE
5
EXT PULSE
TTL
OUTPUT
ACTIVE LOW
6
EXT SLS
TTL
OUTPUT
ACTIVE LOW
7
SPARE
8
PULSE
TTL
INPUT
POSITIVE
TTL
INPUT
RISING EDGE
TTL
INPUT
POSITIVE
TRISTATE
INPUT/OUTPUT
RISING EDGE
9
20 MHz
10
A/A INT
11
50% VIDEO
12
SPARE
13
SPARE
14
SELF INTERR
15
GROUND
16
SPARE
17
GROUND
18
GROUND
19
GROUND
20
GROUND
21
GROUND
22
GROUND
23
SPARE
24
GROUND
25
SPARE
Pin- O ut for AUX BUS Connector
Table 2
1
13
14
25
AUX BUS J10
02418002
AUX BUS Connector
Figur e 1
APPENDIX A
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
3. S-1403DL IFR BUS CONNECTOR (J11) (TO ATC-1400A, J5) PIN-OUT
TABLE
PIN NO.
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL TYPE
INPUT/OUTPUT
POLARITY
1
GROUND
2
3
A0
TTL
INPUT
POSITIVE
A1
TTL
INPUT
4
GROUND
POSITIVE
5
A2
TTL
INPUT
POSITIVE
6
D7
TTL
INPUT/OUTPUT
POSITIVE
7
D6
TTL
INPUT/OUTPUT
POSITIVE
8
A3
TTL
INPUT
POSITIVE
TTL
INPUT/OUTPUT
POSITIVE
TTL
INPUT/OUTPUT
POSITIVE
9
GROUND
10
GROUND
11
NOT USED
12
D5
13
GROUND
14
NOT USED
15
D4
16
GROUND
17
WRITE
TTL
INPUT
POS STROBE
18
D3
TTL
INPUT/OUTPUT
POSITIVE
19
GROUND
20
READ
TTL
INPUT
POS STROBE
21
D2
TTL
INPUT/OUTPUT
POSITIVE
22
INTA
TRI-STATE
OUTPUT
LEVEL SET
23
INTR
TRI-STATE
INPUT
LEVEL SET
24
D1
TTL
INPUT/OUTPUT
POSITIVE
25
D0
TTL
INPUT/OUTPUT
POSITIVE
Pin- O ut for IFR BUS Connector
Table 3
1
13
14
25
IFR BUS J11
02418003
IFR BUS Connector
Figur e 2
APPENDIX A
Page 3
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
4. S-1403DL RS-232 CONNECTOR (J12) PIN-OUT TABLE
PIN NO.
SIGNAL NAME
1
DCD
SIGNAL TYPE
INPUT/OUTPUT
POLARITY
2
TXD
TTL
OUTPUT
POSITIVE
3
RXD
TTL
INPUT
POSITIVE
4
DSR
5
GROUND
6
INPUT
POSITIVE
DTR
TTL
OUTPUT
POSITIVE
7
CTS
TTL
INPUT
POSITIVE
8
RTS
TTL
OUTPUT
POSITIVE
9
RI
Pin- O ut for RS- 232 Connector
Table 4
5
1
6
9
RS-232
J12
02418004
RS- 232 Connector
Figur e 3
APPENDIX A
Page 4
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
5. S-1403DL GPIB CONNECTOR (J21) PIN-OUT TABLE
PIN NO.
SIGNAL NAME
DEFINITION
INPUT/OUTPUT
SIGNAL TYPE
1
DIO1
Data Input/Output
INPUT/OUTPUT
TTL
2
DIO2
Data Input/Output
INPUT/OUTPUT
TTL
3
DIO3
Data Input/Output
INPUT/OUTPUT
TTL
4
DIO4
Data Input/Output
INPUT/OUTPUT
TTL
5
EOI
End or Identify
INPUT
TTL
6
DAV
Data Valid
INPUT
TTL
7
NRFD
Not Ready For Data
OUTPUT
TTL
8
NDAC
Data Not Accepted
OUTPUT
TTL
9
IFC
Interface Clear
INPUT
TTL
10
SRQ
Service Request
OUTPUT
TTL
11
ATN
Attention
INPUT
TTL
12
GROUND
13
DIO5
Data Input/Output
INPUT/OUTPUT
TTL
14
DIO6
Data Input/Output
INPUT/OUTPUT
TTL
15
DIO7
Data Input/Output
INPUT/OUTPUT
TTL
16
DIO8
Data Input/Output
INPUT/OUTPUT
TTL
17
REN
Remote Enable
INPUT
TTL
18
GROUND
19
GROUND
20
GROUND
21
GROUND
22
GROUND
23
GROUND
24
GROUND
Pin- O ut for G PIB Connector
Table 5
12
1
24
13
GPIB J21
02418005
G PIB Connector
Figur e 4
APPENDIX A
Page 5
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
6. S-1403DL SCOPE TRIG OUT CONNECTOR (J7) PULSE DESCRIPTION
6.1 ATC FUNCTION
6.2 SEQ FUNCTIO N
CAL T O Setting:
CAL T O Setting:
Width:
3.0 µs ( Mode 1)
5.0 µs ( Mode 2)
6.5 µs ( Mode T)
8.0 µs ( Mode 3/A)
17.0 µs ( Mode B)
21.0 µs ( Mode C)
25.0 µs ( Mode D)
Accur acy: ± 50 ns
Position:
1.0 µs prior to P 1 leading edge
Accur acy: ± 50 ns
CAL T D Setting:
Width:
20.3 µs
Accur acy: ± 50 ns
Position:
2.0 µs following P 3 leading
edge
Accur acy: ± 50 ns
VAR Setting:
Width:
1.0 µs
Position:
Range:
0 to 35 µs following P 1 leading
edge
Step:
1 µs
Width:
4.75 µs
Accur acy: ± 50 ns
Position:
1.0 µs prior to P 1 leading edge
Accur acy: ± 50 ns
CAL T D Setting:
Width:
8.0 µs
Accur acy: ± 50 ns
Position:
127 µs following SPR
Accur acy: ± 50 ns, ± 0.005%
VAR Setting:
Width:
1.0 µs
Accur acy: ± 50 ns
Position:
Range:
0 to 255 µs following P 1
leading edge
Step:
1 µs
Accur acy: ± 50 ns, ± 0.005%
Accur acy: ± 50 ns
APPENDIX A
Page 6
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
6.3 ACS/ACL FUNCTIONS
6.4 INTLCE FUNCTION
CAL T O Setting:
Same as in ATC and SEQ functions.
Width:
5.0 µs ( Mode 1)
7.0 µs ( Mode 2)
8.5 µs ( Mode T)
10.0 µs ( Mode 3/A)
19.0 µs ( Mode B)
23.0 µs ( Mode C)
27.0 µs ( Mode D)
Accur acy: ± 50 ns
Position:
1.0 µs prior to P 1 leading edge
Accur acy: ± 50 ns
CAL T D Setting:
Width:
NOTE: For best O scilloscope oper ation,
only one type should be enabled
( C72 Setup Scr een) at one time.
6.5 DI FUNCTIO N
Same as in selected functions.
NOTE: For best O scilloscope oper ation,
only one type should be enabled
( C72 Setup Scr een) at one time.
6.6 ATCRBS MONITOR PULSE FUNCTION
Same as in ATC function.
8.0 µs
Accur acy: ± 50 ns
Position:
2.0 µs following P 3 leading
edge ( ACS)
127.0 µs following P 4 leading
edge ( ACL)
Accur acy: ± 50 ns ( ACS)
± 50 ns, ± 0.005% ( ACL)
VAR Setting:
Width:
1.0 µs
Accur acy: ± 50 ns
Position:
Range:
0 to 255 µs following P 1
leading edge
Step:
1 µs
Accur acy: ± 50 ns, ± 0.005%
APPENDIX A
Page 7
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
THIS PAG E INT ENTIO NALLY LEFT BLANK.
APPENDIX A
Page 8
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
APPENDIX B - DECODED SEQUENCE MENU FORMATS
1. GENERAL
T he S- 1403DL contains ten decoded
sequence menu for mats, nine with both
uplink and downlink decoded fields and
another for the decoded DF 17 squitter .
The flexibility of the Mode S T est System
allows any of the 1000 sequence menus to
use any decoded sequence menu for mat in
the pr ogr amming.
The S- 1403DL displays UF and DF fields in
decimal for m ( base10) .
The S- 1403DL
conver ts the decoded AC field to the
decimal altitude in feet. F or consistency,
the S- 1403DL always displays the 4096
code ID field in the standar d octal for mat.
The S- 1403DL displays all other uplink and
downlink fields accor ding to the Smenu
Radix ( O CTAL [base8] or HEX [base16])
selected in the C76 SMenu Setup Scr een.
Appendix B shows the Sample Decoded
sequence menus in octal and hexadecimal.
Descr iptions explain fields using octal,
hexadecimal and decimal values.
T he C76 Setup ( SMenu) Scr een contr ols
global addr ess fields and sets sequence
menus to default. Refer to C76 SMenu in
2.4.1 of 1- 1- 2. Refer to Appendix D for
detailed explanation of the var ious uplink
and downlink for mat fields.
APPENDIX B
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2. UF00/DF00
T he S- 1403DL displays the decoded Uplink/
Downlink For mat 00 ( Shor t Air - to- Air
Sur veillance) as follows:
S012:D;UF00,RL=0,AQ=0,BD=000,
+
ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;DF00,VS=0,SL=0,RI=00,AC=+ 31200,
CC=0
ADDR=17725762
Sample Decoded UF 00/DF00 Sequence Menu in O ctal
Figur e 1
S012:D;UF00,RL=0,AQ=0,BD=00,
+
ADDR=3FABF2
RPLY:D;DF00,VS=0,SL=0,RI=0,AC=+ 31200,
CC=0
ADDR=3FABF2
Sample Decoded UF 00/DF00 Sequence Menu in Hexadecimal
Figur e 2
2.1 UF 00
2.2 DF00
UF 00 inter r ogations contain thr ee var iable
fields.
The RL= ( Reply Length) field
selects the r eply for mat depending on UUT
tr ansponder type. If the UUT is associated
with Air bor ne Collision Avoidance System
( ACAS) equipment, RL=0 selects DF00
r eplies and RL=1 selects DF16 r eplies.
O ther wise, RL=0 selects DF00 r eplies and
RL=1 selects no r eplies.
T he AQ=
( Acquisition)
field
r equests
specific
infor mation in the r eply ( RI= field) . AQ=0
r equests UUT TCAS capability infor mation,
if applicable. AQ=1 r equests UUT air speed
infor mation. The BD= ( Comm- B Data) field
selects the identity of the gr ound initiated
Comm- B r egister to appear in the MV field
of the cor r esponding DF16 r eply. The S1403DL sends the inter r ogations to the
UUT addr ess specified in the ADDR= field.
If set to XPDR or XPDR-X, the Mode S Test
System over lays the UUT addr ess with
par ity data to for m the AP field. If set to
USER or USER- X, the Mode S Test System
over lays the global addr ess set in the C76
Setup Scr een with par ity data to for m the
AP field. An O R function is per for med on
the XPDR-X or USER- X AP field with the
AP XO R field set in the C76 Setup Scr een.
The S- 1403DL displays r eplies fr om the
UUT as either DF00 or DF16, depending on
RL= field setting in the inter r ogation and
nor mal UUT oper ation. DF00 contains five
displayed fields. The VS= ( Ver tical Status)
field pr ovides UUT flight status.
VS=0
indicates UUT air cr aft is air bor ne and VS=1
indicates UUT air cr aft is on the gr ound.
SL= ( Sensitivity Level) field r epor ts cur r ent
UUT TCAS sensitivity level ( SL=0 indicates
no sensitivity level r epor ted) . The RI= field
pr ovides the infor mation r equested in the
inter r ogation ( AQ= field) .
RI=00 to 07
pr ovides
TCAS
capability
infor mation.
RI=10 to 17o, 08 to 0Fh ( 8 to 15, decimal)
pr ovides air speed infor mation. AC= field
r epor ts UUT altitude in feet, calculated
fr om the AC field value r eceived in the
r eply. The CC= ( Cr osslink Capability) field
r epor ts the UUT ability to decode the BD
field and pr ovide the cor r esponding
Comm- B message in a DF16 r eply. CC=1
indicates UUT air cr aft suppor ts cr osslink
capability. The ADDR= field pr ovides the
UUT addr ess taken fr om the AP field value
r eceived in the r eply.
APPENDIX B
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
3. UF04/DF04
T he S- 1403DL displays the decoded Uplink/
Downlink F or mat 04 ( Sur veillance/Altitude)
as follows:
S102:D;UF04,PC=0,RR=00,DI=0,SD=000000,
+
ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;DF04,FS=0,DR=00,UM=00,AC=+ 31200,
ADDR=17725762
Sample Decoded UF04/DF04 Sequence Menu in O ctal
Figur e 3
S102:D;UF04,PC=0,RR=00,DI=0,SD=0000,
+
ADDR=3FABF2
RPLY:D;DF04,FS=0,DR=00,RI=0,AC=+ 31200,
ADDR=3FABF2
Sample Decoded UF04/DF04 Sequence Menu in Hexadecimal
Figur e 4
3.1 UF04
3.2 DF04
UF04 inter r ogations contain five var iable
fields. The PC= ( Pr otocol) field pr ovides
oper ating instr uctions to the UUT.
The
RR= ( Reply Request) field instr ucts the
UUT what r eply and infor mation to send.
RR=00 to 17o, 00 to 0Fh ( 0 to 15, decimal)
r equests a DF04 r eply. RR=20o, 10h ( 16,
decimal) r equests a DF 20 r eply ( Comm- B)
containing the message the UUT r equested
to send in an ear lier r eply ( DR=01 or 03).
RR=21o, 11h ( 17, decimal) r equests a
DF20 r eply containing UUT data link
capability.
RR=22o, 12h ( 18, decimal)
r equests a DF20 r eply containing UUT
air cr aft
identification
( tail
number ) .
RR=23o, 13h ( 19, decimal) r equests a
DF20 r eply containing T CAS r esolution
advisor y infor mation. RR=24 to 37o, 14 to
1Fh ( 20 to 31, decimal) r equests a DF20
r eply ( not assigned to specific infor mation) .
The DI= field designates the content of the
SD= field.
The SD= field contains the
Inter r ogator Identifier , Mode S O nly All Call
lockout instr uctions, multisite infor mation,
specific r eply r equests and/or message
infor mation. T he ADDR= field oper ates the
same as in UF 00.
The S- 1403DL displays r eplies fr om the
UUT as either DF04 or DF20, depending on
the RR= field setting in the inter r ogation
and nor mal UUT oper ation. DF04 contains
five displayed fields. FS= ( Flight Status)
field r epor ts UUT flight status and aler t
conditions. DR= ( Downlink Request) field
indicates UUT r equest to send message.
UM= ( Utility Message) field contains UUT
status ( message r eser vations) . AC= and
ADDR= fields oper ate the same as in DF00.
APPENDIX B
Page 3
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
4. UF05/DF05
T he S- 1403DL displays the decoded Uplink/
Downlink F or mat 05 ( Sur veillance/Identity)
as follows:
S300:D;UF05,PC=0,RR=00,DI=0,SD=000000,
+
ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;DF05,FS=0,DR=00,UM=00,ID=0123,
ADDR=17725762
Sample Decoded UF 05/DF05 Sequence Menu in O ctal
Figur e 5
S300:D;UF05,PC=0,RR=00,DI=0,SD=0000,
+
ADDR=3FABF2
RPLY:D;DF05,FS=0,DR=00,UM=00,ID=0123,
ADDR=3FABF2
Sample Decoded UF 05/DF05 Sequence Menu in Hexadecimal
Figur e 6
4.1 UF 05
4.2 DF05
UF05 inter r ogations contain the same five
var iable fields as in UF 04. T he PC=, DI=,
SD= and ADDR= fields oper ate the same as
in UF04. RR= field oper ates the same as in
UF 04, but r equests differ ent r eplies.
RR=00 to 17o, 00 to 0Fh ( 0 to 15, decimal)
r equests a DF05 r eply. RR=20o, 10h ( 16,
decimal) r equests a DF 21 r eply ( Comm- B)
containing the message the UUT r equested
to send in an ear lier r eply ( DR=01 or 03).
RR=21o, 11h ( 17, decimal) r equests a
DF 21 r eply containing UUT data link
capability.
RR=22o, 12h ( 18, decimal)
r equests a DF21 r eply containing UUT
air cr aft
identification
( tail
number ) .
RR=23o, 13h ( 19, decimal) r equests a
DF 21 r eply containing T CAS r esolution
advisor y infor mation. RR=24 to 37o, 14 to
1Fh ( 20 to 31, decimal) r equests a DF21
r eply ( not assigned to specific infor mation) .
The S- 1403DL displays r eplies fr om the
UUT as either DF05 or DF21, depending on
the RR= field setting in the inter r ogation
and nor mal UUT oper ation. DF05 contains
five displayed fields. The FS=, DR=, UM=
and ADDR= fields oper ate the way as in
DF04.
The ID= ( Identification) field
contains the 4096 identification code set on
the UUT (always in octal).
APPENDIX B
Page 4
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
5. UF11/DF11
T he S- 1403DL displays the decoded Uplink/
Downlink For mat 11 ( Mode S O nly All Call)
as follows:
S044:D;UF11,PR=00,IC=00,CL=0,
+
ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;DF11,CA=0,AA=00000000,
ADDR=17725762
Sample Decoded UF11/DF11 Sequence Menu in O ctal
Figur e 7
S044:D;UF11,PR=0, IC=0, CL=0,
+
ADDR=3FABF2
RPLY:D;DF11,CA=0,AA=000000,
ADDR=3FABF2
Sample Decoded UF11/DF11 Sequence Menu in Hexadecimal
Figur e 8
5.1 UF11
5.2 DF11
UF 11 is the Mode S O nly All Call.
Inter r ogations contain four var iable fields.
PR= ( Pr obability of Reply) field specifies
UUT r eply pr obability and over r ides lockout
instr uctions
if
desir ed.
This
r eply
pr obability is used to separ ate r eplies in a
satur ated AT C envir onment. PR=00 or 10
( 0 or 8, decimal) r equests the UUT to r eply
nor mally. PR=05 to 07 or 15 to 17 ( 5 to 7
or 13 to 15, decimal) r equests the UUT to
not r eply. O ther PR= field codes r equest
the UUT to r eply at a specific r atio to
inter r ogations ( r efer to Appendix D) . IC=
( Inter r ogator Code) field contains the
Inter r ogator Identifier ( II) or par t of the
Sur veillance Identifier ( SI) assigned to the
inter r ogator .
The IC= field is the same
infor mation as the fir st two (IIS) or first four
( SIS) digits of the SD= field in UF04, UF05,
UF20, and UF21 inter r ogations. CL= ( Code
Label)
indicates
what
the IC= field
contains.
CL=0 indicates the IC= field
contains the II and CL z 0 indicates the SI
code r ange of the IC= field. T he six digits
after the CL= field r epr esent the
16 undefined bits in UF 11 and ar e set to
zer o. The ADDR= field oper ates the same
as in UF00.
DF11 r eplies contain thr ee displayed fields.
The CA= ( Capability) field r epor ts UUT
tr ansponder capabilities.
CA=0 indicates
the UUT only r eceives and tr ansmits shor t
formats. CA=1 indicates the UUT r eceives
shor t or Comm- A message for mats and
tr ansmits shor t or Comm- B message
formats. CA=2 indicates the UUT r eceives
shor t, Comm- A message or Extended
Length
Message
( ELM)
for mats
and
tr ansmits shor t or Comm- B message
formats. CA=3 indicates the UUT r eceives
shor t, Comm- A message or Extended
Length
Message
( ELM)
for mats
and
tr ansmits shor t, Comm- B message or ELM
for mats. The AA= ( Air cr aft Addr ess) field
contains the UUT addr ess. The PI= field
contains the par ity code over laid on the
Inter r ogator Identifier code.
APPENDIX B
Page 5
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
6. UF16/DF16
T he
S- 1403DL
displays
the
decoded
Uplink/Downlink F or mat 16 ( Long Air - to- Air
Sur veillance) as follows:
S075:D;UF16,RL=0,AQ=0,
+ MU=0000000000000000000, ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;DF16,VS=0,SL=0,RI=00,AC=+ 31200,
MV=0000000000000000000, ADDR=17725762
Sample Decoded UF 16/DF16 Sequence Menu in O ctal
Figur e 9
S075:D;UF16,RL=0,AQ=0,
+ MU=00000000000000,
ADDR=3FABF2
RPLY:D;DF16,VS=0,SL=0,RI=0,AC=+ 31200,
MV=00000000000000,
ADDR=3FABF2
Sample Decoded UF 16/DF16 Sequence Menu in Hexadecimal
Figur e 10
6.1 UF16
6.2 DF16
UF 16 inter r ogations contain four var iable
fields.
The RL= ( Reply Length) field
selects the r eply for mat depending on UUT
tr ansponder type. If the UUT is associated
with Air bor ne Collision Avoidance System
( ACAS) equipment, RL=0 selects DF00
r eplies and RL=1 selects DF16 r eplies.
O ther wise, RL=0 selects DF16 r eplies and
RL=1 selects no r eplies.
T he AQ= and
ADDR= fields oper ate the same as in UF00.
T he MU= ( Comm- U Message) field contains
infor mation used in air - to- air exchanges
( T CAS messages) .
The S- 1403DL displays r eplies fr om the
UUT as either DF00 or DF16, depending on
the RL= field setting in the inter r ogation
and nor mal UUT oper ation. DF16 contains
six defined fields. The VS=, SL=, RI=, AC=
and ADDR= fields oper ate the same as in
DF00. The MV= ( Comm- V Message) field
contains infor mation used in air - to- air
exchanges ( coor dination r eply messages)
and does not follow Comm- B for mat.
APPENDIX B
Page 6
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
7. UF20/DF20
T he S- 1403DL displays the decoded Uplink/
Downlink F or mat 20 ( Comm- A/Comm- B/
Altitude) as follows:
S097:D;UF20,PC=0,RR=24,DI=0,SD=000000,
+ MA=0000000000000000000, ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;DF20,FS=0,DR=00,UM=00,AC=+ 31200,
MB=0000000000000000000, ADDR=17725762
Sample Decoded UF20/DF20 Sequence Menu in O ctal
Figur e 11
S097:D;UF20,PC=0,RR=14,DI=0,SD=0000,
+ MA=00000000000000,
ADDR=3FABF2
RPLY:D;DF20,FS=0,DR=00,UM=00,AC=+ 31200,
MB=00000000000000,
ADDR=3FABF2
Sample Decoded UF20/DF20 Sequence Menu in Hexadecimal
Figur e 12
7.1 UF 20
7.2 DF20
UF 20 inter r ogations contain six var iable
fields.
T he PC=, RR=, DI=, SD= and
ADDR= fields oper ate the same as in UF04.
The MA= ( Comm- A Message) field contains
messages to the UUT .
The S- 1403DL displays r eplies fr om the
UUT as either DF04 or DF20, depending on
the RR= field setting in the inter r ogation
and nor mal UUT oper ation. DF20 contains
six displayed fields. The FS=, DR=, UM=,
AC= and ADDR= fields oper ate the same
as in DF04. The MB= ( Comm- B Message)
field contains messages to the inter r ogator .
APPENDIX B
Page 7
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
8. UF21/DF21
T he S- 1403DL displays the decoded Uplink/
Downlink For mat 21 ( Comm- A/Comm- B/
Identity) as follows:
S081:D;UF21,PC=0,RR=24,DI=0,SD=000000,
+ MA=0000000000000000000, ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;DF21,FS=0,DR=00,UM=00,ID=0123,
MB=0000000000000000000, ADDR=17725762
Sample Decoded UF 21/DF21 Sequence Menu in O ctal
Figur e 13
S081:D;UF21,PC=0,RR=14,DI=0,SD=0000,
+ MA=00000000000000,
ADDR=3FABF2
RPLY:D;DF21,FS=0,DR=00,UM=0,ID=0123,
MB=00000000000000,
ADDR=3FABF2
Sample Decoded UF 21/DF21 Sequence Menu in Hexadecimal
Figur e 14
8.1 UF21
8.2 DF21
UF 21 inter r ogations contain six var iable
fields.
The PC=, RR=, DI=, SD= and
ADDR= fields oper ate the same as in UF05.
T he MA= field oper ates the same as in
UF 20.
The S- 1403DL displays r eplies fr om the
UUT as either DF05 or DF21, depending on
the RR= field setting in the inter r ogation
and nor mal UUT oper ation. DF21 contains
six displayed fields. The FS=, DR=, UM=,
ID= and ADDR= fields oper ate the same as
in DF05. The MB= field oper ates the same
as in DF20.
APPENDIX B
Page 8
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
9. UF24/DF24
T he S- 1403DL displays the decoded Uplink/
Downlink Format 24 (Comm-C/Comm-D) as
follows:
S500:D;UF24,RC=2,NC=00,MC=00000000000000
+ 0000000000000,
ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;DF24,KE=1,ND=00,MD=00140000000000
0000000000000,
ADDR=17725762
Sample Decoded UF24/DF24 Sequence Menu in O ctal
Figur e 15
S500:D;UF24,RC=2,NC=0,
+ MC=00000000000000000000,
RPLY:D;DF24,KE=1,ND=0,
MD=00C00000000000000000,
ADDR=3FABF2
ADDR=3FABF2
Sample Decoded UF24/DF24 Sequence Menu in Hexadecimal
Figur e 16
9.1 UF 24
9.2 DF24
UF24 inter r ogations contain four var iable
fields.
T he RC= ( Reply Contr ol) field
pr ovides
the
transmitted
segment
designation to contr ol the r eply.
RC=0
indicates initial segment ( default) for
tr ansponder to setup to r eceive number of
segments indicated by the NC= field ( do not
r eply) .
RC=1 indicates an inter mediate
segment ( do not r eply) .
RC=2 indicates
final segment ( do r eply) . RC=3 r equests
immediate Comm- D downlink action ( do
r eply) . T he NC= ( Number of C- segment)
field indicates the message segment
number with 0 signifying the fir st segment.
The last message segment should be sent
in the same inter r ogation as the initial
segment designation ( RC=0) .
The MC=
( Comm- C Message) field contains one
message segment of a sequence of
segments ( ≥ 2) to the tr ansponder .
The
ADDR= field oper ates the same as in UF00.
DF24 r eplies display four fields. The KE=
( ELM Contr ol) field defines the content of
the
ND=
and
MD=
fields.
KE=1
acknowledges r eceipt of the final uplink
Comm- C message segment and the MD=
field will contain the TAS subfield for
r epor ting what segments of the uplink ELM
wer e r eceived. The ND= ( Number of
D- segment) field indicates the message
segment number with 0 signifying the fir st
segment.
The MD= ( Comm- D Message)
field contains one message segment. The
ADDR= field oper ates the same as in DF00.
APPENDIX B
Page 9
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
10. DF17
T he
S- 1403DL
displays
the
decoded
Downlink For mat 17 ( Extended Squitter ) as
follows:
NOTE: Sequence menus only show r eplies
to inter r ogations. T her efor e, only
an inter r ogation that solicits DF17
r eplies ( unknown at this time) or
any Mode S inter r ogation and
perfect timing to a squitter causes
the S- 1403DL to display the
decoded DF 17 in a sequence menu.
S100:
RPLY:D;DF17,CA=0,AA=00000000,
ME=0000000000000000000, ADDR=17725762
Sample Decoded DF17 Extended Squitter in O ctal
Figur e 17
S100:
RPLY:D;DF17,CA=0,AA=000000,
ME=00000000000000,
ADDR=3FABF2
Sample Decoded DF 17 Extended Squitter in Hexadecimal
Figur e 18
DF 17 extended squitter s contain four
displayed fields.
T he CA=, AA= and
ADDR= fields oper ate the same as in DF11.
T he
ME=
field
contains
br oadcast
messages.
APPENDIX B
Page 10
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
APPENDIX C - TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
1. GENERAL
T his Appendix contains a list of test equipment suitable for per for ming all test
pr ocedur es contained in this manual. O ther equipment meeting specifications listed in
this Appendix may be substituted in place of r ecommended models. Equipment listed in
this Appendix may exceed minimum r equir ed specifications for some pr ocedur es
contained in this manual.
2. RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT
TYPE
MODEL
Dual Pulse Generator
WAVETEK 145
or Equivalent
Frequency Counter
SPECIFICATIONS
Functions:
Pulse Delay:
Pulse Width:
Output Level:
Pulse
50 ns to 10 ms
25 ns to 1 ms
15 VP-P into 50 Ω
HP53131A
or Equivalent
Frequency:
Resolution:
Sensitivity:
10 Hz to 10 MHz
±0.001 Hz
150 mV
Frequency Standard
HP58503A
or Equivalent
A ccu r a cy:
1 X 10
Oscilloscope
TEK 2465
or Equivalent
Capability:
Bandwidth:
V e r t i ca l
A ccu r a cy:
Time
A ccu r a cy:
Dual Trace
dc to 100 MHz
-9
±10%
± 0 . 7 % o f T i m e I n t e r va l
±0.6% of Full Scale
∆ Time
A ccu r a cy: ± 0 . 7 % o f T i m e I n t e r va l
±0.3% of Full Scale
Power Meter
HP437B
with (HP8481A Sensor)
or Equivalent
Spectrum Analyzer
HP8569B
or Equivalent
Range:
A ccu r a cy:
-25 to -15 dBm
±0.05 dB
Range:
10 kHz to 2.6 GHz
RBW:
300 Hz to 3.0 MHz
D i sp l a y ( L o g )
A ccu r a cy: < ± 0 . 1 d B / d B
<±1.5 dB/70 dB
Display (Lin)
A ccu r a cy: < ± 3 % o f r e f e r e n c e l e ve l
o v e r 8 d i v i s i o n r e f l e ct i o n
APPENDIX C
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
THIS PAG E INT ENTIO NALLY LEFT BLANK.
APPENDIX C
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
APPENDIX D - MODE S SIGNAL FORMATS
1. OPERATING GOALS
Mode S combines secondar y sur veillance
r adar and a gr ound- air - gr ound data link
system to pr ovide air cr aft sur veillance and
communications necessar y for suppor ting
automated
ATC
in
dense
tr affic
envir onments. Mode S pr ovides commonchannel inter oper ation with the ATC beacon
system and may be implemented over an
extended ATCRBS- to- Mode S tr ansition
per iod.
In suppor ting AT C automation,
Mode
S
pr ovides
the
r eliable
communications necessar y for data link
ser vices.
2. MODE S MESSAGE CONTENT
2.1 ADDRESS/PARIT Y ( F IEL D AP)
All discr ete Mode S inter r ogations ( 56- bit or
112- bit) and r eplies ( except the All Call
r eply) contain the 24- bit discr ete addr ess of
the Mode S tr ansponder upon which the 24
er r or - detecting
par ity
check
bits
ar e
over laid. In the All Call r eply, the 24 par ity
check bits ar e over laid on the addr ess of
the Mode S inter r ogator . T he text of the
r eply includes the discr ete addr ess of the
tr ansponder .
2.2 SURVEILLANCE
T he pr imar y function of Mode S is
sur veillance. For the Mode S tr ansponder ,
this function is accomplished by using shor t
( 56- bit) tr ansmissions in both dir ections. In
these tr ansmissions, the air cr aft r epor ts
altitude ( DF04) or ATCRBS 4096 code as
well as flight status ( air bor ne, on the
gr ound,
aler t,
Special
Position
Identification [SPI], etc.) .
2.3 DATA LINK COMMUNICATIONS
The
discr ete
addr essing
and
digital
encoding allow Mode S tr ansmissions to be
used as digital data links.
Inter r ogation
and r eply for mats of the Mode S system
contain sufficient coding space to tr ansmit
data. Most Mode S data link tr ansmissions
ar e handled as one 56- bit message
included
as
par t
of
long
112- bit
inter r ogations
or
r eplies.
The
tr ansmissions include the message in
addition to sur veillance data, and is
gener ally used in place of a sur veillance
inter r ogation and/or r eply.
An
efficient
tr ansmission
of
longer
messages is accomplished by the extended
length message ( ELM) capability ( UF24 and
DF24) . Using this capability, a sequence of
up to sixteen 80- bit message segments
( each with a 112- bit tr ansmission) is
tr ansmitted, either gr ound- to- air or air - togr ound and is acknowledged with a single
r eply/inter r ogation.
ELMs do not contain
sur veillance
data
and
thus
cannot
substitute for a sur veillance inter r ogationr eply cycle.
3. SIGNAL FORMATS
Chapter 2 of RTCA DO - 181A and Chapter
2, Volume I of RTCA DO - 185 outline the
signal for mats for uplink and downlink
messages. Appendix D, Tables 1 thr ough 7
contain the signal for mats and definitions
but the RTCA documents ar e the final
author ity on the data infor mation. Data is
expr essed in decimal unless other wise
specified. For conver sion to hexadecimal,
octal or binar y; r efer to 1- 2- 2, Table 5.
NOTE: TCAS oper ates in Mode S and
many signals per tain only to TCAS.
Bits ar e number ed in tr ansmission or der
beginning with bit one. Unless other wise
stated, the most significant bit ( MSB) is the
first bit transmitted for numer ical values
encoded by gr oups of bits ( fields and
subfields) .
APPENDIX D
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
FORMAT
NO.
UF
0 (0 0000)
 3  ( R L : 1 )  4  ( A Q : 1 ) ( B D : 8 )  1 0  ( A P : 2 4 ) . . . . . . . . . S h o r t A i r - A i r S u r ve i l l a n ce
1 (0 0001)
 27  (AP:24)
2 (0 0010)
 27  (AP:24)
3 (0 0011)
 27  (AP:24)
4 (0 0100)
5 (0 0101)
(PC:3)
(RR:5)
(DI:3)
(SD:16)
( A P : 2 4 ) . . S u r ve i l l a n ce , A l t i t u d e R e q u e st
(PC:3)
(RR:5)
(DI:3)
(SD:16)
( A P - 2 4 ) . . S u r ve i l l a n ce , I d e n t i t y R e q u e st
6 (0 0110)
 27  (AP:24)
7 (0 0111)
 27  (AP:24)
8 (0 1000)
 27  (AP:24)
9 (0 1001)
 27  (AP:24)
10 (0 1010)
 27  (AP:24)
11 (0 1011)
(PR:4) (IC:4) (CL:3)  16  (AP:24) ................ Mode S Only All Call
12 (0 1100)
 27  (AP:24)
13 (0 1101)
 27  (AP:24)
14 (0 1110)
 27  (AP:24)
15 (0 1111)
 27  (AP:24)
1 6 ( 1 0 0 0 0 )  3  ( R L : 1 )  4  ( A Q : 1 )  1 8  ( M U : 5 6 ) ( A P : 2 4 ) . . . . . . . . . L o n g A i r - A i r S u r ve i l l a n ce
17 (1 0001)
 83  (AP:24)
18 (1 0010)
 83  (AP:24)
19 (1 0011)
 83  (AP:24)
20 (1 0100)
( P C : 3 ) ( R R : 5 ) ( D I : 3 ) ( S D : 1 6 ) ( M A : 5 6 ) ( A P : 2 4 ) . . . . . . . . C o m m - A , A l t i t u d e R e q u e st
21 (1 0101)
( P C : 3 ) ( R R : 5 ) ( D I : 3 ) ( S D : 1 6 ) ( M A : 5 6 ) ( A P : 2 4 ) . . . . . . . . C o m m - A , I d e n t i t y R e q u e st
22 (1 0110)
 83  (AP:24)
23 (1 0111)
 83  (AP:24)
24 (1 1)
(RC:2)
(NC:4)
(MC:80)
(AP:24) ........................Comm-C (ELM)
NOTE: ( XX:M) r epr esents a field designated XX containing M number of assigned bits.
NOTE: N r epr esents fr ee coding space with N available bits, coded as Zer os for
tr ansmission.
NOTE: For Uplink For mats ( UF) 0 thr ough 23, the for mat number cor r esponds to the binar y
code in the fir st 5 bits of the inter r ogation. For mat number 24 is ar bitr ar ily defined
as the for mat beginning with O nes in the fir st two bit positions.
NOTE: All for mats ar e shown for completeness, although a number of them ar e unused.
O ver view of Mode S Inter r ogation For mats
Table 1
APPENDIX D
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
FORMAT
NO.
DF
0 ( 0 0 0 0 0 ) ( V S : 1 ) ( C C : 1 ) - 1 - ( S L : 3 ) - 2 - ( R I : 4 ) - 2 - ( A C : 1 3 ) ( A P : 2 4 ) . . . . . . . . S h o r t A i r - A i r S u r ve i l l a n ce
1 (0 0001)
 27  (P:24)
2 (0 0010)
 27  (P:24)
3 (0 0011)
 27  (P:24)
4 (0 0100)
(FS:3)
(DR:5)
(UM:6)
(AC:13)
( A P : 2 4 ) . . . . . S u r ve i l l a n ce , A l t i t u d e R e p l y
5 (0 0101)
(FS:3)
(DR:5)
(UM:6)
(ID:13)
( A P - 2 4 ) . . . . . S u r ve i l l a n ce , I d e n t i t y R e p l y
6 (0 0110)
 27  (P:24)
7 (0 0111)
 27  (P:24)
8 (0 1000)
 27  (P:24)
9 (0 1001)
 27  (P:24)
10 (0 1010)
 27  (P:24)
11 (0 1011)
(CA:3)
(AA:24)
( P I : 2 4 ) . . . . . . . A l l C a l l R e p l y/ A Q S q u i t t e r
12 (0 1100)
 27  (P:24)
13 (0 1101)
 27  (P:24)
14 (0 1110)
 27  (P:24)
15 (0 1111)
16 (1 0000)
17 (1 0001)
 27  (P:24)
( V S : 1 ) - 2 - ( S L : 3 ) - 2 - ( R I : 4 ) - 2 - ( A C : 1 3 ) ( M V : 5 6 ) ( A P : 2 4 ) . . . . . . . . . L o n g A i r - A i r S u r ve i l l a n ce
(CA:3)
(AA:24)
(ME:56)
( P I : 2 4 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E xt e n d e d S q u i t t e r
18 (1 0010)
 83  (P:24)
19 (1 0011)
 83  (P:24)
20 (1 0100)
(FS:3) (DR:5) (UM:6) (AC:13) (MB:56) (AP:24) ...........Comm-B, Altitude Reply
21 (1 0101)
(FS:3) (DR:5) (UM:6) (ID:13) (MB:56) (AP:24) ........... Comm-B, Identity Reply
22 (1 0110)
 83  (P:24)
23 (1 0111)
 83  (P:24)
24 (1 11)
(KE:1)
(ND:4)
(MD:80)
(AP:24) ....................... Comm-D (ELM)
NOTE: ( XX:M) r epr esents a field designated XX containing M number of assigned bits.
NOTE: ( P:24) r epr esents a 24- bit field r eser ved for par ity infor mation.
NOTE: N r epr esents fr ee coding space with N available bits, coded as Zer os for
tr ansmission.
NOTE: F or Downlink F or mats ( DF) 0 thr ough 23, the for mat number cor r esponds to the
binar y code in the fir st 5 bits of the r eply. For mat number 24 is ar bitr ar ily defined
as the for mat beginning with O nes in the fir st thr ee bit positions.
NOTE: All for mats ar e shown for completeness, although a number of them ar e unused.
O ver view O f Mode S Reply For mats
Table 2
APPENDIX D
Page 3
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
NO. OF
BITS
BITS
POSITION
AA
24
9-32
X
The aircraft address announced in the clear,
used in DF=11, 17.
AC
13
20-32
X
The altitude code used in formats DF=0, 4,
16 and 20. All bits are Zeros if altitude
information is not available. Contains
metric altitude if M-bit (26) is One.
AP
24
24
33-56
89-112
X
AQ
1
14
X
Designates formats UF=0, 16 as acquisition
t r a n sm i ssi o n s. B i t 1 4 ( R I , D F = 0 , 1 6 ) ,
r e p e a t s A Q a s r e ce i ve d b y t r a n sp o n d e r .
BD
8
15-22
X
Contains the identity of the ground-initiated
C o m m - B r e g i st e r co n t e n t s t o a p p e a r i n t h e
MV field of the corresponding reply, used in
UF=0.
CA
3
6-8
X
U se d i n D F = 1 1 o r D F 1 7 t o r e p o r t
transponder capability. Codes are:
0 = Level 1, no communications capability
( su r ve i l l a n ce o n l y, ) T r a n sp o n d e r a cce p t s
U F = 0 , 4 , 5 , 1 1 ; T r a n sp o n d e r t r a n sm i t s
DF=0, 4, 5, 11.
1 = L e ve l 2 , C o m m - A a n d C o m m - B
capability, Transponder accepts UF=0,
4 , 5 , 1 1 , 2 0 , 2 1 ; T r a n sp o n d e r t r a n sm i t s
DF=0, 4, 5, 11, 20, 21.
2 = L e ve l 3 , C o m m - A , C o m m - B a n d u p l i n k
ELM capability, Transponder accepts
U F = 0 , 4 , 5 , 1 1 , 2 0 , 2 1 , 2 4 ; T r a n sp o n d e r
t r a n sm i t s D F = 0 , 4 , 5 , 1 1 , 2 0 , 2 1 .
3 = Level 4, Comm-A, Comm-B, uplink and
downlink ELM capability, Transponder
a cce p t s U F = 0 , 4 , 5 , 1 1 , 2 0 , 2 1 , 2 4 ;
T r a n sp o n d e r t r a n sm i t s D F = 0 , 4 , 5 , 1 1 ,
20, 21, 24.
4 = Level 2, 3 or 4; ability to set code 7, and
is on the ground.
5 = Level 2, 3 or 4; ability to set code 7, and
is airborne.
6 = Level 2, 3 or 4; ability to set code 7.
7 = DR≠0 or FS=3, 4 or 5.
N O T E : C o d e s 4 - 7 a r e f o r sq u i t t e r s o n l y.
CC
1
7
FIELD
SUB
FIELD
FORMATS
UP DOWN
X
X
CONTENT
P a r i t y o ve r l a i d o n t h e A d d r e ss a p p e a r s a t
the end of all transmissions, uplink and
downlink, with exception of format DF11.
Indicates transponder has ability to support
crosslink capability (decode the contents of
the UF=0 BD field and respond with the
contents of the specified ground-initiated
C o m m - B r e g i st e r i n t h e M V f i e l d o f t h e
corresponding DF=16 reply. Used in DF=0.
O ver view of For mat Definitions
Table 3
APPENDIX D
Page 4
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
NO. OF
BITS
BITS
POSITION
CL
3
14-16
DF
5
1-5
DI
3
14-16
DR
5
9-13
X
FS
3
6-8
X
FIELD
SUB
FIELD
FORMATS
UP DOWN
X
X
X
CONTENT
C o d e L a b e l d e f i n e s I C f i e l d a s f o l l o w s:
0 = IC field contains the II code.
1 = IC field contains SI codes 1 to 15.
2 = IC field contains SI codes 16 to 31.
3 = IC field contains SI codes 32 to 47.
4 = IC field contains SI codes 48 to 63.
5 - 7 = N o t a ssi g n e d .
The first field in all downlink formats is the
transmission descriptor.
Identifies coding contained in the SD field
in formats UF=4, 5, 20, 21. Codes are:
0 = SD has Interrogator Identifier (IIS).
1 = S D co n t a i n s ( I I S , M B S , M E S , L O S , R S S ,
TMS).
2 = S D co n t a i n s ( T C S , R C S , S A S )
3 = S D co n t a i n s ( S I S , L S S , R R S )
4 - 6 = N o t a ssi g n e d .
7 = S D co n t a i n s ( I I S , R R S , L O S , T M S )
R e q u e s t s e x t r a c t i o n o f d o w n l i n k m e ssa g e s
f r o m t r a n sp o n d e r b y i n t e r r o g a t o r . A p p e a r s
in formats DF=4, 5, 20, 21. Codes are:
0 = No downlink request.
1 = R e q u e st t o se n d C o m m - B ( B b i t se t ) ,
2 = T C A S i n f o r m a t i o n a va i l a b l e .
3 = T C A S i n f o r m a t i o n a v a i l a b l e a n d r e q u e st
t o se n d C o m m - B m e ssa g e .
4 = Comm-B Broadcast #1 available.
5 = Comm-B Broadcast #2 available.
6 = TCAS information and Comm-B
Broadcast #1 available.
7 = TCAS information and Comm-B
Broadcast #2 available.
8-15 = Not assigned.
1 6 - 3 1 = R e q u e st t o se n d n - se g m e n t s,
signified by 15 + n.
C o d e s 1 - 1 5 t a ke p r i o r i t y o ve r co d e s 1 6 - 3 1 .
R e p o r t s f l i g h t st a t u s o f a i r cr a f t a n d i s u se d
in formats DF=4, 5, 20, 21. Codes are:
CODE ALERT
SPI
ON THE
AIRBORNE GROUND
0
no
no
yes
no
1
no
no
no
yes
2
yes
no
yes
no
no
3
yes
no
4
yes
yes
either
yes
5
no
yes
either
6, 7 are not assigned.
O ver view of For mat Definitions
Table 3 ( Cont)
APPENDIX D
Page 5
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
FIELD
SUB
FIELD
IC
NO. OF
BITS
BITS
POSITION
4
10-13
FORMATS
UP DOWN
X
CONTENT
Identifies the interrogator and appears in
UF=11, the Mode S Only All Call.
NOTE: The same information may also
a p p e a r i n S I S o r I I S su b f i e l d s o f S D .
ID
13
2-32
X
T h e 4 0 9 6 i d e n t i f i c a t i o n c o d e , n u m b e r s , a s,
se t b y t h e p i l o t , i n D F = 5 , 2 1 .
KE
1
4
X
I n d i ca t e s T A S su b f i e l d e xi st s i n M D f i e l d ,
C o m m - D r e p l i e s/ D F 2 4 , i f 1 ( U E L M p r o t o co l )
o r d o e s n o t e xi st i f 0 ( D E L M p r o t o co l ) .
MA
56
33-88
X
M e ssa g e s d i r e ct e d t o t h e a i r cr a f t , p a r t o f
C o m m - A i n t e r r o g a t i o n s, U F = 2 0 , 2 1 .
ADS
8
33-40
X
Defines the content of the MA message field
in Comm-A requests and is expressed in two
g r o u p s o f 4 b i t s e a ch , A D S 1 ( 3 3 - 3 6 ) a n d
ADS2 (37-40).
ADS1
4
33-36
X
P a r t o f t h e A - D e f i n i t i o n S u b f i e l d a n d i s se t
t o 0 f o r T C A S S e n si t i vi t y L e ve l C o m m a n d s.
ADS2
4
37-40
X
P a r t o f t h e A - D e f i n i t i o n S u b f i e l d a n d i s se t
t o 5 f o r T C A S S e n si t i vi t y L e ve l C o m m a n d s.
SLC
4
41-44
X
56
33-88
X
S e n si t i vi t y L e ve l C o m m a n d f o r t h e T C A S
a i r cr a f t . T h e co d e s a r e :
0 = No command.
1 = N o t A ssi g n e d .
2 = S e l e ct T A _ O N L Y m o d e o f o p e r a t i o n .
3 = S e t T C A S S e n si t i vi t y L e ve l t o 3 .
4 = S e t T C A S S e n si t i vi t y L e ve l t o 4 .
5 = S e t T C A S S e n si t i vi t y L e ve l t o 5 .
6 = S e t T C A S S e n si t i vi t y L e ve l t o 6 .
7 = S e t T C A S S e n si t i vi t y L e ve l t o 7 .
8 - 1 4 = N o t A ssi g n e d .
15 = Cancel previous Sensitivity Level.
M e ssa g e s t o b e t r a n sm i t t e d t o i n t e r r o g a t o r ,
p a r t o f t h e C o m m - B r e p l i e s, D F = 2 0 , 2 1 .
The field contains Data Link, Capability
R e p o r t s o r A i r cr a f t I d e n t i f i ca t i o n R e p o r t s o r
T C A S R e so l u t i o n A d vi so r y R e p o r t s.
ACS
20
45-64
X
Comm-A capability subfield reports data link
service(s) supported by the installation. If
all bits are Zeros, no Comm-A data link
se r vi ce s a r e su p p o r t e d .
AIS
48
41-88
X
A i r cr a f t I d e n t i f i ca t i o n , r e p o r t e d w h e n a
su r ve i l l a n ce o r C o m m - A i n t e r r o g a t i o n
( U F = 4 , 5 , 2 0 , 2 1 ) co n t a i n s R R = 1 8 a n d
D I = a n yt h i n g b u t 7 . A I S co n t a i n s u p t o e i g h t
6-bit characters as defined in Table 4.
MB
O ver view of For mat Definitions
T able 3 ( Cont)
APPENDIX D
Page 6
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
FIELD
SUB
FIELD
NO. OF
BITS
BITS
POSITION
FORMATS
UP DOWN
MB
ARA
14
41-54
X
ATS
1
35
X
BCS
16
65-80
X
C o m m - B c a p a b i l i t y s u b f i e l d r e p o r t s i n st a l l e d
data sources that can be accessed by the
ground for transmission via a groundi n i t i a t e d C o m m - B . I f a l l b i t s a r e Z e r o s, n o
data is accessible by a ground-initiated
Comm-B.
BDS
8
33-40
X
D e f i n e s t h e c o n t e n t o f t h e M B m e ssa g e f i e l d
in reply to ground-initiated Comm-B and is
e x p r e s s e d i n t w o g r o u p s o f 4 b i t s e a ch ,
BDS1 (33-36) and BDS2 (37-40).
BDS1
4
33-36
X
BDS2
4
37-40
X
C o r r e sp o n d s w i t h R R i n U F = 4 , 5 , 2 0 , 2 1 .
The codes are:
0 = M B co n t a i n s A i r - i n i t i a t e d C o m m - B .
1 = MB contains Data Link Capability
Report.
2 = M B co n t a i n s A i r cr a f t I d e n t i f i ca t i o n .
3 = M B co n t a i n s T C A S R e so l u t i o n A d vi so r y.
4-15 = Not assigned.
B a si c r e p o r t u se s B D S 2 = 0 . M o r e co m p l e x
Mode S installations report additional
c a p a b i l i t i e s i n v a r i o u s f o r m a t s a s si g n e d t o
B D S 2 co d e s o t h e r t h a n 0 a s r e q u e st e d b y
i n t e r r o g a t o r , s p e c i f i e d i n t h e R R S su b f i e l d
of SD.
CONTENT
T C A S R e so l u t i o n A d vi so r y R e p o r t i n d i ca t i n g
cu r r e n t A ct i ve R e so l u t i o n A d vi so r i e s ( i f a n y)
g e n e r a t e d b y o w n T C A S u n i t a g a i n st o n e o r
m o r e t h r e a t a i r cr a f t . E a ch b i t i n d i ca t e s a
specific resolution advisory with One being
active and Zero being inactive. Bit
indications are:
41-Climb.
4 2 - D o n ’t d e s c e n d .
4 3 - D o n ’t d e s c e n d f a s t e r t h a n 5 0 0 F P M .
4 4 - D o n ’t d e s c e n d f a s t e r t h a n 1 0 0 0 F P M .
45-Don’t descend faster than 2000 FPM.
46-Descend.
47-Don't climb.
48-Don't climb faster than 500 FPM.
4 9 - D o n ' t cl i m b f a st e r t h a n 1 0 0 0 F P M .
5 0 - D o n ' t cl i m b f a st e r t h a n 2 0 0 0 F P M .
51-Turn left.
52-Turn right.
53-Don't turn left.
54-Don't turn right.
Altitude Type subfield in Squitter Capability
R e p o r t ( r e q u e st e d w i t h R R = 1 6 , D I = 7 , R R S = 7 )
is 0 to report barometric altitude or 1 to
report navigation-derived height.
O ver view of For mat Definitions
Table 3 ( Cont)
APPENDIX D
Page 7
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
FIELD
SUB
FIELD
NO. OF
BITS
BITS
POSITION
MB
CFS
4
41-44
X
Continuation subfield contains the BDS2
value of the next additional capability report
available from the installation.
ECS
8
81-88
X
Data Link Capability subfield reports ELM
capability of installation. No ELM data link
s e r v i c e s a r e s u p p o r t e d i f a l l b i t s a r e Z e r o s.
MTE
1
60
X
Multiple Threat Encounter bit indicates ≥2
si m u l t a n e o u s T C A S t h r e a t s.
RAC
4
55-58
X
RAT
1
59
X
Resolution Advisory Complements subfield
indicates currently active resolution,
advisory complements (if any) received from
a l l o t h e r T C A S a i r cr a f t w i t h o n - b o a r d
resolution capability. Bits are set to One
w h e n a ct i ve a n d Z e r o w h e n i n a ct i ve . B i t
indications are:
5 5 - D o n ’t d e s c e n d .
5 6 - D o n ’t c l i m b .
57-Don’t turn left.
58-Don't turn right.
R e so l u t i o n A d vi so r y T e r m i n a t e d i n d i ca t o r i s
se t t o O n e f o r 1 8 se co n d s ( ± 1 s e c o n d )
following termination of a previously
reported resolution advisory.
TID
26
33-88
X
Threat Identity Data subfield contains data
a cco r d i n g t o T T I f i e l d . I f T T I = 1 , T I D
co n t a i n s M o d e S a d d r e ss o f t h r e a t i n b i t s
63-85 (bits 87-88 are Zero). If TTI=2, TID
contains altitude, range and bearing data.
TIDA
13
63-75
X
Threat Identity Data, Altitude subfield
reports Mode C altitude code of the threat.
TIDB
6
83-88
X
T h r e a t I d e n t i t y, B e a r i n g su b f i e l d r e p o r t s
m o st r e ce n t b e a r i n g o f t h e t h r e a t .
TIDR
7
76-82
X
T h r e a t I d e n t i t y, R a n g e su b f i e l d r e p o r t s m o st
r e ce n t r a n g e o f t h e t h r e a t .
TRS
2
33-34
X
TTI
2
61-62
X
T r a n sm i ssi o n R a t e su b f i e l d i n S q u i t t e r
Capability Report (requested with RR=16,
DI=7,RRS=7) value indications are:
0 = No capability to automatically determine
su r f a ce sq u i t t e r ( S q t r ) r a t e .
1 = A i r cr a f t se l e ct e d h i g h su r f a ce S q t r r a t e .
2 = A i r cr a f t se l e ct e d l o w su r f a ce S q t r r a t e .
3 = Not assigned.
Threat Type Indicator subfield defines type
of data in TID field.
80
9-88
MC
FORMATS
UP DOWN
X
CONTENT
Comm-C field contains one segment of a
sequence of segments transmitted to the
t r a n sp o n d e r i n t h e E L M m o d e . M C i s p a r t o f
UF=24.
O ver view of For mat Definitions
T able 3 ( Cont)
APPENDIX D
Page 8
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
FIELD
SUB
FIELD
NO. OF
BITS
BITS
POSITION
MC
IIS
4
SRS
16
9-12 (if
RC=0 to 2)
or 25-28 (if
RC=3)
9-24
80
9-88
X
Comm-D field, part of DF=24, contains one
segment of a sequence of segments
t r a n sm i t t e d b y t h e t r a n sp o n d e r i n t h e E L M
m o d e . I t m a y co n t a i n a su m m a r y o f
received MC segments of an uplink ELM.
16
17-32
X
Reports segments received in a Comm-C
sequence. Starting with bit 17 denoting the
first segment, each successive bit is One if
t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g s e g m e n t w a s r e ce i ve d .
T A S a p p e a r s i f K E = 1 i n t h e sa m e r e p l y.
R e f e r t o T a b l e 5 f o r va l u e s.
56
33-88
X
E xt e n d e d sq u i t t e r m e ssa g e , p a r t o f D F = 1 7 ,
co n t a i n s b r o a d ca st m e ssa g e s. F i r st f i ve
bits indicate type of DF=17 message
according to Table 6.
ACS
12
41-52
X
Altitude Code subfield reports altitude in
D F 1 7 A sa m e a s A C f i e l d w i t h o u t t h e M b i t .
SSS
2
38-39
X
56
33-88
X
S u r ve i l l a n ce S t a t u s su b f i e l d r e p o r t s st a t u s
i n D F 1 7 A a s f o l l o w s:
0 = N o st a t u s i n f o r m a t i o n .
1 = T r a n sp o n d e r r e p o r t s p e r m a n e n t a l e r t .
2 = T r a n sp o n d e r r e p o r t s t e m p o r a r y a l e r t .
3 = T r a n sp o n d e r r e p o r t s S P I co n d i t i o n .
F i e l d , p a r t o f t h e l o n g a i r - a i r s u r v e i l l a n ce
i n t e r r o g a t i o n U F = 1 6 , co n t a i n s i n f o r m a t i o n
f o r a i r - t o - a i r e xch a n g e s ( T C A S , R e so l u t i o n
M e ssa g e s a n d T C A S B r o a d ca st M e ssa g e s) .
3
47-49
X
MD
TAS
ME
MU
CHC
FORMATS
UP DOWN
CONTENT
X
I n t e r r o g a t o r I d e n t i f i e r su b f i e l d r e p o r t s t h e
identity of the interrogator (See SD and UM
fields).
X
I f a C o m m - C i n t e r r o g a t i o n ( U F = 2 4 ) co n t a i n s
R C = 3 , t h e S R S su b f i e l d co n t a i n s a l i st o f
se g m e n t r e q u e st - a u t h o r i za t i o n s f o r D E L M s
i n t h e 1 6 - b i t ( 9 - 2 4 ) S R S su b f i e l d . S t a r t i n g
w i t h b i t 9 , d e n o t i n g t h e f i r s t s e g m e n t , e a ch
o f t h e f o l l o w i n g b i t s i s se t t o O n e i f t h e
t r a n sm i ssi o n o f t h e co r r e sp o n d i n g se g m e n t
i s r e q u e st e d . R e f e r t o T a b l e 5 .
C a n c e l H o r i z o n t a l R e s o l u t i o n A d v i so r y
C o m p l e m e n t . I n T C A S R e so l u t i o n
M e ssa g e s t r a n sm i t t e d b y T C A S w i t h o u t
h o r i zo n t a l r e so l u t i o n ca p a b i l i t y, C H C i s se t
t o 0 . T h e co d e s a r e :
0 = No cancellation.
1 = C a n ce l , d o n ’t t u r n l e f t .
2 = C a n ce l , d o n ’t t u r n r i g h t .
3 - 7 = N o t a ssi g n e d .
O ver view of For mat Definitions
Table 3 ( Cont)
APPENDIX D
Page 9
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
FIELD
SUB
FIELD
NO. OF
BITS
BITS
POSITION
FORMATS
UP DOWN
MU
CVC
2
43-44
X
HRC
3
50-52
X
HSB
5
56-60
X
MID
24
65-88
X
CONTENT
C a n ce l V e r t i ca l R e so l u t i o n A d vi so r y
Complement. The codes are:
0 = No cancellation.
1 = C a n c e l , d o n ’t d e s c e n d .
2 = Cancel, don’t climb.
3 = Not assigned.
H o r i zo n t a l R e so l u t i o n A d vi so r y C o m p l e m e n t .
I n T C A S R e so l u t i o n M e ssa g e s t r a n sm i t t e d
b y T C A S w i t h o u t h o r i zo n t a l r e so l u t i o n
ca p a b i l i t y, H R C i s se t t o 0 . T h e co d e s a r e :
0 = No horizontal resolution advisory
complement sent.
1 = I n t r u d e r T C A S se n se i s t u r n l e f t / d o n o t
turn left.
2 = I n t r u d e r T C A S se n se i s t u r n l e f t / d o n o t
turn right.
3 - 4 = N o t a ssi g n e d .
5 = I n t r u d e r T C A S se n se i s t u r n r i g h t / d o n o t
turn left.
6 = I n t r u d e r T C A S se n se i s t u r n r i g h t / d o n o t
turn right.
7 = Not assigned.
E n co d e d S e n se B i t s f o r H o r i zo n t a l
Resolution Complements provide a parity
coding field protecting the six horizontal
se n se b i t s ( C H C a n d H R C ) a n d a r e u se d i n
TCAS III Resolution Messages.
Contains discrete address of interrogating
a i r cr a f t a n d i s i n T C A S R e so l u t i o n
A d vi so r i e s L o ck R e q u e st s, T C A S R e so l u t i o n
M e ssa g e s a n d T C A S B r o a d ca st M e ssa g e s.
N O T E : T C A S B r o a d ca st M e ssa g e i s se n t a t
10-second intervals.
MTB
1
42
X
Multiple Threat Bit indicates more than one
T C A S t h r e a t w h e n se t t o O n e a n d n o m o r e
t h a n o n e t h r e a t w h e n se t t o Z e r o .
UDS
8
33-40
X
Defines the content of the MU message field
and is expressed in two 4-bit groups, UDS1
(33-36) and UDS2 (37-40).
UDS1
4
33-36
X
I s se t t o 3 f o r T C A S R e so l u t i o n M e ssa g e s
a n d T C A S B r o a d ca st M e ssa g e s.
UDS2
4
37-40
X
I s se t t o 0 f o r T C A S R e so l u t i o n M e ssa g e s o r
se t t o 2 f o r T C A S B r o a d ca st M e ssa g e s.
VRC
2
45-46
X
V e r t i ca l R e so l u t i o n A d vi so r y C o m p l e m e n t
(VRC) contains code as follows:
0 = No VRC sent.
1 = Don't descend.
2 = Don't climb.
3 = Not assigned.
O ver view of For mat Definitions
T able 3 ( Cont)
APPENDIX D
Page 10
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
FIELD
SUB
FIELD
NO. OF
BITS
BITS
POSITION
MU
VSB
4
61-64
MV
ARA
FORMATS
UP DOWN
X
CONTENT
E n co d e d S e n se B i t s f o r V e r t i ca l R e so l u t i o n
Complements provide a parity coding field
t o p r o t e ct f o u r ve r t i ca l se n se b i t s ( C V C a n d
V R C ) i n a l l T C A S R e so l u t i o n M e ssa g e s. I f
bits 43-46 do not agree with bits 61-64, the
T C A S r e ce i ve r a ssu m e s a n e r r o r a n d
d i sr e g a r d s m e ssa g e . B i t s a r e a s f o l l o w s:
43
44
45
46
61
62
63
64
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
56
33-88
X
F i e l d , p a r t o f t h e l o n g a i r - a i r s u r v e i l l a n ce
r e p l y D F = 1 6 , c o n t a i n s i n f o r m a t i o n u se d i n
a i r - t o - a i r e xch a n g e s ( C o o r d i n a t i o n R e p l y
M e ssa g e ) .
14
41-54
X
Same as in MB field.
MTE
1
60
X
Same as in MB field.
RAC
4
55-58
X
Same as in MB field.
RAT
1
59
X
Same as in MB field.
VDS
8
33-40
X
D e f i n e s t h e c o n t e n t o f t h e M V m e ssa g e f i e l d
a n d i s e xp r e sse d i n t w o 4 - b i t g r o u p s, V D S 1
(33-36) and VDS2 (37-40).
VDS1
4
33-36
X
I s se t t o 3 f o r C o o r d i n a t i o n R e p l y M e ssa g e .
VDS2
4
37-40
X
I s se t t o 0 f o r C o o r d i n a t i o n R e p l y M e ssa g e .
NC
4
5-8
ND
4
5-8
X
P r o v i d e s t h e s e g m e n t n u m b e r t r a n sm i t t e d i n
an uplink ELM and is part of a Comm-C
interrogation, UF=24.
X
P r o v i d e s t h e s e g m e n t n u m b e r t r a n sm i t t e d i n
a downlink ELM and is part of a Comm-D
r e p l y, D F = 2 4 .
O ver view of For mat Definitions
Table 3 ( Cont)
APPENDIX D
Page 11
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
NO. OF
BITS
BITS
POSITION
PC
3
6-8
PI
24
33-56
PR
4
6-9
FIELD
SUB
FIELD
FORMATS
UP DOWN
X
X
X
CONTENT
Contains operating commands to the
transponder and is part of surveillance and
Comm-A interrogations UF=4, 5, 20, 21
( i g n o r e d w h e n D I = 3 ) . T h e co d e s a r e :
0 = No changes in transponder state.
1 = Non-selective All Call lockout.
2 = Not assigned.
3 = Not assigned.
4 = C a n ce l B .
5 = Cancel C.
6 = Cancel D.
7 = Not assigned.
Contains the parity overlaid on the
i n t e r r o g a t o r co d e . P I i s i n D F = 1 1 o r D F 1 7 .
Field contains commands to the transponder
specifying the reply probability to the Mode
S Only All Call interrogation, UF=11
co n t a i n i n g t h e P R . A co m m a n d t o d i sr e g a r d
any lockout state can also be given. The
assigned codes are:
0 = Reply with probability = 1.
1 = Reply with probability = 1/2.
2 = Reply with probability = 1/4.
3 = Reply with probability = 1/8.
4 = Reply with probability = 1/16.
5,6,7 = Do not Reply.
8 = Disregard lockout, reply with probability
= 1.
9 = Disregard lockout, reply with probability
= 1/2.
10 = Disregard lockout, reply with,
probability = 1/4.
1 1 = D i sr e g a r d l o cko u t , r e p l y w i t h
probability = 1/8.
1 2 = D i sr e g a r d l o cko u t , r e p l y w i t h
probability = 1/16.
1 3 , 1 4 , 1 5 = D o n o t r e p l y.
NOTE: On receipt of a Mode S Only All Call
containing a PR code other than 0 or
8 , t r a n sp o n d e r e xe cu t e s a r a n d o m
process and makes a reply decision
for the interrogation in accordance
with the commanded probability.
Random occurrence of replies
enables interrogator to acquire
closely spaced aircraft when replies
would otherwise synchronously
garble each other.
O ver view of For mat Definitions
T able 3 ( Cont)
APPENDIX D
Page 12
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
NO. OF
BITS
BITS
POSITION
RC
2
3-4
RI
4
14-17
RL
1
9
X
RR
5
9-13
X
FIELD
SUB
FIELD
FORMATS
UP DOWN
X
CONTENT
Designates transmitted segment as initial,
intermediate or final if coded 0, 1 or 2
r e sp e ct i ve l y. R C = 3 i s u se d t o r e q u e st
C o mm- D D E L M s b y the transponder. R C i s
part of Comm-C interrogation, UF=24.
X
I n f o r m a t i o n i n D F = 0 , 1 6 . T h e co d e s a r e :
0 = No on-board TCAS.
1 = Not assigned.
2 = O n - b o a r d T C A S w i t h r e so l u t i o n
capability inhibited.
3 = O n - b o a r d T C A S w i t h ve r t i ca l - o n l y
resolution capability.
4 = O n - b o a r d T C A S w i t h ve r t i ca l a n d
h o r i z o n t a l r e s o l u t i o n c a p a b i l i t y.
5 - 7 = N o t a ssi g n e d .
8 = No maximum airspeed data available.
9 = A i r sp e e d i s ≤ 7 5 kt s.
1 0 = A i r s p e e d i s > 7 5 k t s a n d ≤ 1 5 0 kt s.
1 1 = A i r s p e e d i s > 1 5 0 k t s a n d ≤ 3 0 0 kt s.
1 2 = A i r s p e e d i s > 3 0 0 k t s a n d ≤ 6 0 0 kt s.
1 3 = A i r s p e e d i s > 6 0 0 k t s a n d ≤ 1 2 0 0 kt s.
14 = Airspeed is >1200 kts.
15 = Not assigned.
C o m m a n d , s e n t i n U F = 0 , 1 6 ; s o l i ci t s D F = 0
reply if Zero and DF=16 reply if One (only
i f t r a n sp o n d e r i s a sso ci a t e d w i t h A i r b o r n e
C o l l i si o n A vo i d a n ce S yst e m [ A C A S ]
e q u i p m e n t ) . O t h e r w i se , i n U F = 0 , Z e r o
solicits DF=0 reply and One solicits no
reply. In UF=16, Zero solicits DF=16 reply
and One solicits no reply.
Contains length and content of interrogator
requested reply. RR is part of surveillance
and Comm-A interrogations UF=4, 5, 20, 21.
RR
CODE
REPLY
LENGTH
0-15
Short
N/A
16
Long
Air initiated Comm-B
MB CONTENT
17
Long
Data link capability
18
Long
Aircraft Identification
19
Long
Resolution Advisories
20-31
Long
Not Assigned
N O T E : I f f i r st b i t o f R R co d e i s O n e ,
decimal equivalent of last four bits
of RR code designates code for
BDS1 in reply (ground initiated).
B D S 2 i s a ssu m e d t o b e Z e r o i f n o t
specified by DI=7 and RRS.
O ver view of For mat Definitions
Table 3 ( Cont)
APPENDIX D
Page 13
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
FIELD
SUB
FIELD
NO. OF
BITS
BITS
POSITION
16
17-32
X
Contains control codes, as specified by the
DI field affecting transponder protocol and
i s p a r t o f su r ve i l l a n ce a n d C o m m - A
interrogations UF=4, 5, 20, 21.
IIS
4
17-20
X
I n t e r r o g a t o r I d e n t i f i e r su b f i e l d co n t a i n s t h e
self-identification code of the interrogator
and is numerically identical to the II code
t r a n sm i t t e d b y t h e i n t e r r o g a t o r i n M o d e S
Only All Calls. IIS codes are 0 through 15;
I I S = 0 i s n o t a va l i d i n t e r r o g a t o r i d e n t i f i e r f o r
multisite purposes. IIS is sent only when
DI=0, 1 or 7.
LOS
1
26
X
Lockout subfield, if set to One, initiates a
multisite All Call lockout to Mode S Only All
Calls (UF=11) from the Interrogator
i n d i ca t e d i n I I S o f t h e i n t e r r o g a t i o n . I f L O S
is set to Zero, no change in lockout state is
co m m a n d e d . L O S i s se n t o n l y i f D I = 1 o r 7 .
LSS
1
23
X
Lockout Surveillance subfield signifies
multisite lockout from interrogator indicated
in SIS field. Sent when DI=3.
MBS
2
21-22
X
MES
3
23-25
X
RCS
3
24-26
X
Multisite Comm-B subfield, sent when DI=1,
is assigned the following codes:
0 = N o C o m m - B a ct i o n .
1 = C o m m - B r e se r va t i o n .
2 = C o m m - B cl o se o u t .
Multisite ELM subfield, sent when DI=1,
contains reservation and closeout
co m m a n d s f o r E L M a s f o l l o w s:
0 = N o E L M a ct i o n .
1 = C o m m - C r e se r va t i o n .
2 = Comm-C closeout.
3 = C o m m - D r e se r va t i o n .
4 = Comm-D closeout.
5 = C o m m - C r e se r va t i o n a n d C o m m - D
closeout.
6 = Comm-C closeout and Comm-D
r e se r va t i o n .
7 = Comm-C and Comm-D closeouts.
Rate Control subfield, sent when DI=2,
co n t r o l s su r f a ce sq u i t t e r ( S q t r ) ( D F 1 7 S ) r a t e
with codes as follows:
0 = N o sq u i t t e r r a t e co m m a n d .
1 = R e p o r t h i g h su r f a ce S q t r r a t e f o r 6 0 S e c.
2 = Report low surface Sqtr rate for 60 Sec.
3 = S u p p r e ss a l l su r f a ce S q t r s f o r 6 0 S e c.
4 = S u p p r e ss a l l su r f a ce S q t r s f o r 1 2 0 S e c.
5 - 7 = N o t a ssi g n e d .
SD
FORMATS
UP DOWN
CONTENT
O ver view of For mat Definitions
T able 3 ( Cont)
APPENDIX D
Page 14
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
FIELD
SUB
FIELD
NO. OF
BITS
BITS
POSITION
FORMATS
UP DOWN
SD
RRS
4
21-24
X
Reply Request subfield, sent when DI=7,
contains coding corresponding to the
r e q u e st e d B D S 2 co d e .
RSS
2
27-28
X
SAS
2
27-28
X
SIS
6
17-22
X
Reservation Status subfield, sent when DI=1,
r e q u e st s t r a n sp o n d e r t o r e p o r t r e se r va t i o n
status in the UM field. The codes are:
0 = N o r e q u e st .
1 = R e p o r t C o m m - B r e se r va t i o n st a t u s.
2 = R e p o r t C o m m - C r e se r va t i o n st a t u s.
3 = R e p o r t C o m m - D r e se r va t i o n st a t u s.
Surface Antenna subfield, sent when DI=2,
controls diversity antenna used for squitters
sent from aircraft on the ground as follows:
0 = No antenna command, use top antenna.
1 = Alternate top and bottom antennas for
120 Sec.
2 = U s e b o t t o m a n t e n n a f o r 1 2 0 S e c.
3 = Return to default.
Surveillance Identifier subfield, sent when
DI=3, contains assigned interrogator SI code.
TCS
3
21-23
X
CONTENT
Type Control subfield, sent when DI=2,
controls reported position type as follows:
0 = No position type command.
1 = U s e s u r f a c e p o s i t i o n f o r n e x t 1 5 S e c.
2 = U s e s u r f a c e p o s i t i o n f o r n e x t 6 0 S e c.
3 = Cancel surface type command.
4 - 7 = N o t a ssi g n e d .
O ver view of For mat Definitions
Table 3 ( Cont)
APPENDIX D
Page 15
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
FIELD
SUB
FIELD
NO. OF
BITS
BITS
POSITION
SD
TMS
4
29-32
SL
3
9-11
UF
5
1-5
UM
6
14-19
FORMATS
UP DOWN
X
X
X
CONTENT
T a ct i ca l Message subfield, sent when DI=1
or 7 , c o n t a i n s c o d i n g f o r l i n k i n g t h e C o m m A m e ssa g e se g m e n t s. T h e co d e s a r e :
0 = N o A ct i o n .
1 = U n l i n ke d , P r i o r i t y.
2 = Unlinked, Acknowledge.
3 = U n l i n ke d , P r i o r i t y, A ckn o w l e d g e .
4 = L i n ke d 1 st S e g m e n t , S i n g l e A D S .
5 = L i n ke d 1 st S e g m e n t , S i n g l e A D S
P r i o r i t y.
6 = L i n ke d 1 st S e g m e n t , S i n g l e A D S
Acknowledge.
7 = L i n ke d 1 st S e g m e n t , S i n g l e A D S ,
P r i o r i t y, A ckn o w l e d g e .
8 = L i n ke d 1 st S e g m e n t , M u l t i p l e A D S .
9 = L i n ke d 1 st S e g m e n t , M u l t i p l e A D S ,
P r i o r i t y.
1 0 = L i n ke d 1 st S e g m e n t , M u l t i p l e A D S ,
Acknowledge.
1 1 = L i n ke d 1 st S e g m e n t , M u l t i p l e A D S ,
P r i o r i t y, A ckn o w l e d g e .
1 2 = S e co n d S e g m e n t .
13 = Third Segment.
14 = Final Segment.
1 5 = N o t A ssi g n e d .
Reports the current operating sensitivity
l e ve l o f t h e T C A S u n i t a n d i s a p a r t o f a i r air surveillance replies, DF=0, 16. The
co d e s a r e :
0 = N o T C A S se n si t i vi t y l e ve l r e p o r t e d .
1 = T C A S o p e r a t e s a t se n si t i vi t y l e ve l 1 .
2 = T C A S o p e r a t e s a t se n si t i vi t y l e ve l 2 .
3 = T C A S o p e r a t e s a t se n si t i vi t y l e ve l 3 .
4 = T C A S o p e r a t e s a t se n si t i vi t y l e ve l 4 .
5 = T C A S o p e r a t e s a t se n si t i vi t y l e ve l 5 .
6 = T C A S o p e r a t e s a t se n si t i vi t y l e ve l 6 .
7 = T C A S o p e r a t e s a t se n si t i vi t y l e ve l 7 .
NOTE: The SL field has no meaning for
a i r cr a f t w i t h R I = 0 ( n o o n - b o a r d
capability to generate resolution,
advisories).
The first field in all uplink formats is the
t r a n s m i s s i o n d e s c r i p t o r i n a l l i n t e r r o g a t i o n s.
X
Contains transponder status readouts in
replies DF=4, 5, 20, 21.
O ver view of For mat Definitions
T able 3 ( Cont)
APPENDIX D
Page 16
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
FIELD
SUB
FIELD
NO. OF
BITS
BITS
POSITION
UM
IDS
2
18-19
X
IIS
4
14-17
X
1
6
X
VS
FORMATS
UP DOWN
CONTENT
I d e n t i f i e r D e si g n a t o r su b f i e l d r e p o r t s t h e
t yp e o f r e se r va t i o n m a d e b y t h e i n t e r r o g a t o r
identified in IIS and corresponds with the
R S S su b f i e l d o f S D . A ssi g n e d co d i n g i s:
0 = No information available.
1 = C o m m - B r e se r va t i o n a ct i ve .
2 = C o m m - C r e se r va t i o n a ct i ve .
3 = C o m m - D r e se r va t i o n a ct i ve .
I n t e r r o g a t o r I d e n t i f i e r su b f i e l d r e p o r t s t h e
identity of the interrogator that has made a
m u l t i si t e r e se r va t i o n .
I n d i ca t e s a i r cr a f t i s a i r b o r n e w h e n Z e r o o r
a i r cr a f t i s o n t h e g r o u n d w h e n O n e . V S i s a
part of DF=0, 16.
O ver view of For mat Definitions
Table 3 ( Cont)
APPENDIX D
Page 17
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
B5
0
0
1
1
B6
0
1
0
1
P
SP
0
B4
B3
B2
B1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
A
Q
1
0
0
1
0
B
R
2
0
0
1
1
C
S
3
0
1
0
0
D
T
4
0
1
0
1
E
U
5
0
1
1
0
F
V
6
0
1
1
1
G
W
7
1
0
0
0
H
X
8
1
0
0
1
I
Y
9
Z
1
0
1
0
J
1
0
1
1
K
1
1
0
0
L
1
1
0
1
M
1
1
1
0
N
1
1
1
1
O
SP=SPACE code
6- Bit Char acter Set for AIS Subfield
Table 4
APPENDIX D
Page 18
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SRS OR TAS SUBFIELD VALUE
OCTAL
HEXADECIMAL
NUMBER OF SEGMENTS
100000
8000
1
140000
C000
2
160000
E000
3
170000
F000
4
174000
F800
5
176000
FC00
6
177000
FE00
7
177400
FF00
8
177600
FF80
9
177700
FFC0
10
177740
FFE0
11
177760
FFF0
12
177770
FFF8
13
177774
FFFC
14
177776
FFFE
15
177777
FFFF
16
Valid Values for SRS and TAS Subfields
Table 5
APPENDIX D
Page 19
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
FIRST TWO
DIGITS OF
ME FIELD IN
SQUITTER
DF17
LETTER
(2of2)
TYPE
TYPE
SCREEN
(SQUITTER (DECIMAL
SCREENS) VALUE)
(HEX)
DESCRIPTION
O
0
00-07
I n v a l i d , N o D a t a o r U n u se d
I
1
08-0F
A i r c r a f t I d e n t i f i ca t i o n , A i r cr a f t T yp e S e t D
I
2
10-17
A i r c r a f t I d e n t i f i ca t i o n , A i r cr a f t T yp e S e t C
I
3
18-1F
A i r c r a f t I d e n t i f i ca t i o n , A i r cr a f t T yp e S e t B
I
4
20-27
A i r c r a f t I d e n t i f i ca t i o n , A i r cr a f t T yp e S e t A
S
5
28-2F
S u r f a c e P o si t i o n , 5 m e t e r A N P
S
6
30-37
S u r f a c e P o si t i o n , 1 0 0 m e t e r A N P
A
7
38-3F
A i r b o r n e P o si t i o n , 5 m e t e r A N P , 2 5 / 1 0 0 F t b a r o m e t r i c
altitude
A
8
40-47
A i r b o r n e P o si t i o n , 1 0 0 m e t e r A N P , 2 5 / 1 0 0 F t b a r o m e t r i c
altitude
A
9
48-4F
A i r b o r n e P o si t i o n , 0 . 2 5 n m A N P , 2 5 / 1 0 0 F t b a r o m e t r i c
altitude
A
10
50-57
A i r b o r n e P o si t i o n , 1 . 0 n m A N P , 2 5 / 1 0 0 F t b a r o m e t r i c a l t i t u d e
A
11
58-5F
A i r b o r n e P o si t i o n , 4 . 5 n m A N P , 2 5 / 1 0 0 F t b a r o m e t r i c a l t i t u d e
A
12
60-67
A i r b o r n e P o si t i o n , 2 0 n m A N P , 2 5 / 1 0 0 F t b a r o m e t r i c a l t i t u d e
A
13
68-6F
A i r b o r n e P o si t i o n , 5 m e t e r A N P , G P S h e i g h t
A
14
70-77
A i r b o r n e P o si t i o n , 1 0 0 m e t e r A N P , G P S h e i g h t
T
15
78-7F
Airborne Supplementary Information
O
16
80-87
U n u se d
O
17
88-8F
U n u se d
O
18
90-97
U n u se d
O
19
98-9F
U n u se d
O
20
A0-A7
U n u se d
O
21
A8-AF
U n u se d
O
22
B0-B7
U n u se d
O
23
B8-BF
U n u se d
O
24
C0-C7
U n u se d
O
25
C8-CF
U n u se d
O
26
D0-D7
U n u se d
O
27
D8-DF
U n u se d
O
28
E0-E7
U n u se d
P
29
E8-EF
O n - D e m a n d I n f o r m a t i o n , M e ssa g e C
P
30
F0-F7
O n - D e m a n d I n f o r m a t i o n , M e ssa g e B
P
31
F8-FF
O n - D e m a n d I n f o r m a t i o n , M e ssa g e A
O RIG inal DF17 Squitter Types
Table 6
APPENDIX D
Page 20
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
LETTER
DF17
TYPE
TYPE
(SQUITTER (DECIMAL
SCREENS) VALUE)
DESCRIPTION
(POSITION/ALTITUDE ACCURACY)
A
0
A i r b o r n e P o si t i o n , N o p o si t i o n i n f o r m a t i o n , b a r o m e t r i c a l t i t u d e ( 2 5 / 1 0 0 F t )
I
1
A i r c r a f t I d e n t i f i ca t i o n , A i r cr a f t T yp e S e t D
I
2
A i r c r a f t I d e n t i f i ca t i o n , A i r cr a f t T yp e S e t C
I
3
A i r c r a f t I d e n t i f i ca t i o n , A i r cr a f t T yp e S e t B
I
4
A i r c r a f t I d e n t i f i ca t i o n , A i r cr a f t T yp e S e t A
S
5
Surface Position (<3 m)
S
6
Surface Position (≥3 m but <10 m)
S
7
Surface Position (≥10 m but <0.05 NM)
S
8
Surface Position (≥0.05 NM)
A
9
A i r b o r n e P o si t i o n ( < 3 m ) , b a r o m e t r i c a l t i t u d e ( 2 5 / 1 0 0 F t )
A
10
A i r b o r n e P o si t i o n ( ≥ 3 m b u t < 1 0 m ) , b a r o m e t r i c a l t i t u d e ( 2 5 / 1 0 0 F t )
A
11
A i r b o r n e P o si t i o n ( ≥ 1 0 m b u t < 0 . 0 5 N M ) , b a r o m e t r i c a l t i t u d e ( 2 5 / 1 0 0 F t )
A
12
A i r b o r n e P o si t i o n ( ≥ 0 . 0 5 N M b u t < 0 . 1 N M ) , b a r o m e t r i c a l t i t u d e ( 2 5 / 1 0 0 F t )
A
13
A i r b o r n e P o si t i o n ( ≥ 0 . 1 0 N M b u t < 0 . 2 5 N M ) , b a r o m e t r i c a l t i t u d e
(25/100 Ft)
A
14
A i r b o r n e P o si t i o n ( ≥ 0 . 2 5 N M b u t < 0 . 5 N M ) , b a r o m e t r i c a l t i t u d e ( 2 5 / 1 0 0 F t )
A
15
A i r b o r n e P o si t i o n ( ≥ 0 . 5 N M b u t < 1 N M ) , b a r o m e t r i c a l t i t u d e ( 2 5 / 1 0 0 F t )
A
16
A i r b o r n e P o si t i o n ( ≥ 1 N M b u t < 5 N M ) , b a r o m e t r i c a l t i t u d e ( 2 5 / 1 0 0 F t )
A
17
A i r b o r n e P o si t i o n ( ≥ 5 N M b u t < 1 0 N M ) , b a r o m e t r i c a l t i t u d e ( 2 5 / 1 0 0 F t )
A
18
A i r b o r n e P o si t i o n ( ≥ 1 0 N M ) , b a r o m e t r i c a l t i t u d e ( 2 5 / 1 0 0 F t )
V
19
A i r b o r n e V e l o ci t y
A
20
Airborne Position (<3 meter) and GPS height (<4 meter)
A
21
Airborne Position, (<10 meter) and GPS height (<15 meter)
A
22
Airborne Position, (>10 meter) or GPS height (≥ 15 meter)
O
23
U n u se d
O
24
U n u se d
O
25
U n u se d
O
26
U n u se d
O
27
U n u se d
O
28
U n u se d
E
29
E v e n t - D r i v e n I n f o r m a t i o n , M e ssa g e C
E
30
E v e n t - D r i v e n I n f o r m a t i o n , M e ssa g e B
E
31
E v e n t - D r i v e n I n f o r m a t i o n , M e ssa g e A
N O T E : T h e f i r s t t w o d i g i t s o f t h e M E f i e l d i n t h e C 6 0 S q u i t t e r ( 2 o f 2 ) a r e t h e sa m e a cco r d i n g t o
the DF17 type decimal value as in Appendix D, Table 6.
RTCA DF17 Squitter Types
Table 7
APPENDIX D
Page 21
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
THIS PAG E INT ENTIO NALLY LEFT BLANK.
APPENDIX D
Page 22
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
APPENDIX E - INTERROGATION AND REPLY TIMING
The following timing diagr ams contain the
inter r ogation and r eply pulse patter ns
nor mally encounter ed by tr ansponder s
oper ating
in
the
ATCRBS/Mode
S
envir onment.
NOTE: ATCRBS O nly All Call and
ATCRBS/Mode S All Call
inter r ogations may contain any
valid ATCRBS P 1 to P 3 spacing.
Appendix E, Figur e 2 shows only
Modes A and C.
APPENDIX E
Page 1
Dec 1/03
MODE D
MODE C
(MODE AC2 )
MODE B
MODE A
(MODE 3)
MODE T
(TEST MODE)
MODE 2
MODE 1
.8
P1
∗
3.0
8.0
6.5
.8
P3
17.0
21.0
25.0
NOTE: ALL MEASUREMENTS ARE EXPRESSED IN µ s.
SIDE-LOBE SUPPRESSION (SLS)
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
5.0
∗
P2
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
02402010
ATCRBS Inter r ogations
Figur e 1
APPENDIX E
Page 2
Dec 1/03
ATCRBS/MODE S
ALL CALL
(MODE C)
ATCRBS/MODE S
ALL CALL
(MODE A)
ATCRBS ONLY
ALL CALL
(MODE C)
ATCRBS ONLY
ALL CALL
(MODE A)
MODE S
P1
∗
∗
∗
∗
4.75
0.8
0.8
2.0
1.5
P2
P1
∗
8.0
8.0
∗
2.0
2.0
P3
.8
P4
21.0
1.6
21.0
SPR LOCATION
SIDE-LOBE SUPPRESSION (SLS)
P6
19.75
NOTE: ALL MEASUREMENTS ARE EXPRESSED IN µ s.
33.75
SHORT
2.0
2.0
1.6
.8
LONG
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
02402011
Mode S and All Call Inter r ogations
Figur e 2
APPENDIX E
Page 3
Dec 1/03
MODE C
A1
C1
F1
0.0 0.5 1.0
2.9
A1
1.45
C1
0
F1
A1
Example - Reply data block
corresponding to bit sequence
0010....001
LEADING EDGE TO
LEADING EDGE
SPACING (µs)
MODES 2,T,
AND A
MODE 1
F1
A2
5.8
A2
C4
7.25
C4
4.5
TIME ( µ s)
3.5
PREAMBLE
8.0 µ s
C2
4.35
C2
A2
A4
8.7
A4
A4
13.05
D1
B2
14.5
B2
B2
0
9.0
0
MODE S REPLY
8.0
0
1
1
0
BIT 2
BIT 1
ATCRBS REPLY
B1
11.6
B1
B1
1
1
B4
17.4
B4
D4
18.85
D4
0
1
0
0
BIT 4
DATA BLOCK
56 OR 112 µ s
BIT 3
D2
15.95
D2
B4
0
F2
20.3
F2
F2
1
0
0
BIT
N-1
1
1
0
BIT N
24.65
SPI
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
02402012
AT CRBS and Mode S Expected Replies
Figur e 3
APPENDIX E
Page 4
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
APPENDIX F - RELATED DOCUMENTS
Aer onautical T elecommunications, Annex
7, Januar y 1996; ICAO
Aer onautical T elecommunications, Annex
10, Volume 1, Part 1, O ctober 1994; ICAO
ARINC718- 4 Mar k3 Air Tr affic Contr ol
T r ansponder , December 1989; ARINC
AT C- 1400A O per ation Manual
( 1002- 7501- 500) , Rev 1 ( 1002- 7501- 510) ,
Rev 2 ( 1002- 7501- 520) , EMC1 ( 10027503- 200) and SAF E1 ( 1002- 7504- 200) ;
Aer oflex
DO 181A
Minimum
O per ational
Per for mance
Standar ds
for
AT CRBS/ModeS
Air bor ne
Equipment,
Januar y 1993; Er r ata, ( no date) ;
Change 1, Januar y 1993; Change 2,
Januar y 1997; RTCA Inc.
DO 181A dr aft change for ModeS Extended
Squitter , 31O ct95; Technical Wor k G r oup,
RTCA Inc.
DO 185 Minimum O per ational Per for mance
Standar ds for TCAS Air bor ne Equipment,
November 1993; Change 1, Febr uar y
1997; RTCA Inc.
DO 218 Minimum O per ational Per for mance
Standar ds for the ModeS Air bor ne Data
Link Pr ocessor , August 1993; Change 1,
1997; RTCA Inc.
IEEE
Standar d
Codes,
For mats,
Pr otocols, and Common Commands, Std
488.2- 1992; The Institute of Electr ical and
Electr onics Engineer s, Inc. ( IEEE)
Mode S Test System TMAC Manual ( 10022400- 600) , Aer oflex
SCPI Syntax & Style, Volume 1; SCPI
Consor tium
APPENDIX F
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
THIS PAG E INT ENTIO NALLY LEFT BLANK.
APPENDIX F
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
APPENDIX G - METRIC/BRITISH IMPERIAL CONVERSION TABLE
WITH NAUTICAL DISTANCE CONVERSIONS
TO
CONVERT:
INTO :
cm
feet
cm
inches
feet
cm
feet
meters
f t / se c
MUL TIPLY
BY:
TO
CONVERT:
INTO :
0.03281
meters
feet
0.3937
meters
i n ch e s
m / se c
f t / se c
3.281
0.3048
m/sec
km/hr
3.6
km/hr
1.097
m/sec
miles/hr
2.237
ft/sec
knots
0.5921
miles
feet
ft/sec
miles/hr
0.6818
miles
km
miles
meters
0.3048
miles
nmi
0.8684
30.48
ft/sec
2
cm/sec
ft/sec
2
m/sec
2
2
30.48
MULTIPL Y
BY:
3.281
39.37
5280
1.609
1609
grams
ounces
0.03527
m i l e s/ h r
f t / se c
1.467
inches
cm
2.54
miles/hr
km/hr
1.609
kg
pounds
2.205
miles/hr
knots
0.8684
psi
0.0703
nmi
feet
nmi
km
kg/cm
2
3281
6080.27
1.8532
km
feet
km
miles
0.6214
nmi
meters
km
nmi
0.5396
nmi
miles
1.1516
km / h r
ft/sec
0.9113
ounces
grams
28.34953
km/hr
knots
0.5396
pounds
kg
km/hr
miles/hr
0.6214
psi
kg/cm
knots
ft/sec
1.689
100 ft
km
3.048
knots
km/hr
1.8532
100 ft
miles
1.894
knots
miles/hr
1.1516
100 ft
nmi
1.645
1853.2
0.4536
2
0.0703
APPENDIX G
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
THIS PAG E INT ENTIO NALLY LEFT BLANK.
APPENDIX G
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
APPENDIX H - COMPARISON WITH THE S-1403C
1. NEW FEATURES
Automatic saving of last S- 1403DL
settings
New scr eens for softwar e contr olled
calibr ations pr oviding tighter pr ecision
Detailed data scr eens for UUT Per cent
Reply, Reply Delay and Squitter
infor mation
Reply Delay measur ement on ever y
r eply
Special tests for ELM and MTL
Additional flexibility for SCO PE TRIG
O UT, EXT SYNC O UT and PPMG
signals
System scr eens for contr ol of user
inter face par ameter s
DF17 decoded extended squitter
capability
ELM decoded data link ( UF24/DF24)
capability
Pulse Power Measur ement G ate ( PPMG )
location updated after ever y r eply
Power measur ement for selected pulse
in an ELM r eply segment
Faster pr ocessor for quicker r esponse
time
Flash memory for easier firmware
upgr ades
Scr een dump capability
Setup scr eens for easier contr ol of test
par ameter s
Incr eased number of available sequence
menu scr eens fr om 16 to 1000
Incr eased user saved memor y fr om two
to five memory slots
Maximum PRF incr eased as follows:
FUNCTIONS
WAS
IS
ATC
2400
7999
SEQ, ACL
200
2500
ACS
2400
2500
INTLCE
200-900
1250
DI
750/100
1250
BURST
2400/Limits
7999/2500
PRF Changes
Table 1
S- 1403DL Stand- Alone oper ation for
testing ever ything except tr ansponder
power and fr equency ( inter fer ence and
suppr essor pulses not available dur ing
Stand- Alone oper ation)
TMAC language and extended r emote
oper ation capabilities ( S- 1403DL
RS- 232 and G PIB Connector s)
Added scr een r efer ence designator s
shown in the upper left cor ner of the
MENU Display to indicate scr een and
menu hier ar chy position
Hexadecimal or octal modes suppor ted
with the ability to enter hexadecimal
data dir ectly fr om the Keyboar d
Rear panel TTL outputs that dr ive 90 Ω
loads
Scr een indicates 2nd key function in
effect ( cur sor changes fr om a block to
an under line after pr essing 2ND Key)
Incr eased MTL testing capabilities
( mor e validity checking and fr ont panel
oper ation)
Incr eased validity checking on ATCRBS
( must contain F1 and F2 pulses) and
Mode S ( must contain valid pr eamble
and phase tr ansitions for data bits)
r eplies
Incr eased maximum BURST number
fr om 999 to 9999 ( valid at any PRF)
Tightened r eply delay measur ement
r esolution fr om 25 ns to 12.5 ns
Incr eased Antenna B level r ange ( was
- 80 to - 20 dBm, now - 83 to - 20 dBm)
APPENDIX H
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
2. OTHER DIFFERENCES
3. BACKWARDS COMPATIBILITY
Minimum spacing for DI SEQ :SEQ is
40 µs.
Capability to accept all old- style
S- 1403C r emote commands
When Antenna A and/or Antenna B ar e
disabled ( S- 1403DL C10 or C20 AntB
field set to O F F, S- 1403DL C75
AntAEnable field set to O F F or
AT C- 1400A CW/NO RM/O F F Switch set
to O F F) , the Mode S T est System shuts
off all inter r ogations and disr egar ds all
squitter s thr ough the affected antenna
connector ( s) . The S- 1403C r ecognized
squitters in the O F F position.
Equivalent or better timing for electr ical
signals
In sequence menus for the S- 1403C,
data enter ed in the undefined fields ( S
or L) did not car r y over to the defined
fields ( undefined fields wer e clear ed) .
For the S- 1403DL, data enter ed in
undefined fields car r y over when
changing to defined fields ( even if the
bits set in the undefined fields ar e not
displayed in the defined mode) . The
opposite is also tr ue ( defined fields to
undefined) .
In the INTLCE and DI functions for the
S- 1403C, only the fir st four sequence
menus wer e cycled thr ough r egar dless
of how many were active. In the same
functions for the S- 1403DL, all active
sequence menus ar e cycled thr ough.
In INTLCE and DI functions for the
S- 1403C, the SCO PE SYNC O UT
Connector ( J7) switches between the
ATCRBS ( T O ) and Mode S ( T D )
inter r ogations accor ding to the ATC1400A T O /TAC/T D Switch setting. Since
the sync for either type can be selected
( C72 Setup Scr een) on the S- 1403DL,
the SCO PE SYNC O UT ( J7) Connector
oper ates accor ding to inter r ogation
types used in the INT LCE or DI
functions.
Similar scr een oper ation for the seven
basic functions ( ATC, SEQ , ACS, ACL,
INTLCE, DI and BURST)
Similar scr een oper ation for the
sequence menus
Keyboar d shor tcuts ( 100% backwar d
compatible) move cur sor to desir ed
contr ol fields
Same default sequence menus
4. CMENU#2 FIELDS LOCATION
Some fields in the S- 1403C Contr ol Menu
#2 have been r elocated as follows:
OLD
FIELDS
NEW
SCREEN
NEW
FIELDS
Sqtr.Add.
C50 Squitter (1of2) Addr:
Prepulse
C75 Misc Setup
PrePulseOut
Ext.Sync.:
Out=, Dv=
C73 Ext Sync Out
Setup
Enable and Dv
Ext.Sync.:
In=
C71 Interrogation
Trigger Setup
TrigSource
Pulse
Power
Gate
C74 PPMG Setup
Enable and
Pulse
Ext.Mod.In C75 Misc Setup
AntAModSource
Contr ol Menu #2 Relocated Fields
Table 2
The S- 1403DL AUX BUS and IF R BUS
Connector s changed locations.
Recalling Memor y Slot 0 sets the
S- 1403DL to the F actor y Default
( S- 1403C) settings.
APPENDIX H
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
APPENDIX I - ABBREVIATIONS
C
A
A
AA
AC
AC
ac
ACAS
ACL
ACS
ACS
ADDR
Addr
ADLP
ADJ
ADS
AIS
AM
ANG
ANT
Ant
ANT A
AntA
ANT B
AntB
AP
APER
AQ
Ar f
ARF LVL
ASCII
ATC
ATC
AT CRBS
ATE
AUX
Amper es
Addr ess Announced
Altitude Code
Alter nating Cur r ent
Alter nating Cur r ent
Air bor ne Collision Avoidance
System
All Call Long
All Call Shor t
Comm- A Capability Subfield
Address
Addr ess
Air bor ne Data Link Pr ocessor
Adjust
A- Definition Subfield
Comm- A Capability Subfield
Amplitude Modulation
Analog
Antenna
Antenna
Antenna A
Antenna A
Antenna B
Antenna B
Addr ess Par ity
Antenna A Per cent Reply
Acquisition Special
RF thr ough Antenna A
Antenna A RF Level
Amer ican National Standar d
Code for Infor mation
Inter change
Air T r affic Contr ol
AT CRBS ( scr een/function
abbr eviation)
Air T r affic Contr ol Radar
Beacon System
Automatic T est Equipment
Auxiliar y
B
BD
BCS
BDS
BN
BPER
bps
Br f
BRF LVL
Comm- B Data
Comm- B Capability Subfield
B- Definition Subfield
Bur st Number
Antenna B Per cent Reply
Bits per Second
RF thr ough Antenna B
Antenna B RF Level
C
CA
CAL
CC
ccw
CFS
CH
CHAN
CL/ESC
CLO S
cm
C MENU
Cont
CR
CTRL
CTS
CTS/RTS
CVC
CW
cw
Celsius or Centigr ade
Tr ansponder Capability
Calibr ation or Calibr ated
Cr osslink Capability
Counter clockwise
Continuation Subfield
Channel
Channel
Clear /Escape
Closeout
-2
Centimeter ( 10 Meters)
Contr ol Menu
Continued
Car r iage Retur n
Control
Clear to Send/( O ne- way
har dwar e)
Two- way har dwar e
Cancel Ver tical Resolution
Advisor y Complement
Continuous Wave
Clockwise
D
DABS
DAC
DCD
dB
DBL
dBm
DELM
DEV
DF
DI
DI
Dly
DME
DMM
DO
DPSK
DR
DSP
DSR
DTR
Dv
Discr ete Addr ess Beacon
System
Digital to Analog Conver ter
Data Carrier Detect
Decibel
Double
Decibels above one milliwatt
Downlink Extended Length
Message
Deviation
Downlink Format
Designator Identification
Double Inter r ogation
Delay
Distance Measur ing
Equipment
Digital Multimeter
Document
Differ ential Phase Shift
Keying
Downlink Request
Digital Signal Pr ocessor
Data Set Ready
Data Ter minal Ready
Deviation
APPENDIX I
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
I
E
ECL
ECS
ELM
EMC
EMI
EO L
ERRM
ESC
ESD
EX MO D
EXP
EX SYN
EXT
Ext
Extended Command
Language
Extended Capability
Subfield
Extended Length Message
Electr omagnetic Compatibility
Electr omagnetic Inter fer ence
End of Line
Er r or Message
Escape
Electr ostatic Dischar ge
Exter nal Modulation
Expected
Exter nal Synchr onization
Exter nal
Exter nal
F
FP
FPM
FREQ
FS
FUNC
FUNC#
F/W
Ft
Fr ont Panel Pr ocessor
F eet Per Minute
F r equency
Flight Status
Function
Function Number
Firmware
Foot/F eet
G
G EN
G Hz
G ND
G PIB
G PS
G RP
G ener ator
9
G igaher tz ( 10 Hertz)
G r ound
G ener al Pur pose Inter face
Bus
G lobal Positioning System
G r oup
H
h
HEX
Hndshk
HRC
hr s
Hz
Hexadecimal
Hexadecimal
Handshake
Horizontal Resolution
Advisor y Complement
Hour s
Hertz
ID
IEEE
IDS
IFF
II
IIS
IN
INTF
INTRF
INTERR
INTERRF
INTLCE
I/O
Identification ( 4096 Code)
Institute of Electr ical and
Electr onics Engineer s
Identifier Designators Subfield
Identification Fr iend or Foe
Inter r ogator Identification
Inter r ogator Identification
Subfield
Input
Interface
Inter fer ence
Inter r ogation
Inter fer ence
Interlace
Input/O utput
K
KE
kg
kHz
Kts
Contr ol, ELM
3
Kilogr am ( 10 G r ams)
3
Kiloher tz ( 10 Hertz)
Knots ( Velocity)
L
LCA
LCD
LED
LF
LO S
LVL
Logic Cell Ar r ay
Liquid Cr ystal Display
Light Emitting Diode
Line Feed
Lockout Subfield
Level
M
MA
MAN
MAX
MB
MBS
MC
MD
ME
MES
MHz
MIN
µs
MLD
MO D
MP
ms
MTE
MTL
MU
MV
Message, CO MM- A
Manual
Maximum
Message, CO MM- B
Multisite CO MM- B Subfield
Message, CO MM- C
Message, CO MM- D
Message, CO MM- E
Multisite ELM Subfield
6
Megaher tz ( 10 Hertz)
Minimum
-6
Micr osecond ( 10 Seconds)
Multi- Level Diver sity
Modulation
Main Pr ocessor
-3
Millisecond ( 10 Seconds)
Multiple Thr eat Encounter
Minimum Thr eshold Level
Message, CO MM- U
Message, CO MM- V
APPENDIX I
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
N
NA
NC
ND
Neg
NORM
ns
Not Applicable
C- Segment Number
D- Segment Number
Negative
Normal
-9
Nanosecond ( 10 Seconds)
O
o
OCT
O PT
OUT
Ω
O ctal
O ctal
O ption
O utput
O hm
P
PC
PC
PC
PLCS
PN
PP
PPM
ppm
P PULSE
PR
PRF
PRTSCR
PWR
Per sonal Computer
Pr inted Cir cuit
Pr otocol
Places
Par t Number
Pulse Pr ocessor
Pulse Position Modulation
Par ts per Million
Pr epulse
Pr obability of Reply
Pulse Repetition F r equency
Pr int Scr een
Power
R
RAM
RAC
RAT
RC
RCI
RCV
RESV
RF
RI
RL
RMS
RO M
RPDLY
RPLY
RR
RRS
RSS
RTCA
RTS
RXD
Random Access Memor y
Resolution Advisory
Complement
Resolution Advisor y
Ter mination
Reply Contr ol
Remote Control Interface
Receive
Reser vation
Radio Fr equency
Reply Infor mation Air - to- Air
Reply Length
Root Mean Squar e
Read O nly Memor y
Reply Delay
Reply
Reply Request
Reply Request Subfield
Reser vation Status Subfield
Requir ements and Technical
Concepts for Aviation
or ganization
Request to Sent
Receive Data
S
SCO PE
SCPI
SD
Sec
SEQ
SEQ AD
SLM
SLS
SMENU
SPER
SPI
spi
SPR
SQ TR
Sqtr
SRQ
SRS
SSR
STATMTL
SYNC
sync
O scilloscope
Standar d Commands for
Pr ogr ammable Instr uments
or ganization
Special Designator
Second
Sequence
Sequence Addr ess
Standar d Length Message
Side- Lobe Suppr ession
Sequence Menu
Antenna A Mode S Per cent
Reply
Special Identifier Pulse
Special Identifier Pulse
Synchr onous Phase Rever sal
Squitter
Squitter
Ser vice Request
Segment Request Subfield
Secondar y Sur veillance
Radar
MTL Status
Synchr onous
Synchr onous
APPENDIX I
Page 3
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
T
TAC
T CAS
TCXO
TD
T ID
TMAC
T MENU
TMS
TO
T RIG
T r ig
TTI
TTL
TX
TXD
T YP
Tacan
Tr affic Aler t and Collision
Avoidance System
T emper atur e Compensated
Cr ystal O scillator
Reply Sync
Thr eat Identity Data
T est Macr o Language
T est Menu
T actical Message Subfield
Inter r ogation Sync
T r igger
Tr igger
Thr eat T ype Indicator
Tr ansistor - T r ansistor Logic
Transmit
Transmit Data
Typical
W
W
w/
Wd
w/o
Watt
With
Width
Without
X
XMT
XMTR
XO N/XO FF
XPDR
Transmit
Transmitter
Softwar e Handshake
Tr ansponder
U
UDS
UELM
UF
UM
U MENU
UUT
U- Definition Subfield
Uplink Extended Length
Message
Uplink Format
Utility Message
User Menu
Unit Under T est
V
V
VAC
VAR
VCO
Vdc
VDS
VERS
Vih
Vil
Voh
Vol
VP-P
VRAM
VRC
Vr ms
VS
VSWR
Volt
Volts, Alter nating Cur r ent
Var iation
Voltage Contr olled O scillator
Volts, Dir ect Cur r ent
V- Definition Subfield
Ver sion
High Level Input Voltage
Low Level Input Voltage
High Level O utput Voltage
Low Level O utput Voltage
Volts, Peak to Peak
Video Random Access
Memor y
Ver tical Resolution Advisor y
Complement
Volts Root Mean Squar e
Ver tical Status
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
APPENDIX I
Page 4
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
INDEX
• Key
+/- Key
1-1-2, Page 12
1-1-2, Page 12
0 Key
1 Key
2 Key
2ND Key
3 Key
4 Key
5 Key
6 Key
7 Key
8 Key
9 Key
1-1-2, Page 12
1-1-2, Page 11
1-1-2, Page 11
1-1-2, Page 9
1-1-2, Page 11
1-1-2, Page 10
1-1-2, Page 10
1-1-2, Page 10
1-1-2, Page 9
1-1-2, Page 10
1-1-2, Page 10
B Key
BRF LVL Key
BURST Function
Description
Old-Style Commands
Performance Evaluation
Procedure
SCPI-Style Commands
Specifications
BURST Key
1-1-2, Page 10
1-1-2, Page 10
1-2-2, Pages 1, 56
1-2-4, Pages 38, 41
1-2-3, Page 8
1-2-2, Page 56
1-2-4, Pages 7, 18
1-3-1, Page 9
1-1-2, Page 11
Abbreviations
Appendix I, Page 1
ACL Function
Description
1-2-2, Pages 1, 29
General Test Sequence
1-2-2, Page 34
Old-Style Commands
1-2-4, Pages 38, 41
Performance Evaluation
1-2-3, Page 6
Procedure
1-2-2, Page 29
SCOPE TRIG OUT Connector
(J7) Pulse Description
Appendix A, Page 7
SCPI-Style Commands
1-2-4, Pages 7, 18
Specifications
1-3-1, Page 8
Timing Diagram
1-2-2, Page 35
ACS Function
Description
1-2-2, Pages 1, 21
General Test Sequence
1-2-2, Page 26
Old-Style Commands
1-2-4, Pages 38, 41
Performance Evaluation
1-2-3, Page 6
Procedure
1-2-2, Page 21
SCOPE TRIG OUT Connector
(J7) Pulse Description
Appendix A, Page 7
SCPI-Style Commands
1-2-4, Pages 7, 18
Specifications
1-3-1, Page 8
Timing Diagram
1-2-2, Page 27
A Key
1-1-2, Page 10
ANT B Key
1-1-2, Page 11
ARF LVL Key
1-1-2, Page 10
ATC-1400A Front Panel
1-1-2, Page 50
ATC-1400A GPIB Configuration
1-2-4, Page 1
ATC-1400A Rear Panel
1-1-2, Page 56
ATC Function
Description
1-2-2, Pages 1, 4
General Test Sequence
1-2-2, Page 9
Old-Style Commands
1-2-4, Pages 38, 41
Performance Evaluation
1-2-3, Page 3
Procedure
1-2-2, Page 4
SCOPE TRIG OUT Connector
(J7) Pulse Description
Appendix A, Page 6
SCPI-Style Commands
1-2-4, Pages 7, 18
Specifications
1-3-1, Page 3
Timing Diagram
1-2-2, Page 11
ATCRBS Monitor Pulse Function
Description
1-2-2, Page 1
SCPI-Style Commands
1-2-4, Pages 7, 18
Specifications
1-3-1, Pages 2, 12
AUX BUS Connector
Pin-Out
Appendix A, Page 2
INDEX
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
C10 Function A
1-1-2, Page 14
Remote Commands
1-2-4, Page 6
C20 Function B
1-1-2, Page 22
Remote Commands
1-2-4, Page 6
C30 Percent Reply
1-1-2, Page 23
Remote Commands
1-2-4, Page 8
C40 Reply Delay
1-1-2, Page 24
Remote Commands
1-2-4, Page 8
C50 Squitter (1of2)
1-1-2, Page 25
Remote Commands
1-2-4, Page 8
C60 Squitter (2of2)
1-1-2, Page 26
Remote Commands
1-2-4, Page 8
C70 Setup Menu
1-1-2, Page 27
C71 Interrogation Trigger
1-1-2, Page 27
Remote Commands
1-2-4, Page 9
C72 Scope Trigger
1-1-2, Page 28
Remote Commands
1-2-4, Page 9
C73 Ext Sync Out
1-1-2, Page 29
Remote Commands
1-2-4, Page 9
C74 PPMG
1-1-2, Page 30
Remote Commands
1-2-4, Page 9
C75 Misc
1-1-2, Page 31
Remote Commands
1-2-4, Page 9
C76 SMenu
1-1-2, Page 32
Remote Commands
1-2-4, Page 10
C79 ATC1400A Controls
1-1-2, Page 33
Remote Commands
1-2-4, Page 10
C80 System Menu
1-1-2, Page 34
C81 RS232 Control
1-1-2, Page 34
Remote Commands
1-2-4, Page 10
C82 RS232 Interface
1-1-2, Page 35
Remote Commands
1-2-4, Page 11
C83 GPIB
1-1-2, Page 35
Remote Commands
1-2-4, Page 11
C84 IFR Bus
1-1-2, Page 36
Remote Commands
1-2-4, Page 12
C85 Keyboard
1-1-2, Page 36
Remote Commands
1-2-4, Page 12
C86 Clock
1-1-2, Page 37
Remote Commands
1-2-4, Page 12
C88 Self Test
1-1-2, Page 37
C89 Version
1-1-2, Page 37
Remote Commands
1-2-4, Page 12
C90 Calibration Menu
1-1-2, Page 38
CAUTION and WARNING Labels
1-2-1, Page 1
C Key
1-1-2, Page 10
C MENU Key
1-1-2, Page 12
CL/ESC Key
1-1-2, Page 12
Commands
1-2-4, Page 6
Old-Style Commands
1-2-4, Page 38
Details
1-2-4, Page 41
SCPI-Style Commands
1-2-4, Page 6
Details
1-2-4, Page 15
Command Syntax
1-2-4, Page 5
Comparison with S-1403C
Appendix H, Page 1
Connector Pin-Out Tables
Appendix A, Page 1
Control Menus
1-1-2, Page 14
Controls, Connectors and
Indicators
1-1-2, Page 2
Conversion Tables
Metric/British Imperial with
Nautical Distance
Conversions
Appendix G, Page 1
Number Systems
1-2-2, Page 13
Decoded Sequence Menu
Formats
Appendix B, Page 1
Description
1-1-1, Page 1
DF17
Appendix B, Page 10
DI Function
Description
1-2-2, Pages 1, 45
General Test Sequence
1-2-2, Page 53
Old-Style Commands
1-2-4, Pages 38, 41
Performance Evaluation
1-2-3, Page 7
Procedure
1-2-2, Page 45
SCOPE TRIG OUT Connector
(J7) Pulse Description
Appendix A, Page 7
SCPI-Style Commands
1-2-4, Pages 7, 18
Specifications
1-3-1, Page 9
Timing Diagram
1-2-2, Page 55
Display Menu Definition
1-1-2, Page 13
D Key
1-1-2, Page 9
E Key
ELM Delay and Spacing
Parameters
ELM Tests
Description
DELM
DELM Multisite
UELM
UELM Multisite
Error Codes
DELM
UELM
Procedure
SCPI-Style Commands
Specifications
Timing Diagram
DELM
UELM
ENTER Key
Examples
EX MOD Key
External Cleaning
EXT SYN Key
f01 ATC
f02 SEQ
f03 ACS
f04 ACL
f05 INTLCE
f06 DI
f07 BURST
f08 ATC Mon
F Key
Front Panel
ATC-1400A
Operation
S-1403DL
FUNC# Key
Functional Capabilities
Fuse Requirements
Fuse Ratings, Specified
1-1-2, Page 10
1-1-2, Page 43
1-2-2, Page 66
1-1-2,
1-1-2,
1-1-2,
1-1-2,
Page
Page
Page
Page
46
47
44
45
1-2-2, Page 72
1-2-2, Page 72
1-2-2, Page 66
1-2-4, Pages 13, 35
1-3-1, Page 9
1-2-2, Page 71
1-2-2, Page 67
1-1-2, Page 12
1-2-4, Page 46
1-1-2, Page 12
1-2-1, Page 4
1-1-2, Page 12
1-1-2,
1-1-2,
1-1-2,
1-1-2,
1-1-2,
1-1-2,
1-1-2,
1-1-2,
1-1-2,
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
14
16
17
17
18
19
20
21
10
1-1-2, Page 50
1-2-4, Page 1
1-1-2, Page 4
1-1-2, Page 9
1-1-1, Page 1
1-3-1, Page 13
1-2-1, Page 2
INDEX
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
General Description and
Capabilities
General Operating Procedures
Grounding Equipment and Power
Cord
HELP Key
HEX Key
1-1-1, Page 1
1-2-2, Page 1
1-2-1, Page 1
1-1-2, Page 12
1-1-2, Page 10
Initial ATC-1400A Control Settings 1-2-2, Page 2
Input Considerations
1-2-2, Page 2
Installation
1-2-1, Page 1
Calibration
1-2-1, Page 4
Procedure
1-2-1, Page 2
Interrogation and Reply
Timing
Appendix E, Page 1
INTLCE Function
Description
1-2-2, Pages 1, 37
General Test Sequence
1-2-2, Page 42
Old-Style Commands
1-2-4, Pages 38, 42
Performance Evaluation
1-2-3, Page 6
Procedure
1-2-2, Page 38
SCOPE TRIG OUT Connector
(J7) Pulse Description
Appendix A, Page 7
SCPI-Style Commands
1-2-4, Pages 7, 18
Specifications
1-3-1, Page 9
Timing Diagram
1-2-2, Page 43
I/O Connectors
Appendix A, Page 1
Keyboard Definition
1-1-2, Page 9
Memory Operation
1-2-2, Page 73
MENU Display Commands
1-2-4, Page 14
Metric/British Imperial Conversion
Table with Nautical Distance
Conversions
Appendix G, Page 1
MS/MR Save and Recall
1-2-4, Page 14
MTL Test
1-2-2, Page 64
Description
1-1-2, Page 42
Error Codes
1-2-2, Page 65
Old-Style Commands
1-2-4, Pages 40, 42, 44
Procedure
1-2-2, Page 64
SCPI-Style Commands
1-2-4, Pages 12, 37
ON/CAL Key
Operating Safety
Operation
1-1-2, Page 12
1-2-1, Page 1
1-2-1, Page 1
P2 Key
1-1-2, Page 10
P3 Key
1-1-2, Page 10
P4/P6 Key
1-1-2, Page 10
Percent Reply
Screen
1-1-2, Page 22
Specifications
1-3-1, Page 11
Performance Evaluation
1-2-3, Page 1
ACL
1-2-3, Page 6
ACS
1-2-3, Page 6
ANT A RF Vernier
1-2-3, Page 8
ANT B RF Level/Vernier (w/ MLD) 1-2-3, Page 9
ANT B RF Level (w/o MLD)
1-2-3, Page 8
ATC
1-2-3, Page 3
ATCRBS D i s c r e t e
1-2-3, Page 12
BURST
1-2-3, Page 8
Corrective Maintenance
1-2-3, Page 1
Data Sheet
1-2-3, Page 13
DI
1-2-3, Page 7
Ext Mod In
1-2-3, Page 11
Ext Sync In
1-2-3, Page 11
Ext Sync Out
1-2-3, Page 10
INTLCE
1-2-3, Page 6
Pre-Operational Conditions
1-2-3, Page 1
Procedure
1-2-3, Page 1
S-1403DL to ATC-1400A
Communication
1-2-3, Page 2
Scope Trigger
1-2-3, Page 12
SEQ
1-2-3, Page 4
Test Equipment Requirements
1-2-3, Page 1
Test Record
1-2-3, Page 1
Pin-Out for
AUX BUS Connector
Appendix A, Page 2
GPIB Connector
Appendix A, Page 5
IFR BUS Connector
Appendix A, Page 3
RS-232 Connector
Appendix A, Page 4
Power Requirements
1-2-1, Page 2
Specifications
1-3-1, Page 13
Power-Up Procedure
1-2-1, Page 4
PPMG Key
1-1-2, Page 12
P PULS Key
1-1-2, Page 12
Pre-Operational Conditions
1-2-3, Page 1
Print Screen
1-2-2, Page 74
PRTSCR Key
1-1-2, Page 11
Rear Panel
ATC-1400A
S-1403DL
Recall
RECALL Key
Recommended Test
Equipment
Related Documents
Remote Operation
Reply Delay
Screen
Specifications
1-1-2, Page 56
1-1-2, Page 5
1-2-2, Page 73
1-1-2, Page 11
Appendix C, Page 1
Appendix F, Page 1
1-2-4, Page 1
1-1-2, Page 24
1-3-1, Page 10
INDEX
Page 3
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
S-1403DL Front Panel
1-1-2 Page 4
S-1403DL GPIB Configuration
1-2-4, Page 3
S-1403DL Rear Panel
1-1-2, Page 5
S-1403DL RS-232 Configuration
1-2-4, Page 2
Safety Conditions
1-3-1, Page 13
Save
1-2-2, Page 73
SAVE Key
1-1-2, Page 11
Sequence Menus
1-1-2, Page 38
SEQ Function
Description
1-2-2, Pages 1, 12
General Test Sequence
1-2-2, Page 18
Old-Style Commands
1-2-4, Pages 38, 43
Performance Evaluation
1-2-3, Page 4
Procedure
1-2-2, Page 11
SCOPE TRIG OUT Connector
(J7) Pulse Description
Appendix A, Page 6
SCPI-Style Commands
1-2-4, Pages 7, 18
Specifications
1-3-1, Page 6
Timing Diagram
1-2-2, Page 19
SEQ AD Key
1-1-2, Page 12
Sequence Menus
1-1-2, Page 38
Old-Style Commands
1-2-4, Pages 40, 43
SCPI-Style Commands
1-2-4, Pages 12, 22
Shipping
1-4-1, Page 1
Signal Formats
Appendix D, Page 1
S MENU Key
1-1-2, Page 11
Specifications
1-3-1, Page 1
Fuse Requirements
1-3-1, Page 13
Input/Output Drive Levels
1-3-1, Page 12
Miscellaneous
Inputs
1-3-1, Page 12
Outputs
1-3-1, Page 12
REPLY (3-27 V) OUT
1-3-1, Page 12
Power Requirements
1-3-1, Page 13
Pulse Characteristics
1-3-1, Page 2
ACS/ACL Functions
1-3-1, Page 8
ATC Function
1-3-1, Page 3
BURST Function
1-3-1, Page 9
DI Function
1-3-1, Page 9
ELM Function
1-3-1, Page 9
INTLCE Function
1-3-1, Page 9
SEQ Function
1-3-1, Page 6
RF
1-3-1, Page 1
Antenna A (ANT A), RF I/O
Connector
1-3-1, Page 1
Antenna B (ANT B), ANT B
Connector
1-3-1, Page 1
Safety Conditions
1-3-1, Page 13
UUT Measurements
1-3-1, Page 10
%Reply
1-3-1, Page 11
Pulse Characteristics
1-3-1, Page 12
Reply Delay
1-3-1, Page 10
SPR Key
1-1-2, Page 10
Squitter Period Measurement
Parameters
1-1-2, Page 26
Stand Alone Operation
1-2-2, Page 74
Storage
1-5-1, Page 1
System
Characteristics
1-2-2, Page 1
Considerations
1-2-2, Page 2
T20 Misc Menu
T23 Misc MTL
Remote Commands
T30 ELM Menu
T31 ELM Setup
Remote Commands
T32 UELM
Remote Commands
T33 UELM Multisite
Remote Commands
T34 DELM
Remote Commands
T35 DELM Multisite
Remote Commands
Test Equipment Requirements
1-1-2, Page 41
1-1-2, Page 42
1-2-4, Page 13
1-1-2, Page 42
1-1-2, Page 43
1-2-4, Page 13
1-1-2, Page 44
1-2-4, Page 13
1-1-2, Page 45
1-2-4, Page 13
1-1-2, Page 46
1-2-4, Page 13
1-1-2, Page 47
1-2-4, Page 13
1-2-3, Page 1
Appendix C, Page 1
Test Macro Language (TMAC)
1-2-4, Page 4
Test Menus
1-1-2, Page 41
Test Menu Tests
1-2-2, Page 64
T MENU Key
1-1-2, Page 12
Test Record
1-2-3, Page 1
UF00/DF00
UF04/DF04
UF05/DF05
UF11/DF11
UF16/DF16
UF20/DF20
UF21/DF21
UF24/DF24
U MENU Key
UUT Measurements
Appendix B, Page 2
Appendix B, Page 3
Appendix B, Page 4
Appendix B, Page 5
Appendix B, Page 6
Appendix B, Page 7
Appendix B, Page 8
Appendix B, Page 9
1-1-2, Page 11
1-3-1, Page 10
INDEX
Page 4
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
FOR QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL ONLY
INSTALLATION CALIBRATION
PROCEDURE
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
THIS PAG E INT ENTIO NALLY LEFT BLANK.
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
WARNING:
HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT
THIS EQUIPMENT CONTAINS CERTAIN CIRCUITS AND/OR COMPONENTS
OF EXTREMELY HIGH VOLTAGE POTENTIALS, CAPABLE OF CAUSING
SERIOUS BODILY INJURY OR DEATH. WHEN PERFORMING ANY OF THE
PROCEDURES CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL, HEED ALL APPLICABLE
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.
SAFETY FIRST: TO ALL OPERATIONS AND SERVICE PERSONNEL
REFER ALL SERVICING OF UNIT TO QUALIFIED TECHNICAL PERSONNEL.
WARNING: USING THIS EQUIPMENT IN A MANNER NOT SPECIFIED BY THE ACCOMPANYING
DOCUMENTATION MAY IMPAIR THE SAFETY PROTECTION PROVIDED BY THE EQUIPMENT.
CASE, COVER OR PANEL REMOVAL
Removing protective covers, casings or panels from this Test Set exposes the technician to electrical
hazards that can result in electrical shock or equipment damage.
SAFETY IDENTIFICATION IN TECHNICAL MANUAL
This manual uses the following terms to draw attention to possible safety hazards, that may exist when
operating or servicing this equipment.
CAUTION:
THIS TERM IDENTIFIES CONDITIONS OR ACTIVITIES THAT, IF IGNORED, CAN RESULT IN
EQUIPMENT OR PROPERTY DAMAGE (E.G., FIRE).
WARNING: THIS TERM IDENTIFIES CONDITIONS OR ACTIVITIES THAT, IF IGNORED, CAN RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
SAFETY SYMBOLS IN MANUALS AND ON UNITS
CAUTION: Refer to accompanying documents.
AC OR DC TERMINAL: Terminal that may supply or be supplied with ac or dc voltage.
DC TERMINAL: Terminal that may supply or be supplied with dc voltage.
AC TERMINAL: Terminal that may supply or be supplied with ac or alternating voltage.
SWITCH OFF: AC line power to the device is OFF.
SWITCH ON: AC line power to the device is ON.
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING PRECAUTION
Improper grounding of equipment can result in electrical shock.
USE OF PROBES
Check specifications for the maximum voltage, current and power ratings of any connector on the Test Set
before connecting it with a probe from a terminal device. Be sure the terminal device performs within these
specifications before using it for measurement, to prevent electrical shock or damage to the equipment.
POWER CORDS
Power cords must not be frayed, broken nor expose bare wiring when operating this equipment.
USE RECOMMENDED FUSES ONLY
Use only fuses specifically recommended for the equipment at the specified current and voltage ratings.
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
WARNING: THE PROCESSOR PC BOARD ASSEMBLY USES A LITHIUM BATTERY. LITHIUM IS A TOXIC
SUBSTANCE AND THE FOLLOWING WARNINGS CONCERNING LITHIUM BATTERIES MUST BE
HEEDED:
DO NOT CRUSH, INCINERATE OR DISPOSE OF IN NORMAL WASTE.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO RECHARGE.
DO NOT SHORT CIRCUIT OR FORCE DISCHARGE AS THIS MIGHT CAUSE THE BATTERY
TO VENT, OVERHEAT OR EXPLODE.
CAUTION:
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND SOLID STATE DEVICES SUCH AS MOS FETS, ESPECIALLY
CMOS TYPES, ARE SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGES RECEIVED
FROM IMPROPER HANDLING, THE USE OF UNGROUNDED TOOLS AND IMPROPER STORAGE
AND PACKAGING. ANY MAINTENANCE TO THIS UNIT MUST BE PERFORMED WITH THE
FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS:
BEFORE USE IN A CIRCUIT, KEEP ALL LEADS SHORTED TOGETHER EITHER BY THE USE
OF VENDOR-SUPPLIED SHORTING SPRINGS OR BY INSERTING LEADS INTO A
CONDUCTIVE MATERIAL.
WHEN REMOVING DEVICES FROM THEIR CONTAINERS, GROUND THE HAND BEING USED
WITH A CONDUCTIVE WRISTBAND.
TIPS OF SOLDERING IRONS AND/OR ANY TOOLS USED MUST BE GROUNDED.
DEVICES MUST NEVER BE INSERTED INTO NOR REMOVED FROM CIRCUITS WITH
POWER ON.
PC BOARDS, WHEN TAKEN OUT OF THE SET, MUST BE LAID ON A GROUNDED
CONDUCTIVE MAT OR STORED IN A CONDUCTIVE STORAGE BAG. REMOVE ANY BUILTIN POWER SOURCE, SUCH AS A BATTERY, BEFORE LAYING PC BOARDS ON A
CONDUCTIVE MAT OR STORING IN A CONDUCTIVE BAG.
PC BOARDS, IF BEING SHIPPED TO THE FACTORY FOR REPAIR, MUST BE PACKAGED IN
A CONDUCTIVE BAG AND PLACED IN A WELL-CUSHIONED SHIPPING CONTAINER.
CAUTION
THIS EQUIPMENT CONTAINS PARTS
SENSITIVE TO DAMAGE
BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD)
CAUTION:
SIGNAL GENERATORS CAN BE A SOURCE OF ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) TO
COMMUNICATION RECEIVERS. SOME TRANSMITTED SIGNALS CAN CAUSE DISRUPTION
AND INTERFERENCE TO COMMUNICATION SERVICES OUT TO A DISTANCE OF SEVERAL
MILES. USERS OF THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD SCRUTINIZE ANY OPERATION THAT RESULTS
IN RADIATION OF A SIGNAL (DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY) AND ENSURE COMPLIANCE WITH
INSTRUCTIONS IN FAA CIRCULAR AC 170-6C, DATED FEBRUARY 19, 1981.
CAUTION:
K E E P A L L V E NT O P E NI NG S CL E A R A ND UNO B S T R U C T E D F O R P RO P E R E Q U I P M E NT C O O L I NG
AND CONTINUED RELIABILITY. WHEN OPERATING THE EQUIPMENT IN THE NORMAL
HORIZONTAL POSITION, MAINTAIN AT LEAST TWO INCHES (≈FIVE CENTIMETERS) OF
CL E A RA NCE B E T W E E N T HE E Q UI P M E NT S I DE W I T H E X HA US T F A N A ND O B J E CT S O R W A L L S .
I F O P E RA T I NG I N A RA CK , M A X I M UM A M B I E NT T E M P E RA T URE M US T B E A T O R B E L O W 4 0° C.
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
FOR QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY
T he Mode S T est System Installation
Calibr ation r equir es a calibr ated S- 1403DL
connected to a calibr ated ATC- 1400A
accor ding to the S- 1403DL O per ation
Manual.
STEP
TEST EQ UIPMENT : Refer to T able 1.
C71
SETUP - INTERROGATION TRIGGER
TrigSource:SelfInterr
TrigGen:
450Hz
CAUTION:
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARG E
( ESD) MAY DAMAG E THE
PULSE/PRO CESSO R, FRO NT
PANEL AND DIVERSITY
ASSEMBLIES. PERSO NNEL
PERF O RMING T HE
INST ALLAT IO N CALIBRATIO N
PROCEDURE MUST FOLLOW
ACCEPT ED ESD PRACTICES.
STEP
PROCEDURE
1. Remove power fr om S- 1403DL.
2. Remove 12 top cover scr ews and two
br acket scr ews ( F igur e 1) .
3. Lift top cover with mounting br acket
fr om Chassis Assembly ( F igur e 1) .
4. Apply power to Mode S Test System.
5. Set AT C- 1400A as follows:
CONTROL
CW/NORM/OFF Switch
SLS/ECHO ON/OFF Switch
XPDR PULSE WIDTH
VAR/CAL Switch
MAN/AUTO/MAN STEP Switch
XPDR DEV P 3 /CAL Switch
SETTING
NORM
OFF
CAL
MAN
CAL
XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL Switch
CAL
PRF/SQTR ON/OFF Switch
TACAN ON/OFF Switch
PRF/SQUITTER Thumbwheels
DBL INTERR/INTRF
Thumbwheels
FREQ/FUNCTION SELECT
Thumbwheels
ON
OFF
1000
∆F Thumbwheels
SELF-INTERR/OFF Switch
000.0 OFF
1030
XPDR
OFF
OFF
PROCEDURE
6. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 1
Keys in sequence to enter the C71
Setup Scr een.
7. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol
and
Keyboar d
to
set
Tr igSour ce to SelfInterr.
8. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 5
Keys in sequence to enter the C75
Setup Scr een
C75
SETUP - MISC
AntAEnable:ON
PrePulseOut:OFF
AntAModSrc:INT
AntBModSrc:INT
9. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol
and
Keyboar d
to
set
AntAEnable to O N, PrePulseO ut to
O F F,
AntAModSrc
to
INT
and
AntBModSrc to INT.
10. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 8 and 4
Keys in sequence to enter the C84
System Scr een
C84
SYSTEM - IFR BUS
1400 Control: MASTER
Must power down
1403 Bus Address: 3
before settings
take effect.
11. If necessar y, use S- 1403DL CURSO R
Keys, SLEW Contr ol and Keyboar d to
set 1400 Contr ol to MASTER. If 1400
Contr ol setting changed, pr ess S1403DL PO WER Switch O F F ( O ) and
back O N ( I) to r ecycle power .
12. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, FUNC#, 0 and
1 Keys in sequence to enter the ATC
Scr een. If necessary, use S-1403DL
CURSO R Keys and SLEW Control to
set menu to C10.
13. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU Key once
and 9 Key twice in sequence to enter
Calibr ation Passwor d Scr een.
Page 1
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
TOP COVER
MOUNTING BRACKET
TOP COVER SCREW
(12 PLCS)
BRACKET SCREW
(2 PLCS)
A2A1A1R9
CHASSIS
ASSEMBLY
A2A1A1R5
TP23004/J23019
A2A1A1R13
AT31001/TP31003
DIVERSITY I/O
PC BOARD ASSEMBLY
02407016
Installation Calibr ation Inter nal Adjustments
Figur e 1
EXT
TRIG
SCOPE TRIG OUT (J7)
S-1403DL
SCOPE
POWER
METER
CHAN1
ATC-1400A
GEN
RF I/O
02403001
Installation Calibr ation Test Setup #1 Diagr am
Figur e 2
Page 2
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
14. Use S- 1403DL Keyboar d
Calibr ations Passwor d.
C99
STEP
to
enter
CAL - PASSWORD
PASSWORD:067215
15. Pr ess S- 1403DL ENT ER Key
display Calibr ation Menu Scr een.
C90
CAL
1)Pulse Alignment
2)Reply Delay
3)RF Level (AntA)
to
MENU
Last:10aug98
4)RF Level (AntB)
5)Reply Width
6)
RF LEVEL
16. Pr ess 3 Key on S- 1403DL to enter RF
Level ( AntA) Calibr ation Scr een.
C93
DAC:
CAL - RF LEVEL (AntA)
-3.0dB
33
-1.5dB
205
0.0dB
410
1.5dB
4095
3.0dB
974
17. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys to set
cur sor to 0.0dB DAC field.
18. Adjust ATC- 1400A RF LEVEL Contr ol
to r ead 00 on the RF LEVEL - dBm
Display.
19. Disconnect cable fr om S- 1403DL RF
LVL Connector ( J13) ( Rear Panel) .
20. Set
ATC- 1400A
Switch to CW.
CW/NO RM/O FF
21. Connect Power Meter ( thr ough Power
Sensor )
to
ATC- 1400A
RF
I/O
Connector as shown in Figure 2.
Recor d Power Meter r eading as
r efer ence.
22. Reconnect cable to RF LVL Connector
( J13) .
23. Use S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to adjust
0.0dB DAC field until Power Meter
displays r efer ence r ecor ded in
Step 21 ( ± 0.05 dB) .
PROCEDURE
24. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to adjust +1.5dB DAC
field until Power Meter displays
r efer ence r ecor ded in Step 21 plus
1.5 dB (± 0.15 dB) .
25. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to adjust +3.0dB DAC
field until Power Meter displays
r efer ence r ecor ded in Step 21 plus
3.0 dB (± 0.3 dB) .
26. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to adjust - 1.5dB DAC
field until Power Meter displays
r efer ence r ecor ded in Step 21 minus
1.5 dB (± 0.15 dB) .
27. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to adjust - 3.0dB DAC
field until Power Meter displays
r efer ence r ecor ded in Step 21 minus
3.0 dB (± 0.3 dB) .
28. Repeat Steps 19 thr ough 27 until no
adjustments ar e r equir ed.
Ver ify
Power Meter r eadings as follows:
Reading with cable disconnected
to S- 1403DL RF LVL Connector
( J13) equals r eading with cable to
S- 1403DL RF LVL Connector ( J13)
connected and 0.0dB offset
selected ( ± 0.05 dB) .
Reading with S- 1403DL +3.0dB
offset selected equals Step 21
r eading plus 3.0 dB (± 0.2 dB) .
Reading with S- 1403DL - 3.0dB
offset selected equals Step 21
r eading minus 3.0 dB (± 0.2 dB) .
29. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 6
Keys in sequence to enter SMenu
Setup Scr een.
30. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to set SmenuRadix to
OCTAL and SetAllSmenu to O F F.
With cur sor in SetAllSmenu field,
pr ess S- 1403DL ENTER Key.
31. Pr ess S- 1403DL S MENU, 0, 0 and 1
Keys in sequence to display S001
Sequence Menu.
Page 3
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
32. Pr ess S- 1403DL O N/CAL Key
activate S001 Sequence Menu.
STEP
to
33. Use
S-1403DL
CURSO R
Keys,
Keyboar d and SLEW Contr ol to set
format to D, UF04 and ADDR= to
17725762.
S001:D;UF04,PC=0,RR=00,DI=0,SD=000000,
+
ADDR=17725762
RPLY:D;
*** No Reply ***
34. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, F UNC#, 2 and
ENTER Keys in sequence. Ver ify S1403DL
displays
C10
Sequence
Scr een
for
oper ating
Mode
S
Sequence function.
If not, use S1403DL CURSO R Keys and SLEW
Contr ol to set menu to C10.
35. Use
S-1403DL
CURSO R
Keys,
Keyboar d and SLEW Contr ol to
activate and set Ar f to 0.0 and AntB to
.00.
36. Set
ATC- 1400A
Switch to NORM.
CW/NO RM/O FF
PRO CEDURE
42. O bser ve Mode S inter r ogation on
O scilloscope and adjust DPSK ADJ
( R28) on S- 1403DL r ear panel until P 6
phase shift peaks ar e r elatively even.
43. Rotate ATC- 1400A RF LEVEL Contr ol
until RF LEVEL - dBm Display shows 50 dBm (- 20 dBm if the Multi- Level
Diver sity option is installed) .
44. Set
ATC- 1400A
Switch to CW.
CW/NO RM/O FF
45. Disconnect Power Meter fr om ATC1400A RF I/O Connector .
46. Connect Spectr um Analyzer to ATC1400A RF I/O Connector .
47. Set Spectr um
follows:
Analyzer
contr ols as
CONTROL
Tuning
Span
Bandwidth
Sweep Rate
Log Scale
Trigger
SETTING
1030 MHz
Zero
3 MHz
2 or 5 µs
1 or 2 dB/Div
Video
37. Connect ATC- 1400A G EN Connector
to O scilloscope. Refer to Figur e 2.
48. Set
ATC- 1400A
Switch to NORM.
38. Connect S- 1403DL SCO PE T RIG O UT
Connector ( J7) to O scilloscope EXT
TRIG input. Refer to Figure 2.
49. Adjust Spectr um Analyzer for stable
display and r ecor d signal level as a
r efer ence.
39. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 2
Keys in sequence to enter C72 Setup
Scr een.
C72
SETUP - SCOPE TRIGGER
ATC ModeS ACS ACL
Enable: ON ON
OFF OFF
Source:CAL CAL
CAL CAL
(in µS)
40. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
O N/CAL Key to set ATC Enable to
O N, ATC Source to CAL , ModeS
Enable to O N and ModeS Sour ce to
CAL .
41. Set ATC- 1400A T O /TAC/T D Switch to
TO.
CW/NO RM/O FF
NOTE: Steps 50 and 51 only apply if the
Multi- Level Diver sity option is
installed.
50. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to set menu to C20.
51. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Control to set Brf to - 20 0.0 ( 20 dBm with no ver nier contr ol set) .
52. Disconnect Spectr um Analyzer fr om
ATC- 1400A RF I/O Connector .
53. Connect Spectr um Analyzer
1403DL ANT B Connector .
to
S-
Page 4
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
STEP
54. Refer
to
F igur e
1
and
adjust
A2A1A1R13
on
the
S- 1403DL
Diver sity I/O PC Boar d Assembly to
set Spectr um Analyzer signal at
r efer ence level r ecor ded in Step 49
( ± 0.5 dB) .
NOTE: Steps 55 thr ough 65 only apply if
the Multi- Level Diver sity option is
installed.
55. Set
ATC- 1400A
Switch to CW.
57. Connect Power Meter ( thr ough Power
Sensor )
to
S- 1403DL
ANT
B
Connector .
58. Ver ify Power Meter r eading indicates 20 dBm ( ± 0.5 dB) .
Recor d signal
level for reference.
59. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 9 and 4
Keys in sequence to enter RF Level
( AntB) Calibr ation Scr een.
C94
DAC:
CAL - RF LEVEL (AntB)
-3.0dB
33
-1.5dB
205
0.0dB
410
64. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to adjust - 3.0dB DAC
field until Power Meter displays
r efer ence r ecor ded in Step 58 minus
3.0 dB (± 0.3 dB) .
65. Repeat Steps 60 thr ough 64 until no
adjustments ar e r equir ed.
66. Disconnect O scilloscope and Power
Meter fr om Mode S Test System.
CW/NO RM/O FF
56. Disconnect Spectr um Analyzer fr om
S- 1403DL ANT B Connector .
1.5dB
1023
3.0dB
974
60. Use S- 1403DL SLEW Contr ol to adjust
0.0dB DAC field until Power Meter
displays r efer ence r ecor ded in
Step 58 ( ± 0.05 dB) .
61. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to adjust +1.5dB DAC
field until Power Meter displays
r efer ence r ecor ded in Step 58 plus
1.5 dB (± 0.15 dB) .
62. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to adjust +3.0dB DAC
field until Power Meter displays
r eading r ecor ded in Step 58 plus
3.0 dB (± 0.3 dB) .
63. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to adjust - 1.5dB DAC
field until Power Meter displays
r efer ence r ecor ded in Step 58 minus
1.5 dB (± 0.15 dB) .
PROCEDURE
PULSE ALIG NMENT
67. Connect O scilloscope EXT TRIG to S1403DL
SCO PE
TRIG
O UT
Connector . Refer to Figur e 3.
68. Connect O scilloscope Channel 1 to
Heter odyne Monitor IF Connector .
Refer to Figur e 3.
69. Connect
Heter odyne
Monitor
Connector to ATC- 1400A RF
Connector . Refer to Figur e 3.
RF
I/O
70. Refer to Figur e 3. Connect RF Signal
G ener ator ( 1030 MHz at +6 dBm) to
Heter odyne Monitor LO Connector .
71. Set
ATC- 1400A
Switch to NORM.
CW/NO RM/O FF
72. Set ATC- 1400A RF LEVEL Contr ol for
0 dBm on RF LEVEL - dBm Display.
73. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, FUNC#, 2 and
ENTER Keys in sequence.
74. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to set menu to C10.
75. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 9 and 1
Keys in sequence to enter Pulse
Alignment Calibr ation Scr een.
76. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to adjust AntA SPR
first (coarse ± 50 ns incr ements) and
second (fine +0.5 ns increments) fields
until 50% point of P 2 leading edge to
SPR center point is 2.75 µs ( ± 1 ns) .
C91
CAL - PULSE ALIGNMENT
AntA SPR : -50nS +00.0nS
AntB Pulse:+950nS +25.5nS
AntB SPR :-950nS +55.0nS
Page 5
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
SCOPE
TRIG
OUT
(J7)
TP31003
S-1403DL
EXT
TRIG
10 dB
ATTENUATOR
ATC-1400A
SCOPE
CHAN1
RF I/O
HET
IF
MONITOR
RF
LO
RF SIGNAL
GEN
02403002
Installation Calibr ation Test Setup #2 Diagr am
Figur e 3
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
77. Align 50% point of P 1 ( Ant A) leading
edge with major ver tical axis on
O scilloscope for r efer ence.
78. Disconnect Heter odyne Monitor RF
Connector fr om ATC- 1400A RF I/O
Connector .
79. Disconnect S- 1403DL AT31001 fr om
TP31003.
80. Connect
Heter odyne
Monitor
RF
Connector ( thr ough 10 dB Attenuator
if MLD is installed) to S- 1403DL
TP31003.
STEP
PRO CEDURE
81. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to adjust AntB Pulse
first (coarse ± 50 ns incr ements) and
second ( fine +0.5 ns incr ements)
fields until 50% point of P 1 leading
edge aligns with major ver tical axis on
O scilloscope.
82. Adjust
A2A1A2R9
on
S- 1403DL
Diver sity I/O PC Boar d Assembly for
P 1 pulse width of 800 ns (± 10 ns) .
83. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to adjust AntB SPR
first (coarse ± 50 ns incr ements) and
second ( fine +1 ns incr ements) fields
until P 2 50% point leading edge to
SPR center point spacing is 2.75 µs
( ± 1 ns) .
Page 6
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
STEP
84. Adjust
S- 1403DL
A2A1A2R5
on
Diver sity I/O PC Boar d Assembly until
spacing between SPR and next phase
tr ansition is 1.0 µs ( ± 10 ns) .
85. Pr ess S- 1403DL 2ND, SAVE, 1 and
ENT ER Keys in sequence.
86. Pr ess S- 1403DL PO WER Switch O F F
( O ).
After ≈ 30 seconds, pr ess
PO WER Switch O N ( I).
87. Pr ess 2ND, RECALL and 1 Keys in
sequence.
88. Ver ify P 2 to SPR is 2.75 µs ( ± 25 ns) .
89. Remove power
System.
fr om
Mode
S
Test
90. Disconnect Heter odyne Monitor RF
Connector ( and 10 dB Attenuator , if
applicable) fr om S- 1403DL TP31003.
91. Reconnect
TP31003.
S- 1403DL
EXT PRF OUT
(J17)
AT31001
SCOPE TRIG
OUT (J7)
S-1403DL
to
PROCEDURE
ANTENNA A REPLY DELAY
NOTE: Top cover s must be r emoved fr om
the ATC- 1400A ( included in
pr ocedur e) while still maintaining
the connections with the S- 1403DL
to per for m the r eply delay
calibr ation.
92. Connect
Heter odyne
Monitor
Connector to ATC- 1400A RF
Connector . Refer to Figur e 4.
93. Disconnect O scilloscope EXT TRIG
fr om S- 1403DL SCO PE T RIG O UT
Connector ( J7) .
94. Connect O scilloscope EXT TRIG to S1403DL EXT PRF O UT Connector
( J17) . Refer to Figur e 4.
95. Connect S- 1403DL SCO PE TRIG O UT
Connector
( J7)
to
Dual
Pulse
G ener ator TRIG input.
DUAL
PULSE GEN
SCOPE
TRIG
TP3501
RF
I/O
EXT TRIG
1 MΩ
CHAN2
FUNCTION
OUT
50 Ω
CHAN1
ATC-1400A
RF I/O
HET
IF
MONITOR
RF
LO
RF SIGNAL
GEN
02403010
Installation Calibr ation Test Setup #3 Diagr am
Figur e 4
Page 7
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
STEP
96. Refer to F igur e 5 and r emove top
cover fr om ATC- 1400A as follows:
Remove six top cover fr ont scr ews.
Remove ten top cover side scr ews.
Slide top cover to r ear and off of
Chassis Assembly.
PRO CEDURE
98. Connect O scilloscope Channel 2 and
Dual Pulse G ener ator Function O ut to
ATC- 1400A TP3501.
99. Apply power to Mode S Test System.
100. Set RF Signal G ener ator output to
+7 dBm with no modulation.
97. Refer to F igur e 6 and r emove AT 3501
ter mination fr om ATC- 1400A TP3501.
TOP COVER FRONT SCREW
(6 PLCS)
TOP COVER SIDE SCREW
(10 PLCS)
FUSE
FUSE
TOP COVER
CHASSIS ASSEMBLY
7520035
ATC- 1400A Top Cover Removal
Figur e 5
Page 8
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
TP3501
7520033
ATC- 1400A TP3501 Location
Figur e 6
Page 9
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
STEP
101. Set O scilloscope as follows:
CONTROL
Mode
SETTING
50 Ω DC/CHAN1,
1 MΩ DC/CHAN2
Volts/Div
Sec/Div
20 mV/CHAN1,
100 mV/CHAN2
50 µs
Trigger
Ext/Positive Slope
102. Set Dual Pulse G ener ator as follows:
CONTROL
SETTING
Function
Frequency
Neg Pulse/Double
≈100 kHz
Mode
Pulse Delay (Spacing)
Ext Trig
20.3 µs
Pulse Width
0.45 µs
103. Set ATC- 1400A as follows:
CONTROL
SETTING
RF LEVEL Control
CW/NORM/OFF Switch
SUPPRESSOR ON/OFF Switch
SLS/ECHO ON/OFF Switch
XPDR PULSE WIDTH
VAR/CAL Switch
MAN/AUTO/MAN STEP Switch
XPDR DEV P 3 /CAL Switch
0 dBm
NORM
OFF
OFF
1.0 µs/1.45 µs Switch
1.0 Ps
CAL
MAN
CAL
TO
ON
OFF
1000
F 1 /P 1
T O /TAC/T D Switch
PRF/SQTR ON/OFF Switch
TACAN ON/OFF Switch
PRF/SQUITTER Thumbwheels
F 2 /P 2 F 1 /P 1 Switch
DBL INTERR/INTRF
Thumbwheels
FREQ/FUNCTION SELECT
Thumbwheels
∆F Thumbwheels
000.0 OFF
1030
XPDR
OFF
104. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 2
Keys in sequence to enter C72 Setup
Scr een.
C72
105. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set ACL
Enable to O N and ACL Sour ce to 147.
106. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 1 and 0
Keys in sequence to enter Contr ol
Menu 10.
C10 f04:ACL (All Call Long)
Arf:+0.0
P4:CAL,Wd: CAL ,Dv: CAL
P3:CAL
Dly=-------- Sqtr=----AntA%:ATC= 0,S= 0 AntB%= 0 AntB:0.00
107. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set function
field to f 04, Arf to 0.0, P4 to CAL , P4
Wd: to CAL , P4 Dv: to CAL , P3 to
CAL and AntB to 0.00.
108. Adjust O scilloscope to display
heter odyned inter r ogation and
simulated r eply video.
SETUP - SCOPE TRIGGER
ATC ModeS ACS ACL
Enable:ON OFF
OFF ON
Source:CAL 150
CAL 147
(in µS)
the
the
109. Adjust Dual Pulse G ener ator output
level until ATC- 1400A XMTR PWR
WATTS Display indicates ≈ 500 W.
110. Adjust
Dual
Pulse
G ener ator
fr equency to set time fr om P 3 of the
inter r ogation to F 1 of the r eply, shown
on the O scilloscope, to ≈ 128 µs.
NOTE: It may be necessar y to adjust
C72 Setup Scr een ACL
Sour ce field to obtain the
desir ed delay.
CAL
XPDR DEV P 2 /CAL Switch
PRO CEDURE
111. Using O scilloscope ∆ time function,
measur e actual r eplay delay fr om the
50% point on P 3 leading edge in the
inter r ogation to the 50% point on F 1
leading edge in the r eply. Recor d as
r efer ence.
112. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU Key once
and 9 Key twice in sequence to enter
Calibr ation Passwor d Scr een.
113. Use S- 1403DL Keyboar d
Calibr ations Passwor d.
C99
to
enter
CAL - PASSWORD
PASSWORD:067215
Page 10
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
114. Pr ess S- 1403DL ENT ER and 2 Keys in
sequence
to
enter
Reply
Delay
Calibr ation Scr een.
C92
CAL - REPLY DELAY
Ainterr/Areply: -12.5nS
Ainterr/Breply:-987.5nS
MeasDelay:
Binterr/Breply:+987.5nS
128.0125µS
115. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to adjust Ainter r /Ar eply
field until MeasDelay r eading equals
r efer ence r ecor ded in Step 111.
ANTENNA A REPLY PULSE WIDTH
116. Adjust O scilloscope to display only
the simulated r eply video.
117. Use O scilloscope to measur e actual
width of fir st simulated r eply video
pulse F 1 fr om 50% point on leading
edge to 50% point on tr ailing edge.
Recor d as r efer ence.
118. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 9 and 5
Keys in sequence to enter Reply
Width Calibr ation Scr een.
C95
CAL - REPLY WIDTH
AntA:
AntB:
+0.0nS
-25.0nS
ATC F1 Width=
0.4625µS
119. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to adjust AntA field
until AT C F 1 Width r eading equals
r efer ence r ecor ded in Step 117.
ANTENNA B REPLY DELAY
120. Disconnect Heter odyne Monitor RF
Connector fr om ATC- 1400A RF I/O
Connector .
121. Disconnect O scilloscope Channel 2
and Dual Pulse G ener ator Function
O ut fr om ATC- 1400A TP3501.
122. Reconnect AT 3501
ATC- 1400A T P3501.
ter mination
to
Page 11
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
STEP
PRO CEDURE
123. Connect O scilloscope Channel 2 to S1403DL UUT VIDEO Connector ( J1) .
Refer to Figur e 7.
127. Adjust O scilloscope to display
heter odyned inter r ogation and
simulated r eply video.
124. Refer to Figur es 1 and 7. Connect
Dual Pulse G ener ator Function O ut
thr ough T- Connector to S- 1403DL
TP23004. If the Multi- Level Diver sity
option is installed:
128. Set Dual Pulse G ener ator for Positive
Pulse/Double function and adjust
output level until level at S- 1403DL
UUT VIDEO Connector ( J1) is
400 mV P - P as shown on O scilloscope.
Disconnect coaxial cable fr om S1403DL J23019.
Connect Dual Pulse G ener ator
F unction O ut thr ough T - Connector
to S- 1403DL J23019.
125. Refer to F igur e 1 and disconnect S1403DL AT31001 fr om T P31003.
the
the
129. Disconnect O scilloscope Channel 2
fr om S- 1403DL UUT VIDEO Connector
(J1) .
130. Refer to Figur e 7 and connect
O scilloscope
Channel
2
to
TConnector with Dual Pulse G ener ator
Function
O ut
and
S- 1403DL
TP23004/J23019.
126. Refer to Figur es 1 and 7. Connect
Heter odyne Monitor RF Connector
( thr ough 10 dB Attenuator if MLD is
installed) to S- 1403DL TP31003.
EXT PRF OUT
(J17)
TP31003
SCOPE TRIG
OUT (J7)
TP23004/J23019
S-1403DL
UUT VIDEO
DUAL
PULSE GEN
SCOPE
TRIG
EXT TRIG
1 MΩ
CHAN2
FUNCTION
OUT
50 Ω
CHAN1
ATC-1400A
10 dB
ATTENUATOR
HET
IF
MONITOR
RF
LO
RF SIGNAL
GEN
02403011
Installation Calibr ation Test Setup #4 Diagr am
Figur e 7
Page 12
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
STEP
PROCEDURE
131. Adjust
Dual
Pulse
G ener ator
fr equency to set time fr om P 3 of the
inter r ogation to F 1 of the r eply, shown
on the O scilloscope, to ≈ 128 µs.
NOTE: It may be necessar y to adjust
C72 Setup Scr een ACL
Sour ce field to obtain the
desir ed delay.
132. Using O scilloscope ∆ time function,
measur e actual r eplay delay fr om the
50% point on P 3 leading edge in the
inter r ogation to the 50% point on F 1
leading edge in the r eply. Recor d as
r efer ence.
133. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to adjust Ainter r /Br eply
field until MeasDelay r eading equals
r efer ence r ecor ded in Step 132.
ANTENNA B REPLY PULSE WIDTH
134. Adjust O scilloscope to display only
the simulated r eply video.
135. Use O scilloscope to measur e actual
width of fir st simulated r eply video
pulse F 1 fr om 50% point on leading
edge to 50% point on tr ailing edge.
Recor d as r efer ence.
136. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 9 and 5
Keys in sequence to enter Reply
Width Calibr ation Scr een.
137. Use S- 1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to adjust AntB field
until AT C F 1 Width r eading is 25 ns
gr eater than the r efer ence r ecor ded in
Step 135.
PUL SE WIDT H
138. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 8 and 4
Keys in sequence to enter the C84
System Scr een.
STEP
PROCEDURE
140. Pr ess S- 1403DL PO WER Switch to
O F F ( O ).
141. Disconnect
1403DL:
ATC- 1400A
fr om
S-
Disconnect ATC- 1400A AC INPUT
Connector fr om S- 1403DL 1400A
PO WER Connector .
Disconnect ATC- 1400A DABS
INPUT Connector ( J1) fr om S1403DL DPSK O UT Connector
( J15) .
Disconnect ATC- 1400A EXTERNAL
MEASUREMENT G ATE Connector
( J3) fr om S- 1403DL PPMG
Connector ( J14) .
Disconnect ATC- 1400A RF LEVEL
INPUT Connector ( J4) fr om S1403DL RF LVL Connector ( J13) .
Disconnect ATC- 1400A AUXILIARY
Connector ( J6) fr om S- 1403DL
AUX BUS Connector ( J10) .
Disconnect ATC- 1400A IFR BUS
Connector ( J5) fr om S- 1403DL IFR
BUS Connector ( J11) .
142. Pr ess S- 1403DL PO WER Switch to
O N ( I).
143. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 1
Keys in sequence to enter the C71
Setup Scr een.
C71
SETUP - INTERROGATION TRIGGER
TrigSource:TrigGen
TrigGen:
1000Hz
144. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol
and
Keyboar d
to
set
Tr igSour ce to TrigGen and Tr igG en to
1000Hz.
C84
SYSTEM - IFR BUS
1400 Control: STAND-ALONEMust power down
1403 Bus Address: 3
before settings
take effect.
139. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set 1400
Contr ol to STAND-ALONE.
Page 13
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
ST EP
PRO CEDURE
STEP
145. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU, 7 and 9
Keys in sequence to enter the C79
Setup Scr een.
C79
SETUP - ATC1400A CONTROLS
ATCRBS:C
P123Wd: CAL
RF I/O:NORM Mode:OFF
P2Dv: CAL
Scope :To
P3Dv: CAL
151. Use S- 1403DL Keyboar d
Calibr ations Passwor d.
C99
to
enter
CAL - PASSWORD
PASSWORD:067215
146. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys, SLEW
Contr ol and Keyboar d to set:
152. Pr ess S- 1403DL ENTER and 2 Keys in
sequence
to
enter
Reply
Delay
Calibr ation Scr een.
153. Use S-1403DL CURSO R Keys and
SLEW Contr ol to adjust Binter r /Br eply
field until MeasDelay r eading equals
r efer ence r ecor ded in Step 149.
ATCRBS to C.
P123Wd to CAL .
RF I/O to NORM.
154. Remove power and disconnect test
equipment.
Mode to O F F.
P2Dv to CAL .
155. Reconnect
TP31003.
Scope to T o.
P3Dv to CAL .
147. Adjust O scilloscope to display
heter odyned inter r ogation and
simulated r eply video.
PRO CEDURE
the
the
148. Adjust
Dual
Pulse
G ener ator
fr equency to set time fr om P 3 of the
inter r ogation to F 1 of the r eply, shown
on the O scilloscope, to ≈ 128 µs.
NOTE: It may be necessar y to adjust
C72 Setup Scr een ACL
Sour ce field to obtain the
desir ed delay.
149. Using O scilloscope ∆ time function,
measur e actual r eplay delay fr om the
50% point on P 3 leading edge in the
inter r ogation to the 50% point on F 1
leading edge in the r eply. Recor d as
r efer ence.
S- 1403DL
AT31001
to
156. Refer to Figur e 1 and install
1403DL top cover as follows:
S-
Place S- 1403DL top cover with
mounting br acket on Chassis
Assembly.
Install 12 top cover scr ews and
two br acket scr ews.
157. Refer to Figur e 5 and r einstall ATC1400A top cover as follows:
Slide top cover to fr ont and onto
Chassis Assembly.
Install ten top cover side scr ews.
Install six top cover fr ont scr ews.
150. Pr ess S- 1403DL C MENU Key once
and 9 Key twice in sequence to enter
Calibr ation Passwor d Scr een.
Page 14
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
TYPE
MODEL
10 dB Attenuator
HP8491A
or Equivalent
Dual Pulse Generator
WAVETEK 145
or Equivalent
Heterodyne Monitor
ANZAC MD-141
or Equivalent
Oscilloscope
TEK 2465
or Equivalent
SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency:
dc to 12.4 GHz
Frequency:
A ccu r a cy:
Functions:
Rise and Fall
Time:
Pulse Width:
O u t p u t L e ve l :
100 kHz
±3%
Dual Pulse
Capability:
Bandwidth:
V e r t i ca l
A ccu r a cy:
Time
A ccu r a cy:
<20 ns
1 to 5 µs
0 to -500 mV Peak
Dual Trace
dc to 100 MHz
±10%
± 0 . 7 % o f T i m e I n t e r va l
±0.6% of Full Scale
∆ Time
A ccu r a cy: ± 0 . 7 o f T i m e I n t e r va l
±0.3% of Full Scale
Power Meter
HP437B
(with HP8481A Sensor)
or Equivalent
RF Signal Generator
Spectrum Analyzer
Range:
A ccu r a cy:
-25 to -15 dBm
±0.05 dB
HP8640B
or Equivalent
Frequency:
Resolution:
A ccu r a cy:
RF Output:
1 to 1030 MHz
0.1 to 100 Hz
2 x 10-6
-130 to +13 dBm
HP8569B
or Equivalent
Range:
10 kHz to 2.6 GHz
RBW:
300 Hz to 3.0 MHz
D i sp l a y ( L o g )
A ccu r a cy: < ± 0 . 1 d B / d B
<±1.5 dB/70 dB
Display (Lin)
A ccu r a cy: < ± 3 % o f r e f e r e n c e l e ve l
o v e r 8 d i v i s i o n r e f l e ct i o n
Test Equipment Requir ements
Table 1
Page 15
Dec 1/03
O PERATIO N MANUAL
S-1403DL
THIS PAG E INT ENTIO NALLY LEFT BLANK.
Page 16
Dec 1/03
As we are always seeking to improve our products, the information in
this document gives only a general indication of the product capacity,
performance and suitability, none of which shall form part of any
contract. We reserve the right to make design changes without notice.
CHINA
Tel: [+86] (21) 6282 8001
Fax: [+86] (21) 6282 8002
FRANCE
Tel: [+33] 1 60 79 96 00
Fax: [+33] 1 60 0177 69 22
HONG KONG
Tel: [+852] 2832 7988
Fax: [+852] 2834 5364
SCANDINAVIA
Tel: [+45] 9614 0045
Fax: [+45] 9614 0047
Tel: [+34] (91) 640 11 34
Fax: [+34] (91) 640 06 40
Tel: [+44] (0) 1438 742200
Fax: [+44] (0) 1438 7276
SPAIN
UNITED KINGDOM
Toll Free: 0800 282388 (UK only)
USA
Tel: [+1] (316) 522 4981
Fax: [+1] (316) 522 1360
Toll Free: 800 835 2352 (US only)
Our passion for performance is defined by three
attributes represented by these three icons:
solution-minded, performance-driven, customer-focused.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement